Skip to main content

Full text of "Man Whence How And Whither"

See other formats


ir 

<OU_1 64246 



MAN: 
WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 



MAN 



Whence, How and Whither 



-A RECORD OF- 



CLAIRVOTANT INVESTIGATION 



BY 
ANNIE BESANT AND C. W. LEADBEATER 



THE THEOSOPHICAL PRESS 
Wheaton, Illinois 



Copyright Registered 

All Rights Reserved 

Permission for translation* will be given 

BY 

THE THEOSOPHICAL PUBLISHING HOUSE 
Adyar, Madras, India 

Reprint 1947 



FOKEWOBD 

The idea that clairvoyant observation is possible 
is no longer regarded as entirely insane. It is not 
generally accepted, nor indeed is it accepted to any 
large extent. A constantly growing minority, how- 
ever, of fairly intelligent people believe clairvoyance 
to be a fact, and regard it as a perfectly natural 
power, which will become universal in the course of 
evolution. They do not regard it as a miraculous 
gift, nor as an outgrowth from high spirituality, 
lofty intelligence, or purity of character ; any or all 
of these may be manifested in a person who is not 
in the least clairvoyant. They know that it is a 

and that it can be developed 



ry anyone who is able and willing to pay the price 
demanded for its forcing, ahead of the general evo- 
lution. 

The use of clairvoyance for research into the past 
is not new. The Secret Doctrine of H. P. Blavatsky 
is a standing instance of such use. Whether or not 
the work thus done is reliable is a question which 
must be left for decision to future generations, pos- 
sessing the power which is now used for this pur- 
pose. We shall, we know, have a large body of read- 
ers who are students, who, believing the power to^be 
a reality, andjrppjwjng ug to be honest, will find this 
booftTBoth interesting and illuminative. For them 
it has been written; As the number of students in- 
creases, so will increase the number of our readers. 



More than this we cannot hope for. Centuries 
hence, when people will be able to write much better 
books, based on similar researches, this well be 
looked on as an interesting pioneer, considering the 
time at which it was written. 

Proofs of its general accuracy obviously cannot 
be given, though from time to time discoveries may 
be made which confirm an occasional statement. The 
truth of clairvoyant research can no more be proved 
to the general public, than colour can be demonstrat- 
ed to a blind man. The general public, so far as it 
reads the book, will regard it with blank incredulity ; 
some may think it an interesting fabrication ; others 
may find it dull. Most will regard the authors as 
either self-deceived or fraudulent, according as the 
judges are kind-hearted or malevolent. 

To students we would say : Accept it so far as it 
helps you in your studies, and throws light on what 
you already know. Amplification and correction 
may be made in the future, for we have only given 
a few fragments of a huge history, and the task 
has boon a very heavy one. 

The research work was done at Adyar in the 
summer of 1910 ; in the heat of the summer many of 
the students were away, and w^j^t^aarselyes jip, 
siL-M-tqjMijQ^ every 

week; we observed, and said exacHy what we saw, 
and two members, Mrs. Van Hook and Don Fabri- 
zio Ruspoli, were good enough to write down all we 
said, exactly as we said it ; these two sets of notes 
have been preserved. They are woven into the 
present story, written partly during the summer of 
1911, when a few weeks were stolen for the purpose, 
and completed in April and May V 1912, similarly 



stolen out of the rush of busy lives. This kind of 
work cannot be done in the midst of constant inter- 
ruptions, and the only way to accomplish it is to 
escape from the world for the time, to 'go into re- 
treat,' as the Eoman Catholics call it. 

The broad Theosophical outline of evolution has 
been followed, and it is given among the * prelimi- 
naries 'in Chapter I. This governs the whole, and 
is the ground-plan of the book. The fact of an Oc- 
cult Hierarchy, which guides and shapes evolution, 
is throughout taken for granted, and some of its 
members inevitably appear in the course of the 
story. In order to throw ourselves back into the 
earliest stages, we sought for our own conscious- 
nesses, present there, and easier to start from than 
anything else, since no others were recognisable 
They gave us, as it were, a footing in the first and 
second Chains. From the latter part of the third 
Chain and onwards, we traced humanity's story by 
following a group of individuals, except where this 
group was otherwise occupied during any important 
stage of evolution as in the beginnings of the third 
and fourth sub-races of the fifth Boot Eace; when 
that was the case we left it, and followed the main 
stream of progress. In this record comparatively 
few details as to persons can be given, the sweep of 
the story being so large. Many detailed lives, how- 
ever, have been published in The Theosophist, under 
the general title 'Kents in the V^il of Time' rents 
through which glimpses of the past of individuals 
may be seen. A volume of these, named Lives of 
Alcyone, will shortly be published, and to that will 
be appended full genealogical tables, showing the 
in each life of all the characters so far 



identified. Work of this kind might be done ad 
libitum, if there were people to do it. 

As a history cannot be written without names, and 
as mncarnatipQjs a fact and therefore the re- 
appearance of the same individual throughout suc- 
ceeding ages is also a fact, the individual playing 
many parts under many names we have given 
names to many individuals by which they may be 
recognised throughout the dramas in which they take 
part. Irving is the same Irving to us, as Macbeth, 
Richard III, Shylock, Charles I, Faust, Romeo, 
Matthias ; and in any story of his life as actor he is 
spoken of as Irving, whatever part he is playing; 
his continuing individuality is recognised through- 
out. So a human being, in the long story in which 
lives .jMSjiays, pla^B hmx^reds of parts but is him- 
self throughout be he man or woman, peasant, 
prince, or priest. To this ' himself we have given a 
distinguishing name, so that he may be recognised 
under all the disguises put on to suit the part he is 
playing. These are mostly names of constellations, 
or stars. For instance, we have given to Julius 
Caesar the name of Corona ; to Plato that of Pallas ; 
to Lao-Tze that of Lyra; in this way we can see 
how different are the lines of evolution, the previous 
lives which produce a Caesar and a Plato. It gives 
to the story a human interest, and teaches the 
student of reincarnation. 

The names of Those who constantly appear in this 
story as ordinary men and women, but who are now 
Masters, may make those great Beings more real 
to some ; They have climbed to where They stand on 
the same ladder of life up which we are climbing 
now; They have known the common household life, 



the joys and sorrows, the successes and the failures, 
which make up human experiences. They are not 
Gods perfect from unending ages, but men and wo- 
men who have unfolded the God within themselves 
and have, along a toilsome road, reached the super- 
human. They are the fulfilled promise of what we 
shall he, the glorious flowers on the plant on which 
we are the buds. 

And so we launch our ship on the stormy ocean 
of publicity, to face its destiny and find its fate. 



SOME OF THE CHARACTERS IN THE STORY 

THE FOUR KUMARAS. . . Four of the Lords of 

the Flame, still liv- 
ing in Shamballa. 

MAHAGURU The Bodhisattva of the 

time, appearing as 
Vyasa, Thoth (Her- 
mes), Zarathushtra, 
Orpheus, finally as 
Gautama, who be- 
came the Lord Bud- 
dha. 

SURYA ... ... The Lord Maitreya, 

the present Bodhi- 
sattva, the Supreme 
Teacher of the 
world. 

MANU ... ... The Head of a Root 

Race. If with a pre- 
fix, Root-Manu or 
Seed-Manu, a yet 



VIRAJ 



SATURN 

JUPITER 

MARS 
MERCURY 
NEPTUNE 
OSIRIS 

BRHASPATI 
VENUS 



higher Official, pre- 
siding over a larger 
cycle of evolution 
a Round or a Chain. 
The cognomen Vaiv- 
asvata is given in 
Hindu books both to 
the Root Manu of 
our Chain and the 
Manu of the Aryan, 
or fifth, Root Race. 

The Maha-Chohan, a 
high official, of rank 
equal to that of a 
Manu or a Bodhisat- 
tva. 

. Now a Master, spoken 
of in some Theoso- 
p h i c a 1 books as 
'The Venetian.' 

. . . Now a Master, re- 
siding in the Nilgiri 
Hills. 

. Now the Master M. of 
the Occult World. 

. Now the Master K. H. 
of the Occult World. 

, . Now the Master Hilar- 
ion. 

. Now the Master Sera- 
pis. 

. Now the Master Jesus. 

. Now the Master Rago- 
zci (or Rakovzky), 



6 



URANUS 
VULCAN 



ATHENA 



ALBA 

ALBIEEO 

ALCYONE 

ALETHEIA 

ALTAIR 

ARCOR 

AURORA 

CAPELLA 

CORONA 

CRUX 

DENEB 

EUDOXIA 

FIDES 

GEMINI 

HECTOR 

HELIOS 

HERAKLES 

LEO 

LOMIA 

LUTETIA 



the 'Hungarian 
Adept,' the Comte 
de S. Germain of the 
eighteenth century. 

Now the Master D. K. 

Now a Master; known 
in His last earth-life 
as Sir Thomas More. 

Now a Master; known 
on earth as Thomas 
Vaughan, 'Eugenius 

Philalethes.' 

Ethel Whyte. 

Maria-Luisa Kirby. 

J. Krishnamurti. 

JoEarf van" Marten. 

Herbert Whyte. 

A. J. WiUson. 

Count Bubna-Licics. 

S. Maud Sharpe. 

Julius Caesar. 

The Hon. 1 w a y 
Cuffe. 

Lord Cochrane (Tenth 
Earl of Dundonald). 

Louisa Shaw. 

G._S._Arundalfe. 

E. Maud Green. 

W. H. Kirby. 

Marie Russak. 

Annie Bgsant. 

Fabrizio Ruspoli. 

J. I. Wedgwood. 

Charles Bradlaugh. 



LYRA ... ... Lao-Tze. 

MIBA ... ... Carl Holbrook. 

MIZAR ... . . . J. Nityananda. 

MONA ... ... Piet Meuleman. 

NOEMA ... ... Margherita Ruspoli. 

OLYMPIA ... ... Damodar K. Mavalan- 



PALLAS ...... Plato. 

PHOCEA ...... W. Q. Judge. 

PHCENTX ...... T. Pascal. 

POLAEIS ...... B. P. Wadia. 

PROTEUS ... ... The Teshu Lama. 

SELENE ... . . . C. Jinarajadasa. 

SHOTS ... ... CJJV. Leadbeater. 

SIWA ... ... TTSubba Rao. 

SPICA ... ... Francesca Arundale. 

TATJRUS ... ... Jerome Anderson. 

ULYSSES ...... H. S. Olcott. 

VAJRA ...... H. P. Blavatsky*. 

VESTA ...... Minnie C. Holbrook. 

A certain number of members of the Theosophical 
Society have bravely allowed their names to appear 
in the above list, despite the ridicule it may bring on 
them. A large number of our friends are just now 
in Hindu bodies, but we cannot expose them to the 
mockery and persecution they would be likely to 
suffer if we named them, so we have not asked their 
permission. 



8 



INTRODUCTION : 
CHAPTER I 
CHAPTER II 
CHAPTER III 
CHAPTER IV 
CHAPTER V 
CHAPTER VI 
CHAPTER VII 
CHAPTER VIII 
CHAPTER IX 
CHAPTER X 
CHAPTER XI 
CHAPTER XII 
CHAPTER XIII 
CHAPTER XIV 
CHAPTER XV 
CHAPTER XVI 
CHAPTER XVII 
CHAPTER XVIII 
CHAPTER XIX 
CHAPTER XX 
CHAPTER XXI 

CHAPTER XXII 
CHAPTER XXIII 
CHAPTER XXIV 
CHAPTER XXV 
CHAPTER XXVI 
CHAPTER XXVII 



CONTENTS 

Preliminaries 

The First and Second Chain 
Early Times on the Moon Chain . 
The Sixth Round on the Moon Chain . 
The Seventh Round on the Moon Chain 
Early Times on the Earth Chain 
Early Stages of the Fourth Round . 
The Fourth Root Race . 
Black Magic in Atlantis 
The Civilisation of Atlantis 
Two Atlantean Civilisations Peru 



i 

1 

16 
29 
42 
54 
74 
88 
102 
116 
126 
134 
165 
190 
225 
240 
249 
259 
276 
288 
301 



99 Chaldaea 

Beginnings of the Fifth Root Race 
The Building of the Great City 
Early Aryan Civilisation and Empire 
The Second sub-race, the Arabian 
The Third sub-race, the Iranian 
The Fourth sub-race, the Keltic 
The Fifth sub-race, the Teutonic 
The Root-Stock and its Descent into 

India 305 

The Vision of King Ashoka . 321 

The Beginnings of the Sixth Root Race 329 
Religion and the Temples . 341 

Education and the Family 374 

Buildings and Customs .... 396 

Conclusion 427 

Epilogue 447 

Appendix 453 

Index 487 



MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 



INTRODUCTION 

The problem of Man's origin, of his evolution, of 
his destiny, is one of inexhaustible interest. Whence 
came he, this glorious Intelligence, on this globe, at 
least, the crown of visible beings? How has he 
evolved to his present position? Has he suddenly 
descended from above, a radiant angel, to become 
the temporary tenant of a house of clay, or has he 
climbed upwards through long dim ages, tracing his 
humble ancestry from primeval slime, through fish, 
reptile, mammal, up to the human kingdom! And 
what is his future destiny? is he evolving onwards, 
climbing higher and higher, only to descend the long 
slope of degeneration till he falls over the precipice 
of death, leaving behind him a freezing planet, the 
sepulchre of myriad civilisations? or is his present 
.climbing but the schooling of an immortal spiritual 
Power, destined in his maturity to wield the sceptre 
of a world, a system, a congeries of systems, a veyj^ 
table Godjn^^th^^making? 

To tliese questions many answers have been 
given, partially or fairly fully, in the Scriptures of 



ii MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

ancient religions, in the shadowy traditions handed 
down from mighty men of old, in the explorations 
of modern archaeologists, in the researches of geol- 
ogists, physicists, biologists, astronomers, of our 
own days. The most modern knowledge has vindi- 
cated the most ancient records in ascribing to our 
earth and its inhabitants a period of existence of 
vast extent and of marvellous complexity ; hundreds 
of millions of years are tossed together to give time 
for the slow and laborious processes of nature ; fur- 
ther and further back ' primeval man' is pushed; Le- 
muria is seen where now the Pacific ripples, and Aus- 
tralia, but lately rediscovered, is regarded as one of 
the oldest of lands ; Atlantis is posited, where now 
the Atlantic rolls, and Africa is linked to America by 
a solid bridge of land, so that the laurels of a dis- 
coverer are plucked from the brow of Columbus, and 
he is seen as following long perished generations who 
found their way from Europe to the continent of the 
setting sun. Poseidonis is no longer the mere fairy- 
tale told by superstitious Egyptian priests to a 
Greek philosopher; Minos of Crete is dug out of his 
ancient grave, a man and not a myth ; Babylon, once 
ancient, is shown as the modern successor of a series 
of highly civilised cities, buried in stratum after 
stratum, glooming through the night of time. Tra- 
dition is beckoning the explorer to excavate in Turk- 
estan, in Central Asia, and whispering of cyclopean 
ruins that await but his spade for their unburying. 
Amid this clash of opinions, this conflict of theories, 
this affirmation and repudiation of evernew hypo- 
theses, it may be that the record of two observers, 
two explorers treading a very ancient path that 
few feet tread to-day, but that will be trodden more 



INTRODUCTION iii 

and more by thronging students as time shows its 
stability may have a chance of being read. Science 
is to-day exploring the marvels of what it calls the 
* subjective mind/ and is finding in it strange powers, 
strange upsurgings, strange memories. Healthy 
and balanced, dominating the brain, it shows as 
genius; out of equilibrium with the brain, vagrant 
and incalculable, it shows as insanity. Some day 
Science will realise that what it calls the subjective 
mind, Religion calls the Soul, and that the exhibi- 
tion of its powers depends on the physical and super- 
physical instruments at its command. If these are 
well-constructed, sound and flexible, and thorough- 
ly under its control, the powers of vision, of audi- 
tion, of memory, irregularly up-welling from the 
subjective mind, become the normal and disposable 
powers of the Soul; if the Soul strive upwards to 
the Spirit the Divine Self veiled in the matter of 
our System, the true Inner Man, instead of ever 
clinging to the body, then its powers increase, and 
knowledge, otherwise unattainable, comes within its 
reach. 

Metaphysicians, ancient and modern, declare that 
Past, Present, and Future are ever simultaneous- 
ly existent in the divine Consciousness, and are only 
successive as they come into manifestation, i.e., 
under Time, which is verily the succession of states 
of consciousness. Our limited consciousness, exist- 
ing in Time, is inevitably bound by this succession ; 
we can only think successively. But we all know, 
from our experience of dream-states, that time- 
measures vary with this change of state, though suc- 
cession remains; we know also that time-measures 
vary even more in the thought- world, and that when 



iv MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

we construct mental pictures we can delay, hasten, 
repeat, the succession of thought-images at will, 
though still ever bound by succession. Pursuing this 
line of thought, it is not difficult to conceive of a mind 
raised to transcendent power, the mind of a LOGOS, 
or WORD such a Being, e.g., as is described in the 
Johannine Gospel, i. 1-4 containing within itself 
all the mental images embodied in, say, a Solar Sys- 
tem, arranged in the order of succession of their 
proposed manifestation, but all there, all capable of 
review, as we can review our own thought-images, 
though we have not yet attained to the divine power, 
so strikingly voiced by the Prophet Muhammad, 
as: "He only saith to it: 'Be,' and it is'/- 1 Yet, as 
the infant of a day contains within himself the poten- 
tialities of his sire, so do we, the offspring of God, 
contain within ourselves the potentialities of Divini- 
ty. Hence, when we resolutely turn the Soul away 
from earth and concentrate his attention on the 
Spirit the substance whereof he is the shadow in 
the world of matter the Soul may reach the * Mem- 
ory of Nature, ' the embodiment in the material world 
of the Thoughts of the LOGOS, the reflection, as it 
were, of His Mind. There dwells the Past in ever- 
living records; there also dwells the Future, more 
difficult for the half-developed Soul to reach, be- 
cause not yet manifested, nor yet embodied, though 
quite as 'real'. The Soul, reading these records, 
may transmit them to the body, impress them on the 
brain, and then record them in words and writings. 
When the Soul is merged in the Spirit as in the 
case of "men made perfect, " of Those who have 

1 AI Quran, xi. 37. 



INTRODUCTION v 

completed human evolution, the Spirits who are 
1 liberated, ' or 'saved 11 then the touch with the 
divine Memory is immediate, direct, ever available, 
and unerring. Before that point is reached, the 
touch is imperfect, mediate, subject to errors of 
observation and transmission. 

The writers of this book, having been taught the 
method of gaining touch, but being subject to the 
difficulties involved in their uncompleted evolution, 
have done their best to observe and transmit, but are 
fully conscious of the many weaknesses which mar 
their work. Occasional help has been given to them 
by the Elder Brethren, in the way of broad outlines 
here and there, and dates where necessary. 

As in the case of the related books which have 
preceded this in the Theosophical movement, the 
"treasure is in earthen vessels, " and, while grate- 
fully acknowledging the help graciously given, they 
take the responsibility of all errors entirely on them- 
selves. 



ir Fhe terms used by Hindus and Christians respectively 
to mark the end of purely human evolution. 



MAN: 
WHENCE AND HOW 



CHAPTER I 
PRELIMINARIES 

WHENCE comes man and whither goes he t In the 
fullest answer we can only say : Man, as a spiritual 
Being, comes forth from God and returns to God; 
but the Whence and Whither with which we deal here 
denote a far more modest sweep. It is but a single 
page of his life-story that is copied out herein, telling 
of the birth into dense matter of some of the Chil- 
dren of Man What lies beyond that birthing, still 
unpenetrated Night? and following on their growth 
from world to world to a point in the near future but 
some few centuries hence What lies beyond that 
cloud-flush in the dawning, still unrisen Day? 

And yet the title is not wholly wrong, for he who 
comes from God and goes to God isjijgj; precisely 
'Man'. That Eay of the divine Splendour which 
comes forth from Divinity at the beginning of a mani- 
festation, that "fragment of Mine own Self, trans- 
formed in the world of life into an immortal Spirit," 1 
is far more than Man. Man is but one stage of his 
unfolding, and mineral, vegetable, animal, are but 
stages of his embryonic life in the womb of nature, 
ere he is born as Man. Man is the stage in which 

*Bhagavad-Gita t xv. 7. 



2 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

Spirit and Matter struggle for the mastery, and when 
the struggle is over and Spirit has become Lord of 
Matter, Master of life and death, then Spirit enters 
on his superhuman evolution, and is no longer Man, 
but rather Superman. 

Here then we deal with him only as Man: with 
Man in his embryonic stage, in the mineral, vegetable 
and animal kingdoms ; with Man in his development 
in the human kingdom ; with Man and his worlds, the 
Thinker and his field of evolution. 

In order to follow readily the story told in this 
book, it is necessary for the reader to pause for a few 
minutes on the general conception of a Solar System, 
as outlined in Theosophical literature, 1 and on the 
broad principles of the evolution therein carried on. 
This is not more difficult to follow than the technical 
terminology of every science, or than other cosmic 
descriptions, as in astronomy, and a little attention 
will easily enable the student to master it. In all 
studies of deep content, there are ever dry prelimi- 
naries which have to be mastered. The careless read- 
er finds them dull, skips them, and is, throughout his 
subsequent reading, in a more or less bewildered and 
confused condition of mind; he is building his house 
without a foundation, and must continually be shor- 
ing it up. The careful reader faces these difficulties 
bravely, masters them once for all, and with the 
knowledge thus gained he goes easily forward, and 
the details he meets with later fall readily into their 

*The student may find it in H. P. Blavatsky's The Secret 
Doctrine, A. P. Sinnett's Esoteric Buddhism, and Growth of 
the Soul, Annie Besant's The Ancient Wisdom, etc. There 
are minor differences such as H. P. Blavatsky's and A. P. 
Sinnett's naming of the globes of the earth-chain but the 
^ain facts are identical. 



PRELIMINARIES 3 

places. Those who prefer the first plan, had better 
miss the present Chapter, and go on to Chapter II ; 
the wiser readers will give an hour to mastering 
what follows. 

That great Sage, Plato, one of the world's master- 
intellects, whose lofty ideas have dominated Euro- 
pean thought, makes the pregnant statement: "God 
geometrises. " The more we know of Nature, the 
more we realise this fact. The leaves of plants are 
set in a definite order of succession, 1/2, 1/3, 2/5, 3/8, 
5713, and so on. The vibrations that make the suc- 
cessive notes of a scale may be correspondently 
figured in a regular series. Some diseases follow a 
definite cycle of days, and the 7th, the 14th, the 21st, 
mark the crises that result in continued physical life 
or in death. It is useless to multiply instances. 

There is, then, nothing surprising in the fact that 
we find, in the order of our Solar System, the con- 
tinual recurrence of the number Seven. Because of 
tins, it has been called a 'sacred number'; a 'signi- 
ficant number' would be a better epithet. The 
moon's life divides itself naturally into twice seven 
days of waxing and an equal number of waning, and 
its quarters give us our week of seven days. And 
we find this seven as the root-number of our Solar 
System, dividing its departments into seven, and 
these again divided into subsidiary sevens, and these 
into other sevens, and so on. The religious student 
will think of the seven Ameshaspentas of the Zoro- 
astriaii, of the seven Spirits before the throne of God 
of the Christian: the Theosophist of the supreme 
Triple Logos of the system, with His Ministers ; the 

'These have been called Planetary Logoi, but the name 
often causes confusion, and is therefore here dropped. 



4 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

"Rulers of seven Chains" round Him, each ruling 
His own department of the system as a Viceroy 
for an Emperor. We are concerned here with but 
one department in detail. The Solar System con- 
tains ten of these, for while rooted in the seven, 
it develops ten departments, ten being therefore, 
by Mystics, called the * perfect number'. Mr. A. P. 
Sinnett has well named these departments ' Schemes 
of Evolution,' and within each of these Schemes 
humanities are evolving or will evolve. We will 
now confine ourselves to our own, though never 
forgetting that the others exist, and that very high- 
ly evolved Intelligences may pass from one to an- 
other. In fact, such visitors came to our earth at 
one stage of its evolution, to guide and help our new- 
ly-born humanity. 

A Scheme of Evolution passes through seven 
great evolutionary stages, each of which is called a 
Chain. This name is derived from the fact that a 
Chain consists of seven Globes, mutually interrelat- 
ed ; it is a chain of seven links, each link a globe. The 
seven Schemes are shown in Diagram I, around the 
central sun and at any one period of time only one 
of the rings in each Scheme will be active ; each ring 
of each of these seven Schemes is composed of seven 
globes; these are not figured separately but form 
what we here have drawn as a ring, in order to save 
space. The globes are shown in the next Diagram. 

In Diagram II we have a single Scheme, figured 
in the seven stages of its evolution, i.e., in its seven 
successive Chains; it is now shown in relation to 
five of the seven spheres, or types, of matter existing 
in the Solar System ; matter of each type is composed 
of atoms of a definite kind, all the solids, liquids, 



5 






* 





O" 
O, 


-O- 

-o- 


Jp 






cr 

0. 


o-o 

00 

oo 


^'N 






o 
o 


.0 










-ON 

^v,^ 




CT 


o-o 






- 


00 




O" 


-o 
-o- 


Ov o 







o 



tf 

o 



PRELIMINARIES 5 

gases, and ethers of one type of matter being ag- 
gregations of atoms of a single kind; 1 this matter 
is named according to the mood of consciousness to 
which it responds: physical, emotional, mental, in- 
tuitional, spiritual. 2 In the first Chain, its seven 
Worlds, A, B, C, D, E, F, G, are seen arranged: 8 
A and G, the root-world and the seed-world, are on 
the spiritual plane, for all descends from the 
higher to the lower, from the subtle to the dense, and 
climbs again to the higher, enriched with the gains 
of the journey, the gains serving as seed for the 
next Chain; B and F are on the intuitional plane, 
one gathering and the other assimilating; C and F 
are on the higher mental, in similar relationship; 
D, the turning point, the polntf of balance between 
the ascending and descending arcs, is in the lower 
part of the mental plane. These pairs of globes 
in every Chain are ever closely allied, but the one 
is the rough sketch, the other the finished picture. 
In the second Chain, the globes have all sunk one 
stage lower into matter, and D is on the emotional 
plane. In the third Chain, they have sunk yet one 
stage further, and D reaches the physical plane. 

'See Occult Chemistry, Annie Besant and C. W. Lead- 
beater, pp. 5 11. 

2 Physical matter is the matter with which we are daily 
dealing in our waking life. Emotional matter is that which 
is set vibrating by desires and emotions, and is called astral 
in our older books, a name we retain to some extent. Mental 
matter is that which similarly answers to thoughts. Intui- 
tional matter (buddhic, in Samskrt) is that which serves as 
medium for the highest intuition and all-embracing love. 
Spiritual matter (atmic) is that in which the creative Will 
is potent. 

3 The top left-hand globe is A ; the next lower is B ; and 
so on up to G, the top right-hand globe. 



6 MAN: WHENCE. HOW AND WHITHER 

In the fourth Chain, and on the fourth only, the mid- 
most Chain of the seven, the most deeply involved 
in densest matter, the turning point of the Chains 
as is D of the globes, there are three of the globes 
C, D, and E on the physical plane. On the return 
journey, as it were, the ascent resembles the descent: 
in the fifth Chain, as in the third, there is one phy- 
sical globe; in the sixth, as in the second, globe D 
is emotional ; in the seventh, as in the first, globe D 
\s mental. With the ending of the seventh Chain the 
Scheme has worked itself out, and its fruitage is 
harvested. 

The seven Schemes of our Solar System may, for 
convenience sake, be named after the globe D of 
each, this being the globe best known to us; these 
are : Vulcan, Venus, Earth, Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus, 
Neptune (see Diagram I). In the Scheme to which 
our Earth belongs, the Chain which preceded our 
terrene Chain was the third of its series, and its 
one physical globe, globe D, was the globe which is 
now our Moon; lifence the third Chain is called the 
lunar, while the second and first Chains are designat- 
ed only by numbers; our Earth Chain, or terrene 
Chain, is the fourth in succession, and has there- 
fore three of its seven globes in physical manifesta- 
tion, its third globe, C, being what is called the 
planet Mars, and its fifth globe, E, what is called 
the planet Mercury. The Neptunian Scheme also, 
tfith Neptune as its globe D, has three globes of 
\ts Chain in physical manifestation C and E being 
the two physical planets connected with it, the exist- 
ence of which was mentioned in Theosophical litera- 
ture before they were recognised by Science and 
hence has reached the fourth Chain of its series. 



THE SUCCESSIVE LIFE-WAVES 




DIAGRAM III. 



PRELIMINARIES 7 

The Venusian Scheme is reaching the end of its 
fifth Chain, and Venus has consequently lately lost 
her Moon, the globe D of the preceding Chain. 1 It 
is possible that Vulcan, which Herschel saw, but 
which, it is said, has now disappeared, is in its sixth 
Chain, but on that we have no information, either 
direct or mediate. Jupiter is not yet inhabited, but 
its moons are, by beings with dense physical bodies. 
Diagrams III and IV 2 represent the relationships 
between the seven Chains within a Scheme, show- 
ing the evolutionary progress from Chain to Chain. 
Diagram III should be first studied; it is merely a 
simplification of Diagram IV 2 , which is a copy of 
one drawn by a Master; this though at first sight 
somewhat bewildering will be found very illumina- 
tive when understood. 

Diagram III places the seven Chains in a Scheme 
as columns standing side by side, in order that the 
divine Life-Streams, figured by the arrows, may be 
traced from kingdom to kingdom in their ascent. 
Each section in a column represents one of the seven 
kingdoms of nature three elemental, mineral, vege- 
table, animal, human. 3 Follow Life-Stream 7, the 
only one which goes through the seven kingdoms 
within the Scheme; it enters the first Chain at the 
*It may be remembered that the Moon of Venus was seen 
by Herschel. 

2See frontispiece, Diagram IV. 

SThe "elemental" kingdoms are the three stages of life on 
its descent into matter involution and the seven king- 
doms might be figured on a descending and ascending arc, 
like Chains and globes : 

1st Elemental Human 

2nd Elemental Animal 

3rd Elemental Vegetable 

Mineral 



MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

first Elemental Kingdom, and there develops during 
the life-period of the Chain; it passes into the second 
Elemental Kingdom on the second Chain, and 
develops therein during its life-period; it ap- 
pears in the third Elemental Kingdom on the 
third Chain, and enters the Mineral on the fourth; 
it then successively develops through the Vegetable 
and Animal Kingdoms on the fifth and sixth Chains, 
nnd attains the Human in the seventh. The whole 
Scheme thus provides a field of evolution for a 
stream of the divine Life from its ensouling of mat- 
ter up to man. 1 The remaining streams have either 
commenced in another Scheme and enter this at the 
point of evolution therein reached, or enter this too 
late to reach the human kingdom herein. 

The study of Diagram IV must be begun by realis- 
ing that the coloured circles are not seven Chains 
of globes, as might be expected, but the seven King- 
doms of Nature in each successive Chain, and there- 
fore correspond with the sections of columns in Dia- 
gram TIL We have here a whole Scheme of Evolu- 
tion, with the place of each Kingdom shown in each 
Chain. The student should select a line of any 
colour in the first circle and trace it carefully on- 
wards. 

Let us take the blue circle at the top lefthand, 
pointed out by the arrow; it represents the first 
Elemental Kingdom on the first Chain. Leaving the 

ir rhese seven Life-Stroaras and the six additional in- 
gresses for the lowest Elemental Kingdom in the remaining 
six Chains, thirteen in all, are the successive impulses which 
make up, for this Scheme, what Theosophists call the * second 
Life-wave,' i.e., the form-evolving current of Life from the 
Second LOGOS, the Vishnu of the Hindu, the Son of the 
Christian, Trinities. 



PRELIMINARIES 9 

first Chain for the second the next ring of coloured 
circles this blue stream divides on arriving there; 
its least advanced part, which is not ready to go on 
into the second Elemental Kingdom, breaks off from 
the main stream and goes again into the first Ele- 
mental Kingdom of this second Chain, joining the 
new Life-stream coloured yellow and marked with 
an arrow which enters on its evolution in that Chain, 
and being merged in i x ; the main blue stream goes on 
into the second Elemental Kingdom of this second 
Chain, receiving into itself some laggards from the 
second Elemental Kingdom of the first Chain, as- 
similating them, and carrying them on with itself; 
it will be noticed that only a blue stream leaves this 
Kingdom, the foreign elen ents having been complete- 
ly assimilated. The blue stream flows on into the third 
Chain, divides, leaves its laggards to continue in the 
second Elemental Kingdom in the third Chain, while 
the bulk goes on to form th? third Elemental King- 
dom of this third Chain ; again it receives some lag- 
gards from the third Elemental Kingdom of the 
second Chain, assimilates tlem, and carries them 
on with itself, an undiluted blue stream, into the 
Mineral Kingdom of the fourth Chain; as before, it 
leaves some laggards to evolve themselves in the 
third Elemental Kingdom of the fourth Chain, and 
receives some from the Mineral Kingdom of the 
third Chain, assimilating them as before. It has 
now reached its densest point in evolution, the 
Mineral Kingdom. Leaving this we still follow 
the blue line it climbs into the Vegetable Kingdom 
of the fifth Chain, sending off its laggards to the 
Mineral Kingdom of this Chain, and taking up 
the laggards of the Vegetable Kingdom of the 



10 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

fourth Chain. Again it climbs upwards, now 
into the Animal Kingdom of the sixth Chain, 
leaving its insufficiently developed vegetables 
to complete that stage of their evolution in 
the Vegetable Kingdom of the sixth Chain, and 
receiving undeveloped animals from the fifth Chain 
into its own Kingdom. Lastly, it completes its long 
evolution by entering the Human Kingdom on the 
seventh Chain, dropping its too undeveloped animals 
into the Animal Kingdom of the seventh Chain, re- 
ceiving some human beings from the Human King- 
dom of the sixth Chain, carrying them on with itself 
to its triumphant conclusion, where human evolu- 
tion is perfected and the superhuman begins, along 
one or another of the seven paths, indicated in the 
blue plume at the end. In another Scheme, those we 
left as laggards in the Animal Kingdom of the 
seventh Chain will appear in the Human Kingdom 
of the first Chain of that new Scheme, and therein 
reach perfection as men. They will be in the circle 
corresponding to the grey-brown circle with its 
plume in the first Chain of the present Diagram. 

Each line can be followed in this way from King- 
dom to Kingdom in successive Chains. The life in 
the! second, the orange, circle, representing the 
second Elemental Kingdom in the first Chain and 
having therefore, one stage of life in a Chain behind 
it, or, in other words, having entered the stream of 
evolution as the first Elemental Kingdom in the 
seventh Chain of a previous Scheme (see the top 
left-hand circle with arrow in the seventh Chain in 
our Diagram) reaches the Human Kingdom in the 
sixth Chain and passes on. That in the third circle, 
purple, with two Kingdoms behind it in a prevous 



PRELIMINARIES 11 

Scheme, reaches the Human Kingdom in the fifth 
Chain and passes on. That in the fourth, the 
Mineral Kingdom, passes out in the fourth Chain. 
That in the Vegetable Kingdom passes out in the 
third Chain ; that in the Animal in the second ; that 
in the Human in the first. 

The student who will thoroughly master this dia- 
gram will find himself in possession of a plan into 
the compartments of whch he can pack any numbfer 
of dfttnils without, in the midst of their complexity, 
losing sight of the general principles of aeonian 
evolution. 

Two points remain: the sub-elemental and the 
superhuman. The Life-Stream from the LOGOS en- 
souls matter first in the first, or lowest, Elemental 
Kingdom; hence when that same stream from the 
first Chain enters the second Elemental Kingdom on 
the second Chain, the matter which is to be that of 
the first Elemental Kingdom on that second Chain 
has to be ensouled by a new Life-Stream from the 
LOGOS, and so on with each of the remaining Chains. 1 

When the Human Kingdom is traversed, and man 
stands on the threshold of His superhuman life, a 
liberated Spirit, seven paths open before Him for 
His choosing: He may enter into the blissful om- 
niscience and omnipotence of Nirvana, with activities 
far beyond our knowing, to become, perchance, in 
some future world an Avatara, or divine Incarna- 
tion: this is sometimes called, 'taking the Dharma- 
kaya vesture'. He may enter on 'the Spiritual 
Period' a phrase covering unknown meanings, 

14 'My Father worketh hitherto and I work." 8. John v. 
17. See in Chapter v. the description of this on our Earth, 
when the Spirit of the Moon incarnates therein. 



12 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

among them probably that of i taking the Sainbhoga- 
kaya vesture'. He may become part of that treas- 
ure-house of spiritual forces on which the Agents 
of the LOGOS draw for Their work, * taking the Nir- 
manakaya vesture'. He may remain a member of 
the Occult Hierarchy which rules and guards the 
world in v^hich He has reached perfection. He may 
pass on to the next Chain, to aid in building up its 
forms. He may enter the splendid Angel Deva 
Evolution. He may give Himself to the immediate 
service of the LOGOS, to be used by Him in any part 
of the Solar System, His Servant and Messenger, 
who lives but to carry out His will and do His work 
over the whole of the system which He rules. As a 
General has his Staff, the members of which carry 
his messages to any part of the field, so are These 
the Staff of Him who commands all, "Ministers of 
His that do His pleasure". 1 This seems to be con- 
sidered a very hard Path, perhaps the greatest sac- 
rifice open to the Adept, and is therefore regarded 
as carrying with it great distinction. A member of 
the General Staff has ao physical body, but makes 
one for Himself by Kriyashakti the 'power to 
make' of the matter of the globe to which He is 
sent. The Staff contains Beings at very different 
levels, from that of Arhatship 2 upwards. There are 
some who dedicated themselves to it on reaching 
Arhatship in the Moon-Chain; others who are 
Adepts; 3 others who have passed far beyond this 
stage in human evolution. 
The need for the provision of such a Staff arises 

*Psalm$, ciii. 21. 

2 Those who have passed the fourth Great Initiation. 
8 Those who have passed the fifth Great Initiation. 



PRELIMINARIES 13 

probably, among many other reasons unknown to 
us, from the fact that in the very early stages of the 
evolution of a Chain especially of one on the down- 
ward arc or even of a globe, more help from out- 
side is needed than is required later. On the first 
Chain of our Scheme, for instance, the attainment 
of the first of the Great Initiations was the appoint- 
ed level of achievement, and none of its humani- 
ty attained Adeptship, which is itself nowhere near, 
Buddhahood ; it would therefore be necessary to sup- 
ply the higher offices from outside. So again later 
Chains were helped, and our Earth will have to 
provide high Officials for the earlier Chains of other 
Schemes, as well as yielding the normal supply for 
the later globes and Rounds of our own Chain. Al- 
ready from our own Occult Hierarchy two Members, 
within our own knowledge, have left our Earth, 
either to join the General Staff, or lent by the Head 
of our Hierarchy to the Head of the Hierarchy of 
some other globe outside our Scheme. 

The human beings who, in any Chain, do not reach 
by a certain time the level appointed for the Human- 
ity of the Chain, are its * failures'; the 'failure' may 
be due to youth and consequent lack of time, or to 
lack of due exertion, and so on; but, whatever the 
cause, those who fail to reach a point from which 
they can progress sufficiently, during the remaining 
life of a Chain, to attain the required level by its 
end, drop out of its evolution before that evolution 
is completed, and are obliged to enter the succeeding 
Chain at a point determined by the stage already 
reached, that they may complete their human course. 
There are others who succeed in passing this crucial 
point, the 'Day of Judgment' for the Chain, but who 



14 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

yet do not progress with sufficient rapidity to reach 
the level from which the seven Paths open out. 
These, though not * failures,' have not wholly suc- 
ceeded, and they therefore also pass on into the 
next Chain and lead its humanity, when that human- 
ity has reached a stage at which the bodies are suffi- 
ciently evolved to serve as vehicles for their further 
progress. We shall find these various classes in our 
study, and this is but a bird's-eye view of them; the 
details will make them come out more clearly. Only 
in the first Chain we noticed no failures dropping 
out of its evolution. There were some there who 
did not succeed, but if that Chain had its Day of 
Judgment, we failed to observe it. 

In a single Chain the evolutionary wave sweeps 
from A to G, using each globe in turn as the field 
of growth; this circling round the Chain is appro- 
priately named a Round, and seven times the wave 
sweeps round, ere the life of the Chain is over, its 
work complete. Then the results are gathered up 
and garnered, and all form the seed for the succeed- 
ing Chain, save Those who, having finished Their 
course as men, and become Super-men, elect to 
serve in other ways than in guiding that coming 
Chain upon its way, and who enter on another of 
the seven Paths. 

To conclude these preliminaries. In the Monadic 
Sphere, on the super-spiritual level, dwell the Divine 
Emanations, the Sons of God, who are to take flesh 
and become Sons of Man in the coming universe. 
They ever behold the Face of the Father, and are 
the Angel-Counterparts of men. This divine Son 
in his own world is technically called a /Monad,' a 
Oneness. He it is that, as said on p. 1, is " trans- 



PRELIMINARIES 15 

formed in the world of life into an immortal Spirit ". 
The Spirit is the Monad veiled in matter, triple 
therefore in his aspects of Will, Wisdom, and Activ- 
ity, being the very Monad himself, after he has 
appropriated the atoms of matter of the spiritual, 
intuitional and mental sphere, round which his 
future bodies will be formed. In the Monad wells 
up the intarissable fount of life ; the Spirit, or him- 
self veiled, is his manifestation in a universe. As 
he gains mastery over matter in the lower sphere, 
he takes more and more control of the evolutionary 
work, and all the great choices which decide a man's 
destiny are made by his Will, guided by his Wisdom, 
and achieved by his Activity. 



CHAPTER 11. 
THE FIRST AND SECOND CHAINS 

WE have to face what is practically the only great 
difficulty of our study at the very outset the evo- 
lutionary cycles on the first and second Chains of 
our Scheme. A Master said smilingly as to this: 
"Well, you will be able to see it, but it is doubtful 
how far you will be able to describe it in intelligible 
language, so that others may understand/' The 
conditions are so different from all that here we 
know: the forms are so tenuous, so subtle, so chang- 
ing; the matter so utterly "the stuff which dreams 
are made of," that clear voicing of the things seen 
is well-nigh impossible. Yet however imperfect the 
description, some description must be essayed, in 
order to render intelligible the later growth and un- 
folding; poor as it must be, it may be better than 
none. 

A real 'beginning' may not be found; in the end- 
loss chain of living tilings a link may be studied, 
fairly complete in itself; but the metal thereof has 
somewhere slept in the bosom of the earth, has been 
dug out from some mine, smelted in some furnace, 
wrought in some workshop, shaped by some hands, 
ere it appears as a link in a chain. And so with 
our Scheme. Without previous Schemes it could not 
be, for its higher inhabitants began not here their 

16 



THE FIRST AND SECOND CHAINS 17 

evolution. Suffice it, that some of the fragments of 
Deity, eternal Spirits, who otherwhere had passed 
through the downward arc involving themselves 
in ever-densifying matter through the Elemental 
Kingdoms, and reaching their lowest point began 
in the Mineral Kingdom of this first Chain their 
upward climbing, their long unfolding in evolving 
matter; and in that Chain, learning our first evolu- 
tionary lessons in that Mineral Kingdom, were we 
the humanity of our present earth. It is these con- 
sciousnesses that we propose to trace from their 
life in minerals in the first Chain to their life in 
men in the fourth. Ourselves part of the humanity 
of the earth, it is easier to trace this than to trace 
something entirely alien from ourselves. For in 
this we are but evoking from the Eternal Memory 
scenes in which we ourselves played our part, with 
which we are indissolubly linked, and which we 
therefore can more easily reach. 

Seven centres are seen, forming the first Chain, 
the first and seventh, as already said, on t^Q spirit- 
ual level, 1 the second and sixth on the intuitional, 2 
the third and fifth on the higher mental, the fourth 
on the lower mental. We name them in the fashion 
of later globes, A and G, B and F, C and E, and in 
the centre D, the turning point of the cycle. In the 
first Round of the fourth Chain, which is to some 
extent a coarse copy of the first Chain, the Occult 
Commentary quoted in The Secret Doctrine says of 
the Earth that it was "a foetus in the matrix of 
Space," and the simile recurs to the mind. This 
Chain is the future worlds in the matrix of thought, 



'Nirvanic. 
2 Bnddhic. 



18 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

the worlds that later are to be born into denser 
matter. We can scarcely call these centres "globes" ; 
they are like centres of light in a sea of light, foci 
of light through which light is rushing, wrought 
of the very substance of light and only light, yet 
modified by the flood of light which courses through 
them; they are as vortex-rings, yet the rings are 
but light, only distinguishable by their whirling, by 
the difference of their motion, like whirlpools made 
only of water in the midst of water; but these are 
whirlpools of light in the midst of light. The first 
and seventh centres are both modifications of spirit- 
ual matter, the seventh the perfected outworking of 
the broad outlines visible in the first, the finished 
picture outwrought from the rough sketch of the 
divine Artist. There is a humanity there, a very 
glorified humanity, product of some previous evolu- 
tion, which is here to complete its human course on 
this Chain (see the top right hand circle in the 
first Chain in Diagram IV) ; hereon each entity will 
acquire his lowest body in the fourth globe of each 
Round the body of mental matter which is the 
densest the Chain can give. The level fixed for 
achievement on this Chain the nonattainment of 
which would imply the necessity for rebirth on the 
following Chain is the first of the great Initiations, 
or what corresponds to it there. On this first Chain 
there are so tar as we could see none who drop 
out as failures, and some, as always seems to be the 
case in later Chains also, pass far beyond the ap- 
pointed level ; in the seventh Round the members of 
that humanity who became Initiates entered on one 
or other of the seven Paths before-mentioned. 
All stages of ego-hood appear to be present on 



THE FIRST AND SECOND CHAINS 19 

this Chain, but the absence of the lower levels of 
matter to which we are accustomed makes one not- 
able difference in the evolutionary methods that 
strikes the observer : everything not only starts but 
also progresses * above,' there being no below and 
no ' forms' in the ordinary sense of the word, but 
only centers of life, living beings without stable 
forms; there are no physical and emotional worlds 
in the first three globes not even a lower mental 
from which impulses can surge upwards, calling 
down the higher in response to ensoul and use the 
forms already existing on the lower levels. The 
nearest approach to such action is on globe D, where 
the animal-like thought-forms reach upwards, at- 
tracting the attention of the subtle centres floating 
above them; then more of the life of the Spirit 
pulses out into the centres, and they anchor them- 
iselves to the thought-forms and ensoul them, and 
the thought-forms become human, 

It is difficult to mark off the successive Bounds; 
they seepi to fade one into the other like dissolving 
views, 1 and are marked only by slight increases and 
diminutions of light. Progress is very slow; one 
recalls the Satya Yuga of the Hindu Scriptures, 
where a life lasts for many thousands of years with- 
out much change, 2 The entities unfold very slowly, 
as rays of magnetised light play upon them; it is 

l lt may be remembered that the first and second Races 
on our present world also showed something of this pecul- 
iarity, though on a level so much lower. 

2 The Hindus divide time into cycles composed of four 
Yugas, or Ages, that succeed each' other, the Satya, the first 
of the series, being the most spiritual and the longest. When 
the fourth is ended, a new cycle opens, again with a Satya. 



20 MAN.-WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

like a gestation, like growth within an egg, or of a 
flower-bud within its sheath. The chief interest of 
the Chain is in the evolution of the Shining Ones 
the Devas, or Angels those who live habitually on 
these high levels; while the lower evolutions seem 
to play a subsidiary part. Humanity is much in- 
fluenced by these, mostly by their mere presence 
and by the atmosphere created by them, and occas- 
ionally a Shining One may be seen to take a human 
being almost as a toy or as a pet. The vast angelic 
evolution helps humanity by its very existence ; the 
vibrations set up by these glorious Spirits play on 
the lower human types, strengthening and vivifying 
them. Looking at the Chain as a whole, we saw it 
as a field for this Angel Kingdom primarily, and 
only secondarily for humanity; but perchance that 
may ever be so, and that it is because we are human 
that we regard the world as so specially our own. 

On the fourth globe, now and again a Shining One 
may be seen deliberately to aid a human being, 
transferring matter from his own body into the 
human, and thus increasing the responsiveness and 
susceptibility of the latter. Such helpers belong to 
the class of Form-Angels "Riipa-Devas who live 
normally in the lower mental world. 

When we turn to the mineral kingdom, we are 
among those some of whom will become men on the 
Moon Chain, and some on the Earth Chain. The 
consciousness asleep in these minerals is to awaken 
gradually and to unfold through long stages into 
the human. 

The vegetable kingdom is a little more awake, but 
very dull and sleepy still; the normal progress 
herein will carry the ensouling consciousness into 



THE FIRST AND SECOND CHAINS 21 

the animal kingdom on the second Chain, and into 
the human on the third. 

At present, while we must needs speak of these 
kingdoms as mineral and vegetable, they are really 
composed of mere thoughts thoughts of minerals, 
thoughts of vegetables, with the Monads who dream 
in them, as it were, floating over them, sending 
down faint thrills of life into these airy forms; 
these Monads are, it would seem, forced now and 
again to turn attention to them, to feel through 
them, to sense through them, when some external 
touch compels a drowsy notice. These thought- 
forms are as models in the Mind of the Ruler of 
the Seven Chains, living within Him, products of 
His meditation, a world of thoughts, of ideas; we 
see that the Monads who have acquired permanent 
atoms in some previous Scheme, and who are float- 
ing over these thought-forms, attach themselves to 
them, and become vaguely conscious in and through 
them. Vague as this consciousness is there are 
differences in it; the lowest grade can scarcely be 
called consciousness, the life in the thought-forms 
of types resembling what we should now call earth, 
rocks, stones. Monads touching these can scarcely 
be said to be aware of anything through them, save 
of pressure, drawing from them a dull stirring of 
life, showing itself as resistance to the pressure, 
and thus different from the yet duller life in the 
chemical molecules unattached to Monads, and sens- 
ing no pressure. In the next grade, in the thought- 
forms resembling what we should now call metals, 
the sense of pressure is stronger and the resistance 
to it a little more definite ; there is almost an effort 
to push outwards against it, a reaction causing ex- 



22 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

pansion. When this sub-conscious reaction is in 
several directions, the thought-model of a crystal 
is formed. We noticed that when our own conscious- 
ness was in the mineral, we felt only the sub-con- 
scious re-action ; but passing out and trying to feel 
the re-action from outside, it figured itself in our 
consciousness as a vague discontent at the pressure, 
and a dull resentful effort to resist and push against 
it. "I feel a discontented sort of mineral, " one of 
us remarked. Probably the Monadic life, seeking 
expression, did vaguely feel displeasure at its frus- 
tration, and this we felt when we came out of the 
mineral, feeling it in ourselves as we felt it in that 
part of our consciousness which was at that time 
outside the rigid form. If we glance hastily for- 
ward, we may see that Monads attached to crys- 
tals do not enter the next Chain in the lowest forms 
of vegetable life, but only in the higher, and, pass- 
ing through those, enter the Moon Chain at its 
middle point as mammals, becoming individualised 
there, and taking human birth in its fifth Round. 

One most disconcerting fact for observers is that 
these ' thoughts of minerals' are not immobile, but 
mobile; a hill, which one expects to be steady, will 
turn over or float away, or change its form; there 
IB no solid earth, but a shifting panorama. It re- 
quires no faith to move these mountains, for they 
move of themselves. 

At the end of this first Chain, all who attained 
the appointed level set for it that which, as said 
before, corresponded to our first Initiation en- 
tered on one or other of the seven Paths, one of 
these leading to work on the second Chain as 
the builders of the forms of its humanity, 



TBE FIRST AND SECOND CHAINS 23 

playing to it a part similar to that played 
later on our earth by the * Lords of the Moon 1 . 1 
These are called by H. P. Blavatsky 'Asuras,' i.e., 
4 living beings '; later the term was confined by usage 
to living beings in whom intellect, but not emotion 
was developed.* Those who did not succeed in 
reaching this level entered the second Chain for 
their own further evolution at its midmost point 
and led its humanity, at the close of that Chain 
reaching liberation and being among its i Lords'; 
some of these Lords, in turn, worked on the third 
Chain in building the forms of its humanity. 8 The 
early humanity on the second Chain was drawn 
from the animal kingdom of the first; the animal 
kingdom of the second Chain from the vegetable of 
the first; while the vegetable kingdom of the second 
came from the mineral of the first. The three 

'The Barhishad Pitrs of The Secret Doctrine. 

2 These Asuras acted on the second Chain as Barhishad 
Pitrs, and on the third as Agnishvatta Pitrs, and formed 
one of the highest classes of the superhuman Manasaputras 
who came to our earth, according to The Secret Doctrine. 
It must be remembered that these stages are all super- 
human ; they apparently indicate the superhuman stages of 
the fifth of the seven Paths named on p. 12. In The Secret 
Doctrine a difficulty is created by the use of this same name 
of Asuras for those who left the lunar Chain from the first 
globe of its seventh Round, and who caused trouble on Earth 
by 'refusing to create'. Readers of The Pedigree of Man 
must correct it by this, and by details given later, for I was 
led into a mistake by the double use of the word in The 
Secret Doctrine. The human beings can never exist, as such, 
on more than two successive Chains. They must have be- 
come Supermen, for such appearance. A. B. 

8 In the nomenclature of the S. D. becoming its Barhis- 
had Pitrs. 



24 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

elemental kingdoms on the downward arc of the first 
Chain passed similarly into the second Chain, filling 
the mineral kingdom and two of the elemental, while 
the first elemental kingdom was formed from a new 
impulse of life from the LOGOS. 

In the second Chain, the further descent into 
matter gives us a globe on the emotional plane, an 
astral globe, and the denser material makes things 
a little more coherent and comprehensible. We 
have then A and G on the intuitional level, B and 
F on the higher mental, C and E on the lower 
mental, and D on the emotional. On this lowest 
globe, things were a little more like those to which 
we are accustomed though still very strange and 
weird. Thus things with the general appearance of 
vegetables moved about with the freedom of an- 
imals, though apparently with little, if any, sen- 
tiency. They were not anchored to physical matter, 
and hence were very mobile. The young humanity 
here lived in close contact with the Shining Ones, 
who still dominated the evolutionary field, and 
the Form- Angels and the Desire- Angels Rupa 
Devas and Kama Devas strongly, but for the most 
part unintentionally, influenced human evolution. 
Passion showed itself in many who now had emo- 
tional bodies on globe D, and its germs were visible 
in animals. Differences were noticeable in the capa- 
city to respond to vibrations sent out, consciously 
and unconsciously, by the Shining Ones, but changes 
were very gradual and progress was slow. Later, 
when the intuitional consciousness unfolded, there 
was communication between this Scheme and the 
Scheme of which Venus is now the physical globe; 
that Scheme is a Chain ahead of ours, and some 



THE FIRST AND SECOND CHAINS 25 

came to our second Chain from there ; but whether 
they belonged to the Venus humanity, or were mem- 
bers of the ' Staff,' we could not tell. 

Great surging clouds of matter, splendid in 
colour, were a noticeable feature on globe D in the 
first Round; they became in the following Bound 
denser, more brilliantly coloured, more responsive 
to vibrations which shaped them into forms, wheth- 
er vegetable or animal it is hard to say. Much of 
the work was on the higher levels, a vitalising of 
subtle matter for future use, showing but little 
effect on the lower forms. Just as now elemental 
essence is used to build emotional and mental bodies, 
so then the Form and Desire-Angels were seeking 
to differentiate themselves more fully by using these 
clouds of matter and living in them. They came 
down, sub-plane by sub-plane, into denser matter, 
but were not in this using the human kingdom. 
Even at the present time a Deva, or Angel, may en- 
soul a whole country-side, and such action was very 
general then; the emotional and lower-mental mat- 
ter formed the bodies of these Angels, changing, 
intermingling; and incidentally permanent atoms of 
vegetables, minerals, and even animals, rooting 
themselves in such Angel-bodies, grew and evolved. 
The Angels seemed to take no particular interest 
in them, any more than we interest ourselves in the 
evolution of microbes within ourselves; now and 
then, however, some interest was shown in an an- 
imal, and its capacity to respond increased rapidly 
under such conditions. 

Studying vegetable consciousness in the second 
Chain in which we, who now are human, were liv- 
ing in the vegetable world we find a dim awareness 



26 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

of forces playing on it, and a certain sense of com- 
pulsion towards growth. In some, there was a feel- 
ing of the want to grow, the wish to grow; as one 
of the investigators remarked: "I am trying to flow- 
er. " In others there was a slight resistance to the 
line of growth impressed, and a vague groping after 
another self-chosen direction. Some seemed to try 
to use any forces that contacted them, and in their 
germinal consciousness held that all around existed 
for them. Some tried to push out in a direction 
which attracted them, and were frustrated and be- 
came vaguely resentful; one, forming part of a 
Deva, was observed to be thus hindered, since the 
Deva was naturally arranging things to suit him- 
self, and not any constituents of his body. On the 
other hand, from the obscure view-point of the 
vegetable, the Deva's proceedings were as incom- 
prehensible as the weather is to us in these days, 
and often as troublesome. Towards the end of the 
Chain, the more highly developed vegetables were 
showing a little mind, in fact a fair baby intelligence, 
recognising the existence of external animals, liking 
the neighbourhood of some and shrinking from 
others. And there was a craving for more cohesion, 
evidently the result of the downward push of life 
into matter of greater density, the Will working in 
Nature for descent into denser levels. Without the 
physical anchorage the emotional forms were very 
unstable, and tended to float about vaguely and 
without purpose. 

In the seventh Bound of this Chain a considerable 
number dropped out from its humanity as failures, 
having fallen too far behind to find suitable forms ; 
and they went on later into the third, the Moon Chain, 



THE FIRST AND SECOND CHAINS 27 

as men. Others reached the level now marked by 
the third Initiation, the level appointed for success 
on the second Chain, and entered on one of the 
seven Paths, one, as before, leading to the next 
Chain for work thereon. Those who were not fail- 
ures, but had not reached perfect success, went on 
to the third Chain, entering it at the Bound suit- 
able for the stage previously reached. The foremost 
from the animal kingdom individualised on the 
second Chain, and began their human evolution on 
the Moon Chain, passing through its lower kingdoms 
very rapidly and becoming men ; they then led evo- 
lution on that Chain until the classes already men- 
tioned first the failures, and then those who had 
not achieved perfect success dropped in from the 
second Chain and became successively the leaders. 
The foremost from the second Chain vegetable 
kingdom entered the Moon Chain Animal Kingdom 
as mammals, in its fourth Eound, not passing 
through the infusoria and lower animal types 
fishes and reptiles; the rest came in, in its first 
Round, as animals of the lower types. The con- 
sciousnesses in the second Chain Mineral Kingdom 
passed on into the Vegetable Kingdom in the Moon 
Chain, and the Mineral Kingdom was filled from the 
highest Elemental Kingdom of the second Chain. 
As before, the lowest Elemental Kingdom was filled 
by a new wave of life from the LOGOS. 

An important principle may here be mentioned; 
each of the seven sub-planes which make up a plane 
is again divided into seven ; hence a body, while con- 
taining matter of all the sub-planes in its constitu- 
tion, will show activity only in the subdivisions cor- 
responding to the number of the Chains or Bounds 



28 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

already experienced, or in the course of being ex- 
perienced. A man working in the second Round of 
the second Chain will be able to use in his emotional 
and mental bodies only the first and second subdivi- 
sions of each sub-plane of astral and mental matter ; 
in the third Bound he will be able to use the first, 
second and third, though not so fully as regards 
the third as he will do when he shall be in the third 
Round of the third Chain, and so on. Thus later 
on, in our Earth Chain, man in the second Round 
was working at and through the first and second sub- 
divisions of each of the sub-planes, and feebly in the 
third and fourth, as he was in the fourth Chain; so 
that, while he had matter of all the sub-planes in 
him, it was only the two lower subdivisions of the 
two lower sub-planes that were fully active, and 
through these only could his consciousness fully 
work. Not until the seventh Race of our seventh 
Round will man possess the splendid body in which 
every particle will thrill responsive to himself, and 
even then not as perfectly as in later Chains. 



CHAPTER III 
EARLY TIMES ON THE MOON CHAIN 

ON the Moon Chain the third in succession 
there is a deeper plunge into matter, and the middle 
globe is on the physical plane ; A and Q are on the 
higher mental, B and F on the lower mental, C 
and E on the emotional, and D on the physical. 
This middle globe, the scene of the greatest activ- 
ity in the Chain, is still surviving as the Moon, but 
the Moon is only what is left of it after much loss 
of material, its inner core, as it were, after the dis- 
integration of the crust, a globe much diminished 
in size, on its way to total wreck a corpse, in fact. 

Following the evolving consciousnesses which we 
have seen as minerals on the first Chain, as vege- 
tables on the second, we find the crest of the ad- 
vancing wave which bears us within it entering the 
third Chain as mammals at its middle point, appear- 
ing On globe D, the Moon, in the fourth Bound. 
These mammals are curious creatures, small but 
extraordinarily active; the most advanced of them 
are monkey-like in form, making enormous leaps. 
The fourth Bound creatures are as a rule at first 
scaly in skin, and later the skin is froglike; then 
the more advanced types develop bristles, which 
form a very coarse harsh fur. The air is altogether 

29 



30 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

different from our present atmosphere, heavy and 
stifling, reminding one of choke-damp, but it ob- 
viously suits the Moon inhabitants. The conscious- 
nesses we are following take the bodies of small 
mammals, long in body and short in legs, a mixture 
of weasel, mongoose and prairie-dog, with a short 
scrubby tail, altogether clumsy and ill-finished ; they 
are red-eyed, and able to see in the darkness of 
their holes; -coming out of the holes, they raise 
themselves on their hind legs, which form a tripod 
with the short strong tail, and turn their heads from 
side to side, sniffing. These animals are fairly in- 
telligent, and the relations between the lunar an- 
imals and men, in this district at least, seem more 
friendly than between wild animals and men on our 
earth ; these creatures are not domesticated, but do 
not scuttle away when men appear on the scene. In 
other parts, where men are mere savages, eating 
their enemies when they can get them, and animals 
when man-flesh is unobtainable, the wild creatures 
are timid, and fly from human neighbourhood. 

After this first stage of animal life, comes a spell 
as creatures that live much in the trees, the limbs 
double-jointed, the feet padded; the feet are cu- 
riously modified, with a thumb-like projection at 
right-angles to the limb, like the spur of a cock, 
armed with a curving claw; running rapidly along 
the underside of branches, the animal uses this to 
hold on by, the remaining part of the feet being 
useless; but when moving on the ground it walks 
on the pads, and the spur sticks out behind, above 
the ground level, and does not impede movement. 

Other animals, more highly developed than these 
and far more intelligent, monkey-like in form, live 



EARLY TIMES ON THE MOON CHAIN 31 

habitually in human settlements, and attach them- 
selves strongly to the men of their time, serving 
them in various ways. These become individualized 
on globe D of this fourth Bound, and on globes E, F 
and G develop human, emotional and mental bodies, 
the causal, though fully formed, showing but little 
growth. These will leave the Moon Chain in the 
middle of the seventh Round, as we shall see, and 
thus go through, on the Moon Chain, three Rounds 
of development as men. Among these, individual- 
ised in a small community living in the country, are 
observed the present Masters, Mars and Mercury, 
who are now at the head of the Theosophical Socie- 
ty, and who are to be the Manu and Bodhisattva 1 of 
the sixth Root Race on our earth, in the present 
fourth Round of the terrene Chain. 

The consciousnesses of the animals we are follow- 
ing, after the death of their last bodies on globe D, 
practically slept through the remainder of the 
fourth Round and through the first three globes of 
the fifth; losing their emotional and inchoate men- 
tal bodies very shortly after the death of the phys- 
ical ones, and having no causal, they remained 
sleeping in a sort of heaven with pleasant dreams, 
without touch with the manifested worlds, the gulf 
between them and those worlds unbridged. On 
globe D of the fifth Round, they were again thrown 
down into bodies and appeared as large monkey- 
like creatures, leaping forty feet at a bound, and 
appearing to enjoy making tremendous springs 
high into the air. In the time of the fourth human 
race on this globe D they became domesticated, act- 

'The official titles of the Heads the King and the 
Priest, the Ruler and the Teacher of a Root Race. 



32 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

ing as guardians of their masters ' property and as 
playmates of the children of the household, much as 
faithful watch-dogs may be now, carrying the chil- 
dren on their backs and in their arms, and develop- 
ing intense affection for their human masters; the 
children nestled delightedly in their thick soft fur, 
and enjoyed the huge bounds of their faithful guard- 
ians. One scene may act as a type of the individual- 
isation of such creatures. 

There is a hut in which dwells a Moon-man, his 
wife and children; these we know in later times 
under the names of Mars and Mercury, the Mahagu- 
ru and Surya. 1 A number of these monkey-crea- 
tures live round the hut, and give to their owners 
the devotion of faithful dogs ; among them we notice 
the future Sirius, Herakles, Alcyone and Mizar, to 
whom we may give their future names for the pur- 
pose of recognition, though they are still non- 
human. Their astral and mental bodies have grown 
under the play of their owners f human intelligence, 
as those of domesticated animals now develop under 
our own; Sirius is devoted chiefly to Mercury, 
Herakles to Mars; Alcyone and Mizar are pas- 
sionately alt ached servants of the Mahaguru and 
Surya. 

One nigh^ there is an alarm ; the hut is surround- 

'See 'Rents in the Veil of Time 1 in The Theosophist of 
1910, 1911. The Mahaguru is the Lord Gautama, Surya is 
the Lord Maitreya. Why did these animals come into this 
close connection with those who were to be their Masters on 
the then far-off Earth? Had they been plants tended by 
them, as we tend our plants now, in the higher cases for 
the Lords Gautama and Maitreya were men on the second 
Chain or in the lower cases animals and plants that had 
an affinity for each other? 



EARLY TIMES ON THE MOON CHAIN S3 

ed by savages, supported T>y their domesticated 
animals, fierce and strong, resembling furry lizards 
and crocodiles. The faithful guardians spring up 
around their masters' hut and fight desperately in 
its defence; Mars comes out and drives back the 
assailants, using some weapon they do not possess ; 
but, while he drives them backward, a lizard-like 
creature darts behind him into the hut, and catch- 
ing up the child Surya, begins to carry him away. 
Sirius springs at him, bears him down, and throws 
the child to Alcyone, who carries him back into the 
hut, while Sirius grapples with the lizard, and, after 
a desperate struggle, kills it, falling senseless, 
badly mangled, over its body. Meanwhile a savage 
slips behind Mars and stabs at his back, but Herak- 
les, with one leap, flings himself between his master 
and the weapon, and receives the blow full on his 
breast, and falls, dying. The savages are now fly- 
ing in all directions, and Mars, feeling the fall of 
some creature against his back, staggers, and, re- 
covering himself, turns. He recognises his faithful 
animal defender, bends over his dying servant, and 
places his head in his lap. 

The poor monkey lifts his eyes, full of intense 
devotion, to his master 's face, and the act of service 
done, with passionate desire to save, calls down a 
stream of response from the Will aspect of the 
Monad in a fiery rush of power, and in the very 
moment of dying the monkey individualises, and 
thus he dies a man. 

Our damaged monkey, Sirius, has been very much 
chewed up by his lizard-enemy, but is still living, 
and is carried within the hut; he lives for a con- 
siderable time, a crippled wreck, and can only drag 



34 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

himself about with difficulty. It is touching to see 
his dumb fidelity to his mistress; his eyes follow 
her everywhere as she moves about; the child Surya 
nurses him tenderly, and his monkey comrades, Al- 
cyone and Mizar, hang round him; gradually his 
intelligence, fed by love, grows stronger, until the 
lower mind, reaching up, draws down response from 
the higher, and the causal body flashes into fteing, 
shortly before his death. Alcyone and Mizar live on 
after his death for some time, one-pointed devotion 
to the Mahaguru and Surya their most marked 
characteristic, until the emotional body, instinct 
with this pure fire, calls down an answer from the 
intuitional plane, and they also reach individualisa- 
tion, and pass away. 

These cases are good instances of the three great 
types of methods of individualisation, 1 in each of 
which the downflow of the higher life is through 
one aspect of the Triple Spirit, through Will, 
through Wisdom, through active Intellect. Action 
reaches up and calls down Will; Love reaches up 
and calls down Wisdom; Mind reaches up and calls 
down Intellect. These are the three 'Eight Ways' 
of Individualisation. Others there are, that we shall 
turn to in a moment, reflexions of these in denser 
matter, but these are * Wrong Ways' and lead to 
much sorrow. 

Henceforth these consciousnesses that we have 
been specially following are definitely human, and 
have the same causal bodies which they still use; 
they are in globe E as human beings, but are not 
taking any definite part in its ordinary life. They 

'See on this C. W. Leadbeater's 'Modes of Individual- 
isation/ in The Inner Life, vol. ii, 6. 



EARLY TIMES ON THE MOON CHAIN 35 

float about in its atmosphere like fishes in water, 
but are not sufficiently advanced to share in its 
normal activities. The new emotional body on 
globe E is produced by a kind of protuberance 
formed round the emotional permanent atom; the 
newly individualised are not born as children of its 
inhabitants, who, it may be said in passing, are not 
prepossessing in appearance; their real progress 
as human beings cannot be said to begin until they 
land again on globe D in the sixth Round. Some 
consolidation and improvement there certainly is 
in the emotional body floating in the atmosphere 
of globe E, in the mental similarly floating in that 
of globe F, and in the causal likewise in that of 
globe G-. This improvement is shown in the descent 
through the atmospheres of globes A, B and C of 
the sixth Round, wherein the matter drawn into 
each body is better of its kind, and is more coher- 
ent. But, as said, the effective progress is on globe 
D, whereon physical matter is once more donned. 
Among the advanced animals in this fifth Round, 
living in contact with primitive human beings, there 
are some who are of interest because they later drift 
together into a type founded on a similarity of the 
method of individualisation. They individualise in 
one of the ' Wrong Ways' aforesaid. They try to 
imitate the human beings among whom they are, in 
order to gain credit for superiority with their fel- 
low-animals, strutting about, full of vanity, and 
constantly * showing off'. They are monkey-like 
creatures, much like those previously observed, but 
distinctly cleverer and with more imaginative, or, 
at least, imitative faculty, and they play at being 
human beings, as children play at being grown up. 



36 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

They individualise by this intense vanity, which 
stimulates the imitative faculty to an abnormal de- 
gree, and causes a strong feeling of separation, an 
emphasising of the dawning *P of the animal, un- 
til the effort to be distinguished from others calls 
down an answer from the higher levels, and the 
ego is formed. But the effort to rise above their 
fellows, without either admiration or love for any 
one above them, to rise only in order that they 
may look down, does nothing to change animal 
passions into human emotions, and lays no founda- 
tion folr future harmonious growth of 'the emo- 
tional and intellectual natures. They are independ- 
ent, self-centered, self-sufficient, each thinking of 
himself only, with no thought of co-operation, or 
union for a common purpose. When they die, 
after becoming individualised, they dneam away 
the interval between death and rebirth on globe D 
in the sixth Bound, much in the same way as did 
the other individualised animals described, but 
with one difference a difference of enormous im- 
port to the lines of growth that in the previous 
cases the new human beings had their minds fixed 
lovingly on their adored owners of globe D, and 
their emotions were thus strengthened and im- 
proved, whereas those individualised by vanity 
fixed their minds only on themselves and their own 
excellences, and hence had no emotional growth of 
love. 

Another set of animals is individualised by ad- 
miration of the human beings with whom' they come 
into contact, and they also seek to imitate them, 
not because they wish to outstrip their fellows, but 
because they regard the human beings as superior 



EARLY TIMES ON THE MOON CHAIN 37 

and wish to he like them. There is no strong love 
of them or wish to serve them, but there is much 
desire to be taught and great readiness to obey, 
growing out of the admiration felt for them as 
superior beings. They are trained by their owners, 
first to perform tricks and then to do trifling ser- 
vices, and in this way they grow into a certain 
sense of co-operation with their owners; they try 
to please them and to win their approval, not be- 
cause they care specially for them, but because the 
permitted co-operation, resulting from the approval 
won, brings them nearer to the greater beings with 
whom they work. When they individualise through 
the growth of intelligence, the intellect is ready 
to submit to discipline, to co-operate, to see the ad- 
vantages of united effort, and the necessity for 
obedience. They carry into their intermediate ex- 
istence this sense of united work and willingness 
to submit to direction, to their own great advantage 
in the future. 

Another type is developed along a most unfor- 
tunate line, that of mind rendered keen and alert 
by fear; animals hunted for food or owned by 
savage types of men, and 6ften cruelly treated, 
may reach individualisation by efforts to escape 
cruelty, by planning how to escape when chased ; they 
develop craft and cunning and similar faculties, 
showing a distorted ingenuity bred of fear, with 
much suspicion, distrust and revengefulness. When 
the mind has been thus strengthened to a certain 
point in contact with man, albeit along most un- 
desirable lines, individualisation results; in one 
case we observed that a creature's mate was killed f 
and there was a great rush of hatred and passionate 



38 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

revenge, causing individualisation ; in another a 
lynx-like animal individualised by an intense desire 
to inflict pain, as yielding a sense of power over 
others; but here again the stimulus was a malign 
human influence and example. The long interval 
between individualisation and re-birth is in these 
cases filled with dreams of successful escapes, of 
treacherous revenges, and of cruelties inflicted on 
those who misused them during their last animal 
lives. The unfortunate result throws responsibility 
on the man who caused it, and makes a link in 
future lives; it would perhaps be not unreasonable 
to regard all such individualisations as premature 
"taking the human shape too soon". We shall 
find these types again in the sixth Bound, working 
out their new humanity along the lines determined 
by their respective methods of individualisation. It 
would seem as though only the three kinds of in- 
dividualisations caused by a downflow from above 
were in the Plan, and that the forcing upward from 
below was brought about by the wrong-doing of 
man. 

Ere following both these and our friends of other 
types into their lives on globe D on the sixth Bound, 
we may glance at the higher civilisation of the cities 
of the Moon Chain in this, its fifth, Bound. There 
were many communities scattered over the globe 
leading distinctly primitive lives; some, like those 
in the hut already mentioned, who were kindly, al- 
though little developed, fighting vigorously when 
attacked, while others were savage, quarrelsome 
and continually at war, apparently for the mere 
lust of blood-shedding and cruelty. In addition to 
these various communities, some large, some small, 



EARLY TIMES ON THE MOON CHAIN 39 

some nomad, some pastoral, there were more high- 
ly civilised people, living in cities, carrying on 
trades, ruled by settled governments. There did 
not appear to be much in the way of what we should 
call a nation ; a city and a considerable sometimes 
a very extensive area around it, with scattered 
villages, formed a separate State, and these States 
entered into fluctuating agreements with each other 
as to trade, mutual defence, etc. 

One sample may serve as illustration. Near what 
corresponds to the Equator is a great city but 
it looks more like a cemetery with a large extent 
of cultivated land round it. The city is built 
in separate quarters, according to the class of in- 
habitants. The poorer people live out of doors dur- 
ing the day, and at night, or when it rains, crawl 
under flat roofs, reminding one of dolmens, which 
lead into oblong holes, or chambers, cut out of the 
rocks. These are like underground burrows going 
a long way and communicating with each other, a 
regular labyrinth; the entrance-door is made of a 
huge slab of stone, resting on upright smaller 
stones as pillars. These rooms are massed together 
thousands of them lining the two sides of one 
long circular street, and forming the outside ring 
of the city. 

The higher classes live in the domed houses with- 
in this ring, built on a higher level, with a wide 
terrace in front, forming a ring right round like 
the road below; the domes are supported on short 
strong pillars, carved all over, the carving show- 
ing a fairly well-advanced civilisation. An im- 
mense number of these domes are joined together 
at the lower edge, and make a kind of community 



40 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

city, a belt, with again a circular terrace above its 
inner edge. The centre of the city is its highest 
part, and there the houses themselves are taller, 
with three domes, rising one above another; the 
central one has five domes, one on the top of the 
other, each successive dome being smaller than the 
one below it. The upper ones are reached by steps 
inside one of the pillars on the ground floor, and 
winding round the central pillar above. It seems 
as though these had been hewn out of a pinnacle 
of living rock. In the higher domes no provision 
seems to be made for light and air. The highest 
dome has a kind of hammock hanging from the 
centre, and this is the prayer room ; it appears that 
any one who is praying must not touch the ground 
during his prayer. 

This is evidently the highest humanity of the 
Moon, who will later become the Lords of the Moon, 
reaching the Arhat level, the goal set for the lunar 
evolution. They are already civilised, and in one 
room a boy is writing, in a script which is wholly 
unintelligible to us. 

Those of the lunar humanity who in this Bound 
were entering on the Path were in touch with a 
loftier band of Beings, the Hierarchy of the time, 
who had come over from the second Chain to help 
evolution on the third. These lived on a lofty and 
practically inaccessible mountain, but Their pres- 
ence was realised by those on the Path, and was 
generally accepted as a fact by the intelligent hu- 
manity of the time. Their disciples reached Them 
when out of the body, and occasionally one of Them 
descended into the plains, and lived for a while 



EARLY TIMES ON THE MOON CHAIN 41 

among men. The dwellers in the central house of 
the city just described were in touch with These, 
and were influenced by Them in matters of serious 
concern. 



CHAPTER IV 
THE SIXTH ROUND ON THE MOON CHAIN 

WE comfc again to Globe D, but now in the sixth 
Round, and our individualised animals are born 
into it as men of a simple and primitive, but not 
savage and brutal, type. They are not handsome 
according to our present ideas of beauty hair 
ragged, lips thick, noses squat, and wide at the base. 
They are living on an island, and food has run short, 
so that, in his first fully human life, Herakles ap- 
pears on the scene engaged in a vigorous struggle 
with another savage for the corpse of an eminently 
undesirable-looking animal. Fighting among the 
islanders themselves does not seem usual, and only 
occurs when food runs short; but there is much of 
it in repulsing, from time to time, the invasions 
from the mainland, where the savages are partic- 
ularly brutal cannibals, fiendishly cruel, and much 
dreaded by their gentler neighbours. These un- 
pleasant neighbours cross the straits on primitive 
looking rafts, and pour over the island, destroying 
as they go. They are regarded as demons by the 
islanders, who nevertheless fight fiercely in self- 
defence. The islanders kill all whom they take 
prisoners, but do not, like the mainland savages, 
either torture them living, or eat them dead. 



42 



THE SIXTH ROUND ON THE MOON CHAIN 4:* 

These savages of the mainland are from those 
who became individualised by fear in the fifth 
Round, and among them may be recognised Scorpio, 
whose hatred of Herakles, so prominent in future 
lives, may here have had its root, as even in this 
very primitive humanity they are in opposed tribes 
and fight furiously against each other. Scorpio, in 
Herakles' second life in this community, leads an 
attack on a tribe inhabiting the island, presently to 
be mentioned, and Herakles was in a rescue party, 
which assailed the savages on their return home, 
and succeeded in crushing them, and in saving a 
wounded captive of a much more evolved type, who 
was being kept for torture. 

Among the islanders at this same time we find 
Sirius, and also Alcyone and Mizar; there do not 
seem to be any special relationships life is com- 
munal, and people live promiscuously 'beyond 
those which are formed by personal attractions in 
any one life. The intervals between death and re- 
birth are very short, a few years at most, and our 
savages are re-born in the same community. The 
second life shows advance, for help comes from out- 
side which quickens their evolution. 

A stranger lands upon the island, a man of much 
higher type and lighter complexion a clear bright 
blue than the muddy-brown islanders, who cluster 
round him with much curiosity and admiration. He 
comes to civilise the islanders, who are docile and 
teachable, in order to incorporate them in the 
Empire, from the capital city of which he has come. 
He begins by astonishing them. He puts water in- 
to a bowl made of the shell of a fruit, and, taking a 
small seed-like ball out of his pocket, he drops it 



44 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

into the water ; it catches fire and he lights some dry 
leaves and presently has a blazing fire, the first fire 
seen by the savages, who promptly run away and 
climb up trees, gazing down with terrified eyes 
at this strange leaping shining creature. He coaxes 
them down gradually, and they approach timid- 
ly, and, finding that nothing harmful ensues, and 
that the fire is pleasant at night, they incontinently 
decide that he is a God, and proceed to worship 
him, and also the fire. His influence being thus 
established, he further teaches them to cultivate the 
ground, and they grow a vegetable, like a species 
of cactus^ but red-leaved, which produces under- 
ground tubers, somewhat resembling yams; he cuts 
open the thick stems and leaves, dries them in the 
sun, and shows them how to make a kind of thick 
soup with them. The inside pith of the stems is a 
little like arrowroot, and the juice, squeezed out, 
yields a coarse sweet sugar. Herakles and Sirius 
are close comrades, and in their clumsy ignorant 
way discuss this stranger's proceedings, both feel- 
ing much attracted to him. 

Meanwhile, a party of savages from the main- 
land had attacked a tribe living at some distance 
from the settlement of our tribe, had killed most 
'of the men, carrying off a few as prisoners, with all 
the women of marriageable age and the children, 
and killing the elder women ; the children were car- 
ried off as animals might have been merely as 
specially delicious food. A wounded fugitive ar- 
rived at the village with the news, and implored the 
fighting men to rescue the unhappy captives; Her- 
akles and a troop went off, not averse to a fray, 
and falling on the savages when, they were heavy 
with gormandising, succeeded in killing the whole 



THE SIXTH ROUND ON THE MOON CHAIN 45 

band, with the exception of Scorpio, who was absent. 
In a hut they found a wounded man, evidently, from 
his colour, of the same race as the stranger who 
had come to the island, who was being kept with a 
view to torture, and subsequent feasting on what 
remained of him. He was lifted on a litter of 
crossed spears if long sharpened sticks may be so 
designated and carried back to the island, with 
two or three rescued captives, and the younger wo- 
men who had been kept alive. Sorely wounded as 
he was, he gave a cry of joy on recognising the 
stranger, a well-loved friend from the same city as 
himself, and he was taken into the stranger's hut. 
There he remained until well, and recounted how 
he had been sent to exterminate the savage tribes 
on the mainland coasts ; his army had been surround- 
ed and annihilated instead, himself and some of his 
officers and men having been captured alive. They 
had been put to death with horrible tortures, but 
he was left for awhile to gain strength, being too 
weak to promise amusement by long resistance to 
torture, and had thus been saved. Herakles nursed 
him in his rude way with dog-like devotion, and sat 
for hours listening as the friends Mars and Mer- 
cury talked together in. a tongue to him wholly 
unknown. Mercury was something of a doctor, and 
his friend grew rapidly better under his care, his 
wounds healing and his strength returning. 

The people were becoming a little more civilised 
under the influence of Mercury, and when Mars, 
recovered, decided to return to the city, Mercury 
resolved to remain awhile with the devoted tribe 
he was educating. An expedition was sent off to 
convoy Mars through the dangerous belt inhabited 



46 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

by the man-eating savages, and a small escort 
accompanied him as far as the city, Herakles 
insisting on becoming his servant, and refusing to 
leave him. There was much rejoicing in the city 
on his return, as the people had thought him dead; 
the news of the destruction of his army and of his 
own narrow escape roused great excitement, and 
preparations for a new expedition were at once set 
on foot. 

The city was distinctly civilised, with large and 
handsome Buildings in the better quarters, and an 
immense number of shops. There were many domes- 
ticated animals, some of them used for draught 
purposes and for riding. Commerce was carried 
on with other cities, and there was a system of 
canals connecting the city with many at great dis- 
tances. The city itself was divided into quarters, 
the different classes inhabiting different parts of it; 
in the centre of it the people were of a distinctly 
high typo and blue complexion, and the ruler and 
his highest nobles were in touch with a group of 
people living secluded in a somewhat inaccessible 
region. These people, some of whom will be known 
later as the Lords of the Moon, were themselves 
pupils of still more exalted Beings, who had come 
thither from some other sphere. Some of the hu- 
manity of the Moon succeeded in going beyond the 
Arhat Initiation, and their superiors were evidently 
from a humanity which had reached a far higher 
stage. 

It was from These that an order reached the Ruler 
of the city which was the capital of a large Em- 
pire for the extermination of the savages of the 
mainland coasts ; the expedition was led by Viraj 



TEE SIXTH ROUND ON THE MOON CHAIN 47 

who looked much like a North American Indian 
with Mars under him, and was an overwhelming 
force. Against such a body the poorly armed and 
undisciplined savages had no chance, and they were 
completely annihilated; Scorpio, once more, was the 
chief of a band and he and the men with him fought 
desperately to the last. Herakles followed Mars as 
his servant and fought under him, and when the 
battles were over, and it was decided to transplant 
the docile savages from the island to the mainland, 
and to incorporate them as a colony of the Empire, 
Sirius and Herakles met again, to their mutual de- 
light, as great according to their small capacity as 
the deeper joy of Mars and Mercury on their higher 
level. Mercury took his people over to the main- 
land and established them there as cultivators of 
the soil, and then returned to the city with Mars, 
Herakles persuading Sirius who was nothing loth 
to accompany them. Thus the two became dwell- 
ers in the city, and there lived to a great age, at- 
taching themselves very decidedly to their respective 
masters, whom they regarded as Deities, as belong- 
ing to a divine race and omnipotent. 

The extermination of the savages though done 
in obedience to an order that none dared to disobey 
was regarded by the soldiers, and even by most of 
the officers, as only part of a political plan of con- 
quest, intended to enlarge the borders of the Em- 
pire; these tribes stood in the way, and therefore 
had to be cleared out of it. From the higher stand- 
point, a stage had been reached beyond which these 
savages were incapable of advancing on the Moon 
Chain, bodies suitable to their low stage of evolu- 
tion being no longer available. Hence, as they died, 



48 MAN : WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

or wero killed off, they were not re-born, but passed 
into a condition of sleep ; many bodies of similarly 
low types were annihilated by seismic catastrophes 
which laid wjiple districts waste, and the popula- 
tion of the globe was very much diminished. It was 
the 'Day of Judgment ' of the Moon Chain, the 
separation between those who were capable and 
those who were incapable of further progress on 
that Chain, and from that time forward all was 
directed towards the pressing forward as rapidly 
as possible of those who remained ; it was a prepara- 
tion of the* remaining population for evolution on 
another Chain. 

It may be noted that, at this time, the year was, 
roughly, of about the same length as at present; 
the relation of the globe to the sun was similar, but 
was different as regards the constellations. 

The whole tribe partially civilised by Mercury 
escaped the dropping out, while in the city, Herak- 
les and Sirius, together with the households and 
dependents of Mars and Mercury 1 also just slipped 
over the dividing line, by virtue of their attachment 
to their respective leaders; they married if the 
term may be applied to the loose connections of that 
time into the low-class city population, and incar- 
nation succeeded incarnation in the lower classes 
of the more civilised people of the time, with very 
little progress, intelligence being very poor and 
development very slow. Sirius, in one birth, was 
observed as a small tradesman, the shop being a 

*In the household of Mars were : Herakles, Siwa, Corona, 
Vajra, Capella, Pindar, Beatrix, Lutetia, Theodoros, Ulysses, 
Aurora. In the household of Mercury : Sirius, Alcyone, Mi- 
zar, Orion, Achilles, Hector, Albireo, Olympia, Aldebaran, 
Leo, Castor, Rhea. 



THE SIXTH ROUND ON THE MOON CHAIN 49 

hole ten feet square, in which he sold things of 
various kinds. Herakles, twelve lives further on, 
was seen as a woman labouring in the fields, ad- 
vanced enough to cook her rats and other edibles 
instead of eating them raw, and With a whole pack 
of brothers as husbands Capella, Pindar, Beatrix, 
Lutetia. Women were scarce at the time, and a 
plurality of husbands was very common. 

Very many , lives later, improvement was visible ; 
the members of the above-named groups were no 
longer so primitive, and others had come up below 
them, but they were only very small employers of 
labour, shop-people and farmers, and they did not 
go much beyond that stage on the Moon. In one 
life to which our attention was attracted by the 
curious agricultural proceedings, Sirius was the wife 
of a small farmer, who employed other men. The 
harvest was rather a nightmare. Much of the vege- 
tation belonged to what we should now call the fun- 
gus, family, but gigantic and monstrous. There 
were trees which grew to a great height in a single 
year, and which were semi-animal. The cut-off 
branches writhed like snakes and coiled round the 
axe-wielders, contracting as they died; red sap, 
like blood, gushed out under the strokes of the axe, 
and the texture of the tree was fleshy; it was car- 
nivorous, and during its growth, seized any animal 
that touched it, coiling its branches round it like an 
octopus, and sucking it dry. The harvesting of this 
crop was considered to be very dangerous, and only 
very strong and skilful men took part in it. When 
the tree was cut down and the branches lopped off, 
they were left to die ; then, when all movement had 
ceased, the rind was stripped off and was made in- 



50 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

to a kind of leather, and the flesh cooked and eaten. 

Many of the growths we must call plants were 
semi-animal and semi-vegetable; one had a large 
ambrella-like top, with a slit in the middle which 
allowed the two halves, armed with teeth, to open 
out; it bent over, with these jaws gaping open, 
hanging above the ground, and any animal brush- 
ing against it was seized, and the two halves 
closed over it; then the stem straightened itself, 
and the closed halves again formed the umbrella 
surface, while the animal within them was slowly 
sucked dry. These were cut down when the jaws were 
above and closed, and the skill required consisted 
in leaping out of reach, as the top swooped down- 
wards to seize the aggressor. 

Insect life was voluminous and gigantic, and 
served largely as food to the carnivorous trees. 
Some insects were fully two feet long, and of most 
formidable aspect, and were greatly dreaded by the 
human inhabitants. The houses were built as quad- 
rangles, enclosing very large courtyards; these 
were covered in with strong network, and in the sea- 
sons when the large insects were about, the chil- 
dren were not allowed to go outside these enclos- 
ures. 

Those who individualised in the fifth Bound by 
vanity were born for the most part into city popula- 
tions, and life after life they tended to drift together 
by similarity of tastes and contempt for others, 
even though their dominating idiosyncrasy of vani- 
ty led to much quarrelling and often-repeated rup- 
tures among themselves. Separateness became 
much intensified, the mental body strengthening in 
an undesirable way, and becoming more and more 



THE SIXTH ROUND ON THE MOON CHAIN 51 

of a shell, shutting out others. The emotional body, 
as they repressed animal passions, grew less power- 
ful, for the animal passions were starved out by a 
hard and cold asceticism, instead of being trans- 
muted into human emotions; sex-passion, for in- 
stance, was destroyed instead of being changed in- 
to love. The result was that they had less feeling, 
birth after birth, and physically tended towards sex- 
lessness, and while they developed individualism to 
a high point, this very development led to constant 
quarrels and rioting. They formed communities, 
but these broke up again, because no one would 
obey; each wanted to rule. Any attempt to help 
or guide them, on the part of more highly develop- 
ed people, led to an outburst of jealousy and resent- 
ment, it being taken as a plan to manage or belittle 
them. Pride grew stronger and stronger, and they 
became cold and calculating, without pity and with- 
out remorse. When the tide of life flowed onwards 
into the fifth globe of emotional matter they re- 
mained in activity for but a short time, the emo- 
tional body being dwarfed until it became atrophied, 
and on the sixth globe the mental body became hard- 
ened and lost plasticity, leading to a curious trun- 
cated effect, by no means attractive reminding one, 
indeed, oddly, of a man who had lost his legs from 
the knee downwards, and had his trousers sewn up 
over the stumps. 

The type which in the previous Round individual- 
ised by admiration, and was docile and teachable, 
also tended to come mostly into city populations, 
and formed the better class of labourers at first, 
rising through the lower middle class to the upper, 
developing intelligence to a very considerable 



!>2 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

extent. They were free from the excessive pride 
of the preceding type the pride which deeply tinged 
their auras with orange and showed a clear, bright, 
and rather golden yellow. They were not devoid 
of emotion, but their emotions, while leading 
them to co-operation and to obedience to those 
wiser than themselves, were selfish rather than lov- 
ing. They saw clearly that co-operation brought 
about better results than strife, and they co-operat- 
ed for their own advantage rather than with any 
desire to spread happiness among others. They 
were much more intelligent than the people whom 
we have been specially following, and their orderli- 
ness and discipline quickened their evolution. But 
they gave the impression of having developed in 
their mental bodies (by a clear vision of what was 
most to their own advantage) the qualities which 
should have had their roots in their emotional bod- 
ies, founded in and nourished by love and devotion. 
Hence the emotional bodies were insufficiently de- 
veloped, though not atrophied as in the previously 
mentioned type. But they also profited little by 
their sojourn on globe E, while considerably improv- 
ing their mental bodies on globe F. 

Globes E, F, and G, were most useful to the 
groups of egos who had individualised in one of 
the three 'Eight Ways,' and were hence develop- 
ing in an all-round, rather than in a lop-sided, 
fashion, as was the case with those who individual- 
ised in the 'Wrong Ways,' so far as intelligence was 
concerned; but, after all, these egos would be com- 
pelled later to develop the emotions they had in the 
early days stunted or neglected. In the long run, all 
powers have to be completely developed ; and in gaz- 



THE SIXTH ROUND ON THE MOON CHAIN 53 

ing at the huge sweep of evolution from nescience to 
omniscience, the progress or the methods at any par- 
ticular stage lose the immense importance which they 
appear to have as they loom through the mists of 
our ignorancg and propinquity. 

As these three globes on the ascending arc of the 
sixth Round came successively into activity, very 
great emotional and mental progress was made by 
the more advanced egos. As only those were em- 
bodied on them who had passed over the critical 
period, the 'Day of Judgment' on the Moon Chain, 
there were no hopeless laggards to be a clog on 
evolution, and growth was steady and more rapid 
than before. When the Round was over, prepara- 
tions began to be made for the exceptional condi- 
tions of the final Round, the seventh, during which 
all the inhabitants, and much of the substance, of 
the Moon Chain were to be transferred to its suc- 
cessor, that in which our Earth is the fourth, or 
central, globe. 



CHAPTER V 

THE SEVENTH ROUND ON THE MOON 
CHAIN 

THE Seventh Round of a Chain differs from the 
preceding Rounds in that its globes, one by one, 
pass into quiescence on the way to disintegration, 
as their inhabitants leave them for the last time. 
When the period arrives for this final departure 
from each globe, such of its inhabitants as are ca- 
pable of further evolution on the Chain pass on, as 
in earlier Rounds, to the next globe; while the 
others, for whom the conditions of the later globes 
are unsuitable, leave the Chain altogether when they 
leave the globe, and remain in a state hereafter to 
be described, awaiting re-embodiment on the next 
Chain. Thus the stream of departures from each 
globe on this Round leaving out any who may 
have attained the Arhat level divides into two, 
some going on as usual to the globe next in succes- 
sion, while others take ship to sail over an ocean, 
the further shore of which is the next Chain. 

Normally, a man is free to leave a Chain unless 
dropped out as temporarily hopeless-^only when he 
has reached the level appointed for the humanity 
evolved on the Chain. That level in the Moon 
Chain, we have already seen, was equivalent to that 

54 



THE SEVENTH ROUND ON THE MOON CHAIN 55 

which we now call the fourth, or Arhat, Initiation. 
But we found, much to our surprise, that, on the 
seventh Eound, groups of emigrants departed from 
globes A, B and C, while the huge mass of the pop- 
ulation of globe D left the Moon Chain finally ay 
the life-wave quitted that globe to roll onwards to 
globe E. Only a comparatively small number re- 
mained behind to carry on their evolution on the 
three remaining globes, and of these some departed 
finally from the Chain as each globe dropped into 
inactivity. 

It appears that, in a seventh Round, the mighty 
Being to whom has been given the title of the 'Seed- 
Manu of a Chain* takes into His charge the humani- 
ty and lower forms of living beings which have been 
evolving thereon. A Chain Seed-Mann gathers up 
into Himself, takes within His mighty far-reaching 
aura, all these results of the evolutions on the Chain, 
transporting them into the Inter-Chain sphere, the 
Nirvana for the inhabitants of the dying Chain, 
nourishing them within Himself, and finally hand- 
ing them over at the appointed time to the Root- 
Manu of the next Chain, who, following out the plan 
of the Seed-Manu, determines the times and places 
of their introduction into His kingdom. 

The Seed-Manu of the Moon Chain appeared to 
have a vast plan, according to which he grouped the 
Moon-creatures, dividing them, after their last 
deaths, into classes, and sub-classes, and sub-sub- 
classes, in a quite definite way, apparently by some 
kind of magnetisation ; this set up particular rates 
of vibration, and the people who could work best at 
one such rate were grouped together, and those who 
worked best at another rate were similarly grouped, 



56 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

and so on, when He was dealing with huge multi- 
tudes, as on globe D. These groups appeared to 
form themselves automatically in the heaven-world 
of globe D, as figures on a vibrating disc form them- 
selves under the impact of a musical note; but on 
the three earlier globes more easily distinguished 
lines of cleavage appeared, and people were sent 
off by a great Official, evidently working on a definite 
plan. The Seed-Manu was aided in His gigantic 
task by many great Beings, who carried out His 
directions, and the whole vast plan was worked out 
with an order and an inevitableness which were un- 
speakably impressive. He appeared, among other 
things, to be choosing out the Officials for the next 
Chain, those who, in the long course of evolution, 
would pass ahead of their fellows, and become 
Masters, Manus, Bodhisattvas, in the various 
Bounds and Races. He evidently selected many 
more than would be needed, as a gardener chooses 
out many plants for special culture, out of which a 
later selection may be made. Most, if not all, of 
this choosing was done on globe D, and we shall 
return to it when we reach that world. Meanwhile 
we will consider globes A, B, and C. 

On globe A of the Moon Chain, we see that a part 
of the humanity is not taken on to globe B, but is 
compelled to leave the Chain because it can make 
no further progress on it. The great Official who 
has charge of the globe has not been able to evolve 
some of the people in the way He desired has, in 
fact, found some of the human material too rigid 
for further evolution, and so He ships it off when 
the life of the globe is over. This boat-load, as we 
call it, for the number is not large, consists of our 



THE SEVENTH ROUND ON THE MOON CHAIN 57 

friends with the orange-hued auras, who have 
brought their mental bodies to a point beyond which 
they cannot develop on the Moon Chain, except mis- 
chievously; they have so shut themselves into their 
mental shell, and have so starved the germs of their 
emotional bodies, that they cannot safely descend 
any further; moreover they are far too proud 
to wish to do so. The causal bodies are a rigid 
shell, not a living expanding form, and to let them 
pass on into globe B would only mean a fatal 
hardening of the lower mental. They are very 
clever, but quite selfish, and have cut themselves 
off from further progress for the time, save a 
progress which would be harmful. The Official is 
clearly dissatisfied with these orange-hued people, 
and does His best for them by shipping them off; 
glancing forward, we see that we shall meet some 
of these again in Atlantis, as Lords of the Dark 
Face, priests of the Dark Worship, leaders against 
the White Emperor, and so on. Meanwhile, they 
will rest in the Inter-Chain sphere, self-centred as 
ever. 

The group of people before-mentioned, whose 
auras showed the golden-yellow of disciplined in- 
tellect, together with the rest of the inhabitants of 
the Chain, passed on to globe B, including some 
who had reached the Arhat level on globe A, and 
who on globe B became Adepts. From globe B the 
golden -yellow group was shipped off, for they also 
had not sufficiently nourished the emotional side 
to make the formation of a fairly developed emo- 
tional body, possible for them on globe C. Their 
willingness to obey shaped for them a fairer future 
than that of the orange people, and we meet them 



58 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

again in Atlantis as priests of the White temples, 
gradually forming emotional bodies of a good type. 
Both these first boat-loads enter on the terrene evo- 
lution at its fourth Round, being too advanced to 
take part in its earlier stages. It seeifts that it is 
necessary on each globe to develop the qualities 
which will need for their full expression a body of 
the material of the next; so our yellow people could 
go no further, but had to be shipped off to the Inter- 
Chain sphere. 

From globe C went off a small number who had 
reached the Arhat level, who had developed to a 
lofty point both intellect and emotion, and who 
needed no further evolution on the Moon Chain ; they 
therefore left it by any one of the usual seven Paths. 
One group of these is specially interesting to us, 
because they formed part of one division of the 
'Lords of the Moon' the group called Barhishad 
Pitrs in The Secret Doctrine who superintended 
the evolution of forms on our Earth Chain. On 
leaving globe C, they went towards the region where 
the Earth Cljain was building, to be joined later by 
a number of others who also gave themselves to 
this work. Globe A of the terrene Chain began to 
form as the lifewave left globe A of the lunar Chain. 
The Spirit of a globe, when its life is over, takes a 
new incarnation, and, as it were, transfers the life 
with himself to the corresponding globe of the next 
Chain. The inhabitants, after leaving the Chain, 
have long to wait ere their new home is ready for 
them, but the preparation of that home begins when 
the Spirit of the first globe leaves it and it becomes 
a dead body, while he enters on a new cycle of life 
and a new globe begins to form round him. Mole- 
cules are built up under the direction of Devas, 



THE SEVENTH ROUND ON THE MOON CHAIN 59 

humanity not being at all involved. The Spirit of 
a globe is probably on the line of this class of Devas, 
and members of it perform the work of building 
globes all through the system. A great wave of life 
from the LOGOS builds up atoms in a system by the 
intermediary of such a Deva; then molecules are 
built, then cells, and so on. Living creatures are 
like parasites on the surface of the Spirit of the 
earth, and he does not concern himself with them, 
and is probably not normally conscious of their 
existence, though he may feel them slightly when 
they make very deep mines. The Arhats who, leav- 
ing 'globe C of the Moon Chain, selected the path 
which leads to the Earth Chain, passed, as said, to 
the region where globe A of the Earth Chain was 
forming; it commenced with the first Elemental 
Kingdom, which flowed upwards from the middle 
of the globe the workshop of the Third LOGOS as 
water wells up in an artesian boring and flows over 
the edge on all sides. It came from the heart of 
the Lotus, as sap comes up into a leaf. These Lords 
of the Moon took no active part at this stage, but 
seemed to be looking on at the building of a worlc- 
to-be. ^Eons later they were joined by some of the 
Lords of the Moon from globe G of the lunar Chain, 
and these made the original forms on globe A 
giving their Chhayas, or Shadows, to make these, 
as The Secret Doctrine phrases it and then the 
Lives came and occupied the forms in succession. 
Globes B and C were similarly built up round their 
respective Spirits, as the latter left their lunar pre- 
decessors. Our physical Earth was formed when 
the inhabitants left globe D of the Moon Chain ; the 
Spirit of the globe left the Moon, and the Moon 



60 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

then began to disintegrate, a very large part of its 
substance passing over to build up the Earth. 
When the inhabitants began to leave the Moon final- 
ly, globes A, B and C of the terrene Chain were al- 
ready formed, but globe D, our Earth, could not 
go far in its formation till its congener, globe D of 
the lunar Chain, the Moon, had died. 

The groups which were, as said, small in num- 
ber which left the Chain from globes A and B were, 
as we have seen, people who had shot on ahead in- 
tellectually, but who had been individualised in the 
fifth Round. The Arhats who left globe C had been 
individualised in the fourth Round among a city 
population, and thus were brought into a civilisa- 
tion where the pressure quickened their evolution; 
surrounded by more highly advanced people, they 
were stimulated into more rapid growth. To be 
ready to take advantage of these conditions it is 
evident that their development as animals on the 
previous Chain must have reached a higher point 
than that of those who individualised in the same 
Chain in primitive country districts. It seems as 
though the humanity of a Chain can only advance 
towards and enter the Path, when the individualis- 
ing of animals on that Chain has practically ceased, 
and when only exceptional cases of individualisation 
will occur in the future. When the door of the 
human kingdom is shut against animals, then the 
door to the Path is opened to humanity. 

As said, the groups which left the Chain from 
globes A, B and C, were small in number, the mass 
of the population on each globe passing on to the 
next in the usual way. But on globe D, things be- 
came very different ; there the immense majority of 



THE SEVENTH ROUND ON THE MUON CHAIN 61 

the population, when the period for the death of the 
globe was approaching, after leaving their physical 
bodies for the last time, were not prepared for trans- 
ference to globe E, but were shipped off to the 
Inter-Chain sphere, the lunar Nirvana, to await their 
transference to the new Chain preparing for them. 
If we compare the other groups launched on the 
ocean of space to boat-loads, we have now a huge 
fleet of ships launched on that same ocean. The 
general fleet leaves the Moon ; only a small popula- 
tion is left, set aside for reasons which will present- 
ly appear, and these leave globes E, F and G in 
small groups, boat-loads only to keep up our meta- 
phor. 

The group of egos that we have been following as 
samples of the lower humanity of the Moon shows 
marks of distinct improvement on globe D; the 
causal body is well marked, the intelligence is more 
developed, and the affection for their superiors has 
deepened and intensified; instead of a passion, it 
lias now become a settled emotion, and is their most 
distinguishing characteristic. To this group may 
be given the name of Servers for although the in- 
stinct is still blind and half-conscious, yet to serve 
and please the higher people to whom they have 
devoted themselves is now the dominating motive 
in their lives; looking forward, we see that this 
remains their characteristic through the long series 
of lives to come on earth, and they do much 
rough pioneer work in the future. They love their 
superiors and are ready to obey them, " without 
cavil or delay". A marked change has come over 
their physical bodies in this Round; they are now 
bright blue, instead of being muddy brown as be- 



62 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

fore. They are brought together physically during 
their last incarnations on the Moon, and much ar- 
ranging is going on for a considerable time before 
this: the strengthening of ties between groups of 
egos is brought about by guiding them to re-birth 
in communities, and a very large number, indeed 
most, of the characters in Rents in the Veil of Time 
appear here ; and it seems likely that the remainder, 
were we able to recognise them, would be among 
friends of later days, for these are all Servers, 
ready to do whatever they are told, to go whither-so- 
ever they are sent. They are marked out by a 
slight downpour of the higher life, which causes a 
little expansion of a thread of intuitional matter, 
connecting the intuitional and mental permanent 
atoms, and makes it a little broader above than be- 
low, like a small funnel ; large numbers of people far 
more intelligent than they are do not show this, and 
it is connected with the germinal desire to serve, 
absent in those otherwise more advanced people. 
The group includes many types, and does not con- 
sist, as might be expected, of people of one Ray, or 
temperament; there are persons who became in- 
dividualised in any one of the three Right Ways, 
through the aspects of Will, Wisdom, and active In- 
tellect, 1 each stimulated into action by devotion to 
a superior. The method of individualisation comes 
in only as a cause of subdivision within the group, 
and affects the length of the interval between death 
and re-birth, but does not affect the characteristic of 
serviceableness. It affects the rate of vibration 
of the causal body, which is formed in the several 
cases by an endeavour to serve: (1) by an act of 

'Atma, Buddhi, Manas. 



TEE SEVENTH ROUND ON THE MOON CHAIN 63 

devotion; (2) by a great outburst of pure devotion; 
and (3) by devotion causing an effort to understand 
and appreciate. The actual formation of the causal 
body is always sudden; it comes into existence as 
by a flash; but the preceding circumstances differ 
and affect the rate of vibration of the body thus 
formed. An act of sacrifice in the physical body calls 
on the Will, and there is a pulsation in spiritual 
matter; devotion, working in the emotional body 1 
calls on Wisdom, and there is a pulsation in intui- 
tional matter; activity in the lower mind calls on 
the Active Intellect, and there is a pulsation in 
higher mental matter. We shall presently find our 
group of Servers subdivided into two by these dif- 
ferences, the first two forming a sub-group, with 
intervals of an average of seven hundred years be- 
tween births, and the third ^orming a second group 
with intervals of an average of one thousand two 
hundred years. This difference will come out on 
the Earth Chain at a more advanced stage of evo- 
lution, and the two sub-groups reach the Earth in 
the fourth Eound with an interval of 400,000 years 
between them, apparently planned to bring them 
to birth together at a certain period, when their 
joint services would all be required ; so minute in its 
details is the Great Plan. This division does not 
affect the relation between Masters and disciples, 
as pupils of each of the two Masters who are to be 
the Manu and Bodhisattva of the sixth Boot Race, 
were found in both sub-groups. Thus the germinal 
desire to serve, seen by the higher Authorities, is 
the mark of this whole group, and the differences in 
individualisation, affecting the interval between 

lf The vehicle of desire, Kama. 



64 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

death and re-birth, subdivide the group into two. 1 
At the head of this group stand many whom we 
know as Masters now, and high above them are 
many who were already Arhats, who transmit to 
those below them the orders received from far 
mightier Beings. The Manu of the Race it is the 
seventh Eace of the globe is in charge, and He is 
obeying the orders, carrying out the plan, of the 
Seed-Manu, who directs all the preparations for the 
transfer of the huge population. Some of the ad- 
vanced people know vaguely that some great 
changes are impending, but these changes, though 
far-reaching, are too slow to draw much atten- 
tion; some co-operate unconsciously, but effective- 
ly, while thinking that they are carrying out 
great schemes of their own. There is one man, 
for instance, who has an ideal community in his 
mind, and who gathers together'a number of people 
in order to form it ; he is trying to please a Master 
who is an Arhat of the Moon, and people are at- 
tracted by him and collect round him, forming a 
definite group with a common aim, thus subserving 
the Great Plan. We, at our low level, look up to the 
Arhats and higher people as Gods, and try, in our 
very humble way, to fall in with any indications of 
their wishes that we can catch. 
This group of Servers, as its numbers die out 

*It will, of course, be understood that the seven hundred 
and one thousand two hundred years' intervals are 'aver- 
ages/ and the 'exact' length of each interval will depend 
on the length and conditions of the preceding life. There is 
this marked difference between the sub-groups, as though 
the members of the one lived with greater intensity than 
the other in the heaven-world, and thus crowded a similar 
amount into a briefer time. 



THE SEVENTH ROUND ON THE MOON CHAIN 65 

for the last time, having reached the required level 
on globe D, is regathered on the mental plane, the 
heavenly world, and its members remain there for 
an enormous time, having always before them the 
images of those they love, notably of the more ad- 
vanced egos to whom they are especially devoted. 
It is this rapt devotion which so much helps their 
development, and brings out their higher qualities, 
so that later on they are more receptive to the in- 
fluences which play upon them in the Inter-Chain 
sphere. They are included in the general mass of 
the egos called by H. P. Blavatsky ' Solar Pitrs/ and 
by A. P. Sinnett 'First-class Pitrs'. Other huge 
multitudes are also reaching the mental world 
none being re-born who have reached an appointed 
level, which appears to be the possession of a fully 
formed causal body and are falling into great 
groups under the play of the powerful magnetic 
force before mentioned, rayed down upon them by 
the Seed-Manu. As strings at different tensions 
answer to different notes, so do the causal bodies of 
these people and none, as just said, are here ex- 
oept those whose causal bodies are fully formed 
answer to the chord He strikes, and they are thus 
separated off. People who come forth through the 
same Planetary Euler are drafted into different 
groups ; friends fall into different groups ; Jione of 
the ordinary ties seem to count. The egos are au- 
tomatically sorted out and wait on in their own 
places, as a crowd, in continental countries, is sort- 
ed off iijto waiting-rooms, to await the arrival of 
their own particular train in this case, to use our 
former image, to await their own ship. 
We noticed especially two of the ship-loads, be- 



66 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

cause we ourselves formed part of them; one in- 
cluded the coming Manu and Bodhisattva, those who 
are now Chohans and Masters, together with many 
of the Servers who are now disciples, or approach- 
ing that level. These all apparently belonged to the 
sub-group with the seven hundred years' average 
between earth-lives. Another included many who 
are now Masters and disciples, with perhaps half 
the persons mentioned in the Rents in the Veil of 
Time, all belonging to the sub-group with the one 
thousand two hundred years' average. These two 
ship-loads contained many, if not all, of those who 
are to form the Heavenly Man, and they were then 
divided into the two sub-groups. Vaivasvata Manu 
and the present Bodhisattva were seen together on 
globe D, but they passed on to the higher globes of 
the Moon Chain. 

This great mass includes: (1) the Servers afore- 
said, a very mixed lot of many grades, united by 
one common characteristic. Then (2) there is a 
large group of highly developed egos who are ap- 
proaching the Path on the line of Service there- 
fore, but too far ahead of the former group to be 
classed with it and who are yet not near enough to 
the Path to reach it within the remaining life of 
the Chain. Then (3) a huge group of very good 
people but people who have no wish to serve, and 
are not therefore yet turned towards the Path, and 
who will form the bulk of the population of Atlantis 
during its good period. (4) A small but striking 
group of egos, united by the common characteristic 
of highly developed intellectual power, future 
geniuses, varied as to character and morals, a group 
manifestly destined to leadership in the future, but 



THE SEVENTH ROUND ON THE MOON CHAIN 67 

not dedicating themselves to Service, nor turning 
their faces to the Path. Then three very large 
groups: (5) good, and often religious, people mer- 
chants, soldiers, etc., fairly clever, self-centred, think- 
ing mainly of their own development and advance- 
ment, knowing nothing of the Path, and therefore 
with no wish to enter it; (6) bourgeois-commonplace- 
weak, a very large group of the type described by the 
naming; (7) undeveloped, well-meaning, uneducated 
folk, the lowest class who have the causal body 
fully formed. 

These are all in the heaven-world of the Moon, 
awaiting their despatch to the Inter-Chain sphere. 
As convulsions begin to rend the Moon, prepara- 
tory to the disruption of its crust, other types pass 
also into this world; a very considerable number 
of the Solar Pitrs, or First-class Pitrs who are 
capable of making further progress on the remain- 
ing globes of the Chain, where we shall meet them 
again come on into the heaven-world to await 
transference in due course to globe E. 

Below these first-class Pitrs comes an immense 
class of egos who have not fully formed the causal 
body, Mr. Sinnett's i Second-class Pitrs'; a network 
has formed itself, connecting the ego and the lower 
mind, and, from the appearance of this the name 
of 'Basket-works' has been given to them. The 
mass of these, when the Moon begins to approach 
dissolution, pass out of the body for the last time 
on the Moon Chain, and are gathered together in 
the emotional world. There they fall asleep, for 
they cannot function therein; when this emotional 
world of the Moon becomes uninhabitable, they lose 
their emotional bodies, and remain inward-turned, 



68 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

like bulbs awaiting shipment to another land, to be in 
due course shipped off to the Inter-Chain sphere, to 
sleep through ages, until the third Round of the 
Earth Chain offers a suitable field for their growth. 
There are some Basket-works, however, who show 
a capacity for further evolution on the Moon Chain, 
and they will pass on to the higher globes when 
these come into activity, and there form the causal 
body, reinforcing the Solar, or First-class Pitrs. 

The last class above the animals are the Animal- 
Men, Madame Blavatsky's 'First-class Lunar Pitrs,' 
Mr. Sinnett's ' Third-class Pitrs'. These are dis- 
tinguishable by delicate lines of matter which link 
the germinal ego to the dawning lower mind. 
They are gathered up, like the Basket-works, in the 
emotional world, when they pass out of the body for 
the last time on the Moon, and remain unconscious 
in the mental world; they are in due time shipped 
off, and sleep away aeons of time, and finally reach 
the Earth Chain and begin the long work of build- 
ing on globe A, working through all the kingdoms 
up to the human, and then remaining human through 
the succeeding globes of the Round, and through 
the following Rounds. Some of these 'Lines,' as 
we may name them for distinction, are also held 
back when the mass is shipped off, and are sent on 
to globe E for further evolution, and become Basket- 
works, joining thus the class which was above them. 

So far we have followed the fate of the varied 
classes of lunar Humanity. Some part of it 
dropped out, the failures, in the sixth Round, and 
were 'hung-up' until the next Chain gave a suit- 
able field for further evolution. Some, the orange- 
hued, left globe A in the seventh Round. Some, the 



THE SEVENTH ROUND ON THE MOON CHAIN 69 

golden-yellow, left globe B. Some Arhats left from 
globes A, B, and C, and some of them went over to 
the forming Earth Chain from globe 0. Then we 
have the classes that left globe D; those with fully 
formed causal bodies, those with basket-work, those 
with lines. Those that remained passed on to globes 
E, F, and G, some leaving each globe, when they 
had made all the progress of which they were ca- 
pable; some Basket-works, higher-class Pitrs and 
Arhats thus went away from each globe. Most of 
the animals went off to the Inter-Chain Nirvana a 
regular Noah's Ark; a few, who were capable of 
becoming Animal-men, were taken on to the later 
globes. 

The determining cause of these different causal 
bodies lies in the stage at which indi visualisation 
occurred. In the lower parts of the animal kingdom 
very many animals are attached to a single group- 
soul, and the number diminishes as they climb to- 
wards humanity, till in the higher class of animals 
there are but ten or twenty attached to a group-soul. 
Contact with man may bring about individualisation 
at a comparatively low stage; if the animal, say a 
dog, has been for a long time in contact with man, 
and is one of a small group of ten or twenty, then, 
on individualising, a complete causal body is formed. 
If there are about one hundred in the group the 
sheep-dog stage a basket-work causal body would 
be formed; if there were several hundreds pariah 
dogs, as in Constantinople or India he would have 
the indication of the causal body made by the con- 
necting lines. 

These stages remind us of somewhat similar dif- 
ferences in the vegetable kingdom; the more highly 



70 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

developed members of the vegetable world pass 
directly into the mammalian animal kingdom. The 
decent gentle animal does not become a cruel and 
brutal savage, but only a pleasantly primitive man. 
The kingdoms overlap, and a really nice animal 
may be a more agreeable companion than some hu- 
man beings. 

An entity may stop for a shorter time in the 
animal stage and a longer time in the human, or 
vice versa. It does not seem really to matter, as it 
always 'gets there' in the end, just as longer or 
shorter times in the heaven-world work out to the 
same stage of progress among men. It is probably 
a mere human folly which makes one feel that it 
is pleasanter to be the best of one's kind at the 
time, and that one would rather have been a banyan- 
tree or an oak-tree than a flight of mosquitoes, a 
splendid mastiff than a clay-eating or man-eating 
savage. 

To return. Globes E, F, and G seem to have been 
used as a kind of forcing-houses for special cultures, 
for enabling some to reach the Path, or attain Ar- 
hatship, who could not accomplish it on globe D, 
although in a fair way towards it, and to permit 
some, who were approaching a higher stage, to enter 
it. They were centres more than globes. Their 
population was small, since the bulk of human and 
animal kind had been shipped off from globe D, and 
was further diminished by the sending off successive- 
ly of a boat-load from each globe as it passed into 
quiescence. The boat-load from globe E consisted 
of some who were already on the Path and who had 
there become Arhats, some Basket-works who had 
completed the causal body, and some Lines who had 



TEE SEVENTH ROUND ON THE MOON CHAIN 71 

become Basket-works. When these left globe E, the 
remaining population, consisting of those below the 
Arhat level who could bear the strain of further 
forcing, were carried over into globe F. Those who 
left passed into the Inter-Chain Nirvana, and were 
there sorted out into the classes they had attained, 
as late letters with an extra stamp are sorted into 
the heaps to which they belong. 

A similar process went on upon globe F, and it 
was deeply interesting to notice that the Lord Gau- 
tama Buddha and the Lord Maitreya were among 
those who passed onwards, both from globe E and 
globe F, and reached the first great Initiation on 
globe G. They had dropped out in the seventh round 
of the second Chain, not being able to bear the 
forcing process on globes E, F, and G of that Chain, 
the conditions being too strenuous, and only suit- 
able for those who could attain the prescribed level 
of success for that Chain, or could pass from the 
class they were in to the class above. They entered 
globe D of the Moon Chain in the fourth Bound as 
primitive men, with the animals of the second Chain 
who were nearly ready for individualisation. 

They took together, on globe F, their vow to be- 
come Buddhas, but the arrangements were not the 
same as on our earth. There was a kind of Heavenly 
Council in a heavenly world the Buddhist Sukha- 
vati and the great Being to whom they made their 
vow and who, as the acting Buddha, accepted it, 
was He who is called Dipankara in the books. They 
reached Arhatship on globe G, ere leaving the 
Chain. 

The Lord Buddha Dipankara came from the fourth 
Chain of the Venus Scheme; the physical globe of 



72 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

that Chain was the Moon of Venus, which was seen 
by Herschel but which has disappeared since his 
time. He was one of the members of the General 
Staff, spoken of on p. 13, who may be sent to any 
Chain needing help. The Lord Dipankara was fol- 
lowed in the great office of the Buddha by the Bud- 
dhas of the Earth Chain; we know of the Lord Kas- 
hyapa, for instance, the Bodhisattva of the third 
Boot Race, taking Buddhahood in the fourth; and 
the Lord Gautama Himself, the Bodhisattva of the 
fourth Root Race, taking Budhahood in the fifth. 
He was succeeded by the Lord Maitreya, the Bod- 
hisattva of the fifth Root Race, who will take Bud- 
dhahood in the sixth. He will be followed by the 
coming Bodhisattva of the sixth Root Race now 
known as the Master K. H. who will take Buddha- 
hood in the seventh. 

It must be remembered that Buddha is an Official 
who has to superintend much more than a humanity; 
He is the Teacher of Devas, Angels, as well as of 
men, so the fact that a given humanity may be at 
a very low stage of evolution does not do away with 
the need for that high office. 

We noted also the Master Jupiter rmong those 
who entered the Path on globe G. 

THE INTER-CHAIN NIRVANA 

The human mind reels before the enormous 
periods of time concerned in evolution, and one takes 
refuge in the old and modern idea that time has 
no fixed existence, but is long or short according to 
the working of the consciousness of the being con- 



TBE SEVENTH ROUND ON THE MOON CHAIN 73 

cerned. 1 In the Inter-Chain Nirvana the really work- 
ing consciousnesses were those of the Seed-Mann of 
the Innar Chain and the Eoot-Manu of the terrene. 
What time may be to Their consciousnesses who 
may pretend to guess! 

The Great Plan is in the mind of the Seed-Manu, 
and the Eoot-Manu receives it from Him and works 
it out in the new Chain over which He presides. The 
results of the evolution in the Chain whose life is 
over are gathered up within the aura of the Seed- 
Manu, and are arranged, tabulated, filed if one 
may use terms drawn from our common life in 
perfect order. On these intelligences of many 
grades, inward-turned, living a strange slow sub- 
jective life, without idea of time, He pours inter- 
mittent streams of His stimulating magnetism. A 
continuous stream would break them into pieces, so it 
plays on them and stops, and they doze on for per- 
haps a million years, slowly assimilating it; and 
then another stream plays on them, and so on and on, 
for millions upon millions of years. As we watched 
that strange scene, many analogies rose up in our 
minds; bulbs laid carefully on shelves, inspected 
from time to time by a gardener; cots in a hospital, 
visited day by day by a physician. The time drew 
nearer and nearer when the great Gardener was to 
give out His bulbs for the planting, and the plant- 
ing ground was the Earth Chain and the bulbs 
were living souls. 



'See the suggestive little book, Two New Worlds, by 
E. E. Fournier d'Albe. 



CHAPTER VI 
EARLY TIMES ON THE EARTH CHAIN 

MEANWHILE the Earth Chain had been slowly 
forming, and the Lords of the Moon had been look- 
ing on at the building as we saw 1 ; the time had come 
for shipping off to the new Chain the first of those 
who were to evolve in it during the coming ages. 
The Seed-Manu determined the contents of each 
shipload and the order of its going, and the Root- 
Manu distributed them as they arrived successively 
on globe A of the terrene Chain. 

The Occult Government of the Chain may here be 
briefly sketched, though only in broad outline, so 
that the student may realise something of the great- 
ness of the evolutionary Plan which he is to survey. 

At the head is the Seed-Manu of the preceding 
Chain, Chakshushas, something of whose vast work 
we have seen in the lunar Chain. He is aided by Offi- 
cials who report to Him how the members of any 
special division have responded to tttfc influences 
He has thrown upon them during their stay in the 
Inter-Chain Nirvana. Just as the least advanced 
in ' age ' are sent out to perform the task of inhabit- 
ing the most primitive forms, and the more advanced 
follow when the forms have evolved to a higher 
state, so, out of any special division brought ever 

'See Ante, p. 59. 

74 



EARLY TIMES ON THE EARTH CHAIN 75 

from the Moon and stored in the Inter-Chain Nir- 
vana, those who have progressed least under His in- 
fluence during the time of retirement are sent out 
first of their class into the new world. 

The Root-Manu of the terrene Chain, Vaivasvata, J 
who directs the whole order of its evolution, is a 
mighty Being from the fourth Chain of the Venus 
Scheme ; two of His Assistants come from the same 
Chain, and a third is a high Adept who attained e'ar- 
ly in the lunar Chain. 2 A Root-Manu of a Chain 
must achieve the level fixed for the Chain or Chains 
on which He is human, and become one of its Lords ; 
then He becomes the Manu of a Race; then a Pra- 
tyeka Buddha; then a Lord of the World; then the 
Root-Manu, then the Seed-Manu of a Round, and 
only then the Root-Manu of a Chain. He directs the 
Manus of Rounds, who distribute the work among 
the Manus of Races. Further, each Chain yields a 
number of successful human beings, 'the Lords of 
the Chain/ some of whom devote Themselves to the 
work of the new Chain, under its Root-Manu. 

We thus find, for our Chain, seveto classes of 
Lords of the Moon, working under our Root-Manu, 
drawn from the seven globes of the Moon Chain; 
they form one of the two great classes of Helpers 
from outside, who are concerned in the guiding of 

lf The Root-Manu Vaivasvata must not be confused with 
the Manu Vaivasvata of the Aryan Root Race. The former 
was a far loftier Being, as will be seen from the statement 
of His long ascent, made in this same paragraph. 

2 It must be remembered that when a man reaches the 
level appointed for the Chain on which he is evolving, he 
may remain upon it and proceed on his further evolution, 
as Adepts, attaining now on our globe, may, without leaving 
it, reach the higher levels of the Hierarchy. 



76 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

the general evolution of the Earth Chain. The 
second important class of Helpers from outside are 
Those known as the Lords of the Flame, who arrive 
from Venus on the fourth globe, in the fourth Round, 
in the middle of the third Boot Eace, to quicken 
mental evolution, to found the Occult Hierarchy of 
the Earth, and to take over the government of the 
globe. It is They whose tremendous influence so 
quickened the germs of mental life that these burst 
into growth, and there followed the great downrush 
through the Monad that we call the third Life- Wave, 
causing the formation of the causal body, the * birth' 
or ' descent of the ego' for all those who had come 
up from the animal kingdom; so instantaneous was 
the response of the myriad inhabitants of Earth that 
They are sometimes said to have 'given', to have 
'projected' the spark of mind; but the spark was 
fanned into flame, not projected; the nature of the 
gift was the quickening of the germ already present 
in nascent humanity, the effect of a sun-ray on a 
seed, not a giving of a seed. 1 By the Lords of the 
Flame was concentrated the power of the LOGOS 
upon the Monads, as the sun-rays might be concen- 
trated by a lens, and under that influence the re- 
sponsive spark appeared. These are the true Mana- 
saputras, the Sons of Mind coming, as They did 
from the fifth, the mental Bound of Venus the 
Sons of the Fire, the Lords of the Flame, 2 

l The Secret Doctrine, iii, 560. 

2 The word Manasaputra is used in The Secret Doctrine 
to indicate not only These, but also all egos who are suf- 
ficiently advanced to quicken into activity the germ of 
mind in others, as we may now do with animals. The 
word thus covers a huge class, containing many varying 
grades in evolution. 



EARLY TIMES ON THE EARTH CHAIN 77 

The seven classes of the Lords of the Moon were 
distributed by the Root-Mann over the Earth Chain 
to take charge of the Rounds and globes, while the 
Manus of Races took special care of the evolution 
of Races, each of one Root Race. 

THE FIRST ROUND 

The Lords of the Moon from globes A, B, and C 
of the lunar Chain were the three classes who watch-, 
ed over, without partaking in, the physical construc*- 
tion of the globes of our Chain, as they were formed 
successively round the Spirit of each globe, as be- 
fore described. 1 They appear to have superintended 
the detailed work of the Lords who attained later. 
The lowest class, from globe G, made the primitive 
archetypal forms on globe A of the Earth Chain in 
the first Round, and guided the Lines who came in 
to fill them, and to evolve therein. The next class, 
from globe F, superintended the evolution of forms 
in the second Round ; that from globe E the similar 
evolution in the third; and that from globe D the 
similar evolution in the fourth. 2 Furtheij, we find 
some of the Lords from globe E working on Mars 
in the fourth Round, while those from globe D be- 
come active later on the Earth. 

When the despatch of the first entities from the 
Inter-Chain Nirvana began, the first ships brought 
the Lines, and the great mass of animals from globe 
D of the Moon Chain ; the first shiploads succeeded 
each other at intervals of about one hundred thou- 

*See Ante, p. 59. 

2 All these are included under the name Barhishad Pitrs 
in The Secret Doctrine. 



78 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

sand years, and then the supply stopped, and an 
immense period followed, during which the new ar- 
rivals, the pioneers on our Earth Chain, were pur- 
suing their long journey of the first and second 
Rounds and part of the third. 

The worlds are curious, like churning whirlpools; 
our Earth, the most solid, is hot, muddy, sticky, and 
much of its territory does not seem to be anchored 
down very firmly. It is seething, and constantly 
changing in consistency; huge cataclysms engulf 
great multitudes from time to time, and in their 
embryonic condition they do not seem very much 
the worse for the engulfing, but increase and multi- 
ply in huge caves and caverns, as though they were 
living on the surface. 

The first Bound of the Earth Chain had its globes 
on the same levels as the seventh Round of the 
Moon Chain; globe A was on the higher mental 
plane, with some of the matter scarcely awakened; 
globe B was on the lower mental; globe C on the 
emotional; globe D on the physical; globe E on the 
emotional again ; globe F on the lower mental ; globe 
G on the higher mental. In the second Round the 
whole Chain descended, and three globes became 
physical, C, D, and E; but the living things on them 
were etheric in substance, and pudding-baggy to 
borrow H. P. Blavatsky's graphic epithet in form. 
Globes C and E, which we now call Mars and Mer- 
cury, had at that time physical matter, but in a glow- 
ing gaseous state. 

The human bodies on the Earth during the first 
Round were amoeboid, cloudy, drifting things, most- 
ly etheric, and thus indifferent to the heat; they 
multiplied by fission. They seemed to succeed each 



EARLY TIMES ON THE EARTH CHAIN 79 

other in Races but without separate incarnations, 
each form lasting for a Race. There were no births 
and no deaths ; they enjoyed an amoeba-immortality, 
and were under the care of Lords of the Moon who 
had achieved Arhatship on globe G. Some etheric 
floating things appeared to be trying, but not very 
successfully, to be dreams of vegetables. 

The minerals were somewhat more solid, for they 
were largely pelted on to the Earth by the Moon in 
a molten condition; the temperature might be any- 
thing above 3,500 C. (6,332 F.), for copper was in 
the condition of vapour, and it volatilises in an 
electrical furnace at this temperature. Silicon was 
visible, but most of the substances were protoele- 
ments, not elements, and the present combinations 
seemed to be very rare; the earth was surrounded 
by huge masses of vapour shutting in the heat, and 
hence cooled very slowly. At the Pole there was 
some boiling mud, which gradually settled down, 
and after some thousands of years a green scum ap- 
peared, which was vegetable; or perhaps it would 
be more accurate to say that it would become vege- 
table later on. 

SECOND ROUND 

In the second Round the temperature of globe D 
had dropped considerably, and the copper had cooled 
down and become liquid, in some places solid. 
There was some land near the Poles, but flames burst 
out if a hole was made, as at some points on the 
sides of the cone of Vesuvius. The pudding-bag 
creatures did not seem to mind the heat, but floated 
about indifferently, reminding one in their shape of 



80 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

wounded soldiers who had lost their legs and had 
had their clothes sewn round the trunk ; a blow made 
an indentation, which slowly filled up again, like 
the flesh of a person suffering from dropsy; the 
fore part of the thing had a kind of sucking mouth, 
through which it drew in food, and it would fasten 
on another and draw it in, as though sucking an 
egg through a hole, whereupon the sucked one grew 
flabby and died; a struggle was noticed in which 
each had fixed its mouth on the other, and sucked 
away diligently. They had a kind of flaphand, like 
the flap of a seal, and they made a cheerful kind of 
chirruping trumpeting noise, expressing pleasure 
pleasure being a sort of general sense of bien-etre, 
and pain a massive discomfort, nothing acute, only 
faint likes and dislikes. The skin was sometimes 
serrated, giving shades of colour. Later on, they 
became a little less shapeless and more human, and 
crawled on the ground like caterpillars. Later still, 
near the North Pole, on the cap of land there, these 
creatures 'were developing hands and feet, though un- 
able to stand up, and more intelligence was notice- 
able. A Lord of the Moon an Arhat who had at- 
tained on globe F of the Moon Chain was observed, 
who had magnetised an island and shepherded on to 
it a flock of these creatures, reminding one of sea- 
cows or porpoises, though with no formed heads; 
they were taught to browse, instead of sucking each 
other, and when they did eat each other they chose 
some parts in preference to others, as though deve- 
loping taste. The depression which served for mouth 
grew deeper into a kind of funnel, and a stomach 
began to develop, which was promptly turned in- 
side out if any alien matter which was disapproved 



EARLY TIMES ON THE EARTH CHAIN 81 

of found its way in. One turned himself entirely 
inside out, and seemed none the worse. The surface 
of the Earth being still very uncertain, they oc- 
casionally got burnt or partially cooked; this they 
evidently disliked, and if it went too far they col- 
lapsed. The heavy atmosphere made floating their 
usual method of locomotion, and this was pleasanter 
to look at than the writhing motion adopted on the 
ground, recalling the " loathly worm". Reproduc- 
tion was by budding; a protuberance appeared, grew, 
and after a while broke off, and led an independent 
existence. 

Their intelligence was infantile, and one was seen 
who had aimed at a neighbour with his mouth, and, 
missing him, had caught hold of his own lower end, 
and then went on sucking contentedly till, presum- 
ably becoming uncomfortable, he spat himself out 
again. One fellow found out that by rolling his lower 
end in mud, he could float upright instead of length- 
wise, and appeared to be very proud of himself. 
Gradually the end which contained the funnel tap- 
ored off somewhat, and a small centre appeared in 
it, which, in far future ages, might become a brain. 
A small protuberance appeared, and the habit was 
formed of drifting forward, with this in front, as 
carrying the mouth, and impacts being constantly 
made on this, development was promoted. 

Vegetable life developed during this period, aided 
by the heavy choking atmosphere ; there were forest- 
like growths, much resembling grass, but forty feet 
high and proportionately thick. They grew in the 
warm mud, and flourished exceedingly. 

Towards the end of this period, some of the Earth 
was quite solid and only reasonably warm. There 



82 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

was much tumultuous cracking, apparently due to 
shrinkage, and every hill was an active volcano. 

Mars became more solid, cooling more rapidly in 
consequence of its smaller size, but life on it was 
much like that on the Earth. 

THIRD ROUND 

In the third Round Mars was quite solid and firm, 
and some animals began to develop, though at first 
they looked rather like clumsy chunks of wood, saw- 
ed off a log. They recalled sketches made by chil- 
dren who had not learned how to draw; but as time 
went on, there were beings who were distinctly hu- 
man, though more like gorillas than men. 

The configuration then was very different from 
that of the Mars now known to us. The water ques- 
tion had not arisen, for about three-fourths of the 
surface was water and only one-fourth dry land. 
Hence there were no canals, as now, and the general 
physical condition much resembled that of the Earth 
of to-day. 

The people who began with the linear indication 
of the causal body had by this time developed basket- 
work of a kind coarser, we noticed, than that which 
had been developed on the Moon. When this stage 
was reached the Basket- works from the Moon came 
streaming in, ship-loads again being sent off by the 
Seed-Manu to the Earth. 

Looking at the Inter-Chain Nirvana, in order to 
trace out the coming of the Basket-works to Mars, 
we came upon an interesting point. The ' shelves' 
on which the 'bulbs' were stored were clearly of the 
higher mental matter; but the bulbs brought over 
in the Seed-Manu 's aura were brought over through 
the spiritual sphere, and the basket-work of Moon 



EARLY TIMES ON THE EARTH CHAIN 83 

mental matter would thus be disintegrated, and 
would need to be reformed before these entities be- 
gan their terrene career. They would have slept 
for ages in the spiritual sphere, and then would have 
been reclothed in Basket-work of the equivalent 
terrene mental matter. There is no continuity of 
mental matter between Chains. The distance, of 
course, may be disregarded, as the terrene Chain oc- 
cupies much the same position as the lunar, but the 
discontinuity of the mental matter renders necessary 
the disintegration and reintegration of the Basket- 
work causal bodies. 

We saw a Manu coming over to Mars with a ship- 
load of Basket-works, reminding us of the stories 
in the Hindu Puranas of the Manu crossing the 
ocean in a ship, bearing with Him the seeds of a 
new world, and those in the Hebrew records of Noah, 
preserving in an ark all that was needed to repop- 
ulate the Earth after a flood. The legends preserved 
in the Scriptures of religions are often stories con- 
taining the records of the past, and the Manu truly 
came to the Martian world to give a new impulse 
to evolution. Arriving on Mars, He founded a col- 
ony of His Basket-works thereon. 

Tracing back this particular set, the first arrival 
of Basket-works in the terrene Chain, we found that 
they had come from globe G of the lunar Chain, 
having thereon become Basket-works. They were 
the least developed of the Basket-work crowd, hav- 
ing been the last to reach that stage; the Manu 
guided them to take birth in the most promising 
third-Race families on Mars, and, as they grew, He 
led them off to His colony, where they would more 
quickly develop into fourth Race people. In the 



84 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

colony the people moved by a central will like bees 
in a hive, the central will being that of the Manu; 
He sent out streams of force and directed all. Two 
other sets of these Basket-work bees came to Mars, 
those who reached this stage on globes E and F of 
the Moon Chain ; they arrived in reverse order from 
that of their leaving the Moon, those from globe F 
forming the fourth-Race on Mars, and those from 
globe E the fifth. They developed some affection and 
some intelligence under the fostering care of the 
Manu; at first living in caves, they soon began to 
build, and to teach the aborigines to build under 
them, even Basket-works becoming leaders at this 
stage of evolution. 

These people were hermaphrodite, but one sex was 
usually developed more than the other, and two in- 
dividuals were necessary for reproduction. Other 
forms of reproduction also existed among the lower 
types, and there were some embryonic human beings 
of the hydra kind who reproduced by budding and 
others by exudation, while some were oviparous. But 
these were not found among the Basket-works. 

In the fifth-Race the social arrangements changed,, 
as more intelligence was developed; the bee system 
disappeared, but they still had little individuality, 
and moved rather in flocks and herds, shepherded by 
their Manu. The baskets became more closely 
woven, and represented what could be done by the 
unf >!ding life in those who were emphatically self- 
made men, unaided by the great stimulus given in the 
fourth Round by the Lords of the Flame. This type 
which moves in flocks is still largely represented 
among us by the people who hold conventional ideas 
because others hold them, and are wholly dominated 



EARLY TIMES OX THE EARTH CHAIN 85 

by Mrs. Grundy. These are often quite good people, 
but are very sheepy and flocky, and are appallingly 
monotonous. There are differences among them, 
but they are like the differences between people who 
buy tea by the quarter-pound or by the ounce, no- 
ticeable chiefly by themselves. 

One fierce type of Basket-work was observed, not 
living in communities, but wandering about in forests 
in pairs ; their heads ran up to a point behind match- 
ing the chin in front, and the head ending in two 
points looked odd and unattractive. They fought by 
butting against each other like goats, the top of the 
head being of very hard bone. There were some yet 
lower types, curious reptilian creatures, living in 
trees. They were larger than the Lines and far less 
intelligent, and ate the latter when they had the 
chance. 

There were also on Mars some carnivorous brutes ; 
a huge crocodile-like animal was seen fiercely attack- 
ing a man, who rushed at it with a club, which did 
not seem a very effective weapon. However, he 
stumbled over a rock and fell headlong into the 
creature's jaws, and so came to an untimely end. 

The third Round on the Earth much resembled 
that on Mars, the people being smaller and denser, 
but, from our present standpoint, still huge and 
gorilla-like. The bulk of the Basket-works from 
globe D of the lunar Chain arrived on our Earth in 
this Round, and led the human evolution ; the Basket- 
works from Mars fell in behind them, and the whole 
resembled fairly intelligent gorillas. The animals 
were very scaly, and even the creatures we must call 
birds were covered with scales rather than feathers ; 
they all seemed to be made of a job lot of fragments 



86 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

stuck together, half bird, half reptile, and wholly 
unattractive. Still, it was a little more like a world 
than the preceding globes, in fact than anything we 
had seen since we left the Moon ; and later on cities 
were built. The work of the Lords of the Moon who 
in this Round were Arhats from globe E re- 
sembled the training of animals more than the 
evolution of a humanity. But it is noticeable that 
they were working on sections, as it were, of the 
different bodies, physical and subtle. The third sub- 
planes of the physical, astral and mental spheres 
were being specially worked through, and the spiril- 
lae of the atoms on these sub-planes were being vivi- 
fied. 1 

The methods of reproduction on our Earth dur- 
ing the third Round were those which are now con- 
fined to the lower kingdoms of nature. In the first 
and second Races, not thoroughly densified, fission 
still occurred v ut in the third and onwards the 
methods were: budding-off like hydras in the less 
organised ; the exuding of cells from different organs 
of the body, which reproduced similar organs, and 
grew into a miniature duplication of the parent; the 
laying of eggs, within which the young human being 
developed. These were hermaphrodite, and gradual- 
ly one sex predominated, but never sufficiently to 
represent a definite male and female. 

The passing of the life-wave from one globe to 
another is gradual and there is considerable overlap- 
ping; it will be remembered that globe A of the 
terrene Chain began to form when globe A of the 
lunar Chain was in process of disintegration, the 
passing of the Spirit of the globe being the signal of 

'See Ante, pp. 27, 28. 



EARLY TIMES ON THE EARTH CHAIN 87 

the transference of activity. 1 Thus life-activity is con- 
tinuous, though egos have long periods of rest. A 
glohe ' passes into obscuration' when the attention 
of the LOGOS is turned away from it, and thus His 
Light is withdrawn. It passes into a kind of coma, 
and there is a residuum of living creatures, left be- 
hind; these creatures do not seem to increase in 
number during this period. But while the Races 
die out, the egos inhabiting them having passed on, 
the globe becomes a field for the Inner Round, a place 
to which egos in a transition state can be transferred 
for special treatment in order to quicken their evolu- 
tion. The globe to which the attention of the LOGOS 
is turned starts into active life, and receives the 
streams of egos ready to gc forward on their jour- 
ney. 

Another point that may be noted is the recurrence 
of types at a higher level of evolution, in which they 
form but transitional stages. As in the development 
of the human embryo of to-day, the fish, reptile, and 
lower mammalian-types appear, repeating in a few 
months the aeonic evolution of the past, so do we see 
in each Round that a period of repetition precedes 
that of new advance. The third Round laboriously 
worked out in detail that which the third Race in 
the fourth Round would reproduce with comparative 
swiftness, while the second Race would similarly 
reflect the second Round, and the first Race the first 
Round. This broad principle once grasped, study 
becomes more easy, as the outline is clear into which 
details are to be fitted. 



'See Anie, pp. 58, 59. 



CHAPTER VII 
EARLY STAGES OF THE FOURTH ROUND 

IN taking a preliminary bird's-eye-view of the 
fourth Round, one important and far-reaching 
change is apparent in the surroundings amid which 
human evolution is to proceed. In the three pre- 
ceding Rounds the elemental essence was practical- 
ly untouched by man, and was affected only by 
the Devas, or Angels, by whose influences it evolved. 
Man was not sufficiently developed to affect it to any 
serious extent. But in this Round man's influence 
plays a very important part, and his self-centred 
thoughts create swirls in the elemental essence sur- 
rounding him. The elementals, also, begin to show 
more hostility to him, as he emerges f ronji the animal 
state into the dominating human, for he is, from their 
standpoint, no longer an animal among animals, but 
an independent and domineering entity, likely to be 
hostile and aggressive. 

Another most important characteristic of the 
fourth Round, the midmost of the seven, is that, in 
it, the door was shut against the animal kingdom, 
and the door was opened to the Path. Both state- 
ments are general ; here and there an animal, by very 
special help, may still be evolved to a point where 
a human incarnation is possible for it, but in almost 
all cases no human body can now be found of suffi- 
ciently low development for its embodiment; so also 

88 



EARLY STAGES OF THE FOURTH ROUND 89 

might a man who had attained Arhatship or more 
on the Moon Chain climb yet higher, but all below 
that rank who had complete causal bodies did not 
enter into evolution on the Earth Chain until the 
later third and early fourth Root Races, 

On Mars in the fourth Round we find a number 
of savages who had not been sufficiently advanced 
to leave that globe for the Earth when the mass of 
the egos went on in the preceding Round. On each 
globe some fail to go on, and remain behind as the 
globe begins its period of obscuration; and they 
return to this same globe when again it recommences 
full activity, and form a very backward class ; these 
were Basket-works of a very poor kind, and were 
savages of the brutal and cruel type, some of those 
who had individualised through fear and anger. 

Mars, in the fourth Round, felt the stress of scar- 
city of water, and it was the Lords of the Moon 
Arhats who had attained on globe E who planned 
out the system of canals and the Basket-works who 
executed them under Their direction. The Martian 
seas are not salt, and the polar snowcaps, aa they 
melt, supply the water necessary for irrigation, and 
thus enable the ground to be cultivated, and crops 
to be raised. 

The fifth Martian Root Race was white, and made 
considerable progress, and the Basket-work devel- 
oped into a complete causal body. They were good, 
well-meaning, and kindly, though not capable of any 
large ideas, of widely spread feelings of affection, or 
of self-sacrifice. At a quite early stage, they be- 
gan to divide food instead of fighting over it, develop- 
ing the social feeling to some extent. 

The first and second Root Races on the Earth 



90 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

were going on before Mars was deserted, some en- 
tities being available for these primitive conditions 
whom Mars in its later stages was too advanced to 
accommodate, and the full attention of the LOGOS 
not being turned on to the Earth in these early 
times. The Lords of the Moon Arhats who had 
achieved on globe D of the lunar Chain brought 
into these early Races a number of backward entities, 
so that these served as special coaches for the lag- 
gards, many of whom repaid the care bestowed upon 
them, and entered the first sub-race qf the third Boot 
Eace, as its lowest types ; they were egg-headed, with 
an eye at the top of their heads, a roll like a sausage 
representing a forehead, and prognathous jaws. The 
egg-headed type persisted for a very long time, but 
became much modified in the later sub-races of this 
third Root Race, and specimens of them are found 
in later Lemurian times. The blue people who form- 
ed the powerful sixth sub-race, and the white who 
composed the seventh sub-race, were finer types, but 
were still Lemurian, and showed a trace of egg- 
headedness, due to the retreating foreheads. 1 The 
population of the Earth during the first and second 
Root Races was very limited, and this special help 
appears to have been given because in the fourth 
globe of the fourth Chain "the door is shut". Fur- 
thermore, everything possible was done to bring for- 
ward all of whom anything could be made, before the 
coming of the Lords of the Flame, in the middle of 

1 While this is going through the press a report has ap- 
peared in the newspapers of the discovery of some skulls 
of this type, hut no particulars are yet available. See The 
Theosophist for August, 1912, in 'On the Watch-Tower,' 
p. 631. 



EARLY STAGES OF THE FOURTH ROUND 91 

the third Root Race, should make the gulf well-nigh 
impassable between the human and animal king- 
doms. 

Mars, at the end of its seventh Root Race, had a 
very considerable population to pour into the 
Earth, and these came streaming in for the third 
Root Race, to head it until the more advanced egos 
from the Moon Chain should come in to take over 
the leadership. These Basket-works, whose causal 
bodies were now completed, had made considerable 
progress on Mars, and they now prepared the way 
for the more advanced people who were soon to 
arrive. It was they who fought with the savage 
reptilian creatures, slimy and backboneless, who 
were the "water-men terrible and bad" of the 
Stanzas of Dzyan, the re-embodied remnants of the 
previous Rounds, who had been i water-men/ i.e., 
amphibious, scaly, half -human animals, on Mars. 

The many schemes of reproduction characteristic 
of the third Round reappear in this third Root Race, 
and run simultaneously in various parts; of the 
Earth. The bulk of the population passed on 
through the successive stages and became mostly 
oviparous, but there were various little side-shows 
in which earlier methods persisted. It seems as 
though the vaiious schemes of reproduction were 
suitable to egos at different stages of evolution, and 
were kept going for laggards after the bulk of the 
people had passed beyond them. The egg-scheme 
was dropped very slowly; the shell became thinner 
and thinner, the human being within developing into 
a hermaphrodite; then he became a hermaphrodite 
with one sex predominant; and then a unisexual 



92 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

being. These changes began some sixteen and a half 
million years ago, and occupied some five and a half 
to six million years, physical bodies changing very 
slowly and reversion frequently occurring. More- 
over the original number was small, and needed time 
for multiplication. When this last type became quite 
stable, then the egg was preserved within the femi- 
nine body, and reproduction assumed the form which 
still persists. 

To sum up : we have the first Root Eace, repeating 
the first Bound, etheric clouds drifting about in a 
hot heavy atmosphere, which enclosed a world rent 
by recurrent cataclysms ; these multiplied by fission. 
The second Boot Bace, repeating the second Bound, 
was of the ' pudding-bag' type, described under the 
second Bound; these multiplied by budding. The 
early third Boot Bace, repeating the third Bound, 
was human-gorilla in form, and reproduction was at 
first by extrusion of cells, the 'sweatborn' of The 
Secret Doctrine. Then comes the oviparous stage, 
and finally the unisexual. 

Some very special treatment was applied to some 
of the eggs ; they were taken away by the Lords of 
the Moon, and were carefully magnetised and kept 
at an equable temperature, until the human form, at 
this stage a hermaphrodite, broke out; it was then 
specially fed and carefully developed, and when 
ready, was taken possession of by one of the Lords 
of the Moon, many of whom became incarnate in 
order to work on the physical plane, and they used 
these carefully prepared bodies for a long period 
of time; some Devas also took some of these pre- 
pared bodies. This seems to have been only a few 
centuries before the separation of the sexes. 



EARLY STAGES OF THE FOURTH ROUND 93 

While the later Egg-borns were in possession, the 
very best of the Basket-works came in, straight from 
the Inter-Chain Nirvana, and these were quickly fol- 
lowed by the lowest of those who had gained com- 
plete causal bodies on the Moon. Between the high- 
est of the first and the lowest of the second there 
was but little difference. The first boat-load of the 
latter consisted of those who had responded but 
little to the influence of the Seed-Manu, from globes 
G, F, and E, of the lunar Chain, the majority being 
from G, the stupidest of those who had gained com- 
plete causal bodies. The second boat-load had a 
large number from globe G, a low section from globe 
F, and a still lower from globe E. The third con- 
tained the best from globe G, with some fairly good 
from globe F, and good from globe E. The fourth 
boat-load had the best from globe F, and all but the 
very best of globe E. The fifth boat-load brought the 
best of globe E with a few from globe D. These all 
seemed to be sorted out by ' age 'rather than by ' type, ' 
and were, in fact, of all types. One individual was 
noticed who was a chief in the savage mainland tribe 
which took Mars prisoner on the Moon, one who had 
individualised through fear. All these incarnated 
among the Egg-borns, some hundreds of thousands 
of them. 

Then came, from ten to eleven million years ago, 
when separation of the sexes was fully established, 
the important stage when some of these incarnated 
Lords of the Moon descended on the seven-pointed 
Lemurian Polar Star, and formed etheric images 
of themselves, which were then materialised into 
greater density, multiplying these for the use of the 
incoming egos; the Lords were of different types, 



94 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

the " seven men each on his lot," and gave bodies 
suited to the seven Bays, or temperamental types 
of humanity, making the forms on the points of the 
Star. 

At this stage there were four human classes, press- 
ing on each other to obtain better human forms. 
These were: (1) the set of the best Basket- works 
above-named, with the five boat-loads from globes G, 
F, and E, possessing complete causal bodies; then 
(2) the Basket-works from Mars; then (3) the Lines, 
who had been here all the time; then (4) the last, 
composed of those who were only now coming up out 
of the animals. Below these were the animals, 
plants, and minerals, with which we need not con- 
cern ourselves. 

The coming of these into the etheric forms provid- 
ed by the Lords of the Moon was something of a 
struggle, for there were often many claimants for 
a single form, and the one who succeeded in gaining 
it could not always hold it for more than a few 
moments ; the scene recalls the Greek idea that the 
Gods made the world amid shouts of laughter, for 
it decidedly had its comic element, as the egos 
struggled for the forms and could not manage them 
when they had obtained them. It is one of the des- 
cents into matter, the final materialisation of the 
body of man, the completion of 'the fall of man'. 
Gradually they became accustomed to the new * coats 
of skin,' and settled down to reproduce the seven 
great temperamental types. In various parts of 
the world other ways of reproduction continued for 
long periods of time; the successive stages overlap- 
ped very much, owing to the great differences in 
evolution, and the classes that came in from other 



EARLY STAGES OF THE FOURTH ROVND 95 

Rounds had not been in the two early Boot Races 
on Earth; the tribes following the early methods 
gradually became sterile, while the true men and 
women multiplied greatly, until humanity, as we 
know it now, was definitely established all over the 
world. 

The forms as thrown off by the Lords of the Moon 
were fairly good-looking, but being etheric they were 
very readily modifiable, and the incoming egos much 
distoited them; the children born of them were dis- 
tinctly ugly; probably those using them were ac- 
customed to think of the egg-shaped head and sau- 
sage-roll forehead, and hence these reappeared. 

After many generations of well-established hu- 
man beings, descended from the etheric materialised 
forms, had been evolved, the Arhats urged on those 
who had left globes A, B, and C of the lunar Chain 
because they could make no further progress on 
it that they should descend and take incarnation in 
the bodies now ready for their indwelling. There 
were three boat-loads of these ; more than two mil- 
lion orange people from globe A, rather less than 
three million golden-yellow from globe B, and rather 
more than three million pink from globe C about 
nine millions in all; they were guided to different 
areas of the world's surface, with the view that they 
should form tribes. The orange, on seeing the 
bodies offered to them, refused to enter, not out of 
any wickedness but from pride, disdaining the unat- 
tractive forms, and perhaps also from their ancient 
hatred of sexual unions; but the yellow and pink 
were docile and obeyed, gradually improving the 
bodies they inhabited. These made the fourth Lem- 
urian sub-race, the first which was in any sense, ex- 



96 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

cept the embryonic, human; and it may be dated 
from the giving of the forms. It is interesting to 
notice that H. P. Blavatsky in The Secret Doctrine 
speaks of this fourth sub-race as 'yellow,' apparent- 
ly noting the incoming of the golden-yellow people 
from globe B of the Moon Chain; she can hardly 
have been referring to the established colour of the 
fourth sub-race, as that was black, and the black con- 
tinued even in the lower classes of the sixth sub- 
race, in which the higher classes were of a quite 
respectable blue. Yet even in those there was an 
underlying tinge of black. 

The area allotted to the orange tribe was thus left 
open, and the bodies they should have used were 
gladly seized upon by the entities just emerging 
from the animal kingdom, the lowest of the classes 
before mentioned, the very poorest human type; 
these, not unnaturally, felt little difference between 
themselves and the ranks from which they had just 
emerged, and hence arose the "sin of the mindless". 

It is interesting to note the karma of this refusal 
of the orange people to take their due place in the 
work of peopling the world. Later, the law of evo- 
lution forced them into incarnation, and they had 
to take lower and coarser bodies, the Lords of the 
Moon having gone on into other work; they thus be- 
came a backward race, cunning but not good, and 
passed through many unpleasant experiences; they 
diminished in number by constantly coming into col- 
lision with the common order, and being hammered, 
largely by suffering, into ordinary folk. A few 
strong, remorseless and unscrupulous became 
Lords of the Dark Face in Atlantis ; some were seen 
among the North American Indians with refined but 



EARLY STAGES OF THE FOURTH ROUND 97 

hard faces ; some few still persist, even down to our 
own day the unscrupulous among the kings of 
finance, statesmen like Bismarck, conquerors like 
Napoleon; but they are gradually disappearing, for 
they have learned many bitter lessons. Those who 
are wanting in heart, who are always fighting, al- 
ways opposing everything everywhere, on general 
principles, must ultimately, in a realm of law, be 
beaten into shape; a very few may end in black 
magic, but the steady pressure is too great for the 
majority. It is a hard road to choose for progress ! 
THE COMING OF THE LORDS OF THE FLAME 

The great Leraurian Polar Star was still perfect, 
and the huge Crescent still stretched along the 
equator, including Madagascar. The sea which oc- 
cupied what is now the Gobi Desert still broke 
against the rocky barriers of the northern Hima- 
layan slopes, and all was being prepared for the most 
dramatic moment in the history of the Earth the 
Coming of the LORDS OF THE FLAME. 

The Lords of the Moon and the Manu of the third 
Root Race had done all that was possible to bring 
men up to the point at which the germ of mind could 
be quickened, and the descent of the ego could be 
made. All the laggards had been pushed on; there 
were no more in the animal ranks capable of rising 
into man. The door against further immigrants into 
the human kingdom from the animal was only shut 
when no more were in sight, nor would be capable 
of reaching it without a repetition of the tremen- 
dous impulse only given once in the evolution of a 
Scheme, at its midmost point, 

A great astrological event, when a very special 
collocation of planets occurred and the magnetic 



98 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

condition of the Earth was the most favourable 
possible, was chosen as the time. It was about six 
and a half million years ago. Nothing more re- 
mained to be done, save what only They could do. 

Then, with the mighty roar of swift descent from 
incalculable heights, surrounded by blazing masses 
of fire which filled the sky with shooting tongues of 
flame, flashed through the aerial spaces the chariot 
of the Sons of the Fire, the Lords of the Flame from 
Venus; it halted, hovering over the < White Island/ 
which lay smiling in the bosom of the Gobi Sea; 
green was it, and radiant with masses of fragrant 
many-coloured blossoms, Earth offering her best 
and fairest to welcome her coming King. There He 
stood, "the Youth of sixteen summers, " Sanat Ku- 
mara, the ' Eternal Virgin- Youth, ' the new Ruler of 
Earth, come to His kingdom, His Pupils, the three 
Kumaras, with Him, His Helpers around Him; 
thirty mighty Beings were there, great beyond 
Earth's reckoning, though in graded order, clothed 
in the glorious bodies They had created by Kriya- 
ehakti, the first Occult Hierarchy, branches of the 
one spreading Banyan-Tree, the nursery of future 
Adepts, the centre of all occult life. Their dwell- 
ing-place was and is the Imperishable Sacred Land, 
on which ever shines down the Blazing Star, the 
symbol of Earth's Monarch, the changeless Pole 
round which the life of our Earth is ever spinning. 1 

lf The use of these occult symbols misled the readers of 
The Secret Doctrine, (perhaps even its writer) into the 
mistake that the 'Pole' and 'Star' mentioned in the Occult 
Commentary were the physical North Pole and North 
Star. I followed this mistaken idea in my Pedigree of 
Man. A. B. 



EARLY STAGES OF THE FOURTH ROUND 99 

A Catechism says: "Out of the seven Kumaras, 
four sacrificed themselves for the sins of the world, 
and the instruction of the ignorant, to remain till 
the end of the present manvantara . . . These are the 
Head, the Heart, the Soul and the Seed of undying 
knowledge. " H. P. Blavatsky adds: "Higher than 
the 'Four' is only ONE on Earth as in Heaven 
that still more mysterious and solitary Being' ' the 
Silent Watcher. 1 

Until the Coming of the Lords the shiploads from 
the Inter-Chain Nirvana had arrived separately, 
but now, with the tremendous stimulus given, fecun- 
dity increased rapidly like everything else, and 
perfect fleets were wanted to bring in egos to in- 
habit the bodies ; these came pouring in, while others 
of lower types took possession of all the animals 
with the germs of mind who were individualised at 
the Coming, the Lords of the Flame doing in a 
moment for millions what we now do by long care 
for units. 

And now the Arhats from globes A, B, and C 
came into incarnation, to help the Manu in founding 
and civilising the fifth, sixth and seventh sub-races 
of the Lemurians. The fourth sub-race continued, 
the very egg- headed one, with a stature of from 
twenty-four to twenty-seven feet in height, loosely 
and clumsily built, and black in colour; one whom 
we measured was twenty-five feet in height. 1 Their 
buildings were proportionate to their size, cyclopean 
in structure, made of enormous stones. 

The Arhats became Kings in the later sub-races, 
the King-Initiates of the myths which are truer than 
history. 

1 The Secret Doctrine, ii t 294, 295. (See bottom next page.) 



100 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

A King-Initiate would gather a number of persons 
round Him, forming a clan, and then would teach 
this clan some of the arts of civilisation, and direct 
and help them in the building of a city. One large 
city was erected under such instruction on what is 
now the island of Madagascar, and many others were 
similarly built over the great Crescent. The style 
of architecture was, as said above, cyclopean, im- 
pressive from its hugeness. 

During the long period thus occupied, the physi- 
cal apearance of the Lemurians was changing. The 
central eye at the top of the head was retreating, as 
it ceased to function, from the surface to the in- 
terior of the head, to form the pineal gland, while 
the two eyes at first one on each side of it were 
becoming active. The Greek legend of Cyclops is 
evidently a tradition from the early Lemurian age. 

There was some domestication of animals; one 
egg-headed Lemurian was seen leading about a scaly 
monster, almost as unattractive as his master. 
Animals of all sorts were eaten raw among some 
tribes human flesh was not despised and creatures 
of the grade of our slugs, snails and worms, much 
larger than their degenerate descendants, were re- 
garded with peculiar favour as toothsome morsels. 



curiosity may arise as to how we measured him : 
first by standing by him, when we came, respectively, a 
little below and level with his knee; then by setting him 
against a first-floor balcony at Headquarters, where he 
could rest his raised hands on the parapet and put his 
chin on them. We later measured the height of the para- 
pet. The poor image was not made welcome when he put 
his head over the balcony: "Take him away," said the 
owner of the balcony; "he is very ugly and enough to 
frighten anybody." Perhaps he was, poor thing. 



EARLY STAGES OF THE FOURTH ROUND 101 

While the sixth sub-race was developing, a large 
number of Initiates and their disciples were sent off 
from the Inter-Chain Nirvana to the Earth, 1 to 
help the Manu of the fourth Root Eace by incarnat- 
ing in the best bodies He had so far evolved. The 
very best bodies being given to those who had ex- 
hausted their karma, their occupants were able 
to improve them, and to get out of them everything 
which they were capable of yielding. These Arhats 
and their pupils worked under the Lords of the 
Moon and the Manus of the third and fourth Root 
Races; the seventh sub-race, the bluish- white, was 
evolved by their help, and furnished men and 
women of a better type for further moulding by the 
Manu of the fourth. 



*It may be noted that while the general rule was that 
the less evolved should be sent first to the Earth, excep- 
tions were made where help was wanted, as in this ease 
with this special boat-load. 



CHAPTER VIII 
THE FOURTH BOOT RACE 

THE Head of the Hierarchy began, almost imme- 
diately after His coming, to make arrangements for 
the founding of the fourth Root Race, employing 
the future Manu to pick out the smallest, densest 
and best of the Lemurian types available ; and while 
the founding and growth of civilisation under the 
King-Initiates were going forward among the Lemu- 
rians, the Manu of the coming Race was diligently 
seeking for the egos suitable for His purpose, and 
selecting for them appropriate incarnations. He 
gathered together, in one case, thousands of people, 
and finally selected one, after tests that lasted over 
many years, evidently experiencing much difficulty in 
finding desirable ancestors for His Race. Tribes 
were set apart, their members inter-marrying for 
long periods, and the Manu chose promising speci- 
mens and transplanted them; He and His disciples 
incarnated in the progeny of these to raise the phy- 
sical level. He carried on various experiments simul- 
taneously on the points of the Star, utilising the 
differences of climate. It looked at first a hopeless 
task, as though negroes and mulattoes should inter- 
marry to make a white race ; but after generations 
of selection within a tribe, He would take away one 
or two, and pair them off with another one or two, 
similarly selected from another tribe. The third- 

102 



THE FOURTH ROOT RACE 103 

Race Manu had evolved a blue type for His sixth 
sub-race, and a bluish-white for His seventh, though 
the masses of the Lemurians remained black; some 
of the fourth sub-race also mixed in with the blue, 
and slowly, very slowly, the general Lemurian type 
improved. It is noticeable also that when, in other 
parts of the world a lighter-coloured or better type 
appeared it was sent off to the Manu, and He tried 
to find for it a suitable husband or wife ; we observed 
one that was thus sent in from the Madagascan city, 
and others similarly came in from elsewhere. 

More rapid progress was made after the arrival of 
the Initiates, mentioned at the close of the last 
chapter, the best of the bodies improved by their 
indwelling being taken by the Manu for the shaping 
of His first sub-race; the fourth Eace had thus, 
ultimately, a very fine founding and nursing, thanks 
to the large number of developed people who took 
the lead and pressed things forward. The Manu 
was able, finally, to take the bodies of the seventh 
sub-race, improved by the Initiates using them, as 
the nucleus of His first sub-race, the Rmoahal, of 
the fourth Eoot Race. All who were taken on into 
the fourth Root Race were the Initiates and their 
disciples in these bodies, and none at this stage were 
taken from those who had previously been evolving 
on the Earth Chain. 

Subba Rao distinguished the Lemurians as blue- 
black, the Atlanteans as red-yellow, and the Aryans 
as brown-white. We find the fourth Race Manu 
eliminating the blue from the colour of His people, 
passing through purple into the red of the Rmoahal 
sub-race, and then, by mixing in the blue-white ot 
the seventh Lemurian sub-race, He obtained the 



J04 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

first sub-race which seemed to be fully human, and 
that we could imagine as living among ourselves. 
After the race-type was fully established, He thus 
had the materials for the rich red-brown of the Tol- 
tec, the third sub-race, the most splendid and imper- 
ial of the Atlantean peoples, which ruled the world 
for tens of thousands of years. After a long period 
of patient working, about a million years having been 
spent in taking stupendous trouble and care, He 
reached a fair resemblance to the type given to Him 
to produce ; then He definitely founded the Race, He 
Himself taking incarnation, and calling His disciples 
to take bodies in His own family, His posterity thus 
forming the Race. In the most literal sense the 
Manu of a Race is its Progenitor, for the whole Race 
has its Manu as its physical ancestor. 

Even the Manu 's. immediate descendants, however, 
were not a very attractive-looking crowd, judging 
by our present standard, although a vast improve- 
ment on the surrounding population. They were 
smaller, but had no nervous organisation worth 
speaking of, and their astral bodies were shapeless. 
It is extraordinary what He made of such a body 
for Himself, moulding and shaping it after His own 
astral and mental bodies, and modifying the pigment 
in the skin, till He worked it into more of the colour 
that He wished for His Race. 

After this many generations passed before the 
young Race took possession of its continent, At- 
lantis, but from this point onwards ship-loads of 
egos begin to come in from the Inter-Chain Nirva- 
na, to inhabit the fourth Race bodies. The Manu 
arranged with the Root-Manu to send Him large 



THE FOURTH ROOT RACE 105 

numbers of egos ready for incarnation those from 
globe D of the Moon Chain who had complete causal 
bodies, and who had individualised in the lunar 
fourth arid fifth Eounds. Some of these came into 
the Tlavatli sub-race, and some later into the Tol- 
tec, when it was evolved ; and then He again incar- 
nated in the latter, and founded the City of the 
Golden Gates, the first of many successive cities of 
that name. The founding was about one million 
years ago, one hundred and fifty thousand years be- 
fore the first great catastrophe which rent the con- 
tinent of Atlantis. 

The Toltec was at this time the ruling Eace, by 
virtue of its great superiority. It was a warrior race 
going all over the world and subduing its inhabitants, 
but its pure types never formed the lower classes 
anywhere. Even in the City of the Golden Gates, 
only the aristocracy and the middle class were Toltec ; 
the lower classes were of mixed blood, and were 
largely composed of men and women taken captive 
in wars with other sub-races, and reduced to serv- 
itude by their conquerors. 

At this time arrived on Earth a ship-load of egos, 
in a group of whom which kept much together we 
are specially interested, as it contained many old 
friends, Sirius, Orion, Leo and others ; some of these 
were ear-marked on their arrival by Vaivasvata 
Manu the Manu of th6 fifth Eace as part of His 
future materials. Hence H. P. Blavatsky speaks of 
the founding of the fifth Eace as occurring one mil- 
lion years ago, though it was only led out from At- 
lantis 79,997 B. C. These, later, formed the group 



106 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

with an average 1,200 to 1,000 years' interval be- 
tween death and re-birth. 1 

The interval between death and re-birth was at 
this time naturally somewhat shorter, for the ma- 
terial gathered in these primitive lives was not 
enough to make a long interval, however thinly 
spread out. The people were not yet capable of 
deep feeling, though making something out of the 
heaven-life. In the heaven-world these egos kept 
together, and the filmy beings connected with them 
in the intuitional sphere showed a strong affinity for 
each other. In the lower spheres there was apparent- 
ly a dull, groping, sense of 'want,' as though they 
were very dimly sensing the absence of the old 
friends of former lives and of the Inter-Chain inter- 
val, who were still sleeping away in the Inter-chain 
Nirvana, not to arrive on Earth for another 400,000 
years. In the intuitional sphere, these 700-year 
people were in touch with the 1,200-year group, but 
it was only when the former arrived on the Earth 
that there was a time of general rejoicing among 
the egos in the higher mental sphere, due chiefly to 
the arrival of those who were the most deeply loved 
and revered the future Masters. Those immediately 
connected with some of the earlier group were still 
in that Nirvana, although others had come to earth 
with the 1,200-year set, among them the two future 
Masters who now wear English bodies. 2 A good 

ir These intervals must be taken provisionally; the in- 
tervals between death and re-birth in this group and in the 
one mentioned below were relatively about as these lengths. 

2 They were once Sir Thomas More and 'Philalethes' 
Thomas Vaughan. 



THE FOURTH ROOT RACE 107 

deal of slight retarding or hastening of re-birth was 
resorted to, in order to keep the group together in 
incarnation. 

In one of these early lives, Corona 1 a very fine 
fighter came from the City of the Golden Gates, and 
conquered the Tlavatli tribe in which our friends had 
incarnated. Unconscious as he was of the tie be- 
tween them, he was yet influenced by it, and treated 
the tribe kindly: instead of carrying them off as 
slaves, he introduced various improvements and 
incorporated the tribe into the Toltec Empire. Sirius 
took several births in the Tlavatli sub-race, and then 
passed into the Toltec. Glancing forward, we saw 
him once incarnated among the Rmoahls, in order 
to be with Ursa and others, then several lives were 
passed in the Turanian, the fourth sub-race a 
Chinese stage and a number in the Akkadian, the 
sixth; he was observed trading among a people who 
resembled the Phoenicians of later times. He did not 
take the sub-races in any special order, and it is 
difficult, at present, to generalise on this question. 

Ship-loads of egos continued to arrive, and the 
main cause of separation seemed to be the method 
of individualisation. Egos of all Bays, or tempera- 
ments, of similar general development were mixed 
up, but those of different intervals between rebirths 
were not. Nor was there any mingling of the large 
classes of the Moon-Men and Animal-Men. Unless 
an individual had been taken through the Inner 
Round, and had undergone its special forcing, when 
he passed into the class ahead of him, the broad 
lines of distinction remained, and one class did not 

'Known in later history as Julius Ceesar. 



108 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

overtake another. Even when the Basket-works had 
completed their causal bodies, the basket origin re- 
mained discernible. 

The first ship-load containing the 700-year group 
arrived on Earth about 600,000 B. C., some 250,000 
years after the first great cataclysm which rent 
the continent of Atlantis. With it came the future 
Masters, Mars and Mercury and others, and Mars 
was born in the north in the Tlavatli sub-race, 
with Surya and Mercury for his father and mother. 
Herakles was also in the family, as an elder sister. 
Surya was the Chief of the tribe, and Mars, his 
eldest son, soon became its foremost warrior. 1 At 
the age of fifteen, he was left for dead on a battle- 
field, but was searched for and found by his sister, 
who was passionately devoted to him, and who 
nursed him back to health. He succeeded his father 
as Chief, and had his first experience of earthly rule. 

There was one quite small but interesting group, 
only 105 in number, who arrived about the same 
period, 600,000 B. C., but who did not come from the 
Moon. It was a contingent arranged for specially by 
the Head of the Hierarchy, and seemed to consist 
of some who in Venus had been pet animals of the 
Lords 'of the Flame, and were so strongly linked to 
Them by affection, that without Them they would 
not have evolved. They had individualised on Venus, 
and were brought over here, and He placed them all 
in the first and second Hays. There were other small 
groups, abnormal in evolution. Thus one little 
group, belonging to the third Bound, was sent over 
to Mercury, for the special treatment possible under 

*See the Proem for these and other names. 



THE FOURTH ROOT RACE 109 

Mercury conditions, and was then brought back 
here. Some underwent treatment of this kind in 
preparation for the fifth Eoot Race. It may be 
noted that H. P. Blavatsky speaks of some who came 
to the Earth from Mercury. 

Herakles' third birth on earth was in the same 
tribe, in which many members of the group were 
re-united. They had a certain amount of civilisa- 
tion, but the houses were mere huts, and the 
climate being warm the clothing was scanty. The 
life was marked by the re-knitting of the undesirable 
link with Scorpio, and has therefore a certain im- 
portance for those concerned. The tribe in which 
Herakles was a warrior was attacked by a very 
savage tribe to which Scorpio belonged; the plan 
of the latter was to surprise the other tribe and 
slaughter it as a sacrifice to their deity, or, failing 
that, to commit suicide, and thereby gain power to 
torment their enemies from the other world. They 
performed magical rites of an Obeahlike nature, 
which, though done in secret, seem to have become 
known to Herakles. The final suicide was essential 
to the success of the whole plan of after-death ac- 
tivity, and the weird spells, with many tremendous 
'curses and swears,' became then effective: the re- 
sult of these was apparently as much dreaded by 
their foes as it was valued by themselves. The at- 
tack failed, and they proceeded to carry out the 
alternative to victory, a general suicide with grue- 
some rites. Herakles, partly because his religion 
did not permit suicide, partly moved by superstit- 
ious fears, and partly by the thought that the savages 
would make nice brawny slaves, interfered and 
saved a number of them whom he captured and 



110 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

bound. Later on these folk plotted to assassinate 
him, and he had them executed; thus began again, 
this time on earth, a long series of antagonisms not 
yet exhausted. 

It may be noted, as bearing on the closeness of 
ties set up between individuals and enduring for 
hundreds of lives, that from this time forward a set 
of persons within the large groups of 1,200-and 700- 
years' people a set which we may, for the sake of 
distinction, dub 'the Clan' while visiting almost 
every country in the world, kept generally together, 
and Sirius, Especially, was rarely found to marry 
outside this little group. Taking a bird's-eye-view, 
we notice that there were occasional gatherings of 
the whole big Clan, as in the City of the Golden 
Gates when Mars was King, in Peru when he was 
Emperor, in the mainland near the White Island 
under the Manu, and in the second and third sub- 
races at their beginnings and their migrations to 
take a few instances out of many. Herakles turned 
out to be a fighting sort of person, clinging closely 
to Mars ; Sirius a more peaceful one, following Mer- 
cury continually; Alcyone is also of that ilk, with 
Mizar. A good many belonging to the larger groups 
with whom we were very familiar in those early 
days, however, seem to have dropped out by the 
way, and we have not met them in this life; some 
may be just now in the heaven-world. The Theoso- 
phical Society is another instance of the gathering 
of this same Clan, and people are coming into it all 
the time, who turn out to be old friends. Some again, 
like Corona, are just now awaiting a favourable op- 
portunity for incarnation. 

The ship-loads continued to come in for a long 



THE FOURTH ROOT RACE 111 

time, only ceasing with the catastrophe of 75,000 B. 
C., so the phrase as to shutting the door evidently 
applies only to the animals coming up into humanity, 
and not to those whose causal bodies were already 
developed. The anthropoid apes, of whom H, P. 
Blavatsky spoke as still admissible to human bodies, 
would belong to the animal kingdom of the Moon, 
not to that of the Earth; they took up bodies pro- 
duced by the "sin of the mindless," and are the 
gorillas, chimpanzees, orang-utangs, baboons, and 
gibbons. They might be looked for in Africa, and 
might incarnate there in the still existing very low 
human races of Lemurian type. 

Coming down to 220,000 B. 0., to the City of the 
Golden Gates, we find Mars there ruling as Emperor, 
and bearing by inheritance the title of * Divine 
Ruler,' transmitted from Those who had ruled in 
the past, the great Initiates of earlier days. Mer- 
cury was the chief Hierophant, the head of the 
State religion. It is remarkable how these two come 
down together through the ages, one always the 
Ruler, the Warrior, the other always the Teacher, 
the Priest. Noteworthy also is the fact that we 
never saw Mars in a woman's body, whereas Mer- 
cury did take one from time to time. 

There was quite a gathering of the Clan at this 
time. The Crown Prince was then Vajra, and Ulys- 
ses, who had been a successful leader on the f rontier, 
was Captain of the Imperial Guard. This Guard 
formed a picked body of men, even the privates be- 
ing of the upper classes, and they had charge of the 
Palace; they were not supposed to go out to war, 
but rather to strut about in gorgeous uniforms, to 
attend on the person of the Monarch during ceremo- 



112 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

nials, and increase his splendour. Later, however, 
after the death of Ulysses, Vajra became Captain of 
the Guard, and he persuaded his father to allow him 
to take his troop off into a campaign; being always 
a turbulent and restless person, he was not content 
to luad a life of show and luxury, and his soldiers, 
who adored him for his dash and courage, were wil- 
ling enough to exchange their golden breastplates 
for the severer armament of war. Among them we 
find a number of our Clan: Herakles was there, with 
Pindar, Beatrix, Gemini, Capella, Lutetia, Bellona, 
Apis, Arcor, Capricorn, Theodoros, Scotus and Sap- 
pho. Herakles had as servant-boys three Tlavatli 
youths, captured in battle by his father and given to 
him Hygeia, Bootes, and Alcmene. The soldiers 
were distinctly rowdy, indulging in orgies of eating 
and drinking, and then rioting about the city; but 
they had the merit of respecting 'learning, paid 
reverence to the priests, and attended religious cere- 
monies as part of their Palace duty. They had a 
certain code of honour among themselves and kept 
it very rigidly, and in this was included the protec- 
tion of the weak. Their homes were not unrefined, 
a,fter a fashion, though not squaring with modern 
ideas. 

The death of Ulysses, the Captain of the Guard, 
must not be passed by unnoticed, for it linked in in- 
dissoluble bonds the three persons chiefly concerned. 
The Emperor Mars had placed in the Captain's 
hands the care of his son Vajra, a daring, reckless 
lad ; for the times were dangerous, conspiracies were 
rife in the Golden City, and the capture of the person 
of the Crown Prince would have been a great triumph 
for the conspirators. Hence Ulysses would not allow 



THE FOURTH ROOT RACE 113 

the Prince to leave the Palace grounds, much to that 
young man's disgust. One day the Captain and the 
Prince were sitting at some little distance from the 
Palace, and a band of conspirators, greatly daring, 
crept up under the shelter of some bushes, and sud- 
denly pounced upon the two. The Prince was struck 
down senseless, but Ulysses, bestriding his body, 
fought fiercely against the assailants, shouting for 
help. His cries were heard, and as he fell bleed- 
ing across the body of his young master, pierced by 
many wounds, some soldiers of the Guard came 
rushing up, and the conspirators took to their heels. 
The two unconscious bodies were lifted on to stretch- 
ers, carried to the Throne-room of the Palace, where 
the Emperor was sitting, and there laid at his feet. 
The dying Captain raised his eyes to his Emperor: 
' ' Sire, forgive ; I did my best. ' ' 

The Emperor stooped down, and dipped his finger 
in the blood welling up from the Captain's breast; 
he touched with it the forehead of the dying man, 
his own forehead and his feet, and musically his 
voice fell upon the silence: "By the blood that was 
shed for me and mine, the bond between us shall 
never be broken. Depart in peace, faithful servant 
and friend." 

The words reached the ears already becoming dull; 
Ulysses smiled, and died. The young Prince, who 
was only stunned, revived. And the bond lasted on, 
millennium after millennium, and became the bond 
between Master and disciples, for ever unbreakable. 

The lives of Herakles were not remarkable in any 
way for a long time. They were spent in fighting, 
when the body was that of a man, in having very 
numerous babies when it was that of a woman. 



114 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

The spread of black magic in Atlantis led up to 
the second great catastrophe of 200,000 B. C., which 
left as remnants of the great continent which had 
joined Europe and Africa to America the huge 
islands of Kuta and Daitya. They endured until 
the catastrophe of 75,025 B. C. 1 overwhelmed them 
beneath the waters of the ocean we now call the At- 
lantic. 

During the next hundred thousand years, the 
peoplo of Atlantis flourished abundantly, and built 
up a mighty, but over-luxurious, civilisation. Its 
centre was in the City of the Golden Gates the 
name was preserved but it spread far and wide 
over the world, both over Africa and the West. Un- 
happily with the civilisation spread again also the 
knowledge giving control over nature which, used 
for selfish purposes, becomes black magic. 

Members of the Clan came into it, more or less, 
sometimes being born into families immersed in it, 
and breaking away; sometimes dallying with it and 
being a little tarred therewith. Some experiences 
of Alcyone's that often tormented him in the form 
of dreams in a later life may here be put on record. 2 
They happened in a life that occurred about 100,000 
B. C. Corona was then the White Emperor at the 
City of the Golden Gates ; Mars was a general under 
him, and Herakles was the wife of Mars. A great 
rebellion was being plotted, and a man of strange 
and evil knowledge, a 'Lord of the Dark Face/ 
leagued with the dark Earth-Spirits who form the 

Usually given roughly as the 80,000 B. C. catastrophe. 

2 See "Rents in the Veil of time" The Theosophist, May, 
1910. 



THE FOURTH ROOT RACE 115 

1 Kingdom of Pan, 7 the semi-human, semi-animal 
creatures who are the originals of the Greek satyrs 
was gradually gathering round himself a huge 
army which followed him as Emperor, the Emperor 
of the Midnight Sun, the Dark Emperor, set over 
against the White. The worship he established, with 
himself as central idol huge images of himself being 
placed in the temples was sensual and riotous, hold- 
ing men through the gratification of their animal 
passions. Against the White Cave of Initiation in 
the City of the Golden Gates was set up the Dark 
Cave in which the mysteries of Pan, the Earth-God, 
were celebrated. All was working up toward an- 
other great catastrophe. 

Alcyone, some one hundred and twenty lives back, 
was the son of a man who followed the hideous rites 
of this dark cult, but he held himself much aloof, 
shrinking from the wild orgies of animalism that 
enchained the bulk of the worshippers. But, as is 
too often the case, he fell into the trap baited by a 
woman's beauty, and met a grievous fate. The story 
may be told, as it throws light on the conditions 
which brought down later upon Atlantis the heavy 
doom pronounced by the Occult Hierarchy. 



CHAPTER IX 

BLACK MAGIC IN ATLANTIS 
AN EPISODE 

ALCYONE is lying half asleep, half awake, on a 
grassy bank sloping down to a rippling brooklet. 
His face is perplexed, even anxious, the reflex of 
his troubled mind. He is the son of a wealthy and 
powerful family, belonging to the priesthood, the 
* Priesthood of the Midnight Sun,' vowed to the 
service of the Gods of the Nether World, whom the 
priests sought in the gloom of night, in dark earth- 
caverns opening into passages that led down, down, 
into unknown depths. 

At this time, the great civilised nations of Atlantis 
had drawn into two opposed camps ; the one, looking 
to the ancient City of the Golden Gates as their sa- 
cred metropolis, maintained the traditional worship 
of their race, the worship of the Sun the Sun in 
the beauty of his rising, clad in the bright colours of 
the dawning, encircled with the radiant youths and 
maidens of his court; the Sun in the zenith of his 
glory, the blazing strength of his mid-heaven, scat- 
tering abroad his brilliant rays of life and heat; the 
Sun in the splendid couch of his setting, touching 
into rarest softest hues the clouds he left as promise 
of his return. The people worshipped him with 
choral dances, with incense and with flowers, with 
joyous songs, and with offerings of gojd and gems, 

m 



BLACK MAGIC IN ATLANTIS 117 

with laughter and with minstrelsy, with joyous 
games and sports. Over these children of the Blaz- 
ing Sun the White Emperor bore rule, and his race 
had for long millennia held unchallenged sway. But 
gradually the outlying kingdoms, ruled by his lieu- 
tenants had become independent, and they were be- 
ginning to join together into a Federation, rallying 
round a man who had appeared among them, a re- 
markable but sinister figure. 

This man, Oduarpa by name, ambitious and crafty 
by nature, had realised that, in order to give stabili- 
ty to the Federation and to make head against the 
White Emperor, it was necessary to call to his aid 
the resources of the darker magic, to make compact 
with the denizens of the Nether World, and to es- 
tablish a worship which would attract the people by 
its sensuous pleasures, and by the weird unholy 
powers it placed within the reach of its adepts. He 
had himself, by such compact, extended his life ovey 
an abnormal period, and, when going into battle, 
rendered himself impervious to spear or sword- 
thrust by materialising a metallic coating over his 
body, which turned weapons aside as would a shirt 
of mail. He aimed at supreme power, and was in 
a fair way to reach it, and he dreamed of himself 
as sitting crowned in the Palace of the City of the 
Golden Gates. 

The father of our youth was among the most in- 
timate of his friends, and privy to his most secret 
designs, and both hoped that the lad would devote 
himself to the forwarding of their ambitions. But 
the youth had dreams and hopes of his own, nourish- 
ed silently within his own heart ; he had seen in the 
visions of the night the stately figure of Mars, a 



118 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

general of the White Emperor, Corona, had gazed 
into his deep compelling eyes, had heard, as from 
afar, his words: "Alcyone, thou art mine, of my 
people, and surely thou shalt come to me, and know 
thyself as mine. Pledge not thyself to mine enemies, 
thou who art mine." And he had vowed himself his 
subject, as vassal to his lord. 

Of this was Alcyone thinking, as he lay musing 
by the stream. For another influence was playing 
upon him, and his blood ran hotly in his veins. Ill- 
pleased at his indifference to their worship nay, 
at his shrinking from it, even in its outward rites 
of animal sacrifice and poured out oblations of 
strong drink his father and Oduarpa had conceived 
the plan of drawing him into the secret mysteries 
by the allurements of a maiden, Cygnus, dark and 
beauteous as the midnight sky star-studded, who 
loved him deeply, but had so far failed to win his 
young heart with her charms. Between her dusky 
brilliant eyes and his half-fascinated gaze would float 
the splendid face of his vision, and he would hear 
again the thrilling whisper: "Thou art mine." 

At length, however, she had so far won him per- 
suaded to the task by her mother, a veritable witch- 
hag, who had told her that thus alone might she gain 
his love as to obtain from him a promise that he 
would accompany her to the underground caves in 
which the magical rites were performed, which drew 
the denizens of the Nether World from their re- 
treats and gained from them the forbidden knowl- 
edge which changed the human into the animal form, 
thus giving opportunity for free play to the passions 
of the brute hidden in man, passions of lust and 
slaughter. Cygnus had played upon his heart with 



BLACK MAGIC IN ATLANTIS 119 

skill taught by her own passion, and had fanned his 
indifference into fire, not enduring, indeed, but warm 
while it lasted. And to-day the passion was hot 
upon him, and the power of her allurements swayed 
him. For she had just left him, after coaxing him 
to promise to meet her after sunset near the caverns 
where the mysteries were performed, and he was 
struggling between his longing to follow her, and his 
repulsion from the guessed-at scenes in which he 
would be expected to take part. The sun sank below 
the horizon and the sky darkened while still Alcyone 
lay musing; with a shudder he started to his feet, 
but now his mind was made up, and he turned his 
steps towards the rendez-vous. 

To his surprise a considerable company was 
gathered at the spot; his father was there with his 
priestly friends, and Cygnus with a crescent moon 
on her head, the sign of the bride, and a band of 
maidens round her, all clad in gauzy star-spangled 
raiment, through which the brown lithe limbs gleam 7 
ed duskily ; a band of youths of his own age, among 
whom he recognised his nearest friends, were also 
waiting, with spotted skins of animals for raiment, 
and light cymbals which they clashed as they danced 
round him like fauns. 

"Hail, Alcyone!" they cried, "favourite of the 
Dark Sun, child of the Night ! See where thy Moon 
and her Stars await thee. But first thou must win 
her from us, her defenders.' 1 

Suddenly she was whirled away in the midst of 
the dancers, and vanished in the darkness of the 
cavern yawning wide in front, and Alcyone was seiz- 
ed, stripped of his garments, a skin like that of the 
rest thrown over him, and intoxicated, maddened, he 



120 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

fled in her pursuit, amid laughter and cheers: 
"Hey! young hunter, be swift, lest the hounds pull 
down thy deer." 

After a few minutes Alcyone, with the shouting 
crowd at his heels, had raced through the outer 
caverns, and had reached a vast hall, blazing with 
crimson light. In the midst rose a huge canopy, red 
in colour and studded with great carbuncles, that 
tossed back the light like splashes of fiery blood ; be- 
neath the canopy was a copper throne, inlaid with 
gold, and before it a yawning gulf, out of which 
flashed tongues of flame, lurid and roaring. Heavy 
clouds of strange incense filled the air, intoxicating, 
maddening. 

The rush swept him onwards, and he was caught 
up into a wild tumultuous whirl of dancers, who 
shouted, yelled, sprang into the air in wild bounds, 
circling round the canopied throne, and crying: 
"Oduarpa! Oduarpa! Come, we are craving for 
thee!" 

A low roll of thunder crept muttering round the 
cavern, growing louder and louder, and ending in a 
tremendous clap just overhead ; the flames leapt up, 
and amid them rose the mighty form of Oduarpa, 
steel-grey in his magic sheathing, stern, majestic, 
with his face grave, even sad, as that of a fallen Arch- 
angel, but strong with unbending pride and iron 
resolution. He took his seat on the throne, where 
he sat throughout all that followed, silent and 
sombre, taking no part in the riot; he waved his 
hand, and the mad orgy recommenced, the wildest 
dancers bathing in the flames which lapped over the 
edges of the gulf and tossed themselves high in air. 
Alcyone had caught sight of Cygnus in the midst of 



BLACK MAGIC IN ATLANTIS 121 

the youths and the girls, and he raced, mad with ex- 
citement, in her direction ; she eluded him, her escort 
baffled him, he touched her only to see her whirled 
out of his reach. At last, panting, wild, he made a 
desperate rush, and the escort fled with screams of 
laughter, each youth with a girl, and he leapt on 
Cygnus and clasped her in his arms. 

Wilder and wilder grew the revel ; slaves bearing 
huge pitchers of strong drink appeared, accompanied 
by others with goblets. Madness of drink was ad- 
ded to madness of motion, and the lurid lights sank 
low into twilight of redness. The orgy which fol- 
lowed is better hidden than described. 

But see! out of the passage whence had emerg- 
ed Oduarpa, comes a wild procession ; hairy bipeds, 
long-armed and claw-footed, with animals' heads 
and manes streaming over shoulders, horrent, appal- 
ling, non-human, yet horribly human. They hold in 
their claw-like hands phials and boxes, and as they 
mingle with the wildest dancers they give these to 
the revellers most mad with drink and lust. These 
smear over their limbs the ointment in the boxes, 
drink the contents of the phials, and lo! they drop 
senseless, huddled on the ground, but from each hud- 
dled heap there springs an animal form, snarling, 
ravening, and vanishes from the cavern into the 
darkness of the outside night. 

The bright Gods help the wayfarers who meet 
these bedevilled astral materialisations, fierce and 
conscienceless as animals, cruel and crafty as men ! 
But the bright Gods are sleeping, and only the hosts 
of the Midnight Sun, ghosts, goblins and all evil 
things, are abroad. The creatures return, their jaws 
dripping with blood, their hides draggled with filth, 



122 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

ere morning dawns, and, crouching on the huddled 
forms on the floor of the cavern, sink into them and 
disappear. 

Such orgies as these were held from time to time, 
Oduarpa using them to increase his hold upon the 
people, and he established similar rites at many 
places, making himself the central figure in all, be- 
coming a veritable object of worship, and gradually 
welding the people together in allegiance to himself, 
until he became the acknowledged Emperor. His 
relations with the inhabitants of the Nether World 
called in latter days, as said above, the ' Kingdom 
of Pan' gave him much additional power, and he 
had trusted lieutenants bound to him by their com- 
mon knowledge of, and participation in, the ghastly 
abominations of that realm ever prompt to carry 
out his commands. 

He finally succeeded in assembling a very large 
army and began his march against the White Em- 
peror, directing his course towards the City of the 
Golden Gates. He hoped to overawe and conquer, 
not only by fair assault of arms, but by the terror 
that would be spread by his hellish allies, and the 
ghastly transformations of the black wizards into 
animal forms. He himself had a body-guard of 
magic animals round him, powerful desire forms 
materialised into physical bodies, who guarded him 
and devoured any who approached him with hostile 
intent. When a battle was raging, and the issue 
doubtful, Oduarpa would suddenly loose against his 
foes his horde of demoniacal allies, who would rush 
into the fray, tearing with teeth and claws, and 
spread panic among the startled hosts. When his 
enemies broke into flight, he would send these swift 



BLACK MAGIC IN ATLANTIS 123 

demons in pursuit, and the troops of wizards would 
likewise take animal forms, gorging themselves on 
the bodies of the slain. 

Thus he fought his way onwards, northward ever, 
till he came near the City of the Golden Gates, where 
the last army of the White Emperor lay embattled. 
Alcyone had fought as a soldier in the army, partly 
under a spell, and yet awake enough to be sick at 
heart at his surroundings, and Cygnus, with other 
ladies, had accompanied the camp. The day of the 
decisive battle dawned; the imperial army was led 
by the White Emperor himself, Corona, and the 
right wing of the army was under the command of 
his most trusted general, Mars. During the preced- 
ing night, Alcyone had been visited once more by his 
early vision, and had heard the well-loved voice : 
"Alcyone, thou art fighting against thy true lord, 
and to-morrow wilt thou meet me, face to face. 
Break thou then thy rebel sword and yield thee to 
me; thou shalt die by my side, and it shall yet be 
well." 

And so indeed it happed. For in the fierce shock 
of battle, as the imperial troops were giving way, 
the Emperor slain, Alcyone saw, struggling gallant- 
ly against overwhelming odds, the face of his vision, 
the general Mars. With a cry he sprang forward, 
breaking his sword in two, and catching up a spear, 
he threw himself at Mars' back, fiercely thrusting 
through a soldier who struck at Mars from behind. 
At that moment Oduarpa charged up, mad with fury, 
and struck Mars down, and with a cry that rang 
across the field, he summoned Cygnus, by swift spell 
changing her into a fierce animal, which rushed with 
bared fangs at Alcyone, fainting from loss of blood. 



124 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

But in the very act, the love which had been her life 
cried out from Cygnus' soul and wrought her res- 
cue ; for its strong flow changed into loving woman 
the form of ravening hate, and with a dying kiss on 
Alcyone 's dying face she breathed away her life. 

Herakles, the wife of Mars, was captured by Od- 
uarpa in the assault on the City of the Golden Gates 
that followed and completed his victory; she indig- 
nantly repulsed his advances, and catching up a 
dagger stabbed at him with all her strength. The 
dagger slipped aside on his metallic casing, and, 
laughing, he struck her down, outraging her as she 
lay half senseless : when she recovered consciousness, 
he summoned his horrible animals, and they tore her 
into pieces and devoured her. 

Oduarpa, enthroned on a pile of corpses, and sur- 
rounded by his animal and half -animal guards, was 
crowned Emperor of the City of the Golden Gates, 
assuming the desecrated title of ' Divine Ruler \ But 
his triumph was not of long duration, for Vaivasvata 
Manu marched against him with a great army, and 
His mere presence put to flight the denizens of the 
Kingdom of Pan, while He destroyed the artificial 
thought-forms, created by black magic. A crushing 
victory scattered the army of the Emperor, and he 
himself was shut up in a tower whither he had fled 
in the rout. The building was fired, and he perished 
miserably, literally boiled to death within his mate- 
rialised metallic shell. 

Vaivasvata Manu purified the City and re-establish- 
ed there the rule of the White Emperor, consecrat 
ing to that office a trusted servant of the Hierarchy- 
For a time things went on well, but slowly the evil 
again gathered power, and the southern centre once 



BLACK MAGIC IN ATLANTIS 125 

more grew strong; until, at last, the same Lord of 
the Dark Face, appearing in a new re-incarnation, 
again fought against the White Emperor of the time, 
and set up his own throne against him. Then the 
words of doom were spoken by the Head of the Hier- 
archy, and, as the Occult Commentary tells us : the 
"Great King of the Dazzling Face " the White 
Emperor sent to his brother Chiefs: " Prepare. 
Arise, ye men of the Good Law, and cross the land 
while yet dry. ' ' The ' ' Rod of the Four ' 'the Kuma- 
ras was raised. "The hour has struck, the black 
night is ready/' The "servants of the Great Four" 
warned their people, and many escaped. "Their 
Kings reached them in their Vimanas 1 and led them 
on to the lands of fire and metal (east and north)." 2 
Explosions of gas, floods and earthquakes destroyed 
Ruta and Daitya, the huge inlands of Atlantis, left 
from the catastrophe of 200,000 B. C., and only the 
island of Poseidonis remained, the last remnant of 
the once huge continent of the Atlantic. These islands' 
perished in 75,025 B. C., Poseidonis enduring to 
9,564 B. C. when it also was whelmed beneath the 
ocean. 



1 Chariots which moved in the air the ancient aero- 
planes. 

*The Secret Doctrine, ii, pp. 445, 446. 



CHAPTER X 
THE CIVILISATION OF ATLANTIS 1 

ATLANTIS peopled many countries with its sub- 
races, and built many splendid civilisations. Egypt, 
Mesopotamia, India, North and South America, knew 
them, and the Empires they raised endured for long, 
and reached a point of glory that the Aryan Race has 
not yet overtopped. The chapters XI XIII on Peru 
and Chaldea in the present work shew remnants of 
their greatness, and these may be supplemented by 
some additional details. 

Mr. Scott-Elliot thus describes the famous City of 
the Golden Gates: "A, beautifully wooded park-like 
country surrounded the city. Scattered over a large 
area of this were the villa-residences of the wealthier 
classes. To the west lay a range of mountains, from 
which the water-supply of the city was drawn. The 
city itself was built on the slopes of a hill, which rose 
from the plain about five hundred feet. On the sum- 
mit of this hill lay the Emperor's palace and gardens, 
in the centre of which welled up from the earth a 
never-ending stream of water, supplying first the 
palace and the fountains in the gardens, thence flow- 

*A good account of this may be read in The Story of 
Atlantis by W. Scott-Elliot. The writers of the present 
book were among the collaborateurs who collected the mate- 
rials therein so ably arranged and presented, so the ground 
is very familiar to us. 

126 



THE CIVILISATION OF ATLANTIS 127 

ing in the four directions, and falling in cascades 
into a canal or moat which encompassed the palace 
grounds, and thus separated them from the city which 
lay below on every side. Prom this canal four chan- 
nels led the water through four quarters of the city 
to cascades which, in their turn, supplied another 
encircling canal at a lower level. There were three 
such canals forming concentric circles, the outer- 
most and lowest of which was still above the 
level of the plain. A fourth canal at this lowest 
level, but on a rectangular plan, received the con- 
stantly flowing waters, and in its turn discharged 
them into the sea. The city extended over part of 
the plain, up to the edge of this great outermost 
moat, which surrounded and defended it with a line 
of waterways extending about twelve miles by ten 
miles square. 

"It will thus be seen that the city was divided 
into three great belts, each hemmed in by its canals. 
The characteristic feature of the upper belt, that lay 
just below the palace grounds, was a circular race- 
course and large public gardens. Most of the houses 
of the court officials also lay on this belt, and here 
also was an institution of which we have no parallel 
in modern times. The term 'Strangers' Home' 
amongst us suggests a mean appearance and sordid 
surroundings; but this was a palace where all 
strangers who might come to the city were entertain- 
ed as long as they might choose to stay being treat- 
ed all the time as guests of the Government. The 
detached houses of the inhabitants and the various 
temples scattered throughout the city occupied the 
other two belts. In the days of the Toltec great- 
ness there seems to have been no real poverty even 



128 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

the retinue of slaves attached to most houses being 
well fed and clothed but there were a number of 
comparatively poor houses in the lowest belt to the 
north, as well as outside the outermost canal towards 
the sea. The inhabitants of this part were mostly 
connected with the shipping, and their houses, though 
detached, were built closer together than in other 
districts/' 

Other large towns, built on the plains, were pro- 
tected by immense banks of earth, sloping towards 
the town, and sometimes terraced, while, on the out- 
ward side, they were faced with thick plates of metal, 
clamped together; these were supported on great 
beams of wood, the uprights being driven deeply into 
the earth; when these were in place, and connected 
with heavy crossbars, the plates were attached to 
them, overlapping like scales, and then the space 
between the earth-work and the barrier was filled 
with earth, solidly rammed together. The whole 
formed a practically impregnable barrier against 
the spears, swords, and bows and arrows which were 
the usual weapons of the time. But such a city nec- 
essarily lay open to assaults from above, and the 
Atlanteans carried the making of air-ships aero- 
planes, we should call them now to a high pitch of 
excellence; and, if such a city were to be attacked, 
these birds-of-war were sent to hover over it, and 
to drop into it bombs which burst in the air, and 
discharged a rain of heavy poisonous vapour, des- 
tructive of human life. Allusions to these may be 
found in the conflicts related in the great epics and 
Puranas of the Hindus. They had also weapons 
which projected sheaves of fi re-tipped arrows, which 
scattered far and wide as they hurtled through 



TEE CIVILISATION OF ATLANTIS 129 

the air like deadly rockets, and many others of 
similar kinds, all constructed by men well-versed in 
the higher branches of scientific knowledge. Many 
of these are described in the very ancient books 
above referred to, and they are mentioned as being 
given by some superior Being. The knowledge re- 
quired for their construction was never made com- 
mon. 

The land system of the Toltecs will be described in 
the chapters on Peru, and the absence of poverty and 
the general well-being of the population were largely 
due to the provision therein made for universal 
primary education. The whole scheme of govern- 
ment was planned out by the Wise for the benefit of 
all, and not by special classes for their own advan- 
tage. Hence the general comfort was immensely 
higher than in modern civilisations. 

Science was carried far, for the use of clairvoyance 
being habitual, the processes of nature, now invisible 
to most, were readily observed. Its applications to 
arts and crafts were also numerous and useful. The 
rays of sunshine, sent through coloured glass, were 
used for promoting the growth of plants and animals ; 
scientific breeding was carefully carried out for the 
improvement of promising species ; experiments were 
tried in crossing e.g., the crossing of wheat with 
various grasses produced different kinds of grain; 
less satisfactory were the attempts which produced 



130 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

wasps from bees, and white ants from ants. 1 The 
seedless banana was evolved from a melon-like an- 
cestor, containing, like the melon, large quantities of 
seeds. Forces, the knowledge of which has been 
lost, were known to the science of the day; one of 
these was used for the propulsion of both air-and 
water-ships; another for so changing the relation 
of heavy bodies to the earth, that the earth repelled 
instead of attracting them, so making the raising of 
gigantic stones to a lofty height a matter of the 
greatest ease. The subtler of these were not applied 
by machinery, but were controlled by will-power, 
using the thoroughly understood and developed 
mechanism of the human body, ' ' the vina of a thou- 
sand strings ". 

Metals were much used and admirably wrought, 
gold, silver and aurichalcum being those most em- 
ployed in decoration, and in domestic utensils. They 
were more often alchemically produced than sought 
for in the crust of the earth, and were often very 
artistically introduced to add richness to schemes of 
decoration, carried out in brilliant colours. Armour 
was gorgeously inlaid with them, and that used mere- 
ly for show in pageants and ceremonies was often 
entirely made of the precious metals; golden hel- 

J Wheat, bees and ants were brought from Venus by 
the Lords of the Flame, and the crossing of these with 
species already existing on the earth brought about the 
results named. The nature-spirits in charge of some depart- 
ments of animal and vegetable evolution also attempted on 
their own account to imitate, with the purely terrestial re- 
sources at their disposal, these importations from another 
planet. Their efforts, which were only partially successful, 
are responsible for some of the more unpleasant results 
above-mentioned. 



THE CIVILISATION OF ATLANTIS 131 

mets, breastplates and greaves being worn on such 
occasions over tunics and stockings of the most bril- 
liant colours scarlet, orange, and a very exquisite 
purple. 

Food differed in different classes. The masses of 
the people ate meat, fish, and even reptiles per- 
haps one should not say 'even,' remembering the 
turtle of our City Fathers. The carcase of an animal, 
with all its contents, was slit down the breast and 
stomach, and hung up over a large fire ; when it was 
thoroughly cooked through it was removed from the 
fire, the contents were scooped out and, among the 
more refined, placed on dishes, while the rougher 
people gathered round the carcase itself, and plunged 
their hands into its interior, selecting toothsome 
dainties a plan which sometimes led to quarrels ; the 
rest was thrown away or given to domestic animals, 
the flesh itself being considered as offal. The higher 
classes partook of similar food, but those belonging 
immediately to the Court made rather a secret of 
such banquets. The Divine King, of course, and those 
closely connected with Him, ate only food composed 
of grains cooked in various ways, vegetables, fruits, 
and milk, the latter being drunk as a liquid, or made 
into many sweet preparations. Fruit-juices were 
also largely used as drinks. Some of the courtiers and 
dignitaries, while partaking of these milder comes- 
tibles publicly, were observed quietly stealing "away 
to their private chambers and feasting on more tooth- 
some viands, among which fish, as 'high' as modern 
game, played a not inconspicuous part. 

Government was autocratic, and in the palmy days 
of Toltec civilisation under the Divine Kings, no 
system could have been happier for the people ; but 



132 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

as the unchecked powers They wielded passed into 
the hands of younger souls, abuses crept in and 
troubles arose ; for here, as everywhere, decay began 
in the corruption of the highest. The system was 
that Governors were held accountable for the welfare 
and happiness of their provinces, and crime or 
famine was regarded as due to their negligence or in- 
capacity. They were drawn chiefly from, the upper 
classes, but specially promising children were draft- 
ed out into the higher schools to be trained for the 
service of the State, whenever they were found. Sex 
was no disqualification, as it is now, for any office in 
the State. 1 

The immense growth of wealth and of luxury grad- 
ually undermined the most splendid civilisation that 
the world has yet seen. Knowledge was prostituted 
to individual gain, and control over the powers of 
nature was turned from service to oppression. Hence 
Atlantis fell, despite the glory of its achievements 
and the might of its Empires ; and the leading of the 
world passed into the hands of a daughter Eace, the 
Aryan, which, though it has to its credit many magni- 
ficent achievements in the past, has not yet reached 
the zenith of its glory and its power, and will, some 
centuries hence, rise even higher than Atlantis rose 
in its palmiest days. 

We have chosen two daughter civilisations which 
grew up in later days, far from the great centre of 

ir The exclusion of women from political power in -Eng- 
land only came, it should be remembered, with the growth 
of democracy, and the consequent idea that physical force, 
not intelligence or character, should be the basis of Gov- 
ernment. This is the nadir of political life, as the occult 
system is its zenith. 



THE CIVILISATION OF ATLANTIS 133 

the fourth Root Eace one descended from the third 
sub-race, the Toltec, the other from the fourth sub- 
race, the Turanian in order to give a more vivid 
and detailed picture of the level reached by the At- 
lanteans. These did not form part of the investiga- 
tions made in the summer of 1910, and chronicled in 
the present book; they were done during the last 
decade of the nineteenth century by the present writ- 
ers, working with some other members of the T. S., 
whose names we are not at liberty to give. One of 
the present writers put them into the form of arti- 
cles for The Theosophical Review, and these articles 
are here reprinted in their proper place, as part of 
a much larger work. 



CHAPTER XI 

TWO ATLANTEAN CIVILISATIONS 1 
Toltec, in Ancient Peru, B. C. 12,000 

THE civilisation of Peru in the thirteenth millen- 
nium B. C. so closely resembled that of the Toltec 
Empire in its zenith, that, having closely studied 
that period, we utilise it here as an example of At- 
lantean civilisation. Egypt and India in their Atlan- 
tean periods, offered other examples, but, on the 
whole, the chief features of the Toltec Empire are 
best reproduced in the Peru which is here described. 
The Government was autocratic no other Govern- 
ment in those days was possible. 

To show why this was so, we must look back in 
thought to a period far earlier to the original seg- 
regation of the great fourth Root Race. It will be 
obvious that when the Manu and His lieutenants 
great Adepts from a far higher evolution incarnat- 
ed among the youthful Race which They were labour- 
ing to develop, They were to those people absolutely 
as Gods in knowledge and power, so far were They in 
advance of them in every conceivable respect. Un- 
der such circumstances there could be no form of 
Government possible but an autocracy, for the 

lf The opening pages of this description of Ancient Peru, 
as given in the Theosophical Review, will be found in 
Appendix iii, with a brief statement of the circumstances 
under which it was originally written. 

134 



TWO ATLANTEAN CIVILISATIONS 135 

Ruler was the only person who really knew any- 
thing, and so he had to take the control of everything. 
These Great Ones became therefore the natural rul- 
ers and guides of child-humanity, and ready obe- 
dience was ever paid to Them, for it was recognised 
that wisdom gave authority, and that the greatest 
help that could be given to the ignorant was that they 
should be guided and trained. Hence all the order 
of the new society came, as all true order must ever 
come, from above and not from below; as the new 
Race spread the principle persisted, and on this basis 
the mighty monarchies of remote antiquity were 
founded, in most cases beginning under great King- 
Initiates, whose power and wisdom guided Their in- 
fant States through all their initial difficulties. 

Thus it happened that, even when the original 
Divine Rulers had yielded Their positions into the 
hands of Their pupils, the true principle of Govern- 
ment was still understood, and hence, when a new 
Kingdom was founded, the endeavour was always to 
imitate as closely as might be, under the new circum- 
stances, the splendid institutions which the Divine 
Wisdom had already given to the world. It was 
only as selfishness arose among both peoples and 
rulers that gradually the old order changed, and gave 
place to experiments that were not wise, to Govern- 
ments which were inspired by greed and ambition, 
instead of by the fulfilment of duty. 

At the period with which we have to deal 12,000 
B. C. the earlier Cities of the Golden Gates had 
been sunk beneath the waves for many thousands of 
years, and though the chief of the Kings of the Island 
of Poseidonis still arrogated to himself the beauti- 
ful title which had belonged to them, he made no 



136 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

pretence to imitate the methods of Government which 
had ensured them a stability so far beyond the com- 
mon lot of human arrangements. Some centuries 
before, however, a well-conceived attempt to revive 
though of course on a much smaller scale the life 
of that ancient system had been made by the Mon- 
archs of the country afterwards called Peru, and at 
the time of which we are speaking this revival was 
in full working order, and perhaps at the zenith of its 
glory, though it maintained its efficiency for many 
centuries after. It is, then, with this Peruvian re- 
vival that we are now concerned. 

It is a little difficult to give an idea of the physical 
appearance of the race inhabiting the country, for 
no race at present existing on earth sufficiently re- 
sembles it to suggest a comparison, without mislead- 
ing our readers in one direction or another. Such 
representatives of the great third sub-race of the At- 
lantean Eoot Race as are still to be seen on earth are 
degraded and debased, as compared with the Eace in 
its glory. Our Peruvian had the high cheek-bones 
and the general shape of face which we associate 
with the highest type of the Red Indian, and yet he 
had modifications in its contour which made him al- 
most more Aryan than Atlantean; his expression 
differed fundamentally from that of most modern 
Red Men, for it was usually frank, joyous, and mild, 
and in the higher classes keen intellect and great 
benevolence frequently showed themselves. In colour 
he was reddish-bronze, lighter on the whole among 
the upper classes, and darker among the lower, 
though the intermingling between the classes was 
such that it is scarcely possible to make even this 
distinction. 



TWO ATLANTEAN CIVILISATIONS 137 

The disposition of the people was on the whole 
happy, contented, and peaceful. The laws were few, 
suitable, and well administered, and so the people 
were naturally law-abiding; the climate was for the 
most part delightful, and enabled them to do without 
undue toil all the work connected with the tilling of 
the land, giving them a bountiful harvest in return 
for moderate exertion a climate calculated to make 
the people contented and disposed to make the best 
of life. Obviously such a state of mind among their 
poople gave the rulers of the country an enormous 
advantage to begin with. 

As has already been remarked, the Monarchy was 
absolute, yet it differed so entirely from anything 
now existing that the mere statement conveys no idea 
of the facts. The key-note of the entire system was 
responsibility. The King had absolute power, cer- 
tainly, but he had also the absolute responsibility 
for everything; he had been trained from his earli- 
est years to understand that if, anywhere in his vast 
Empire, an avoidable evil of any kind existed if a 
man willing to work could not get the kind of work 
that suited him, if even a child was ill and cjould not 
get proper attention this was a slur upon his ad- 
ministration, a blot upon his reign, a stain upon his 
personal honour. 

He had a large governing class to assist him in 
his labours, and he subdivided the whole huge nation 
in the most elaborate and systematic manner under 
its care. First of all the Empire was divided into 
provinces, over each of which was a kind of Viceroy ; 
under them again were what we might call Lord- 
Lieutenants of counties ; and under them again Gov- 
ernors of cities or of smaller districts. Every one of 



138 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

these was directly responsible to the man next above 
him in rank for the well-being of every person in 
his division. This subdivision of responsibility went 
on until we come to a kind of Centurion an official 
who had a hundred families in his care, for whom he 
was absolutely responsible. This was the lowest mem- 
ber of the governing class ; but he, on his part, usual- 
ly aided himself in his work by appointing some one 
out of every tenth household as a kind of voluntary 
assistant, to bring him the more instant news of any- 
thing that was needed or anything that went wrong. 1 

If any one of this elaborate network of officials 
neglected any part of his work, a word to his next 
superior would bring down instant investigation, for 
that superior's own honour was involved in the per- 
fect contentment and well-being of everyone within 
his jurisdiction. And this sleepless vigilance in the 
performance of public duty was enforced not so much 
by law (though law no doubt there was), as by the 
universal feeling among the governing class a feel- 
ing akin to the honour of a gentleman, a force far 
stronger than the command of any mere outer law 
can ever be, because it is in truth the working of a 
higher law from within the dictation of the awaken- 
ing ego to his personality on some subject which he 
knows. 

It will be seen that we are thus introduced to a 
system which was in every respect founded on the 
very antithesis of all the ideas which have arrogated 

'Readers of ancient Hindu literature will at once recog- 
nise the likeness between this system and that prevailing 
among the Aryans in the early days. This is but natural, 
since the successive Manns are all members of the same 
Hierarchy, and are engaged in similar work. 



TWO ATLANTEAN CIVILISATIONS 13!) 

to themselves the name of modern progress. The 
factor which made such a Government, so based, a 
possible and a workable one, was the existence among 
all classes of the community of an enlightened public 
opinion an opinion so strong and definite, so deeply 
ingrained, as to make it practically impossible for 
any man to fail in his duty to the State. Any one 
who had so failed would have been regarded as an 
uncivilised being, unworthy of the high privilege of 
citizenship in this great Empire of 'The Children of 
the Sun,' as these early Peruvians called themselves; 
he would have been looked upon with something of 
the same horror and pity as was an excommunicated 
person in mediaeval Europe. 

From this state of affairs so remote from any- 
thing now existing as to be barely conceivable to us 
arose another fact almost as difficult to realise. 
There were practically no laws in old Peru, and con- 
sequently no prisons; indeed, our system of punish- 
ments and penalties would have appeared absolutely 
unreasonable to the nation of which we are thinking. 
The life of a citizen of the Empire was in their eyes 
the only life worth living; but it was thoroughly well 
understood that every man held his place in the com- 
munity only on condition that he fulfilled his duty to- 
wards it. If a man in any way fell short of this (an 
almost unheard-of occurrence, because of the force 
of opinion which is above described), an explanation 
would be expected by the officer in charge of his dis- 
trict; and if, on examination, he proved blame- 
worthy, he would be reprimanded by that officer. 
Anything like continued neglect of duty ranked 
among the heinous offences, such as murder of 



140 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

theft; and for all these there was only one punish- 
ment that of exile. 

The theory upon which this arrangement was 
based was an exceedingly simple one. The Peru- 
vian held that the civilised man differed from the 
savage principally in that he understood and intelli- 
gently fulfilled his duties towards the State of 
which he formed a unit; if a man did not fulfil those 
duties he at once became a danger to the State, he 
showed himself unworthy to participate in its bene- 
fits, and he was consequently expelled from it, and 
left to live among the barbarous tribes on the 
fringes of the Empire. Indeed, it is perhaps charac- 
teristic of the attitude of the Peruvians in this mat- 
ter that the very word by which these tribes were 
designated in their language means, when literally 
translated, 'the lawless ones'. 

It WCTS, however, only rarely that it became neces- 
sary to resort to this extreme measure of exile; in 
most cases the officials were revered and beloved, 
and a hint from one of them was more than suffi- 
cient to bring back any unruly spirit to the path of 
order. Nor were even the few who were exiled ir- 
revocably cast forth from their native country; 
after a certain period they were allowed to return 
upon probation to their place among civilised men, 
and once more to enjoy the advantages of citizen- 
ship, as soon as they had shown themselves worthy 
of them. 

Among their manifold functions the officials (or 
' fathers,' as they were called) included those of 
judges, although, as there was practically no law, 
in our sense of the word, to administer, they per- 
haps corresponded more closely to our idea of ar- 



TWO ATLANTEAN CIVILISATIONS 141 

bitrators. All disputes which arose between man 
and man were referred to them, and in this case, as 
in all others, any one who felt dissatisfied with a 
decision could always appeal to the official next 
above, so that it was within the bounds of possibili- 
ty that a knotty point might be carried to the very 
footstool of the King himself. 

Every effort was made by the higher authorities 
to render themselves readily accessible to all, and 
part of the plan arranged for this purpose consipt- 
ed in an elaborate system of visitations. Once in 
seven years the King himself made a tour of his 
Empire for this purpose; and in the same way the 
Governor of a province had to travel over it yearly ; 
and his subordinates in their turn had constantly to 
see with their own eyes that all was going well with 
those under their charge, and to give every oppor- 
tunity for any one who wished to consult them or 
appeal to them. These various royal and official 
progresses were made with considerable state, and 
were always occasions of the greatest rejoicing 
among the people. 

The scheme of Government had at least this much 
in common with that of our own day, that a com- 
plete and careful system of registration was adopt- 
ed, births, marriages and deaths being catalogued 
with scrupulous accuracy, and statistics compiled 
from them in quite the modern style. Each Centur- 
ion had a detailed record of the names of all who 
were under his charge, and kept for each of them 
a curious little tablet upon which the principal 
events of his life were entered as they occurred. To 
his superior in turn he reported not names, but num- 
bers so many sick, so many well, so many births, 



142 MAN: WHENCE. HOW AND WHITHER 

so many deaths, etc., and these small reports grad- 
ually converged and were added together as they 
passed higher and higher up the official hierarchy, 
until an abstract of them all periodically reached the 
Monarch himself, who had thus a kind of perpetual 
census of his Empire always ready to his hand. 

Another point of similarity between this ancient 
system and our own is to be found in the exceeding 
care with which the land was surveyed, parcelled out, 
and above all analysed the chief object of all this 
investigation being to discover the exact constitution 
of the earth in every part of the country, in order 
that the most appropriate crop might be planted in 
it, and the most made out of it generally. Indeed, 
it may be said that almost more importance was at- 
tached to the study of what WG should now call scien- 
tific agriculture than to any other line of work. 

This brings us directly to the consideration cf 
perhaps the most remarkable of all the institutions 
of this ancient race its land system. So excellent- 
ly suited to the country was this unique arrange- 
ment, that the far inferior race which, thousands of 
years later, conquered and enslaved the degenerate 
descendants of our Peruvians, endeavoured to car- 
ry it on as well as they could, and the admiration of 
the Spanish invaders was excited by such relics of 
it as were still in working order at the time of their 
arrival. Whether such a scheme could be as success- 
fully carried out in less fertile and more thickly- 
populated countries may be doubtful, but at any 
rate it was working capitally at the time and place 
where we thus find it in action. This system we 
must now endeavour to explain, dealing first, for 
clearness' sake, with the broad outline of it only, 



TWO ATLANTEAN CIVILISATIONS 143 

and leaving many points of vital importance to be 
treated under other headings. 

Every town or village, then, had assigned to it 
for cultivation a certain amount of such arable land 
as lay around it an amount strictly proportioned 
to the number of its inhabitants. Among those in- 
habitants were in every case a large number of work- 
ers who were appointed to till that land what we 
may call a labouring class, in fact; not that all the 
others did not labour also, but that these were set 
apart for this particular kind of work. How this 
labouring class was recruited must be explained 
later; let it be sufficient for the moment to say that 
all its members were men in the prime of life and 
strength, between twenty and five-and-forty years 
of age that no old men or children, no sickly or 
weakly persons, were to be seen among its ranks. 

The land assigned for cultivation to any given 
village was first of all divided into two halves, which 
we will call the private land and the public land. 
Both these halves had to be cultivated by the 
labourers, the private land for their own individ- 
ual benefit and support, and the public land for 
the good of the community. That is to say, the 
cultivation of the public land may be regarded 
as taking the place of the payment of rates and 
taxes in our modern State. Naturally the idea 
will at once occur that a tax which is equivalent to 
half a man's income, or which takes up half the time 
and energy that he expends (which in this case is 
the same thing) is an enormously heavy and most 
iniquitous one. Let the reader wait until he learns 
what was done with the produce of that tax, and 
what part it played in the national life, before he 



144 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

condemns it as an oppressive imposition. Let him 
realise also that the practical result of the rule was 
by no means severe; the cultivation of both public 
and private lands meant far less hard work than falls 
to the lot of the agriculturalist in England; for 
while at least twice a year it involved some weeks 
of steady work from morning till night, there were 
long* intervals when all that was required could 
easily be done in two hours' work each day. 

The private land, with which we will deal first, 
was divided among the inhabitants with the most 
scrupulous fairness. Each year, after the harvest 
had been gathered in, a certain definite amount of 
land was apportioned to every adult, whether man 
or woman, though all the cultivation was done by 
the men. Thus a married man without children 
would have twice as much as a single man; a 
widower with, say, two adult unmarried daughters 
would have three times as much as a single man; 
but when one of those daughters married, her por- 
tion would go with her that is, it would be taken 
from her father and given to her husband. For 
every child born to the couple, a small additional 
assignment would be made to them, the amount in- 
creasing as the children grew older the intention 
of course being that each family should always have 
what was necessary for its support. 

A man could do absolutely what he chose with his 
land, except leave it uncultivated. Some crop or 
other he must make it produce, but as long as he 
made his living out of it, the rest was his own affair. 
At the same time the best advice of the experts 
was always at his service for the asking, so that he 
could not plead ignorance if his selection proved 



TWO ATLANTEAN CIVILISATIONS 145 

unsuitable. A man not belonging to our technical 
'labouring class' that is, a man who was making 
his living in some other way could either cultivate 
his plot in his leisure time, or employ a member of 
that class to do it for him in addition to his own 
work : but in this latter case the produce of the land 
belonged not to the original assignee, but to the 
man who had done the work. The fact that in this 
way one labouring man could, and frequently quite 
voluntarily did, perform two men's work, is another 
proof that the fixed amount of labour was in reali- 
ty an extremely light task. 

It is pleasant to be able to record that a great 
deal of good feeling and helpfulness was always 
shown with regard to this agricultural work. The 
man who had a large family of children, and there- 
fore an unusually large piece of ground, could al- 
ways count upon much kindly assistance from his 
neighbours as soon as they had completed their 
own lighter labours; and any one who had reason 
for taking a holiday never lacked a friend to supply 
his place during his absence. The question of sick- 
ness is not touched upon, for reasons which will 
presently appear. 

As to disposing of the produce, there was never 
any difficulty about that. Most men chose to grow 
grain, vegetables or fruits which they themselves 
could use for food; their surplus they readily sold 
or bartered for clothes and other goods ; and at the 
worst, the Government was always prepared to buy 
any amount of grain that could be offered, at a fixed 
rate, a trifle below the market price, in order to store 
it in the enormous granaries which were invariably 
kept full in case of famine or emergency. 



146 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

But now let us consider what was done with the 
produce of that other half of the cultivated ground 
which we have called the public land. This public 
land was itself divided into two equal parts (each 
of which therefore represented a quarter of the 
whole arable land of the country), one of which was 
called the land of the King, the other the land of 
the Sun. And the law was that the land of the Sun 
must first be tilled, before any man turned a sod of 
his own private land ; when that was done, each man 
was expected to cultivate his own piece of land, and 
only after all the rest of the work was safely over 
was he required to do his share towards tilling the 
land of the King so that if unexpected bad weath- 
er delayed the harvest the loss would fall first upon 
the King, and except in an exceedingly inclement 
season could scarcely affect the people's private 
share ; while that of the Sun would be safeguarded in 
almost any possible contingency short of absolute 
failure of the crops. 

In regard to the question of irrigation (always 
an important one in a country, a great part of which 
is so sterile), the same order was always observed. 
Until the lands of the Sun were fully watered, no 
drop of the precious fluid was directed elsewhere; 
until every man's private field had all that it needed, 
there was no water for the lands of the King. The 
reason of this arrangement will be obvious later on, 
when we understand how the produce of these va- 
rious sections was employed. 

Thus it will be seen that a quarter of the entire 
wealth of the country went directly into the hands 
of the King; for in the case of money derived from 
manufactures or mining industries the division was 



TWO ATLANTEAN CWILISATIONS 147 

stil) tlio same first one-fourth to the Sun, then one- 
halt 7 to the worker, and then the remaining fourth 
to the King. What then did the King do with this 
enormous revenue? 

First, he kept up the entire machinery of Govern- 
ment to which reference has already been made. The 
salaries pf the whole official class, from the state- 
ly Viceroys of great provinces down to the com- 
paratively humble Centurions were paid by him, 
and not only their salaries but all the expenses of 
their various progresses and visitations. 

Secondly, out of that revenue he executed all the 
mighty public works of his Empire, the mere ruins 
of some of which are still wonders to us now, four- 
teen thousand years later. The marvellous roads 
which joined city to city and town to town through- 
out the Empire, hollowed out through mountains 
of granite, carried by stupendous bridges over the 
most impracticable ravines, the splendid series of 
aqueducts which, by feats of engineering skill in 
no way inferior to that of our own day, were en- 
abled to spread the life-giving fluid over the remotest 
corners of an often sterile country all these were 
constructed and maintained out of the income de- 
rived from the lands of the King. 

Thirdly, he built and kept always filled a series 
of huge granaries, established at frequent intervals 
all over the Empire. For sometimes it would 
happen that the rainy season failed altogether, and 
then famine would threaten the unfortunate agri- 
culturalist; so the rule was that there should always 
be in store two years' provision for the entire na- 
tion a store of food such as perhaps no other race 
in the world has ever attempted to keep. Yet, colos- 



148 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

sal as was the undertaking, it was faithfully carried 
out in spite of all difficulties ; though perhaps even 
the mighty power of the Peruvian Monarch could 
not have achieved it, but for the method of con- 
centrating food which was one of the discoveries of 
his chemists a method which will be mentioned 
later. 

Fourthly, out of this share he kept up his army 
for an army he had, and a highly trained one, 
though he contrived to utilise it for many other pur- 
poses besides mere fighting, of which indeed there 
was not often much to be done, since the less civilis- 
ed tribes which surrounded his Empire had learnt 
to know and respect his power. 

It will be better not to pause now to describe the 
special work of the army, but rather to fill in the 
remainder of our rough outline of the polity of this 
ancient State by indicating the place held in it by 
the great Guild of the Priests of the Sun, so far as 
the civil side of the work of that priesthood is con- 
cerned. How did this body employ their vast rev- 
enues, equal in amount to those of the King when 
his were at their highest point, and far more certain 
than his not to be diminished in time of distress or 
scarcity? 

The King indeed performed wonders with his 
share of the country's wealth, but his achievements 
pale when compared with those of the priests. 
First, they kept up the splendid temples of the Sun 
all over the land kept them up on such a scale that 
many a small village shrine had golden ornaments 
and decorations that would now represent many 
thousands of pounds, while the great cathedrals of 
the larger cities blazed with a magnificence which 



TWO ATLANTEAN CIVILISATIONS 149 

hap never since been approached anywhere upon 
earth. 

Secondly, they gave free education to the entire 
youth of the Empire, male and female not merely 
an elementary education, but a technical training 
that carried them steadily through years of close 
application up to the age of twenty, and sometimes 
considerably beyond. Of this education details will 
be given later. 

Thirdly (and this will probably seem to our 
readers the most extraordinary of their functions), 
they took absolute charge of all sick people. It is 
not meant that they were merely the physicians of 
the period (though that they were also), but that 
the moment a man, woiLan or child fell ill in 
any way, he at once came under the charge of the 
priests, or, as they more gracefully put it, became 
the 'guest of the Sun'. The sick person was im- 
mediately and entirely absolved from all his duties 
to the State, and, until his recovery, not only the 
necessary morlioiTipp, but also his food, were supplied 
to him free of all charge from the nearest temple of 
the Sun, while in any serious case he was usually 
taken to that temple as to a hospital, in order to 
receive more careful nursing. If the sick man were 
the breadwinner of the family, his wife and chil- 
dren also became ' guests of the Sun' until he re- 
covered. In the present day any arrangement even 
remotely resembling this would certainly lead to 
fraud and malingering; but that is because modern 
nations lack as yet that enlightened and universal- 
ly-diffused public opinion which made these things 
possible in ancient Peru. 

Fourthly and perhaps this statement will be 



150 MAN; WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

considered even more astonishing than the last 
the entire population over the age of forty-five 
(except the official class) were also ' guests of the 
Sun/ It was considered that a man who had work- 
ed for twenty-five years from the age of twenty 
when he was first expected to begin to take his share 
of the burdens of the State had earned rest and 
comfort for the remainder of his life, whatever that 
might be. Consequently every person, when he or 
she attained the age of forty-five, might, if he wish- 
ed, attach himself to one of the temples and live a 
kind of monastic life of study, or, if he preferred 
still to reside with his relatives as before, he might 
do so, and might employ his leisure as he would. 
But in any case he was absolved from all work for 
the State, and his maintenance was provided by the 
priesthood of the Sun. Of course he was in no 
way prohibited from continuing to work in any way 
that he wished, and as a matter of fact most men 
preferred to occupy themselves in some way, even 
though it were but with a hobby. Indeed, many most 
valuable discoveries and inventions were made by 
those who, being free from all need for constant 
labour, were at liberty to follow out their ideas, and 
experimentalise at leisure in a way that no busy man 
could do. 

Members of the official class, however, did not re- 
tire from active work at the age of forty-five, except 
in case of illness, nor did the priests themselves. In 
those two classes it was felt that the added wisdom 
and experience of age were too valuable not to be 
utilised ; so in most cases priests and officials died in 
harness. 

It will now be obvious why the work of the 



TWO ATLANTEAN CIVILISATIONS 151 

priests was considered the most important, and why, 
whatever else failed, the contributions to the trea- 
sury of the Sun must not fall short, for on them de- 
ponded not only the religion of the people, but the 
education of the young and the care of the sick and 
the aged. 

What was achieved by this strange system of 
long ago, then, was this : for every man and woman 
a thorough education was assured, with every op- 
portunity for the development of any special talent 
he or she might possess; then followed twenty-five 
years of work steady indeed, but never either un- 
suitable in character or overwhelming in amount 
and after that, a life of assured comfort and leisure, 
in which the man was absolutely free from any sort 
of care or anxiety. Some, of course, were poorer 
than others, but what we now call poverty was un- 
known, and destitution was impossible, while, in ad- 
dition to this, crime was practically non-existent. 
Small wonder that exile from that State was con- 
sidered the direst earthly punishment, and that the 
barbaric tribes on its borders became absorbed into 
it as soon as they could be brought to understand 
its system! 

It will be of interest to us to examine the religious 
ideas of these men of the olden time. If we had to 
classify their faith among those with which we are 
now acquainted, we should be obliged to call it a kind 
of Sun-worship, though of course they never thought 
for a moment of worshipping the physical sun. They 
regarded it, however, as something much more than 
a mere symbol; if we endeavour to express their 
feeling in Theosophical terminology, we shall per- 
haps come nearest to it by saying that they looked 



152 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

upon the sun as the physical body of the LOGOS, 
though that attributes to them a precision of idea 
which they would probably have considered ir- 
reverent. They would have told an enquirer that 
they worshipped the Spirit of the Sun, from whom 
everything came, and to whom everything must re* 
turn by no means an unsatisfactory presentment 
of a mighty truth. 

It does not seem that they had any clear concep- 
tion of the doctrine of reincarnation. They were 
quite certain that man was immortal, and they held 
that his eventual destiny was to go to the Spirit of 
the Sun perhaps to become one with Him, though 
this was not clearly defined in their teachings. They 
knew that before this final consummation many 
other long periods of existence must intervene, but 
we cannot find that they realised with certainty that 
any part of that future life would be spent upon this 
earth again. 

The most prominent characteristic of the religion 
was its joyousness. Grief or sorrow of any kind 
was held to be absolutely wicked and ungrateful, 
since it was taught that the Deity wished to see His 
children happy, and would Himself be grieved if He 
saw them grieving. Death was regarded not as an 
occasion for mourning, but rather for a kind of 
solemn and reverent joy, because the Great Spirit 
had accounted another of His children worthy to 
approach nearer to Himself. Suicide, on the other 
hand, was, in pursuance of the same idea, regarded 
with the utmost horror, as an act of the grossest 
presumption ; the man who committed suicide thrust 
himself uninvited into higher realms, for which he 
was not yet judged fit by the only authority who 



TWO ATLANTEAN CIVILISATIONS 153 

possessed the requisite knowledge to decide the 
question. But indeed at the time of which we are 
writing suicide was practically unknown, for the 
people as a whole were a most contented race. 

Their public services were of the simplest charac- 
ter. Praise was offered daily to the Spirit of the 
Sun, but never prayer; because they were taught 
that the Deity knew better than they what was re- 
quired for their welfare a doctrine which one 
would like to see more fully comprehended at the 
present day. Fruit and flowers were offered in 
their temples, not from any idea that the Sun-God 
desired such service, but simply as a token that they 
owed all to Him; for one of the most prominent 
theories of their faith was that all light and life 
and power came from the Sun a theory which is 
fully borne out by the discoveries of modern science. 
On their great festivals splendid processions were 
organised, and special exhortations and instructions 
were delivered to the people by the priests ; but even 
in these sermons simplicity was a chief characteris- 
tic, the teachings being given largely by means of 
picture and parable. 

It happened once that, in the course of our re- 
searches into the life of a particular person, we fol- 
lowed him to one of these assemblies, and heard 
with him the sermon delivered on that occasion by 
an old white-haired priest. The few simple words 
which were then uttered will perhaps give a better 
idea of the inner spirit of this old-world religion 
than any description that we can offer. The preach- 
er, robed in a sort of golden cope, which was the 
symbol of his office, stood at the top of the temple 
steps and looked round upon his audience. Then 



154 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

he began to talk to them in a gentle yet resonant 
voice, speaking quite familiarly, more like a father 
telling a story to his children than like one deliver- 
ing a set oration. 

He spoke to them of their Lord the Sun, calling 
upon them to remember how everything that they 
needed for their physical well-being was brought 
into existence by Him; how without His glorious 
light and heat the world would be cold and dead, and 
all life would be impossible ; how to His action was 
due the growth of the fruits and grains which form- 
ed the staple of their food, and even the fresh water, 
which was the most precious and necessary of all. 
Then he explained to them how the wise men of old 
had taught that behind this action which all could 
see, there was always another and still grander ac- 
tion which was invisible, but could yet be felt by 
those whose lives were in harmony with their 
Lord's; how what the Sun in one aspect did for the 
life of their bodies, that same office He also per- 
formed, in another and even more wonderful aspect, 
for the life of their souls. He pointed out that both 
these actions were absolutely continuous that 
though sometimes the Sun was hidden from the 
sight of His child the earth, yet the cause of such 
temporary obscuration was to be found in the earth 
and not in the Sun, for one had only to climb far 
enough up the mountains in order to rise above the 
overshadowing clouds, and discover that their Lord 
was shining on in glory all the time, entirely un- 
affected by the veil which seemed so dense when 
seen from below. 

From this the transition was easy to the spiritual 
depression or doubt which might sometimes seem to 



TWO ATLANTEAN CIVILISATIONS 155 

shut out the higher influences from the soul; and 
the preacher was most emphatic in his fervent as- 
surance that, despite all appearances to the con- 
trary, the analogy held good here also; that the 
clouds were always of men's own making, and that 
they had only to raise themselves high enough in 
order to realise that He was unchanged, and that 
spiritual strength and holiness were pouring down 
all the while, as steadily as ever. Depression and 
doubt consequently, were to be cast aside as the off- 
spring of ignorance and unreason and to be rep- 
robated as showing ingratitude to the Giver of all 
good. 

The second part of the homily was equally prac- 
tical. The full benefit of the Sun's action, continued 
the priest, could be experienced only by those who 
were themselves in perfect health. Now the sign of 
perfect health on all levels was that men should re- 
semble their Lord the Sun. The man who was in 
the enjoyment of full physical health was himself a 
kind of minor sun, pouring out strength and life 
upon all around, so that by his very presence the 
weak became stronger, the sick and the suffering 
were helped. In exactly the same way, he insisted, 
the man who was in perfect moral health was also a 
spiritual sun, radiating love and purity and holiness 
on all who were happy enough to come into contact 
with him. This, he sard, was the duty of man to 
show his gratitude for the good gifts of his Lord, 
first by preparing himself to receive them in all 
their fulness, and secondly by passing them undimin- 
ished to his fellow-men. And both these objects to- 
gether could be attained in one way, and in one way 
only by that constant imitation of the benevolence 



156 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

of the Spirit of the Sun, which alone drew His chil- 
dren ever nearer and nearer to Him. 

Such was this sermon of fourteen thousand years 
ago, and, simple though it be, we cannot but admit 
that its teaching is eminently Theosophical, and 
that it shows a much greater knowledge of the facts 
of life than many more eloquent addresses which 
are delivered at the present day. Here and there 
we notice minor points of especial significance ; the 
accurate knowledge, for example, of the radiation 
of superfluous vitality from a healthy man seems to 
point to the possession of clairvoyant faculty among 
the ancestors from whom the tradition was derived. 

It will be remembered that, besides what we may 
call their purely religious work, the priests of the 
Sun had entire charge of the education of the coun- 
try. All education was absolutely free, and its pre- 
liminary stages were exactly the same for all classes 
and for both sexes. The children attended prepara- 
tory classes from an early age, and in all these the 
boys and girls were taught together. Something 
corresponding to what we now think of as elemen- 
tary education was given in these, though the sub- 
jects embraced differed considerably. Beading, 
writing, and a certain kind of arithmetic, indeed, 
were taught, and every child had to attain facili- 
ty in these subjects, but the system included a 
great deal more that is somewhat difficult to classify 
a sort of rough and ready knowledge of all the 
general rules and common interests of life, so that 
no child of either sex arriving at the age of ten or 
eleven could be ignorant of the way in which the 
ordinary necessaries of life wore obtained, or of 
how any common work was done. The utmost kind- 



TWO ATLANTEAN CIVILISATIONS 157 

ness and affection prevailed in the relations between 
teachers and children, and there was nothing in the 
least corresponding to the insane system of imposi- 
tions and punishments which occupies so prominent 
and so baneful a position in modern school life. 

School hours were long, but the occupations were 
so varied, and included so much that we should not 
think of as school work, that the children were never 
unduly fatigued. Every child, for example, was 
taught how to prepare and cook certain simple kinds 
of food, how to distinguish poisonous fruits from 
wholesome ones, how to find food and shelter if lost 
in the forest, how to use the simpler tools required in 
carpentering, in building, or in agriculture, how to 
make his way from place to place by the positions 
of the sun and stars, how to manage a canoe, as well 
as to. swim, to climb, and to leap with amazing dex- 
terity. They were also instructed in the method of 
dealing with wounds and accidents, and the use of 
certain herbal remedies was explained to them. All 
this varied and remarkable curriculum was no mere 
matter of theory for them ; they were constantly re- 
quired to put the whole of it into practice ; so that 
before they were allowed to pass out of this prepara- 
tory school they had become exceedingly handy 
little people, capable of acting for themselves to 
some extent in almost any emergency that might 
arise. 

They were also carefully instructed in the con- 
stitution of their country, and the reasons for its 
various customs and regulations were explained to 
them. On the other hand, they were entirely igno- 
rant of many things which European children learn; 
they were unacquainted with any language except 



158 MAN: WHENCE. HOW AND WHITHER 

their own, and though great stress was laid upon 
speaking that with purity and accuracy, facility in 
this was attained by constant practice rather than 
by the observance of grammatical rules. They 
knew nothing of algebra, geometry or history, and 
nothing of geography beyond that of their own 
country. On leaving this first school they could 
have built you a comfortable house, but could not 
have made a sketch of it for you; they knew nothing 
whatever of chemistry, but were thoroughly well in- 
structed in the general principles of practical hy- 
giene. 

A certain definite standard in all these varied 
qualifications for good citizenship had to be attained 
before the children could pass out of this prelimina- 
ry school. Most of them easily gained this level by 
the time they were twelve years old; a few of the 
less intelligent needed several years longer. On the 
chief teachers of these preparatory schools rested 
the serious responsibility of determining the pupil's 
future career; or, rather perhaps, of advising him 
as to it, for no child was ever forced to devote him- 
self to work which he disliked. Some definite career, 
however, he had to select, and when this was decided, 
he was drafted into a kind of technical school, which 
was specially intended to prepare him for the line 
of life that he had chosen. Here he spent the re- 
maining nine or ten years of his pupilage, chiefly in 
practical work of the kind to which he was to 
devote his energies. This characteristic was promi- 
nent all through the scheme of instruction; there was 
comparatively little theoretical teaching; but, after 
being shown a thing a few times, the boys or girls 
were always set to do the thing themselves, and to 



TWO ATLANTEAN CIVILISATIONS 159 

do it over and over again until facility was acquired. 

There was a great deal of elasticity about all 
these arrangements ; a child, for example, who after 
due trial found himself unsuited for the special work 
he had undertaken, was allowed, in consultation with 
his teachers, to choose another vocation and transfer 
himself to the school appropriate to it. Such trans- 
fers, however, seem to have been rare ; for in most 
cases before the child left his first school he had 
shown a decided aptitude for one or another of the 
lines of life which lay open before him. 

Every child, whatever might be his birth, had 
the opportunity of being trained to join the govern- 
ing class of the country if he wished it, and if his 
teachers approved. The training for this honour 
was, however, so exceedingly severe, and the quali- 
fications required so high, that the number of appli- 
cants was never unduly large. The instructors, in- 
deed, were always watching for children of unusual 
ability, in order that they might endeavour to fit 
them for this honourable but arduous position, if 
they were willing to undertake it. 

There were various vocations among which a boy 
could make his choice, besides the governing class 
and the priesthood. There were many kinds of man- 
ufactures some with large openings for the de- 
velopment of artistic faculty in various ways ; there 
were the different lines of working in metals, of 
making and improving machinery, of architecture of 
all sorts. But perhaps the principal pursuit of the 
country was that of scientific agriculture. 

Upon this the welfare of the nation largely de- 
pended, and to this therefore a great deal of atten- 
tion had always been given. By a long series of 



160 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

patiently conducted experiments, extending over 
many generations, the capabilities of the various 
kinds of soil which were to be found in the coun- 
try had been thoroughly ascertained, so that at 
the time with which we are dealing there already 
existed a large body of tradition on this subject. 
Detailed accounts of all the experiments were kept 
in what we should now call the archives of the Agri- 
cultural Department, but the general results were 
epitomised for popular use in a series of short max- 
ims, so arranged as to be readily memorised by the 
students. 

Those who adopted farming as a profession were 
not, however, by any means expected to depend ex- 
clusively upon the opinions of their forefathers. On 
the contrary every encouragement was given to new 
experiment, and anyone who succeeded in inventing 
a new and useful manure, or a labour-saving machine, 
was highly honoured and rewarded by the Govern- 
ment. All over the country were scattered a large 
number of Government Farms, where young men 
were carefully trained; and here again, as in the 
earlier schools, the training was less theoretical than 
practical, each student learning thoroughly how to 
do for himself every detail of the work which he 
would afterwards have to superintend. 

It was at these training-farms that all new ex- 
periments were tried, at the cost of the Government. 
The inventor had none of the trouble in securing a 
patron with capital to test his discovery, which is 
so often a fatal bar to his success in the present day ; 
he simply submitted his idea to the Chief of his dis- 
trict, who was assisted when necessary by a council 
of experts, and unless these were able to point out 



TWO ATLANTEAN CIVILISATIONS 161 

some obvious flaw in his reasoning, his scheme was 
tried, or his machine constructed, under his own 
supervision, without any outlay or trouble at all on 
his part. If experience showed that there was any- 
thing in his invention, it was at once adopted by the 
Government and employed wherever it was likely to 
be of use. 

The farmers had elaborate theories as to the adap- 
tation of various kinds of manure to the different 
soils. They not only used the material which we 
now import for that purpose from that very country, 
but also tried all sorts of chemical combinations, 
some of which were remarkably successful. They 
had an ingenious though cumbersome system of the 
utilisation of sewage, which was, however, quite as 
effective as anything of that kind which we have at 
the present day. 

They had achieved considerable advances also in 
the construction and use of machinery, though most 
of it was simpler and rougher than ours, and they 
had nothing like the extreme accuracy in the fitting 
together of minute parts, which is so prominent a 
characteristic of modern work. On the other hand, 
though their machinery was often large and cum- 
brous, it was effective, and apparently not at all 
liable to get out of order. One example that we 
noted was a curious machine for sowing seed, the 
principal part of which looked as though it had been 
modelled from the ovipositor of some insect. It 
was something of the shape of a very wide low cart, 
and as it was dragged across a field it automatical- 
ly drilled ten lines of holes at a regular distance 
apart, dropped a seed into each, watered it, and 
raked the ground even again. 



162 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

They had evidently some knowledge of hydraulics 
also, for many of their machines were worked by hy- 
draulic pressure especially those employed in their 
elaborate system of irrigation, which was unusual- 
ly perfect and effective. A great deal of the land 
was hilly and could not be cultivated to any advan- 
tage in its natural state; but these ancient inhabit- 
ants carefully laid it out in terraces, much as is done 
now in the hill country of Ceylon. Anyone who has 
travelled by rail from Eambukkana to Peradeniya 
can scarcely have failed to notice many examples of 
this sort of work. In old Peru every corner of 
ground near the great centres of population was 
utilised with the most scrupulous care. 

There was a good deal of scientific knowledge 
among them, but all their science was of a severely 
practical kind. They had no sort of idea of such 
an abstract study of science as exists among our- 
selves. They made a careful study of botany, for 
example, but not in the least from our point of 
view. They knew and cared nothing about the clas- 
sification of plants as endogenous and exogenous, 
nothing about the number of stamens in a flower, or 
the arrangement of leaves on a stem; what they 
wanted to know about a plant was what properties 
it possessed, what use could be made of it in 
medicine, as a food-stuff, or to furnish a dye. This 
they did know, and thoroughly. 

In the same way in their chemistry: they had no 
knowledge as to the number and arrangement of 
atoms in a carbon compound; indeed, they had no 
thought of atoms and molecules at all, so far as 
we could see. What interested them were such 
chemicals as could be utilised: those which could 



TWO ATLANTEAN CIVILISATIONS 163 

be combined into valuable manures or plant-foods, 
those which could be employed in their various manu- 
factures, which would yield them a beautiful dye or 
a useful acid. All scientific studies were made with 
some special practical point in view; they were al- 
ways trying to find out something, but always with 
a definite object connected with human life, never 
for the sake of knowledge in the abstract. 

Perhaps their nearest approach to abstract science 
was their study of astronomy ; but this was regarded 
rather as religious than as merely secular knowl 
edge. It differed from the rest in that it was pure- 
ly traditional, and that no efforts were made to add 
to their stock of information in this direction. The 
stock was not a great one, though accurate enough as 
far as it went. They understood that the planets 
differed from the rest of the stars, and spoke of 
them as the sisters of the earth for they recognised 
that the earth was one of them or sometimes 'the 
elder children of the Sun. ' They knew that the earth 
was globular in shape, that day and night were due 
to its rotation on its axis, and the seasons to its 
annual revolution round the sun. They were aware 
also that the fixed stars were outside the solar sys- 
tem, and they regarded comets as messengers from 
these other great Beings to their Lord, the Sun; but 
it is doubtful whether they had anything like an 
adequate conception of the real size of any of the 
bodies involved. 

They were able to predict eclipses both of the sun 
and moon with perfect accuracy, but this was not 
done by observation, but by use of a traditional 
formula; they understood their nature, and do not 
seem to have attached much importance to them. 



164 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

There is abundant evidence to show that those from 
whom they inherited their traditions must have been 
either capable of direct scientific observation, or else 
in possession of clairvoyant powers which render- 
ed such observation needless ; but neither of these ad- 
vantages appertained to the Peruvians at the date 
of our examination of them. The only attempt that 
they weret seen to make at anything like personal 
observation was that the exact moment of noon was 
found by carefully measuring the shadow of a lofty 
column in the grounds of the temple, a set of little 
pegs being moved along stone grooves to mark it 
accurately. The same primitive apparatus was em- 
ployed to find the date of the summer and winter 
solstices, since in connection with these periods there 
were special religious services. 



CHAPTER XII 

TWO ATLANTEAN CIVILISATIONS 
Toltec, in Ancient Peru, B. C. 12,000 
(Continued) 

THE architecture of this ancient race differed in 
many ways from any other with which we are ac- 
quainted, and its study would be of extreme interest 
to any clairvoyant who was possessed of technical 
knowledge of the subject. Our own lack of such 
knowledge makes it difficult for us to describe its 
details accurately, though we may, perhaps, hope to 
convey something of the general impression which it 
gives at the first glance to observers of the present 
century. 

It was colossal, yet unpretentious; bearing evi- 
dence in many cases of years of patient labour, but 
distinctly designed for use rather tjian for show. 
Many of the buildings were of vast extent, but most 
of them would seem to a modern eye somewhat out 
of proportion, the ceilings being nearly always much 
too low for the size of the rooms. For example, it 
was no unusual thing to find in the house of a 
Governor several apartments about the size of West- 
minster Hall, and yet none of them would measure 
more than twelve feet or so from floor to ceiling. 

165 



166 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

Pillars were not unknown, but were sparingly used, 
and what with us would be a graceful colonnade was 
in old Peru more usually a wall with frequent aper- 
tures in it. Such pillars as there were were massive, 
and often monolithic. 

The true arch with the keystone was apparently 
unknown" to them, though windows or doors with a 
semi-circular top were by no means uncommon. In 
the larger examples of these a heavy metal semi- 
circle was sometimes made and fixed upon the side- 
posts of the aperture ; but they generally trusted en- 
tirely to the powerful adhesive which they used in 
the place of mortar. The exact nature of this ma- 
terial we do not know, but it was certainly effec- 
tive. They cut and fitted their enormous blocks of 
stone with the greatest accuracy, so that the joint 
was barely perceptible ; then they plastered the out- 
side of each junction with clay, and poured in their 
'mortar' in a hot and fluid condition. Minute as 
were the crevices between the stones, this fluid found 
and filled them, and when it cooled it set like flint, 
which, indeed, it closely resembled in appearance. 
The clay was then scraped off the outside, and the 
wall was complete; and if after the lapse of cen- 
turies a crack in the masonry ever made its appear- 
ance it was certainly not at any of the joints, for 
they were stronger than even the stone itself. 

The majority of the houses of the peasantry were 
built of what we must call brick, since it was manu- 
factured from clay; but the 'bricks' were large cubes, 
measuring perhaps a yard each way; and the clay 
was not baked, but mixed with some chemical prep- 
aration and left in the open air for some months 
to harden ; so that in consistency and appearance they 



TWO ATLANTEAN CIVILISATIONS 167 

resembled blocks of cement rather than bricks, and 
a house built of them was scarcely inferior in any 
way to one of stone. 

All houses, even the smallest, were built on the 
classical and oriental plan of the central courtyard, 
and all alike had walls of what would now be con- 
sidered enormous thickness. The simplest and 
poorest cottage had only four rooms, one on each of 
the sides of the tiny courtyard into which they all 
faced, and as these rooms had usually no external 
windows the appearance of such houses from out- 
side was dull and bare. Very little attempt at ex- 
terior ornament was made in the poorer parts of the 
city or village ; a kind of frieze of a very simple pat- 
tern was usually all that broke the monotony of the 
dead walls of the cottages. 

The entrance was always at one corner of the 
square, and in earlier days the door was simply a 
huge slab of stone, which ran up, like a portcullis 
or a modern sash-window, in grooves and by means 
of counterweights. When the door was shut the 
counterweights could be rested on shelves and de- 
tached, so that the door remained a practically im- 
movable mass, which would have been distinctly dis- 
couraging to a burglar, had any such person existed 
in so well-ordered a State. In better-class houses 
this door-slab was elaborately carved, and at a later 
period it was often replaced by a thick plate of metal. 
The method of working it, however, was but little 
varied, though a few instances were observed of 
heavy metal doors which turned on pivots. 

The larger houses were originally built on exactly 
the same plan, though with a good deal more or- 
namentation, not only in the way of carving the 



168 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

stone into patterns, but also in diversifying its sur- 
face with broad bands of metal. In such a climate, 
dwellings so massively built were almost everlasting, 
and the majority of the houses in existence and oc- 
cupation at the time of which we write were of this 
type. Some later ones, however, evidently built in 
the centuries when the population had become con- 
vinced of the stability of the Government system, and 
of its power to make the laws respected had 
a double set of rooms round their courtyards, as 
any modern house might have, one set facing into the 
yard (which in their case was a beautifully-laid-out 
garden) and the other facing outwards towards the 
surrounding scenery. This latter set had large win- 
dows or rather openings, for, though several kinds 
of glass were made, it was not used in windows 
which could be closed on the same principle as that 
of the doors. 

Still it will be seen that the general style of the 
domestic architecture, in large and small houses 
alike, was somewhat severe and monotonous, though 
admirably adapted to the climate. The roofs were 
mostly heavy and nearly flat, and were almost in- 
variably made either of stone, or of sheets of metal. 
One of the most remarkable features of their house- 
building was the almost entire absence of wood, 
which they avoided because of its combustibility; 
and in consequence of this precaution conflagrations 
were unknown in ancient Peru. 

The way in which houses were built was peculiar, 
No scaffolding was employed, but as the house was 
erected it was filled with earth, so that when the walls 
had risen to their full height there was a level sur- 
face of earth within them. Upon this the stones of 



TWO ATLANTEAN CIVILISATIONS 169 

the roof were laid, and then the hot cement was pour- 
ed between them as usual. As soon as that had set, 
the earth was dug out and the roof left to support 
its own prodigious weight, which, thanks to the 
power of that wonderful cement, it seems always to 
have done with perfect safety. Indeed, the whole 
structure, roof and walls alike, became, when finish- 
ed, to all intents and purposes one solid block, as 
though it had been hollowed out of the living rock 
a method, by the way, which was actually adopted in 
some places upon the mountain-side. 

A first-floor had been added to a few of the 
houses in the capital city, but the idea had not 
achieved popular favour, and such daring innova- 
tions were extremely rare. Something resembling 
the effect of a series of stories one above the other 
was indeed obtained in a curious way in some of 
the erections in which the priests or monks of the 
Sun were housed, but the arrangement was not one 
which could ever have been extensively adopted in 
a crowded city. An immense platform of earth, say 
a thousand feet square and about fifteen or eighteen 
feet in height, was first made, and then upon that, 
but fifty feet in from the edge on each side, an- 
other huge platform nine hundred feet square was 
constructed; upon that there was another having 
sides measuring eight hundred feet, and above that 
a fourth measuring seven hundred feet, and so they 
rose, steadily decreasing in size, until they reached 
a tenth stage only a hundred feet square, and then 
in the centre of that final platform they built a small 
shrine to the Sun. 

The effect of the whole was something like a great, 
flat pyramid rising by broad shallow steps a sort 



170 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

of Primrose Hill cut into terraces. And out of the 
upright front of each of these great platforms they 
hollowed out rooms cells, as it were, in which the 
monks and their guests lived. Each cell had an out- 
er and an inner room, the latter being lighted only 
from the former, which was quite open to the air 
on the side which faced outwards ; indeed it consisted 
only of three sides and a roof. Both rooms were 
lined and floored with slabs of stone, cemented into 
solidity in the usual manner. The terraces in front 
were laid out in gardens and walks, and altogether 
the cells were pleasant residences. In several cases 
a natural elevation was cut into terraces in this man- 
ner, but most of these pyramids were artificially 
erected. Frequently they ran tunnels into the heart 
of the lowest tL* of such a pyramid, and constructed 
subterranean chambers there, which were used as 
storehouses for grain and other necessaries. 

In addition to these remarkable flattened pyramids 
there were the ordinary temples of the Sun, some of 
them of great size and covering a large amount of 
ground, though all of them had, to European eyes, the 
universal defect of being too low for their length. 
They were always surrounded by pleasant gardens, 
under the trees of which was done most of the teach- 
ing for which these temples were so justly famed. 

If the exterior of these temples was sometimes less 
imposing than might have been desired, at any rate 
the interior more than atoned for any possible de- 
fects. The large extent to which the precious metals 
were used in decoration was a feature of Peruvian 
life even thousands of years later, when a handful 
of Spaniards succeeded in dominating the com- 
paratively degenerate race which had taken the 



TWO ATLANTEAN CIVILISATIONS 171 

place of that whose customs we are trying to de- 
scribe. At the time of which we write the inhabitants 
were not acquainted with our art of gilding, but they 
were exceedingly clever in hammering out metal into 
large thin plates, and it was no uncommon thing for 
the greater temples to be literally lined with gold 
and silver. The plates covering the walls were often 
as much as a quarter of an inch in thickness, and yet 
were moulded over delicate reliefs in the stone as 
though they had been so much paper, so that from 
our modern point of view a temple was frequently 
the depository of untold wealth. 

The race which built the temples regarded all this 
not as wealth in our sense at all, but merely as fit 
and proper decoration. It must be remembered that 
ornament of this nature was by no means confined 
to the temples ; all houses of any consideration had 
their walls lined with some kind of metal, just as 
ours now are papered, and to have the bare stone 
showing in the interior was with them equivalent to 
a white-washed wall with us practically confined to 
outhouses or the dwellings of the peasantry. But only 
the palaces of the King and the chief Governors were 
lined with pure gold like the temples ; for ordinary 
folk, all kinds of beautiful and serviceable alloys 
were made, and rich effects were produced at com- 
paratively little cost. 

In thinking of their architecture we must not 
forget the chain of fortresses which the King erect- 
ed round the boundaries of his Empire, in order that 
the barbarous tribes beyond the frontier might be 
kept in check. Here again for accurate description 
and for criticism that shall be worth anything we 
need the services of an expert ; but even the> veriest 



172 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

civilian can see that in many cases the situation of 
these forts was admirably chosen, and that, short of 
artillery, they must have been practically impreg- 
nable. The height and thickness of their walls was in 
some cases enormous, and they had the peculiarity 
(as indeed had all high walls in the country) that 
they gradually tapered from a thickness of many feet 
at the base to a much more ordinary size at a height 
of twenty or thirty yards. Look-out chambers and 
secret passages were hollowed out in the heart of 
these wonderful walls, and the interior of the fort 
was so arranged and so fully provisioned that the 
garrison must have been able to stand a prolonged 
siege without discomfort. The observers were par- 
ticularly struck by the ingenious arrangement of a 
series of gates one within the other, connected by nar- 
row and tortuous passages, which would have placed 
any force attempting to storm the fortress complete- 
ly at the mercy of the defenders. 

But the most wonderful works of this strange peo- 
ple were without doubt their roads, bridges and 
aqueducts. The roads were carried for hundreds of 
miles across the country (some of them for more 
than a thousand miles), with a splendid disregard of 
natural difficulties that would extort admiration from 
the boldest modern engineers. Everything was done 
on a colossal scale, and though the amount of labour 
involved must in some cases have been almost in- 
calculable, the results achieved were magnificent 
and permanent. The whole road was paved with 
flat slabs, much as are the sidewalks of our London 
streets ; but at each side of it all the way along were 
planted trees for shade, and odoriferous shrubs 
which filled the air with their fragrance ; so that the 



TWO ATLANTEAN CIVILISATIONS 173 

country was intersected with a network of splendid 
paved avenues, up and down which were daily pass- 
ing the messengers of the King. These men were 
in effect postmen also, since it was part of their duty 
to carry letters free of charge for any who wished 
to send them. 

It was when the road-constructors came to a rav- 
ine or a river that the patient genius and indomit- 
able perseverance of the race were seen at their 
highest level. As we have said, they were ignorant 
of the principle of the true arch, and the nearest that 
they could approach to it in bridge-building was to 
cause each layer of stones to project slightly beyond 
that below it, until in this way two piers eventually 
met, and their wonderful cement hardened the whole 
fabric into the likeness of solid rock. They knew 
nothing of coffer-dams and caissons, so they often 
spent incredible labour in temporarily diverting the 
course of a river in order that they might bridge it ; 
or, in other cases, they built out a breakwater into 
the stream until they reached the spot where the pier 
was to stand, and then, when it was thus completed, 
knocked away their breakwater. Because of these 
difficulties they preferred embankment work to 
bridging, wherever it was possible ; and they would 
often carry a road or an aqueduct across even a deep 
ravine with a considerable river in it, by means of a 
huge embankment with many culverts in it, rather 
than by an ordinary bridge. 

Their system of irrigation was wonderfully per- 
fect, and it was to a great extent carried on even 
by the later race, so that much of the country which 
has now relapsed into desert was green and fertile, 
until the water-supply fell into the still more incom- 



174 MAN-: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

petent hands of the Spanish conquerors. It is prob- 
able that no engineering feats in the world have 
been greater than the making of the roads and aque- 
ducts of ancient Peru. And all this was done not by 
the forced labour of slaves or captives, but as reg- 
ularly paid work by the peasantry of the country, 
assisted to a large extent by the army. 

The King maintained a large number of soldiers, 
in order that he might always be ready to cope with 
the border tribes ; but since their weapons were simple 
and they needed comparatively little drill of any sort, 
they were available by far the greater part of the 
time for public service of other kinds. The entire 
charge of the repair of public works of all sorts was 
confided to their hands, and they also had to supply 
the constant stream of post-runners who were carry- 
ing reports and despatches, as well as private cor- 
respondence, all over the Empire. The maintenance 
of everything was supposed to be well within the 
power of the army ; but when a new road had to be 
made or a new fort built additional help was general- 
ly hired. 

Of course it happened sometimes that war broke 
out yrith the less civilised tribes on the borders, but 
in the time of which we are writing these rarely gave 
any serious trouble. They were readily driven back, 
and penalties exacted from them; or sometimes, if 
they seemed amenable to a higher civilisation, their 
land was annexed to the Empire and they were 
brought under its regulations. Naturally there was 
some difficulty with such new citizens at first; they 
did not understand the customs and often did not see 
why they should comply with them ; but after a short 
time most of them fell into the routine readily 



TWO ATLANTEAN CIVILISATIONS 175 

enough, and the incorrigible ones, who would not, 
were exiled into other countries not yet absorbed into 
the Empire. 

These Peruvians were fairly humane in their wars ; 
as they were almost always victorious over the 
savage tribes this was comparatively easy for them. 
They had a saying: "You should never be cruel to 
your enemy, because to-morrow he will be your 
friend. " In conquering the surrounding tribes they 
always endeavoured to do so with as little slaughter 
as possible, in order that the people might willingly 
come into the Empire, and make good citizens with a 
fraternal feeling towards their conquerors. 

Their principal weapons were the spear, the sword 
and the bow, and they also made a considerable use 
of the bolas, an implement which is still employed by 
the South American Indians of the present day. It 
consists of two stone or metal balls joined by a rope, 
and is so thrown as to entangle the legs of a man or 
a horse, and bring him to the ground. When defend- 
ing a fort they always rolled down great rocks on 
the assailants, and the building was specially ar- 
ranged with a view to permitting this. The sword 
employed was a short one, more like a large knife, 
and it was used only when a man's lance was broken, 
or when he was disarmed. They usually trusted to 
demoralising their foes by well-sustained flights of 
arrowp, and then charged them with spears before 
they could recover. 

The weapons were well made, for the people ex- 
celled in metal-work. They used iron, but did not 
know how to make it into steel, and it was less valu- 
able to them than copper and various brasses and 
bronzes, because all these could be made exceedingly 



176 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

hard by alloying them with a form of their remark- 
able cement, whereas iron would not blend with it so 
perfectly. The result of this hardening process 
was remarkable, as even pure copper when subjected 
to it was capable of taking at least as fine an edge as 
our best steel, and there is little doubt that some 
of their alloys were harder than any metal that we 
can produce at the present day. 

Perhaps the most beautiful feature of their metal- 
work was its exceeding fineness and delicacy. Some 
of their engraving was truly wonderful almost too 
fine to be seen by the naked eye at all, at any rate by 
our modern eyes. Best of all, perhaps, was the mar- 
vellous gossamer-like filigree-work in which they so 
excelled ; it is impossible to understand how it could 
have been done without a magnifying glass. Much 
of it was so indescribably delicate that it could not be 
cleaned at all in the ordinary way. It would have 
at once destroyed it to rub or dust it, no matter how 
carefully ; so it had to be cleaned when necessary by 
means of a sort of blow-pipe. 

Another manufacture which was rather a specialty 
was pottery. They contrived, by mixing some chem- 
ical with their clay, to turn it out a lovely rich crim- 
son colour, and then they inlaid it with gold and 
silver in a way which produced effects that we have 
never seen elsewhere. Here again the exceeding 
delicacy of the lines was a matter of great wonder to 
us. Other fine colours were also obtained, and a 
further modification of that ever-useful flinty cement, 
when mixed with the prepared clay, gave it a trans- 
parency almost equal to that of our clearest glass. 
It had also the great advantage of being far less 
brittle than the glass of the present day; indeed, 



TWO ATLANTEAN CIVILISATIONS 177 

there was much about it which suggested an approach 
to the * malleable glass' of which we sometimes read 
as a mediaeval fable. They undoubtedly possessed 
the art of making a certain kind of thin porcelain 
which would bend without breaking, as will be seen 
when we come to deal with their literary achieve- 
ments. 

Since it was the custom of the nation to make so 
little use of wood, metal-work and pottery had to a 
great extent to take its place, and they did so with 
far greater success than we in these days should 
think possible. There is no doubt that the ancient 
Peruvians, in their constant researches into chemis- 
try, had discovered some processes which are still a 
pecret to our manufacturers ; but as time goes on they 
will be rediscovered by this fifth Eace also, and when 
once that happens, the pressing need and competition 
of the present day will force their adaptation to all 
kinds of objects never dreamt of in old Peru. 

The art of painting was practised to a consider- 
able extent, and any child who showed special apti- 
tude for it was encouraged to cultivate his talent to 
the utmost. The methods adopted were, however, 
quite different from our own, and their peculiar 
nature enormously increased the difficulty of the 
work. Neither canvas, paper nor panel was used 
as a surface, but thin sheets of a sort of silicious ma- 
terial were employed instead. The exact composi- 
tion of this was difficult to trace, but it had a deli- 
cate, creamy surface, closely resembling in appear- 
ance that of fine unglazed porcelain. It was not brit- 
tle, but could be bent much as a sheet of tin might 
be, and its thickness varied according to its size. 



178 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

from that of stout notepaper to that of heavy mill- 
board. 

Upon this surface colours of great brilliancy and 
purity were laid with a brush supplied by Nature 
herself. It was simply a length cut from the trian- 
gular stem of a common fibrous plant. An inch or 
so at the end of this was beaten out until nothing was 
left but the fibre, fine as hair but almost as tough as 
wire ; and so the brush was used, the unbeaten por- 
tion serving as a handle. Such a brush could, of 
course, be renewed again and again when worn out, 
bj a process analogous to cutting a lead-pencil ; the 
artist simply cut off the exposed fibre axid beat out 
another inch of the handle. The sharply-defined tri- 
angular shape of this instrument enabled the skilful 
painter to use it either to draw a fine line or to put 
on a broad dash of colour, employing in the first case 
the corner, and in the second the side, of his triangle. 

The colours were usually in powder, and were mix- 
ed as required, neither with water nor oil, but with 
some vehicle which dried instantaneously, so that a 
touch once laid on could not be altered. No out- 
line of any sort was drawn, but the artist had to train 
himself to dash in his effects with sure but rapid 
strokes, getting the exact tone of colour as well as 
the form in the one comprehensive effort, much as is 
done in fresco painting, or in some of the Japanese 
work. The colours were exceedingly effective and 
lumino.us, and some of them surpassed in purity and 
delicacy any that are now employed. There was a 
wonderful blue, clearer than the finest ultramarine, 
and also a violet and a rose colour unlike any modern 
pigment, by means of which the indescribable glories 
of a sunset sky could be reproduced far more closely 



TWO ATLANTEAN CIVILISATIONS 179 

than seems to be possible at the present day. Orna- 
ments of gold, silver and bronze, and of a metal of 
deep crimson colour which is not now known to 
science, were represented in a picture by the use of 
the dust of the metals themselves much asinmediaeval 
illuminations; and, bizarre as such a method seems 
to our modern eyes, it cannot be denied that it pro* 
duced an effect of barbaric richness which was ex- 
ceedingly striking in its own way. 

The perspective was good, and the drawing accu- 
rate, and quite free from the clumsy crudity which 
characterised a later period of Central and South 
American art. Though their landscape art was dis- 
tinctly good of its kind, at the time when we were 
studying them, they did not make it an end in itself, 
but employed it only as a background for figures. Re- 
ligious processions were frequently chosen as sub- 
jects, or sometimes scenes in which the King or some 
local Governor took a prominent part. 

When the picture was completed (and they were 
finished with remarkable rapidity by practised art- 
ists), it was brushed over with some varnish, which 
also possessed the property of drying almost instan- 
taneously. The picture so treated was practically in- 
delible, and could be exposed to rain or sun for a 
long time without any appreciable effect being pro- 
duced upon it. 

Closely associated with the art of the country was 
its literature, for the books were written, or rather 
illuminated, on the same material and with the same 
kind of colours as the pictures. A book consisted of 
a number of thin sheets, usually measuring about 
eighteen inches by six, which were occasionally 
strung together by wire, but far more frequently 



180 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

simply kept in a box from three to five inches in 
depth. These boxes were of various materials and 
more or less richly ornamented, but the commonest 
were made of a metal resembling platinum, and 
adorned with carved horn, which was somehow 
fastened to the metal surface by some process of 
softening, which made it adhere firmly without the 
use of either rivets or cement. 

So far as we could see, nothing of the nature of 
printing was known ; the nearest approach to it was 
the use of a kind of stencil-plate to produce numerous 
copies of some sort of official notice for rapid dis- 
tribution to the Governors all over the Empire. No 
instance has been observed, however, of any attempt 
to reproduce a book in this way; and indeed it is 
evident that such an experiment would have been 
considered a desecration, for the nation as a whole 
had a deep respect for its books, and handled them as 
lovingly as any mediaeval monk. To make a copy of 
a book was regarded as decidedly a work of merit, 
and many of them were most beautifully and artisti- 
cally written. 

The range of their literature was somewhat limit- 
ed. There were a few treatises which might have 
been classed as definitely religious, or at any rate 
ethical, and they ran mostly on lines not dissimilar 
from that of the old priest 's sermon, a summary of 
which was given in the preceding chapter. Two or 
three were even of distinctly mystical tendency, but 
these were less read and circulated than those which 
were considered more directly practical. The most 
interesting of these mystical books was one which so 
closely resembled the Chinese Classic of Purity, that 



TWO ATLANTEAN CIVILISATIONS 181 

there can be little doubt that it was a version of it 
with slight variations. 

The bulk of the literature might be roughly divid- 
ed into two parts scientific information and stories 
with a purpose. Treatises or manuals existed on 
every trade or handicraft or art that was practised 
in the country, and these were of the nature of offi- 
cial handbooks not usually the work of any one 
man, but rather a record of the knowledge existing 
on their subject at the time that they were written. 
Appendices were constantly issued to these books as 
further discoveries were made, or old ideas modified, 
and every person who possessed a copy kept it reli- 
giously altered and annotated up to date. As the 
Governors charged themselves with the dissemina- 
tion of such information, they were able practically 
to ensure its reaching everyone who was interested 
in it; thus the Peruvian monograph on any subject 
was a veritable compendium of useful knowledge 
about it, and gave the student in a condensed form 
the result of all the experience of his predecessors in 
that particular line. 

The stories were almost all of one general type, 
and were distinctly, as I have said, stories with a 
purpose. All but invariably the hero was a King, 
a Governor, or a subordinate official, and the nar- 
rative told how he dealt successfully or otherwise 
with the various emergencies which presented them- 
selves in the course of his work. Many of these 
stories were classics household words to the people, 
as well known among them as biblical stories are 
among ourselves, constantly referred to and quoted 
as examples of what ought or ought not to be done. 
So in almost any conceivable predicament, the man 



182 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

who had to face it had in his mind some sort of pre- 
cedent to guide his action. Whether all these tales 
were historical whether they were all accounts of 
what had actually happened, or whether some of 
them were simply fiction is not certain; but there 
is no doubt that they were generally accepted as true. 

When the scene of such a tale lay in a border pro- 
vince, plenty of wild adventure not infrequently came 
into it; but (happily for our friends the Peruvians) 
that wearisome bugbear of the modern novel-reader, 
the love-story, had not yet made its appearance 
among them. Many of the situations which arose in 
the tales were not without humour, and the nation 
was joyous and laughter-loving; yet the professedly 
comic story had no place in its literature. Another 
and more regrettable gap is caused by the complete 
absence of poetry, as such. Certain maxims and ex- 
pressions, couched in swinging, sonorous speech, 
were widely known and constantly quoted, much as 
some verses of poetry are with us; but, however 
poetical some of the conceptions may have been, 
there was nothing definitely rhythmical about their 
form. " Alliteration's artful aid" was invoked in the 
case of various short sentences which were given to 
children to memorise, and in the religious services 
certain phrases were chanted to music; but even 
these latter were fitted into the chanting in the same 
way as we adapt the words of a psalm to the Gregor- 
ian tone to which it is sung, not written to suit a 
definite sort of music, as our hymns are. 

This brings us to the consideration of the music 
of these ancient Peruvians. They had several vari- 
eties of musical instruments, among which were no- 
ticed a pipe and a kind of harp, from which a wild, 



TWO ATLANTEAN CIVILISATIONS 183 

sweet, inconclusive, aeolian sort of melody was ex- 
tracted. But their principal and most popular instru- 
ment was somewhat of the nature of a harmonium. 
The sound was produced by the vibration of a tongue 
of metal, but the wind was forced into the instrument 
not by the action of the feet, but by an ingenious 
mechanical arrangement. Instead of keys such as 
ours, appeared the tops of a cluster of small metal 
pillars, upon which the fingers of the player pressed, 
so that a performance upon it irresistibly reminded 
one of the action of a modern typewriter. 

Considerable power and great beauty of expres- 
sion were attainable with this machine, but the old 
Peruvian scale in music was the same as that of At- 
lantis, and it differed so radically from our own that 
it is almost impossible for us rightly to appreciate 
the effects produced by its means. So far as we could 
see no such thing as a piece of music, which could be 
written down and reproduced by anyone at will, was 
known to these people; each performer improvised 
for himself, and musical skill among them was not 
the ability to interpret the work of a master, but 
simply fertility and resource in improvisation. 

Sculpture also was an art fairly well developed 
among them, though one would perhaps characterise 
their style rather as bold, dashing and effective than 
as excelling in grace. Nearly all statues seem to 
have been of colossal size, and some of them were un- 
doubtedly stupendous pieces of work ; but to eyes ac- 
customed to the contemplation of Grecian art, there 
is a certain air of ruggedness in the massive strength 
of the old Peruvian sculpture. Fine work was, how- 
ever, done in bas-relief; this was almost always 
covered with metal, for the genius of this people 



184 MAN: WHENCE. HOW AND WHITHER 

turned especially in the direction of metal-work a 
line in which the most exquisite decorations were con- 
stantly produced. 

In connection with the daily life of the nation, 
and its manners and customs, there are some points 
which at once attract our attention as unusual and 
interesting. Their marriage customs, for example, 
were decidedly peculiar, for marriages took place 
on only one day in each year. Public opinion ex- 
pected everyone to marry, unless he had good reason 
to the contrary, but there was nothing that could be 
thought of as compulsion in the matter. The mar- 
riage of minors was prohibited, but as soon as young 
people came of age they were as free to choose their 
own partners as they are among ourselves. The wed- 
ding, however, could not take place until the proper 
day arrived, when the Governor of the district or 
town made a formal visitation, and all young peo- 
ple who had attained the marriageable age during 
the previous year were called up before him, and 
officially notified that they were now free to enter 
upon the state of matrimony. Some proportion of 
these had usually already made up their minds to 
take immediate advantage of the opportunity; they 
therefore stepped forward before the Governor and 
preferred their request, and he, after asking a few 
questions, went through a simple form and pro- 
nounced them man and wife. He also made an or- 
der rectifying the assignment of land to suit the 
new circumstances, for the newly-married man and 
woman now no longer counted as members of their 
respective fathers' families, but as full-fledged 
householders on their own account. The married 
man had therefore twice as much land of his own 



TWO ATLANTEAN CIVILISATIONS 185 

as the single man, but even so he rarely found the 
work connected with it at all excessive. 

A peculiarity was observed in connection with 
the principal food of the nation. The people took, 
of course, various kinds of food, just as men do 
now. We do not know whether animal flesh was 
prohibited, but it certainly was not eaten at the 
period which we were examining. The potato and 
yam were cultivated, and maize, rice, and milk in 
various combinations entered largely into their diet. 
They had, however, one curious and highly artifi- 
cial kind of food which might have been called their 
staff of life which took with them somewhat the 
place that bread takes with us, as the principal foun- 
dation of most of their meals. The basis of this 
was maize-flour, but various chemical constituents 
were mixed with it, and the resultant subjected to 
enormous pressure, so that it came out at the end 
of the operation as a hard and highly concentrated 
cake. Its components were carefully arranged, in 
order that it might contain within itself everything 
that was necessary for perfect nutrition in the smal- 
lest possible compass; and the experiment was so 
far successful that a tiny slice of it made sufficient 
provision for a whole day, and a man could carry 
with him a supply of food for a long journey with- 
out the slightest inconvenience. 

The simplest method of taking it was to suck it 
slowly like a lozenge, but, if time permitted, it could 
be boiled or cooked in various ways, all of which 
largely increased its bulk. Of itself it had scarcely 
any taste, but it was the custom to flavour it in 
various ways in the process of manufacture, and 
these varieties of flavour were indicated by different 



186 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

colours. A pink cake, for example, was flavoured 
with pomegranate, a blue one with vanilla, a yellow 
one with orange, a pink and white striped one with 
guava, and so on, so that every one's taste might be 
suited. 

This curiously compressed sweetmeat was the 
staple food of the country, and large numbers of 
people took practically nothing else, even though 
there were plenty of other dishes from which to 
select. It was manufactured in such enormous quan- 
tities that it was exceedingly cheap and easily with- 
in everybody's reach, and for busy people it had 
many and obvious advantages. Many fruits were 
cultivated, and people who liked them took them 
along with their lozenge, but all these additions were 
matters of taste and not of necessity. 

The race as a whole was fond of pet animals of 
various kinds, and in the course of ages they had 
specialised and developed these creatures to an ex- 
traordinary degree. Small monkeys and cats were 
perhaps the most general favourites, and there were 
many fancy varieties of each, bred almost as much 
out of all relation to the original creature as are the 
deformities called dachshunds at the present day. 
In regard to the cats, they made a great speciality 
of unusual colours, and they had even succeeded in 
breeding some of that colour which is so conspic- 
uously absent among quadrupeds a fairly decided 
and brilliant blue ! 

Many people were fond of birds also, as might be 
expected in a continent where so many magnificent- 
ly coloured specimens are to be found ; indeed, it is 
by no means impossible that we owe to* their care 
in breeding some of the splendid varieties of bird- 



TWO ATLANTEAN CIVILISATIONS 187 

life that now inhabit the forests of the Amazon. 
Some of the richer ladies had huge aviaries with 
golden wires in the courtyards of their houses, and 
devoted all their spare time to the endeavour to 
cultivate the intelligence and affection of their pets. 

The national dress was simple and scanty just 
a sort of loose flowing garment not at all unlike 
some of those that are worn in the East in the pres- 
ent day, except that the old Peruvian wore less 
white and was more addicted to colour than is the 
average Indian of the present day. A Peruvian 
crowd on a festal occasion was an exceedingly bril- 
liant sight, perhaps only to be paralleled now among 
the Burmese. The ladies as a rule exhibited a par- 
tiality for blue robes, and a dress closely resembling 
that often assigned by mediaeval painters to the 
Virgin Mary was one of the commonest at the time 
of which we are writing. The material was usually 
cotton, though the fine soft wool of the llama and 
vicuna was also sometimes used. A sort of cloth of 
great strength was made from the threads of the 
maguey, which were chemically treated in some way 
to make them fit for such use. 

The nation had all the facility in the use of purely 
mechanical methods of rapid calculation which is so 
characteristic of the Atlantean Eace. They em- 
ployed an abacus, or calculating-frame, closely re- 
sembling that used to-day with such dexterity by 
the Japanese, and they also made a cheaper substi- 
tute for such a frame out of a kind of fringe of 
knotted cord, which may perhaps be the original of 
the quipuSj which the Spaniards found in use in the 
same country thousands of years later. 

In studying an ancient civilisation like this, so 



188 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

many points of interest crop up points of resem- 
blance or of contrast with the life of our own time 
that the difficulty is rather to decide what to omit, 
in trying to give an account of it, than what to in- 
clude. We cannot convey to our readers the sense 
of vivid reality which it all bears to those of us 
who have seen it, but we trust that for some few 
at least we have been not entirely unsuccessful in 
making this long-dead past live again for a few brief 
moments. And be it remembered that we ourselves 
many of us who are now living and working in the 
Theosophical Society were born at this very time 
among the inhabitants of old Peru; many dear 
friends whom we know and love now were friends 
or relations in that far-off time also; so that the 
memory of all this that we have tried to describe 
must lie dormant, deep down within the causal bod- 
ies of many of our readers, and it is by no means im- 
possible that in some of them that memory may grad- 
ually be revived by quietly thinking over the de- 
scription. If any should be thus successful, they will 
realise how curious and interesting it is to look back 
into those long-forgotten lives, and see what we have 
gained and what we have failed to gain since then. 1 
At first sight it looks as though in many important 
ways there had been rather retrogression than ad- 
vance. The physical life, with all its surroundings, 
was undoubtedly better managed then, than, so far 
as we know, it has ever been since. The opportuni- 
ties for unselfish work and devotion to duty which 
were offered to the governing class have perhaps 
never been surpassed ; still it must be admitted that 
nothing in the way of mental struggle or effort was 

Appendix TV. 



TWO ATLANTEAN CIVILISATIONS 189 

necessary for the less intelligent classes, though 
when it did show itself it was richly rewarded. 

Undoubtedly the condition of public opinion is 
not so high, nor is the sense of duty so strong, now 
as it was then. But the comparison is in truth hard- 
ly a fair one. We are as yet a comparatively young 
Race, whereas that which we have been examining 
was one of the most glorious offshoots of a Race that 
had long passed its prime. We are passing now, 
because of our ignorance, through a period of trial, 
storm, and stress, but out of it all we too shall, in 
time, when we have developed a little common-sense, 
emerge into a season of rest and success, and when 
that time comes to us, it ought, by the law of evo- 
lution, to reach an even higher level than theirs. 

We must remember that, beautiful as was their re 
ligion, they had, so far as we know, nothing that 
could really be called Occultism; they had no such 
grasp of the great scheme of the universe as we have 
who are privileged to study Theosophy. When our 
fifth Root Race reaches the same stage of its life, 
we may assuredly hope to combine physical sur- 
roundings as good as theirs with true philosophical 
teaching, and with a higher intellectual and spirit- 
ual development than was possible for us when we 
formed part of that splendid old relic of Atlantean 
civilisation, fourteen thousand years ago. 



CHAPTER XIII 

TWO ATLANTEAN CIVILISATIONS 
Turanian, in Ancient Chaldaea, J5. C. 19,000 

ANOTHER ancient civilisation which has interested 
us, in its way, almost as much as that of Peru, was 
one that arose in the part of Asia which was after- 
wards called Babylonia or Chaldaea. One curious 
point these two great Empires of old have in com- 
mon that each of them in the period of its decad- 
ence, many centuries later than the glorious prime 
at which it is most profitable to study them, was 
conquered by people much lower in the scale of 
civilisation, who nevertheless attempted to adopt 
as far as they could the customs, civil and religious, 
of the effete race which they had subdued. Just as 
the Peru discovered by Pizarro was in almost every 
respect a pale copy of the older Peru which we have 
tried to describe, so the Babylonia known to the 
student of archaeology is in many ways a kind of 
degenerate reflection of an earlier and greater Em- 
pire. 

In many ways, but perhaps not in all. It is pos- 
sible that at the zenith of its glory the later king- 
dom may have surpassed its predecessor in military 
power, in the extent of its territories or its com- 
merce ; but in simplicity of life, in earnest devotion 

190 



TWO ATLANTEAN CIVILISATIONS 191 

to the tenets of the remarkable religion which they 
followed, and in real knowledge of the facts of na- 
ture, there is little doubt that the older race had 
the advantage. 

Perhaps there could hardly be a greater contrast 
between any two countries than we find between 
Peru and Babylonia. In the former the remark- 
able system of government was the most prominent 
feature, and religion formed a comparatively small 
part of the life of the people indeed, the civil func- 
tions of the priests as educators, as doctors, and as 
agents in the vast scheme of provision for old age, 
loom much more largely in the mind's eye than their 
occasional work of praise or preaching in connec- 
tion with the temple services. In Chaldaea, on the 
other hand, the system of government was in no way 
exceptional; the chief factor of life there was em- 
phatically religion, for no undertaking of any sort 
was ever begun without special reference to it. In- 
deed, the religion of the people permeated and dom- 
inated their life to an extent equalled perhaps only 
among the Brahmanas of India. 

It will be remembered that among the Peruvians 
the religious cult was a simple but extremely beau- 
tiful form of Sun-worship, or rather worship of the 
Spirit of the Sun ; its tenets were few and clear, and 
its chief characteristic was its all-pervading spirit 
of joyousness. In Chaldaea the faith was sterner 
and more mystical, and the ritual far more compli- 
cated. It was not the Sun alone that was rever- 
enced there, but all the Host of Heaven, and the re- 
ligion was in fact an exceedingly elaborate scheme 
of worship of the great Star-Angels, including with- 
in it, as a practical guide to daily life, a comprehen- 



192 MAN: WHENCE. HOW AND WHITHER 

sive and carefully worked-out system of Astrology. 
Let us postpone for the moment the description 
of their magnificent temples and their gorgeous 
ritual, and consider first the relation of this strange 
religion to the life of the people. To understand its 
effect we must try to comprehend their view of As- 
trology, and I think we shall find it on the whole 
an eminently common -sense view one which might 
be adopted with great advantage by professors of 
the art at the present day. 

, The idea that it is possible for the physical plan- 
ets themselves to have any influence over human 
affairs was of course never held by any of the 
priests or teachers, nor even, so far as we can see, 
by the most ignorant of the common people at the 
early period of which we are now speaking. The 
theory given to the priests was an exceedingly elab- 
orate mathematical one, probably handed down to 
them through an unbroken line of tradition from 
earlier teachers, who had direct and first-hand knowl- 
edge of the great facts of nature. The broad idea 
of their scheme is not difficult to grasp, but it seems 
impossible in our three dimensions to construct any 
mathematical figure which will satisfy the require- 
ments of their hypothesis in all its details at least 
with the knowledge at present at our disposal. 

The entire solar system, then, in all its vast com- 
plexity, was regarded as simply one great Being, 
and all its parts as partial expressions of Him. All 
its physical constituents the sun with his worder- 
ful corona, all the planets with their satellites, their 
oceans, their atmospheres, and the various ethers 
surrounding them all these collectively made up 
His physical body, the expression of Him on the 



TWO ATLANTEAN CIVILISATIONS 193 

physical plane. In the same way the collective astral 
worlds (not only the astral spheres belonging to 
these physical planets, but also the purely astral 
planets of all the chains of the system such, for 
example, as planets B and F of our own Chain) 
made up His astral body, and the collective worlds 
of the mental plane were His mental body the 
vehicle through which He manifested Himself upon 
that particular plane. 

So far the idea is clear, and corresponds closely 
with what we have ourselves been taught with re- 
gard to the great LOGOS of our system. 1 Now let it 
be supposed that in these ' bodies' of His at their 
various levels there are certain different classes or 
types of matter fairly equally distributed over the 
whole system. These types do not at all correspond 
to our usual division into subplanes a division 
which is made according to the degree of density of 
the matter, so that in the physical world, for ex- 
ample, we get the solid, liquid, gaseous and etheric 
conditions of matter. On the contrary, they con- 
stitute a totally distinct series of cross-divisions, 
each containing matter in all these different condi- 
tions, so that if we denote the various types by num- 
bers, we should have solid, liquid, and gaseous mat- 
ter of the first type, solid, liquid and gaseous matter 

indeed, we may sat at once that the Chaldsean theory 
upon these subjects was practically that which is held by 
many Theosophists at the present day. Mr. C. W. Lead- 
beater, in A Textbook of Theosophy and The Hidden Side 
of Things, has made, as the result of his own investigations, 
a statement on planetary influences which is to all intents 
and purposes identical with the belief held thousands of 
years ago (as the result of similar investigations) by the 
Chaldaean priests. 



]94 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

of the second type, and so on all the way through. 

This is the case at all levels, but for the sake of 
clearness let us for the moment confine our thought 
to one level only. Perhaps the idea is easiest to 
follow with regard to the astral. It has often been 
explained that in the astral body of a man matter 
belonging to each of the sub-planes is to be found, 
and that the proportion between the denser 
and the finer kinds shows how far that body is cap- 
able of responding to coarser or more refined de- 
sires, and so is to some extent an indication of the 
degree to which he has evolved himself. Similarly 
in every astral body there is matter of each of these 
types or cross-divisions, and in this case the propor- 
tion between them shows the disposition of the man 
whether he is excitable or serene, sanguine or 
phlegmatic, patient or irritable, and so on. 

Now the Chaldaean theory was that each of these 
types of matter in the astral body of the LOGOS, and 
in particular the mass of elemental essence function- 
ing through each type, is to some extent a separate 
vehicle almost a separate entity having its own 
special affinities, and capable of vibrating under in- 
fluences which might probably evoke no response 
from the other types. The types differ among them- 
selves, because the matter composing them original- 
ly came forth through different centres of the LOGOS, 
and the matter of each type is still in the closest sym- 
pathy with the centre to which it belongs, so that 
the slightest alteration of any kind in the condition 
of that centre is instantly reflected in some way or 
other in all the matter of the corresponding type. 

Since every man has within himself matter of all 
these types, it is obvious that any modification in, 



TWO ATLANTEAN CIVILISATIONS 195 

or action of, any one of these great centres must to 
some degree affect all beings in the system, and the 
extent to which any particular person is so affected 
depends upon the proportion of the type of matter 
influenced which he happens to have in his astral 
body. That is to say, we find different types of men 
as well as of matter, and by reason of their consti- 
tution, by the very composition of their astral bod- 
ies, some of them are more susceptible to one in- 
fluence, some to another. 

The whole solar system, when looked at from a 
sufficiently high plane, is seen to consist of these 
great centres, each surrounded by an enormous 
sphere of influence, indicating the limits within 
which the force which pours out through it is es- 
pecially active. Each of these centres has a sort of 
orderly periodic change or motion of its own, cor- 
responding perhaps on some infinitely higher level 
to the regular beating of the physical human heart. 
But since some of these periodic changes are much 
more rapid than others, a curious and complicated 
series of effects is produced, and it has been observed 
that the movement of the physical planets in their 
relation to one another furnishes a clue to the ar- 
rangement of these great spheres at any given mo- 
ment. In Chaldaea it was held that, in the gradual 
condensation of the original glowing nebula from 
which the system was formed, the location of the 
physical planets was determined by the formation 
of vortices at certain points of intersection of these 
spheres with one another and with a given plane. 

The influences belonging to these spheres differ 
widely in quality, and one way in which this differ- 
ence shows itself is in their action upon the ele- 



196 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

mental essence both in man and around him. Be it 
ever remembered that this influence was supposed 
to be exerted on all planes, not only upon the astral, 
though we are just now confining our attention to 
that for simplicity's sake. The influences may have, 
and indeed must have, other and more important 
lines of action not at present known to us ; but this at 
least forces itself upon the notice of the observer, 
that each such sphere produces its own special effect 
upon the manifold varieties of the elemental essence. 

One, for example, greatly stimulates the activity 
and vitality of those kinds of essence which especial- 
ly appertain to the centre through which it came, 
while apparently checking and controlling others; 
the influence of another sphere is strong over quite 
a different set of essences, which belong to its centre, 
while apparently not affecting the previous set in 
the least. There are all sorts of combinations and 
permutations of these influences, the action of one 
of them being in some cases greatly intensified, and 
in others almost neutralised, by the presence of 
another. 

It will inevitably be asked here whether our Chal- 
daean priests were fatalists whether having dis- 
covered and calculated the exact effect of these in- 
fluences on the various types of human beings, they 
believed that these results were inevitable, and that 
man's will was powerless to resist them. Their an- 
swer to this latter question was always most em- 
phatic; the influences have certainly no power to 
dominate man's will in the slightest degree; all they 
can do is in some cases to make it easier, or more 
difficult, for that will to act along certain lines. Since 
the astral and mental bodies of man are practically 



TWO ATLANTEAN CIVILISATIONS 197 

composed of this living and vivified matter which 
we now call elemental essence, any unusual excita- 
tion of any of the classes of that essence, or a sud- 
den increase in its activity, must undoubtedly affect 
to some extent either his emotions or his mind, or 
both ; and it is also obvious that these influences must 
work differently on different men, because of the 
varieties of essence entering into their composition. 

But it was moat clearly stated that in no case can 
a man be swept away by them into any course of ac- 
tion without the consent of his will, though he may 
evidently be helped or hindered by them in any ef- 
fort that he chances to be making. The priests 
taught that the really strong man has little need to 
trouble himself as to the influences which happen to 
be in the ascendant, but that for all ordinary peo- 
ple it is usually worth while to know at what mo- 
ment this or that force can most advantageously be 
applied. 

They explained carefully that the influences are 
in themselves no more good or evil than any other 
of the forces of nature, as we should say now; like 
electricity or any other great natural force they may 
be helpful or hurtful, according to the use that is 
made of them. And just as we should say that cer- 
tain experiments are more likely to be successful if 
undertaken when the air is heavily charged with 
electricity, while certain others under such condi- 
tions would most probably fail, so they said that an 
effort involving the use of the forces of our mental 
or emotional nature will more or less readily achieve 
its object according to the influences which pre- 
dominate when it is made. 

It was always understood, therefore, that these 



198 MAN: WHENCE, BOW AND WHITHER 

factors might be put aside as une quantite neglige- 
able by the man of iron determination or the student 
of real Occultism; but since the majority of the 
human race still allow themselves to be the helpless 
sport of the forces of desire, and have not yet de- 
veloped anything worth calling a will of their own, it 
was considered that their feebleness permitted these 
influences to assume an importance to which they 
had intrinisically no claim. 

The fact of a particular influence being in opera- 
tion can never make it necessary that an event 
should occur, but it makes it more likely to occur. 
For instance, by means of what is called in modern 
Astrology a Martian influence, certain vibrations of 
the astral essence are set up which tend in the direc- 
tion of passion. So it might safely be predicted of 
a man who had by nature tendencies of a passionate 
and sensual nature, that when that influence is prom- 
inently in action he will probably commit some crime 
connected with passion or sensuality; not in 
the least that he is forced into such crime, but only 
that a condition comes into existence in which it is 
more difficult for him to maintain his balance. For 
ihe action upon him is of a double character; not only 
is the essence within him stirred into greater activ- 
ity, but the corresponding matter of the plane out- 
side is also quickened, and that again reacts upon 
him. 

An example frequently given was that a certain 
variety of influence may occasionally bring about a 
condition of affairs in which all forms of nervous ex- 
citement are considerably intensified, and there is 
consequently a general sense of irritability abroad. 
Under such circumstances disputes arise far more 



TWO ATLANTEAN CIVILISATIONS 199 

readily than usual, even on the most trifling pre- 
texts, and the large number of people who are al- 
ways on the verge of losing their temper relinquish 
all control of themselves on even less than ordinary 
provocation. 

It might even sometimes happen, it was said, that 
such influences, playing on the smouldering dis- 
content of ignorant jealousy, might fan it into an out- 
burst of popular frenzy from which widespread dis- 
aster might ensue. Apparently the warning given 
thousands of years ago is no less necessary now ; for 
it was just in this way that the Parisians in 1870 
were moved to rush about the streets crying "A 
Berlin !" and just so also has arisen many a time 
the fiendish yell of "Din! din!" which so easily 
arouses the mad fanaticism of an uncivilized Mu- 
hammadan crowd. 

The Astrology of these Chaldaean priests there- 
fore devoted itself chiefly to the calculation of the 
position and action of these spheres of influence, so 
that its principal function was rather to form a rule 
of life than to predict the future; or at least such 
predictions as it gave were rather of tendencies than 
of special events, while the Astrology of our own 
day appears to devote itself largely to the latter 
line of prophecy. 

There can be no doubt, however, that the Chal- 
deans were right in affirming the power of 'a man's 
will to modify the destiny marked out for him by 
his karma. Karma may throw a man into certain 
surroundings or bring him under certain influences, 
but it can never force him to commit a crime, though 
it may so place him that it requires great deter- 
mination on his part to avoid that crime. Therefore 



200 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

it seems to us that what Astrology could do, then or 
now, is to warn the man of the circumstances under 
which at such and such a time he would find himself ; 
but any definite prophecy of his action under those 
circumstances can, theoretically, only be based upon 
probabilities even though we fully recognise how 
nearly those probabilities become certainties in the 
case of the ordinary will-less man in the street. 

The calculations of these priests of the old time 
enabled them to draw up a sort of official almanac 
each year, by which the whole life of the race was 
largely regulated. They decided the times at which 
all agricultural operations could most safely be un- 
dertaken; they proclaimed the fit moment for ar- 
ranging the breeding of animals and plants. They 
were the doctors as well as the teachers of the race, 
and they knew exactly under what collocation of 
influences their various remedies could be most effi- 
ciently administered. 

They divided their followers into classes, assign- 
ing each to what would now be called his ruling 
planet, and their calendar was full of warnings ad- 
dressed to these different classes; as, for example: 
"On the seventh day, those who worship Mars 
should be especially on the watch against causeless 
irritation " or : "From the twelfth to the fifteenth 
days there is unusual danger of rashness in matters 
connected with the affections, especially for the wor- 
shippers of Venus, ' ' and so on. That these warnings 
were of great use to the bulk of their people we 
cannot doubt, strange as such an elaborate system 
of provision against minor contingencies may ap- 
pear to some of us at the present day. 

From this peculiar division of the people into 



TWO ATLANTEAN CIVILISATIONS 201 

types, according to the planets which indicated the 
position of the centre of influence to which they were 
most readily susceptible, there arose an equally cu- 
rious arrangement both of the public temple services 
and of the private devotions of the worshippers. 
Certain daily hours of prayer, regulated by the ap- 
parent movements of the sun, were observed by all 
alike ; at sunrise, noon, and sunset, certain anthems 
or verses were chanted by the priests at the temples, 
and the more religious of the people made a point 
of being regularly present at these short services, 
while those who could not conveniently attend them 
nevertheless observed each of these hours by the 
recitation of a few pious phrases of praise and 
prayer. 

But, quite apart from these observances, which 
seem to have been common to all, each person had 
his own special prayers to offer to the particular 
Deity to whom by birth he was attached; and the 
proper time for them varied constantly with the 
motion of his planet. The moment at which it crossed 
the meridian appears to have been considered the 
most favourable of all, and next to that the few 
minutes immediately after its rising or immediately 
before its setting. It might, however, be invoked at 
any time while above the horizon; and even while 
below it the Deity of the planet was not entirely 
out of reach, though in this case he was addressed 
only in some great emergency, and the whole cere- 
monial employed was entirely different. 

The special calendars prepared by the priests for 
the worshippers of each of these planetary Deities 
contained full particulars as to the proper hours 
of prayer and the appropriate verses to be recited 



202 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

at each. What might be described as a kind of 
periodical prayer-book was issued for each planet, 
and all those who were attached to that planet were 
careful to provide themselves with copies of it. In- 
deed, these calendars were something much more 
than mere reminders as to hours of prayer; they 
were prepared under special stellar conditions (each 
under the influence of its own Deity) and were sup- 
posed to have various talismanic properties, so that 
the devotee of any particular planet always carried 
its latest calendar about with him. 

It followed, therefore, that the religious man of 
old Chaldoea had not a regular hour of prayer or 
worship which was always the same, day after day, 
as would be the case now; but instead of this, his 
time for meditation and religious exercise was mov- 
able, and would occur sometimes in the morning, 
sometimes at noon, sometimes in the evening, or 
even at midnight. But whenever it came he did 
not fail to observe it; however awkwardly the hour 
might clash with his business, his pleasure or his 
repose, he would have regarded it as a grave lapse 
from duty if he had omitted to take advantage of it. 
So far as we can see, there was no thought in his 
mind that the Spirit of the planet would in any 
way resent it if he neglected the hour, or indeed that 
it was possible for such a Spirit to feel anger at all ; 
the idea was rather that at that moment the Deity 
was pouring forth a blessing, and that it would be not 
only foolish but ungrateful to lose the opportunity 
so kindly offered. 

These, however, were only the private devotions 
of the people; they had great and gorgeous public 
ceremonies as well. Each of the planets had as- 



TWO ATLANTEAN CIVILISATIONS 201 

signed to it at least two great feast days in the year 
and the Sun and Moon appropriated considerably 
more than two. Each planetary Spirit had his tern 
pies in every part of the country, and on ordinary 
occasions his devotees contented themselves wit! 
frequent visits to the nearest; but on the greate] 
festivals to which we have referred, enormous mul 
titudes assembled on a vast plain in the neighbor 
hood of their capital city, where there was a grou] 
of magnificent temples, which were absolutely 
unique. 

These buildings were in themselves worthy of at 
tention as fine examples of a prehistoric style o 
architecture; but their greatest interest lay in th< 
fact that their arrangement was evidently intende< 
to represent that of the solar system, and that, whei 
the principle of this arrangement was understood 
it undoubtedly showed the possession by its design 
ers of a considerable knowledge of the subject. B: 
far the largest and the most splendid of all was th 
huge temple of the Sun, which it will presently b< 
necessary to describe somewhat more in detail. Th< 
others, erected at gradually increasing distance 
from this, might seem at the first glance to hav 
been built simply as convenience dictated, and no 
upon any orderly plan. 

Closer examination, however, showed that ther 
was a plan, and a remarkable one that not only th' 
gradually increasing distances of these smaller tern 
pies from the principal one had a definite ratio an< 
a definite meaning, but even the relative dimension 
of certain important parts of these fanes were no 
accidental, for they typified respectively the sizes o 
the planets and their distances from the solar orb. 

Now it is obvious to anyone who knows anythinj 



204 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

at all about astronomy that an attempt to construct 
to scale a model of the solar system in temples would 
be foredoomed to failure that is to say, if the tem- 
ples were to be available for worship in the ordinary 
way. The difference in size between the Sun and 
the smaller members of his family is so immense, 
and the distances between them are so enormous, 
that unless the buildings were mere dolls ' houses no 
country would be large enough to contain the entire 
system. 

How, then, did the Chaldaean Sage who designed 
this marvellous group of temples contrive to con- 
quer these difficulties? Precisely as do the illustra- 
tors of our modern books of Astronomy by using 
two entirely different scales, but preserving the rela- 
tive proportions in their delineation of each. There 
is nothing in this wonderful monument of ancient 
skill to prove to us that its designer knew the ab- 
solute sizes and distances of the planets at all, 
though of course he may have done so ; what is cer- 
tain is that he was perfectly well acquainted with 
their relative sizes and distances. He had either 
been taught, or had himself discovered, Bode's Law; 
how much further his knowledge went his buildings 
leave us to conjecture, except that he must certainly 
have possessed some information as to planetary 
magnitudes, though his computation of them differed 
in some ways from that now accepted. 

The shrines devoted to the inner planets made a 
sort of irregular cluster which seemed quite close 
under the walls of the great Sun-Temple, while those 
of the giant outer members of the solar family were 
dotted at ever-increasing intervals over the plain, 
until the representative of far-away Neptune was 



TWO ATLANTEAN CIVILISATIONS 205 

almost lost in the distance. The buildings differed in 
design, and there is little doubt that every variation 
had its special significance, even though in many 
cases we were unable to discern it. There was, 
however, one feature which all shared ; each of them 
possessed a central hemispherical dome, which was 
evidently intended to bear a special relation to the 
orb which it typified. 

All these hemispheres were brilliantly coloured, 
each bearing the hues which Chaldaean tradition as- 
sociated with its particular planet. The principle 
upon which these colours were selected is far from 
clear, but we shall have to return to them later when 
we examine the great festival services. These domes 
by no means always bore the same relation to the 
dimensions of their respective temples, but when com- 
pared one with another they were found to corres- 
pond closely to the sizes of the planets which they 
symbolised. With regard to Mercury, Venus, the 
Moon, and Mars, the Chaldsean measurements of rel- 
ative size corresponded precisely with our own ; but 
Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus, and Neptune, though im- 
mensely larger than the inner group, were yet de- 
cidedly smaller than they would have oeen if con- 
structed on the same scale according to our received 
calculations. 

This may have been due to the use of a different 
standard for these huge globes, but it seems to us 
far more probable that the Chaldaean proportions 
were correct, and that in modern astronomy we have 
considerably over-estimated the size of the outer 
planets. It is all but established now that the sur- 
face which we see in the case of Jupiter or Saturn 
is that of a deep, dense cloud-envelope, and not the 



206 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

body of the planet at all ; and if that be so, the Chal- 
daean representation of these globes is as accurate 
as the rest of their scheme. Another point in favour 
of such a suggestion is that, if it were accepted, the 
extraordinarily low density commonly assigned by 
our astronomers to the outer planets would be 
brought more nearly into agreement with that of the 
other worlds within our ken. 

A number of curious details combined to prove 
to us that thorough comprehension of the system 
which must have been possessed by the designer of 
these beautiful shrines. Vulcan, the intra-Mercurial 
planet, was duly represented, and the place in the 
scheme where our earth should have come in was 
occupied by the temple of the Moon a large one, 
though the hemisphere which crowned it seemed dis- 
proportionately small, being constructed exactly to 
the same scale as the rest. Close by this Moon- 
temple there arose an isolated dome of black marble 
supported by pillars, which from its size was evi- 
dently intended to typify the Earth, but there was no 
shrine of any kind attached to it. 

In the space (quite correctly calculated) between 
Mars and Jupiter there appeared no temple, but a 
number of columns, each ending in a tiny dome of 
the usual hemispherical shape; these we presumed 
to be intended to represent the asteroids. Every 
planet which possesses satellites had them carefully 
indicated by properly proportioned subsidiary 
domes arranged round the primary, and Saturn's 
rings were also clearly shown. 

On the principal festivals of any of the planets, 
all the votaries of the corresponding Deities (as we 
should say now, the people born under those planets) 



TWO ATLANTEAN CIVILISATIONS 207 

wore over or in place of their ordinary dress a 
mantle or cope of the colour considered sacred to 
the planet. These colours were all exceedingly bril- 
liant, and the material worn had a sort of sheen like 
satin, so that the effect was usually striking, es- 
pecially as many of the colours had another tint un- 
derlying them, as in what is called shot silk. A list 
of these colours will be of interest, although, as 
we have before remarked, the reason which dictated 
their choice is not always obvious. 

The dress worn by the followers of the Sun was a 
beautifully delicate silken material, all interwoven 
with gold threads, so that it appeared a veritable 
cloth of gold. But cloth of gold, as we know it now, 
is of a thick, unbending texture, whereas this fabric 
was so flexible that it could be folded like muslin. 

Vulcan's hue was flame-colour, striking, gor- 
geous, and distinctive possibly typical of the ex- 
treme propinquity of Vulcan to the Sun, and the 
fiery physical conditions that must obtain there. 

Mercury was symbolised by a brilliant orange hue, 
shot with lemon-colour shades not infrequently to 
be seen in the auras of his adherents as well as in 
their vestments ; but though in some cases the pre- 
dominant auric colours seem a possible explanation 
of these selections, there are others to which this 
would hardly apply. 

The votaries of Venus appeared in a lovely pure 
sky-blue, with an underlying thread of light green, 
which gave to the whole a quivering iridescent effect 
when the wearer moved. 

The garments of the Moon were naturally of 
white material, but so interwoven with threads of 
silver that practically it might be called cloth of 



208 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

silver, as the Sun's was cloth of gold. Yet in cer- 
tain lights this Moon-robe showed beautiful pale 
violet shades, which much enhanced its effect. 

Mars appropriately enough clothed his followers 
in a splendid brilliant scarlet, but with a strong 
crimson shade underlying it, and practically taking 
its place when seen from certain aspects. This 
colour was quite unmistakable, and totally distinct 
from those of Vulcan or Mercury. It may have been 
suggested either by auric appearances or by the rud- 
dy hue of the physical planet. 

Jupiter robed his children in a wonderful gleam- 
ing blue-violet material, dappled all over with tiny 
silvery specks. It is not easy to assign any reason 
for this, unless indeed it may again be attributed to 
auric associations. 

Saturn's votaries were clothed in clear sunset 
green, with pearl-grey shades underlying it, while 
those born under Uranus wore a magnificent deep 
rich blue that unimaginable colour of the South 
Atlantic, which no one knows but those who have 
seen it. The dress appropriated to Neptune was the 
least noticeable of them all, for it was a plain-looking 
dark indigo, though in high lights it too developed 
an unexpected richness. 

On the principal festivals of any one of these 
planets, its adherents appeared in full dress, and 
marched in procession to its temple, decked with 
garlands of flowers, bearing banners and gilded 
staves, and filling the air with sonorous chanting. But 
the grandest display of all was at one of the great 
feasts of the Sun-God, when the people came to- 
gether, each robed in the gorgeous vestment of his 
tutelary Deity, and the whole immense multitude 



TWO ATLANTEAN CIVILISATIONS 209 

performed the solemn circumambulation of the Sun- 
temple. On such an occasion the worshippers of the 
Sun filled the vast building to overflowing, while 
next to the walls marched the bands of Vulcan, next 
outside them those of Mercury, then the followers of 
Venus and so on, each planet being represented in 
the order of its position with reference to the Sun. 
The whole mass of people, thus arranged in con- 
centric rings of flashing colour, swept slowly, steadi- 
ly round like a colossal living wheel, and, under the 
flood of living light poured down by that all but 
tropical Sun, they formed perhaps as brilliant a 
spectacle as the world has ever seen. 

In order that some account may be given of the 
even more interesting ceremonies that took place on 
such occasions within that great temple of the Sun, 
it is necessary that we should attempt a descrip- 
tion of its appearance and arrangement. Its main 
plan was cruciform, with a vast circular space (cov- 
ered by the hemispherical dome) where the arms of 
the cross met. We shall gain a more correct image 
if, instead of thinking of the ordinary cruciform 
church with nave, chancel and transepts, we picture 
to ourselves a great circular domed chamber like 
the reading-room of the British Museum, and then 
imagine four huge naves opening out of it towards 
the four quarters of the compass; for all the arms 
of its cross were of equal length. Having fixed 
that part of the picture firmly, we must then add 
four other great openings between the arms of the 
cross, leading into vast halls whose walls curved 
round and met at the extremity, so as to give their 
floors the shape of an immense leaf or the petal of 
a flower. In fact, the ground-plan of the temple 



210 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

might be described as an equal-armed cross laid upon 
a simple four-petalled flower, so that the arms lay 
between the petals. 

A man standing in the centre under the dome 
would therefore see long vistas stretching out from 
him in all directions. The whole structure was care- 
fully oriented, so that the arms of the cross were ac- 
curately directed to the cardinal points. The southern 
end remained open and constituted the principal en- 
trance, facing the great altar which occupied the 
end of the northern arm. The eastern and western 
arms contained altars also, of enormous size from 
our point of view, though much smaller than the 
mnm erection at the northern end. 

These eastern and western altars seem to have 
fulfilled something the same purpose as do those ded- 
icated to the Blessed Virgin and to S. Joseph in a 
Catholic cathedral, fcr one of them was consecrated 
to the Sun and the other to the Moon, and some of 
the regular daily services connected with these two 
luminaries were celebrated at them. The great 
northern altar was, however, that round which all 
the greatest crowds gathered, at which all the grand- 
est ceremonies were performed, and its arrange- 
ments and furniture were curious and interesting. 

On the wall behind it, in the place occupied by the 
'east window' in an ordinary church except that 
this was north hung an immense concave mirror, 
far larger than any that we had ever before seen. 
It was of metal, quite probably of silver, and was 
polished to the highest possible degree. Indeed it 
was observed that the care of it, the keeping it 
bright and free even from dust, was considered to be 
a religious duty of the most binding nature. How 



TWO ATLANTEAN CIVILISATIONS 211 

such a huge speculum had been so perfectly cut, how 
it was that its own enormous weight did not distort 
it these are problems that would be serious ones 
to our modern artificers, but they had been success- 
fully solved by these men of long ago. 

Along the centre of the roof of this huge northern 
arm of the cross there ran a narrow slit open to the 
sky, so that the light of whatever star happened to 
be exactly upon the meridian shone straight into the 
temple and fell upon the great mirror. It is a well- 
known property of the concave mirror that it forms 
in the air in front of it, at its focus, an image of 
whatever is reflected in it, and this principle was 
cleverly used by the priests in order, as they would 
probably have put it, to collect and apply the in- 
fluence of each planet at the moment of its greatest 
power, A pedestal bearing a brazier was fixed in 
the floor beneath the focus of the mirror, and just 
as a planet was coming to the meridian and therefore 
shining through the slit in the roof, a quantity of 
sweet-smelling incense was thrown upon the glowing 
charcoal. A pillar of light grey smoke immediate- 
ly ascended, and in the midst of it gleamed forth the 
living image of the star. Then the worshippers 
bowed their heads, and the glad chant of the priests 
rang out ; in fact, this ceremony reminded us some- 
what of the elevation of the Host in a Catholic 
church. 

When necessary another piece of machinery was 
brought into action a flat circular mirror which 
could be lowered from the roof by lines so as to 
occupy exactly the focus of the great mirror. This 
carught the reflected image of the planet, and by tilt- 
ing it the concentrated light received from the con- 



212 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

cave mirror could be poured down upon certain 
spots on the floor of the temple. On these spots 
were laid the sick for whom it was considered that 
that particular influence would be beneficial, while 
the priest prayed that the planetary Spirit would 
pour healing and strength upon them ; and undoubt- 
edly cures did frequently reward their endeavours, 
though it may well be that faith played a large part 
in obtaining the result. 

The lighting of certain sacred fires when the Sun 
himself crossed the meridian was achieved by means 
of the same mechanism, though one of the most in- 
teresting ceremonies of this nature was always per- 
formed at the western altar. Upon this altar burnt 
always what was called ' sacred Moon-fire,' and 
this was allowed to go out only once a year, on 
the night before the spring equinox. The follow- 
ing morning the rays of the Sun, passing through an 
orifice above the eastern altar, fell directly upon that 
at the west end, and by means of a glass globe filled 
with water which was suspended in their path and 
acted as a lens, the Sun himself relit the sacred 
Moon-fire, which was then carefully tended and kept 
burning for another year. 

The inner surface of the great dome was painted 
to represent the night-sky, and by some complicated 
mechanism the principal constellations were made to 
move over it exactly as the real stars were moving 
outside, so that at any time of the day, or on a cloudy 
night, a worshipper could always tell in the temple 
the precise position of any of the signs of the 
zodiac, and of the various planets in relation to 
them. Luminous bodies were used to represent the 



TWO ATLANTEAN CIVILISATIONS 213 

planets, and in the earlior days of this religion, pre- 
cisely as in the earlier days of the Mysteries, these 
bodies were real materialisations called into exist- 
ence by the Adept Teachers, and moving freely in 
the air; but in both cases in later days, when less 
evolved men had to take the place of these exalted 
Beings, it was found difficult or impossible to make 
the materialisations work properly, and so their 
place was filled by ingenious mechanical contrivances 
a kind of orrery on a gigantic scale. The outside 
of this huge dome was thinly plated with gold ; and 
it was noteworthy that a peculiar dappled effect was 
produced on the surface, evidently intended to rep- 
resent what are called the * willow-leaves ' or * rice- 
grains' of the Sun. 

Another interesting feature of this temple was an 
underground room or crypt, which was reserved for 
the exclusive use of the priests, apparently with a 
view to meditation and self-development. The only 
light admitted came through thick plates of a crystal- 
like substance of various colours, which were let into 
the floor of the temple, but arrangements were made 
to reflect the sun's rays through this medium when 
necessary, and the priest who was practising his 
meditation allowed this reflected light to fall upon 
the various centres in his body sometimes upon 
that between the eyes, sometimes upon the base of 
the spine, and so on. This evidently aided in the de- 
velopment of the power of divination, of clair- 
voyance and of intuition ; and it was evident that the 
particular colour of light used depended not only 
upon the object sought, but upon the planet or type 
to which the priest belonged. It was also noticed 
that the thyrsus, the hollow rod charged with electric 



214 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

or vital fire, was used here, just as it was in the 
Grecian Mysteries. 

An interesting part of the study of this old-world 
religion is the endeavour to understand exactly what 
its teachers meant when they spoke of the Star- 
Angel, the Spirit of a star. A little careful investi- 
gation shows that the terms, though sometimes 
synonymous, are not always so, for they seem to have 
included at least three quite different conceptions 
under the one title 'the Spirit of a planet'. 

First they believed in the existence, in connection 
\\ ith each planet, of an undeveloped, semi-intelligent 
yet exceedingly potent entity, which we can perhaps 
best express in our Theosophical terminology as the 
collective elemental essence of that planet, regarded 
as one huge creature. We know how, in the case of 
a man, the elemental essence which enters into the 
composition of his astral body becomes to all intents 
and purposes a separate entity, which has some- 
times been called the desire-elemental; how its many 
different types and classes combine into a tempora- 
ry unity, capable of definite action in its own de- 
fence, as for example against the disintegrating pro- 
cess which sets in after death. If in just the same 
way we can conceive of the totality of the elemental 
kingdoms in a particular planet energising as a 
whole, we shall have grasped exactly the theory held 
by the ancient Chaldaeans with regard to this first 
variety of planetary Spirit, for which 'planetary 
elemental' would be a far more appropriate name. 
It was the influence (or perhaps the magnetism) of 
this planetary elemental which they tried to focus 
upon people suffering from certain diseases, or to 
imprison in a talisman for future use. 



TWO ATLANTEAN CIVILISATIONS 215 

The priests held that the physical planets which 
we can see serve as pointers to indicate the position 
or condition of the great centres in the body of the 
LOGOS Himself, and also that through each of these 
great centres poured out one of the ten types of es- 
sence out of which, according to them, everything 
was built. Each of these types of essence, when 
taken by itself, was identified with a planet, and 
this also was frequently called the Spirit of the 
planet, thus giving another and quite different mean- 
ing to the term. In this sense they spoke of the 
Spirit of each planet as omnipresent throughout 
the solar system, as working within each man 
and showing itself in his actions, as manifesting 
through certain plants or minerals and giving them 
their distinctive properties. Naturally it was this 
4 Spirit of the pl&net' within man which could be 
acted upon by the condition of the great centre to 
which it belonged, and it was with reference to this 
that all their astrological warnings were issued. 

When, however, the Chaldaeans invoked the bless- 
ing of the Spirit of a planet, or endeavoured by earn- 
est and reverent meditation to raise themselves to- 
wards Him, they were using the expression in yet 
another sense. They thought of each of these great 
centres as giving birth to and working through a 
whole hierarchy of great Spirits, and at the head of 
each of these hierarchies stood one great One who 
was called pre-eminently 'The Spirit of the planet,' 
or more frequently the Star-Angel. It was His 
benediction that was sought by those who were more 
especially born under His influence, and He was re- 
garded by them much as the great Archangels, the 
" seven Spirits before the throne of God," are re- 



216 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

garded by the devout Christian as a mighty Min- 
ister of the divine power of the LOGOS, a channel 
through which that ineffable splendour manifests it- 
self. It was whispered that when the festival of 
some particular planet was being held in that great 
temple, and when at the critical moment the image 
of the Star shone out brightly amid the incense-cloud, 
those whose eyes were opened by the fervour of their 
devotion had sometimes seen the mighty form of 
the Star-Angel hovering beneath the blazing orb, 
so that it shone upon his forehead as he looked down 
benignantly upon those worshippers with whose evo- 
lution he was so closely connected. 

It was one of the tenets of this ancient faith that 
it was in rare cases a possibility for highly develop- 
ed men, who were full of heartfelt devotion to their 
Angel, to raise themselves by stress of long-continu- 
ed meditation out of their world into His to change 
the whole course of their evolution, and secure their 
next birth not on this planet any more, but on His ; 
and the temple records contained accounts of priests 
who had done this, and so passed beyond human ken. 
It was held that once or twice in history this had 
happened with regard to that still greater order of 
stellar Deities, who were recognised as belonging to 
the fixed stars far outside of the solar system alto- 
gether; but these latter were thought of as daring 
flights into the unknown, as to the advisability of 
which even the greatest of the high priests were 
silent. 

Strange as these methods may seen to us now, 
widely as they may differ from anything that is 
being taught to us in our Theosophical study, it 
would be foolish for us to criticise them, or to doubt 



TWO ATLANTEAN CIVILISATIONS 217 

that, for those to whom they appeal, they may be as 
efficacious as our own. We know that in the great 
White Brotherhood there are many Masters, and 
that though the Qualifications required for each step 
of the Path are the same for all candidates, yet each 
great Teacher adopts for His pupils that method of 
preparation which He sees to be best suited for them ; 
and as all these paths alike lead to the mountain-top, 
it is not for us to say which is the shortest or the 
best for our neighbour. For each man there is 
one path which is shortest; but which that is de- 
pends upon the position from which he starts. To 
expect everyone to come round to our starting-point 
and use our path would be to fall under the delusion, 
born of conceit and ignorance, which blinds the eyes 
of the bigoted religionist. We have not been taught 
to worship the great Star-Angels, or to set before 
ourselves as a goal the possibility of joining the 
Deva evolution at a comparatively early stage; but 
we should always remember that there are other 
lines of Occultism besides that particular form of 
it to which Theosophy has introduced us, and that 
we know but little yet even of our own line. 

It would perhaps be better to avoid the use of 
the word ' worship' when describing the feeling of tihe 
Chaldaeans toward the Star-Angels, for in the West 
it always leads to misconception; it was rather the 
deep affection and veneration and loyalty which we 
feel towards the Masters of Wisdom. 

This Chaldsean religion lay close to the hearts of 
its people, and undoubtedly produced in the case of 
the majority really good and upright lives. Its 
priests were men of great learning in their own 
way along certain lines; their studies in history and 



218 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

astronomy were profound, and they not unnaturally 
took these two sciences together, always classifying 
the events of history according to their supposed con- 
nection with the various astronomical cycles. They 
were fairly well versed in chemistry also, and utilised 
some of its effects in their ceremonies. We noticed 
a case in which a priest was seen standing upon the 
flat roof of one of the temples and invoking in private 
devotion one of the planetary Spirits. 1 He held in his 
hand a long staff tipped with some bituminous-look- 
ing substance, and he began his invocation by mark- 
ing with this staff the astrological sign of the planet 
upon the pavement in front of him, the substance 
leaving a brilliant phosphorescent mark behind it 
upon the stone or plaster surface. 

As a rule each priest took up a special line of study 
to which he more particularly devoted himself. One 
group became proficient in medicine, constantly in- 
vestigating the properties of various herbs and drugs 
when prepared under this or that combination of 
stellar influences ; another turned its attention exclu- 
sively to agriculture, deciding what kind of soil was 
best suited to certain crops, and how it could be im- 
proved working also at the culture of all kinds of 
useful plants, and the production of new varieties, 
testing the rapidity and strength of their growth 
under differently-coloured glass, and so on. This 
idea of the use of coloured light to promote growth 
was common to several of the old Atlantean races, 
and was part of the teaching originally given in At- 
lantis itself. Another section constituted themselves 



, one of the Fellows of the Theosophical Society, 
some of whose lives are given in 'Rents in the Veil of Time 1 
in The Theosophist. 



TWO ATLANTEAN CIVILISATIONS 219 

into a kind of weather bureau, and foretold with 
considerable accuracy both the ordinary changes of 
weather, and also any special disturbances such as 
storms, cyclones, or cloud-bursts. Later this be- 
came a sort of Government Department, and priests 
who predicted inaccurately were deposed as incap- 
able. 

Enormous importance was attached to pre-natal 
influences, and a mother was directed to seclude 
herself and to live a sort of semi-monastic life for 
some months both before and after the birth of a 
child. The educational arrangements of the country 
were not, as in Peru, directly in the hands of the 
priests, although it was they who decided by their 
calculations evidently aided in some cases by clair- 
voyant insight to which planet a child belonged. 
The children attached to a particular planet attended 
the school of that planet, and were under teachers of 
the same type as themselves, so that the children of 
Saturn would by no means be permitted to attend 
one of the schools of Jupiter, or the children of 
Venus to be taught by a worshipper of Mercury. The 
training appointed for these various types differed 
considerably, the intention being in each case to 
develop the good qualities and to counteract the 
weaknesses which long experience had prepared the 
instructors to expect in that especial kind of boy 
or girl. 

The object of education with them was almost en- 
tirely the formation of character; the mere impart- 
ing of knowledge took quite a subordinate position. 
Every child was taught the curious hieroglyphic 
script of the country, and the rudiments of simple 
calculation, but bevond this nothing that we should 



220 &AN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

recognise as a school subject was taken up at all. 
Numerous religious or rather ethical precepts were 
learnt by heart, all indicating the conduct expected 
from 'a son of Mars,' the planet or Venus or Jup- 
iter as the case might be under various conditions 
that might arise ; and the only literature studied was 
an endlessly voluminous commentary upon these, full 
of interminable stories of adventures and situations 
in which the heroes acted sometimes wisely, some- 
times foolishly. These the children were taught to 
criticise, giving their reasons for the opinions they 
formed, and describing in what way their own action 
in similar circumstances would have differed from 
that of the hero. 

Though children passed many years in the schools, 
the whole of their time was spent in familiarising 
themselves (not only theoretically, but as far as 
might be practically also) with the teachings of this 
unwieldy Book of Duty, as it was called. In order 
to impress the lessons upon the minds of the chil- 
dren, they were expected to impersonate the various 
characters in these stories, and act out the scenes as 
though in a theatre. Any young man who developed 
a taste for history, mathematics, agriculture, chem- 
istry or medicine, could, upon leaving school, attach 
himself as a kind of apprentice to any priest who had 
made a specialty of one of those subjects; but the 
school curriculum did not include any of these, nor 
provide any preparation for their study, beyond the 
general preparation which was supposed to fit every- 
body for anything that might turn up. 

The literature of the race was not extensive. Offi- 
cial records were kept with great care, transfers of 
land were registered, and the decrees and proclama- 



TWO ATLANTEAN CIVILISATIONS 221 

tions of the Kings were always filed for reference; 
but though these documents offered excellent even if 
somewhat dry, material for the historian there is no 
trace that any connected history was written. It was 
taught orally by tradition, and certain episodes of 
it were tabulated in connection with the astronomical 
cycles; but these records were merely chronological 
tables, not histories in our sense of the word. 

Poetry was represented by a series of sacred 
books, which gave a highly symbolical and figurative 
account of the origin of the worlds and of mankind, 
and also by a number of ballads or sagas celebrating 
the deeds of legendary heroes. These latter, how- 
ever, were not written down, but simply handed on 
from one reciter to another. The people were ex- 
ceedingly fond, like so many Oriental races, of listen- 
ing to and improvising stories, and a great deal of 
traditional matter of this sort had been handed down 
through the centuries from what must obviously have 
been a remote period of far ruder civilisation. 

From some of these earlier legends it is possible 
to reconstruct a rough outline of the early history of 
the race. The great bulk of the nation were clearly 
of Turanian stock, belonging to the fourth sub-race 
of the Atlantean Root-Race. They had apparently 
been originally a number of petty tribes, always at 
feud among themselves, living by agriculture of a 
primitive kind, and knowing little of architecture or 
culture of any sort. 1 To them in this semi-savage 
condition came, in B. C. 30,000, a great leader from 
the East, Theodoros, a man of another race, who 

x This was the condition in which they were about B. C. 
75,000, when Vaivasvata Jtanu led His small caravan 
through them. 



222 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

after the Aryan conquest of Persia and Mesopotamia, 
and the establishment of the rule of the Manu over 
those districts, was sent as Governor by Him, under 
Corona, His grandson, who succeeded Him as Ruler 
of Persia. 1 

From Theodoros descended the royal line of an- 
cient Chaldaea a line differing widely in appearance 
from their subjects, strong-faced, with bronzed com- 
plexion and deep-set gleaming eyes. The far later 
Babylonian sculptures which we know give us a fair 
idea of this royal type, though at that date the Aryan 
blood had permeated almost the entire race, where- 
as in the time of which we are speaking it had scarce- 
ly tinged it at all. 

After a long period of splendour and prosperity 
this mighty Empire of Chaldaea slowly waned and 
decayed, until at last it was utterly destroyed by the 
incursion of hordes of fanatical barbarians, who> 
holding some ruder faith and hating with true puri- 
tanical fervour all evidence of a religious feeling 
nobler and more beautiful than their own, destroy- 
ed every trace of the glorious temples which had 
been erected with such loving care for that worship 
of the Star-Angels which we have tried to describe. 
These spoilers were in their turn driven out by the 
Akkads from the northern hill-country AtlanteanB 
still, but of the sixth sub-race ; and these, coalescing 
gradually with the remnants of the old race and with 
other tribes of Turanian type, made up the Sumiro- 
Akkad nation out of which the later Babylonian Em- 
pire developed. As it grew, however, it became more 
and more strongly affected by the mixture of Aryan 

'See Chapter xviii. 



TWO ATLANTEAN CIVILISATIONS 223 

jlood, first from the Arabian (Semitic) and then 
From the Iranian sub-races, until when we come to 
jvhat are commonly called historical times there is 
scarcely a trace of the old Turanian left in the faces 
that are pictured for us in the sculptures and mo- 
saics of Assyria. 

This later race had, in its beginnings at least, a 
strong tradition of its grander predecessor, and its 
sndeavour was always to revive the conditions and 
the worship of the past. Its efforts were but par- 
tially successful ; tinged by an alien faith, hampered 
t>y reminiscences of another and more recent tradi- 
tion of the predominant partner in the combination, 
it produced but a pale and distorted copy of the 
magnificent cult of the Star- Angels, as it had flour- 
ished in the Golden Age which we have been attempt- 
ing to describe. 

Faint and unreal as these pictures of the past 
must be except to those who see them at first-hand, 
yet the study of them is not only of deep interest 
to the occult student, but of great use to him. It 
helps to widen out his view; it gives him now and 
then a passing glimpse into the working of that 
vast whole in which all that we can imagine of prog- 
ress and evolution is but as one tiny wheel in a huge 
machine, as one small company in the great army of 
the King. Something is it also of encouragement to 
him to know a little of the glory and the beauty that 
have been on this grand old earth of ours, and to 
know that that is but a pale forecasting of the glory 
and the beauty that are yet to be. 

But we must not leave this trifling sketch of two 
vignettes from the Golden Age of the past introduc- 
ed, as an inset, into the huge picture of the world- 



224 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 
story without referring to a thought that must in- 
evitably occur to one who studies them. We who 
love humanity we who are trying, however feebly, 
to help it on its arduous way can we read of con- 
ditions such as those of ancient Chaldsea, and per- 
haps still more of ancient Peru, conditions under 
which whole nations lived a happy and religious life, 
free from the curse of intemperance, free from the 
horror of grinding poverty can we read of such 
conditions without a lurking doubt, without putting 
to ourselves the question: "Can it be that mankind 
is really evolving f Can it be for the good of human- 
ity that when such civilisations have been attained, 
they should be allowed to crumble and fall, and 
leave no sign ; and that after them we should come 
to this?" 

Yes; for we know that the law of progress is a 
law of cyclic change, and that under that law person- 
alities, races, empires, and worlds pass away, and 
come not again in that form; that all forms must 
perish, however beautiful, in order that the life with- 
in them may grow and expand. And we know that 
that law is the expression of a Will the divine Will 
of the LOGOS Himself; and therefore to the uttermost 
its working must be for the good of the humanity that 
we love. None ever loved man as He does He who 
sacrificed Himself that man might be ; He knows the 
whole evolution, from the beginning to the end ; and 
He is satisfied. It is in His hand the hand that 
blesseth man that the destinies of man are lying; 
is there any heart among us not content to leave 
them there not satisfied to its inmost core to hear 
Him say, as a great Master once said to His pupil : 
"What I do thou knowest not now, but thou shalt 
know hereafter "f 



CHAPTER XIV 
BEGINNINGS OF THE FIFTH EOOT RACE 

THE statement in The Secret Doctrine that the fifth 
Root Race began one million years ago appears, as 
already stated, to refer to the beginning of the choos- 
ing of materials by the Lord Vaivasvata, the Race 
Manu. He was a Lord of the Moon, taking the first 
step in Initiation on Globe G of the seventh round, 
where also He attained Arhatship. About a mil- 
lion years ago, then, He chose out from the ship- 
load which included our 1,200-year group, a few peo- 
ple whom He hoped to shape for His Race, and with 
whom He therefore kept up a connection. Four 
hundred thousand years later, He picked out some 
more. It was rather like looking over a flock of 
sheep, and choosing out the most suitable. Of these, 
numbers would be dropped out on the way, and the 
selection would be thus narrowed down from time 
to time. 

The isolation of a tribe from the white fifth sub- 
race (the moon-coloured race, as the Stanzas of 
Dzyan poetically describe it) which lived in the 
mountains to the north of Ruta, was the first de- 
cisive step in the building of the Race, and this took 
place about 100,000 B. C. The fifth sub-race, it may 
be said in passing, was addicted to mountains gen- 
erally, and the Kabyles of the Atlas Mountains 

225 



226 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

are its best modern representatives. Their religion 
was different from that of the Toltecs living in the 
plains, and the Manu took advantage of this to isolate 
the sub-race. Then His Brother the Bodhisattva, 
who became later the Lord Gautama Buddha, found- 
ed a new religion ; and people coming into that were 
segregated off, and bidden to keep apart, inter-mar- 
riage with other tribes being forbidden. His dis- 
ciples went out into other lands and gathered a few 
together, who, later, joined the main body. They 
were told that one day they would journey far away 
into another land, which became to them 'the prom- 
ised land/ and that they were under a King and 
Lord, physically unknown to them; they were thus 
kept in a state of preparation for the coming of the 
great One who was to lead them forth; He was go- 
ing to guide His people to a place of safety, where 
they would escape the coming catastrophe that of 
75,025 B. C. 1 Some of the Hebraic story was prob- 
ably derived from these facts, although the separa- 
tion of the people who were known in history as He- 
brews came later. These ancestors of theirs were 
literally a ' chosen people,' set aside for a great pur- 
pose. 

The immediate cause of the emigration was the 
impending subdual of the white sub-race by the Dark 
Euler, and the wish of the Manu to withdraw His 
people from that influence. So, in 79,797 B. C., He 
called them to the coast, that they might be shipped 
off through the Sahara Sea, whence they travelled 
forwards on foot by the south of Egypt to Arabia. 
A small fleet of ships, thirty in number, was provid- 
ed ; the largest did not seem to be over 500 tons, and 
three were cutter-like vessels, carrying only provi- 

lUsually called that of 80,000 B. C. 



BEGINNINGS OF THE FIFTH ROOT RACE 227 

sions. They were clumsy-looking ships, sailing fairly 
well on a wind, but tacking very badly. Some had 
oars as well as sails, and these were certainly not 
well adapted for a long sea-voyage. However, they 
had to cross open water only as far as the mouth of 
the Sahara Sea (which was a crooked sort of bight 
opening into the Atlantic), and then to sail along its 
almost land-locked waters. The fleet carried over 
about two thousand nine hundred persons, deposit- 
ed them on the shore at the eastern end of the Sahara 
Sea, and returned to the place of embarkation for 
another set. The voyage was performed three times, 
and the little nation, made up to nine thousand men, 
women and children by the additional few from else- 
where, set forth eastwards on foot. 1 They had with 
them a number of animals also, looking like a cross 
between a buffalo and an elephant with something of 
the pig, reminding one rather of a tapir, a half-ana- 
half sort of beast. These were used for food when 
other supplies ran short, but were regarded as too 
valuable for such use ordinarily. The whole process 
of embarkation, debarcation, settling down to wait 
for their comrades, and preparing for the journey 
on foot, occupied some years, and the Manu, with 
some other great Officials, was then sent by the 
Head of the Hierarchy to lead them to the high 
plateau of Arabia, where they were to remain for a 
time. 

(The Atlanteans had conquered Egypt and were 
ruling the country at this period. They had built 
the pyramids, on which Cheops put his name many 

^ive-sixths of the nine thousand were from the fifth 
sub-race: one-twelfth were Akkadian, and one-twelfth 
Toltec, each the best of its kind. 



228 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

thousands of years later; when Egypt was swamped 
by a flood, some seventy-seven thousand years ago, 
the people tried to climb these pyramids for safety, 
as the waters rose, but failed in consequence of the 
smoothness of their sides. This great Atlantean civ- 
ilisation perished; then came the flood, and a negroid 
domination, and another Atlantean Empire, and an 
Aryan (B. C. 13,500) all perhaps before that which 
history recognises as * Egyptian'. But we must not 
follow this fascinating by-way. 

Suffice it that a splendid Toltec civilisation was 
flourishing in Egypt when our emigrants passed 
along its borders, and the Egyptian Ruler, following 
the Toltec tradition that other races existed in order 
that the Toltecs might exploit them, tried to bribe 
them into remaining in his land. Some succumbed 
to the temptation and remained in lower Egypt, in 
defiance of the Manu's command, to become, a little 
later, slaves to the dominant Toltecs. 

The rest reached Arabia by way of the route which 
is now the Suez Canal, and were settled down by 
the Manu in groups, in the various valleys of the 
great Arabian highlands. The country was sparsely 
inhabited by a negroid race, and the valleys were fer- 
tile when irrigated. But the emigrants did not 
much like their new quarters, and while the majority 
of the people, who had been prepared by Vaivasvata 
Manu in Ruta, were even fanatically devoted to 
Him, the younger generation did a good deal of 
grumbling, for it was pioneer work, not a 'personal- 
ly conducted Cook's tour'. 

We found in one of the valleys a large number 
of the 1200 and 700 years' groups, including many 
members of 'the family,' and their devotion certainly 



BEGINMNGS OF THE FIFTH ROOT RACE 229 

ran into violent fanaticism. They proposed to kill 
all the people who were not wholly devoted to the 
Manu, and prepared to fight the deserters, who had 
settled down comfortably in Egypt. This drew down 
upon them the wrath of the Egyptians and a con- 
siderable slaughter followed, our fanatics being com- 
pletely wiped out. Mars and Corona gallantly re- 
sisted the Egyptian onslaught, while a side party, 
with Herakles a young unmarried man among 
them, mistaking the direction of the enemy, was an- 
nihilated by the Egyptians ; Vaivasvata Manu came 
up with reinforcements and turned the fortunes of 
the day, driving back the Egyptians ; a side party of 
them, in turn, was attacked by a larger force, among 
which Sirius, the father of Herakles, was prominent, 
furious at finding his son among the dead ; knowing 
the country, they shepherded the Egyptians into a 
crater-like depression, with steep sides covered with 
loose rocks; these rocks they joyfully hurled down 
on their surrounded foes, and the last we saw of 
Sirius on this occasion was his ride down the steep 
slope on an avalanche of stones, waving his spear, 
and shouting a war-song of an uncomplimentary na- 
ture, to become part of the gory mass of crushed men 
and heavy stones which filled the lowest part of the 
crater. 

The few Egyptian soldiers who finally escaped 
and reached Egypt were incontinently put to death, 
as having disgraced the army by their defeat. 

After this there was peace for a time for the 
colonists, and they cultivated their valleys, which 
were rather cold in winter, and blazingly hot in sum- 
mer. They had brought seeds of various kinds from 
Atlantis, and some of these were suitable to their 



230 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

new home; they grew some tasteless fruits resem- 
bling apples, and, on the slopes of the hot part of the 
valley, they raised a very large fruit, as large as a 
man's head, which, in stickiness and general messi- 
ness, was like a date. A kind of crater, where the 
sun was reflected from the rocks, served as a forc- 
ing-house,, and they produced there a fruit of the 
size of a cocoa-nut, of which they seemed to be in- 
ordinately proud. It was nutritious, and, boiled in 
water, it yielded sugar by evaporation of the water, 
while the residuum of the fruit gave a flour, which 
the people made into a sort of sweet bun. Sirius 
had two of these buns in his cloth when he rode 
down the hill-side of death. 

In a succeeding incarnation, Herakles appeared as 
a tall, slim, and rather striking-looking young wo- 
man, hanging a somewhat squawky baby-brother 
Sappho up to a tamarind-like tree in a bark cradle. 

The selection from the fifth Atlantean sub-race 
grew and multiplied exceedingly, and became a na- 
tion of several millions in about two thousand years ; 
they were quite isolated from the world in general 
by a belt of sand, which could only be crossed by 
caravans carrying with them plenty of water, and 
there was only one way across it with grass and 
water, about where Mecca now stands. From time 
to time emigrants left the main body, some settling 
in the south of Palestine and some in the south of 
Egypt ; and these movements were encouraged by the 
representatives of the Manu, for the plateau was 
limited in size and became crowded to an uncom- 
fortable extent. The least desirable types were sent 
away as emigrants, while He preserved unmixed 
within His belt of desert the most promising. Sug- 



BEGINNINGS OF THE FIFTH ROOT RACE 231 

gestions were made from time to time that a caravan 
of settlers should go off, make a colony, or found a 
city; among one of these the horse was developed. 
Occasionally He Himself incarnated, and His de- 
scendants formed a class apart of a somewhat im- 
proved type. But generally He was not physically 
present, but directed affairs through His lieutenants, 
of whom Jupiter and Mars were the most prominent. 

The people were pastoral and agricultural, not set- 
tling in large cities, and the plateau became thickly 
populated till, at the end of about three thousand 
years, it resembled a single huge village; then He 
sent out a very large number of people to Africa to 
found a big colony, so as to reduce the numbers in 
the central settlement. This colony was, later, quite 
exterminated. 

It was only a few years before the catastrophe of 
75,025 B. C. that on receipt of a message from the 
Head of the Hierarchy He selected about seven 
hundred of His own descendants to lead them north- 
wards. He had made these people once more into an 
unorthodox sect, stricter in their lives than those 
around them, and they were not looked on favourably 
by the orthodox among whom they lived ; He advised 
them therefore to follow Him to a land where they 
might live in peace, escaping from the persecutions 
of the orthodox, a land which was distant several 
years' journey. Even His own lieutenants were not 
apparently admitted to His confidence, but were 
simply following out His directions; among these 
were several who are now Masters, and others who 
have passed onwards, away from our Earth. 

The number of His followers being small, they 
made a single caravan, and the Manu sent a mes- 



232 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

sage to the Kuler of the Sumiro-Akkad Empire, pray- 
ing for peaceful passage through his dominions in- 
cluding the present Turkey in Asia, Persia and the 
countries beyond; He reached the borders of that 
Empire without difficulty, and the Emperor proved 
friendly; his passport carried Him right into Tur- 
kestan, and then He had to treat with a Confedera- 
tion of Turanian feudatory States, including what is 
now Tibet. He passed between mountain-ranges, of 
which the present Tianshan range was one; these 
marked the boundaries of the Gobi Sea, and stretch- 
ed up to the Arctic Ocean. He had passed through 
Mesopotamia and Babylonia, slanting north, and the 
mountains He had to cross were not of great height ; 
the Turanian Confederation gave permission for His 
passage, partly because His people were not numer- 
ous enough to cause apprehension, and partly be- 
cause He stated that He was carrying out a mission 
imposed upon Him by the Most High. After some 
years of journeying He reached the shores of the 
Gobi Sea, but, bearing in mind the message He had 
received, He did not remain in the plain, but turned 
into the hills to the north, where a great shallow sea 
stretched northward to the Arctic Ocean and thus to 
the Pole. The Lemurian Star was much broken up 
by this time, and its nearest point was about a thou- 
sand miles to the north. He posted some of His fol- 
lowers on a promontory looking out to the north-east, 
but the greater number settled down in a fertile 
crater-like depression, something like the * Devil's 
Punch-bowP in Surrey, but much larger; this was 
more inland, though from an adjoining peak they 
could catch sight of the sea. From this promontory, 
which stood high, they could see the Gobi Sea, and 



BEGINNINGS OF THE FIFTH ROOT RACE 233 

the land where later they were to settle. This was 
to be their dwelling until after the great catastrophe, 
then close at hand. The White Island was to the 
south-east and was entirely out of sight, though 
later, when covered with lofty temples, it became 
visible from this spot. The promontory and ad- 
joining land were formed of shelves of rock, which 
would be very little harmed by earthquakes, unless 
the whole land was broken up. Here He was to re- 
main till all danger was passed ; and a few years were 
left in which to settle down. Many of the people 
died on the journey and after arrival, and He Him- 
self reincarnated to improve the type more quickly. 

These people, as said above, were really His own 
family being His physical descendants, and, as bod- 
ies died, He packed the egos into new and improved 
ones. 

In Atlantis the reincarnated Metal-Man was again 
ruling, none the wiser, apparently, for his previous 
experiences. He was in possession of the City of the 
Golden Gates, and the nobler types of the Atlanteans 
were much oppressed. 

The City was suddenly destroyed by the rushing 
in of the sea through huge fissures caused by explos- 
ions of gas ; but, unlike the catastrophe in which the 
island of Poseidonis sank within twenty-four hours, 
these convulsions continued over a period of two 
years. Further explosions occurred, new cracks 
were made, earthquakes shook the land, for each ex- 
plosion led to a further disturbance. The Himala- 
yas were heaved up a little higher; the land to the 
south of India was submerged with its population; 
Egypt was drowned, and only the pyramids were left 
standing; the tongue of land which stretched from 



234 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

Egypt to what are now Morocco and Algeria disap- 
peared, and the two countries remained as an island, 
washed by the Mediterranean and the Sahara Sea. 
The Gobi Sea became circular, and land was thrown 
up, now Siberia, separating it from the Arctic Ocean; 
Central Asia rose, and many torrents, caused by the 
unprecedented rainfall, cut deep ravines through the 
soft earth. 

While these seismic changes were in progress, the 
Manu's community was left undisturbed by absolute 
cleavagfe or change of surface ; but the people were 
constantly terrified by the recurring earthquakes, 
and were almost paralysed by the fear that the sun 
(which had been rendered invisible for a year by 
masses of cloud, largely composed of fine dust) had 
gone out for ever. The weather was unspeakable. 
Terrible rains fell almost incessantly; masses of 
steam and clouds of dust enveloped the earth and 
darkened the air. Nothing would grow properly, and 
they were exposed to severe privations; the com- 
munity, originally composed of seven hundred peo- 
ple, which had increased to a thousand, was reduced 
by these hardships to about three hundred. Only the 
stronger survived ; the weaker were killed off. 

At the end of five years, they had again become 
settled; the punch-bowl depression had become a 
lake ; some years of warm weather followed the years 
of disturbance ; much virgin soil had been thrown up, 
and they were able to cultivate the land. But the 
Maim was growing old, and an order came to Him to 
bring His people to the White Island. To hear was 
to obey. 

There, by the Head of the Hierarchy Himself, the 
great plan of the future was unrolled before Him, 



BEGINNINGS OF THE FIFTH ROOT RACE 235 

stretching over thousands upon tens of thousands of 
years. His people were to live on the mainland, on 
the shores of the Gobi Sea, and they were to increase 
and grow strong. The new Race was to be founded 
on the White Island itself, and when it had increased, 
a mighty City was to be built on the opposite shore 
for its dwelling, and the plan of the City was sug- 
gested. There was a mountain range running along 
the shores of the Gobi Sea, some twenty miles distant, 
and low hills stretched out from that range to the 
shore ; there were four great valleys, running from 
within the ranges to the sea, entirely separated from 
each other by the intervening hills ; He was to plant 
certain selected families in these valleys, and develop 
therein four separate sub-races, which then were sub- 
sequently to be sent to different parts of the world. 
Also He was to send some of His own people to be 
born elsewhere, and then bring them back, and thus 
form new admixtures for they would have to marry 
into His family; and when the type was ready, He 
would have again to incarnate in it and to fix it. For 
the Root Race also some admixture was needed, as 
the type was not quite satisfactory. 

Thus a main type and several sub-types had to 
be formed, and the differences were to be started in 
the comparatively early days, thus obtaining five 
groups to develop on different lines. It is interest- 
ing to notice that after refining His people for gene- 
rations and forbidding marriage with those outside 
themselves, He yet found it necessary, later, to in- 
troduce a little foreign blood, and then to separate 
off the posterity of that foreign ancestor. 

The Manu proceeded to settle His people (about 
70,000 B. C.), bidding them build villages on the 



236 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

mainland, there to increase and multiply for some 
thousands of years. They had not to begin at the 
beginning like savages, for they were already a civil- 
ised people, and used a good deal of labour-saving 
machinery. In one of the towns dotted rather widely 
along the coast-line, we noticed a number of familiar 
faces. Mars, a grandson of the Manu, was the head 
of the community, and, with his wife Mercury and 
his family among whom were Sirius and Alcyone 
lived in a pleasant house, surrounded by a large 
garden and fine trees. 1 Corona was there, and Or- 
pheus, an elderly and stately gentleman, very digni- 
fied and much respected. Jupiter was the ruler of 
the province if we may so call the whole settlement 
of the embryonic Eace numbering about seven thou- 
sand souls wielding an authority which was dele- 
gated to him by the Manu, the recognised King of 
the community, residing at Shamballa. 

As we were observing this town, there came gal- 
loping in a tumultuous band of men, who had evi- 
dently been out on a foray; they were riding on 
rough-looking animals, resembling horses, and were 
headed by Vajra; they drew up at the house of 
Mars, who was Vajra 's brother, soon after gallop- 
ing off again, as tumultuously as they came ; and we 
followed them to another town, also on the shores of 
the Gobi, where we found Viraj as Chief. His son, 
Horakles, was in the band of raiders, wherein also 
we observed Ulysses. 

More familiar faces were seen here; Cetus and 

Ulysses were at feud ; they had first quarrelled over 

an animal, which both claimed to have killed, then 

over some land which both wanted, and finally over 

l See Appendix III. 



BEGINNINGS OF THE FIFTH ROOT RACE 237 

a woman whom both desired. Pollux and Herakles 
were great friends, Pollux having saved the life of 
Herakles in a foray, at the imminent risk of his own. 
One of the daughters of Herakles, Psyche, a big 
bouncing girl, attracted our attention at the age of 
fourteen; for she was carrying in her arms a small 
brother, Fides, when she was attacked by a large 
goat ; the goat had big horns, curling at the base and 
spiked at the top, but the girl was not daunted ; she 
seized the goat by the horns and turned it head over 
heels, and then, picking it up by the hind-legs, she 
banged it vigorously on the ground. The child Fides 
seemed to be rather a family pet, as we noticed Her- 
akles carrying him about on his shoulder. 

Much excitement was caused some years later by 
the Manu, who was then a very old man, sending 
for Jupiter, Corona, Mars and Vajra; on their re- 
turn, obeying His order, they selected some children 
from the settlement, and sent them over to Sham- 
balla ; these children were the best in the community 
and have since risen to the position of Masters. They 
were Alcyone's sons, Uranus and Neptune, and his 
daughters Surya and Brhaspati ; Saturn and Vulcan, 
boys, and Venus, a girl, were also selected. A few 
women were sent with them to take care of them, and 
the children were brought up in Shamballa; in due 
course Saturn married Surya, and the Manu was re- 
born as their eldest son, to restart the Race on a 
higher level. 

For meanwhile things had been moving on the 
mainland. Soon after the removal of the above- 
oamed children, the Turanians swept down on the 
community like a devastating flood, for this was the 
event of which the Manu had forewarned His lieuten- 



238 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

ants and from which the children were saved; the 
assailants were bravely beaten back several times, 
but horde succeeded horde. At last the bulk of the 
fighting men were killed, and the battle became a 
mere massacre, not a man, woman or child being left 
alive. Our old friend Scorpio was the Chief of one 
tribe, once more renewing his perennial conflict with 
Herakles. A number of promising children were cut 
off, but, after all, it did not much matter, for they all 
went out of earth-life together, grandparents, par- 
ents and children, and were ready to come back 
when the'Manu founded His family. Mars return- 
ed earlier, and was born in Shamballa as a younger 
brother of the Manu, while Viraj was His sister. 

Then, everything began over again, but on a higher 
level; they invented, or re-invented, many useful 
things, and in some thousands of years there was a 
populous and flourishing civilisation. Our old friends 
were there among the pioneers, Herakles, this time, 
as the son of Mars. Those of the group of Servers 
then in birth worked hard under the direction of 
their leaders, trying to carry out their will. Thick- 
headed and stupid they often were, and they made 
many mistakes, but loyal and whole-hearted they al- 
ways were, and that bound them closely to those 
they served. 

Houses were built of great size, to accommodate 
several generations (in fact, all the members of a 
family), and were strongly fortified, with only one 
entrance, and the windows opening into a large court- 
yard in the middle, where the women and children 
could be in safety. After a time, strong walls were 
built round villages and round towns, as additional 
defences, for the savage Turanians were constantly 



BEGINNINGS OF THE FIFTH ROOT RACE 23J) 

hovering on the outskirts of the community, terrify, 
ing the inhabitants by their w.ild yells and sudden on- 
slaughts. The outlying villages were in a continual 
state of alarm, the dwellers on the seacoast being left 
more at peace. 

When the Race had again grown to the propor- 
tions of a small nation, there was another determined 
onslaught of the Turanians, and finally another mas- 
sacre, with only, once more, a few children and their 
nurses saved and brought up in Shamballa. It is 
noteworthy that even the bloodthirsty Turanians did 
not attack the White Island, for they held it in the 
deepest veneration. Thus the Race-type was ever 
preserved, even when the bulk of it was twice swept 
away, and on each occasion the Manu and His lieu- 
tenants incarnated in it as soon as possible and puri- 
-fied it still further, ever approaching the type at 
which He aimed. 



CHAPTER XV 
THE BUILDING OF THE GREAT CITY 

AFTER the second destruction, the Manu thought 
that a little more of the Toltec infusion was needed 
in His Race, which had, it will be remembered, only 
one-twfelfth of Toltec strain in it; so He sent Mars, 
who had been killed in the beginning of the last war, 
to incarnate in the purest of the Toltec families in 
Poseidonis, and called him to return to His infant 
community at the age of twenty-five. The fairest 
and best of the Manu's own daughters, who had es- 
caped the second massacre in her childhood, was 
given to Mars as wife his age-long friend and teach- 
er, Jupiter. Of these two Viraj was born a splen- 
did specimen of all that was best in the two Races 
whence he sprang. He married Saturn, and Vaivas- 
vata Manu took birth again as their son. From this 
point the Fifth, or Aryan Root-Race, as a really suc- 
cessful foundation, may be said to begin, for after 
this it was never again destroyed. This was about 
B. C, 60,000. The civilisation which rose slowly from 
that tiny seed was a fine and pure one, and, shut 
away as it was to a large extent from the rest of the 
world, it flourished exceedingly. 

The descendants of the Manu remained on the 
Island until they numbered one hundred; it had 
been decreed by the Manu that when they reached 

240 



THE BUILDING OF THE GREAT CITY 241 

that number they should go over to the mainland, 
and begin to work at the City which He had planned 
as the future capital of His Race. The plan was 
fully worked out, as He wished it to be when finished, 
all the streets marked in, their width stated, the 
size of the chief buildings given, and so on. The 
White Island was the centre on which the great main 
streets converged, so that if they had crossed the in- 
tervening sea they would have ended on the Island. 
Low cliffs rose from the sea, and from these the 
land sloped gradually up to the lovely purple hills 
twenty miles away ; it was a splendid site for a city, 
though open to cold winds from the north; the city 
spread out fan-like round the edge of the shore, ex- 
tending over this great gentle slope, and the main 
streets were so wide that even from their extreme 
ends towards the hills the White Island could be seen. 
It was the most prominent object, and seemed to 
dominate all the City's life, when the whole splendid 
plan was complete. The City was built a thousand 
years in advance of the people who were to live in it ; 
it did not grow disjointedly, like London; and the 
little group of one hundred the children and grand- 
children of the Manu looked almost absurdly in- 
adequate for the immense task which they were to 
begin, and which their descendants would finish. 
They put up temporary quarters for themselves in 
a way which did not interfere with the plan, and had, 
of course, to cultivate enough of the land to enable 
them to live. All the time which they were not com- 
pelled to give to their own support, they devoted to 
preparation for building; they measured the land 
and marked out the wide streets according to the plan, 
cutting down many trees, the wood of which they 



242 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

used for their own quarters. Presently some were 
sent to the hills to look for suitable stone and metals, 
and they sank mines and dug out quarries. Out of 
these they hewed white, grey, red and green stone, 
stone which looked like marble, but seemed to be 
harder than the marble we know ; it may be that they 
had some secret for hardening it, since they came 
from Atlantis, where architecture was carried to 
great perfection. Later on, they went further afield, 
and found some porphyry of a splendid purple col- 
our, which they used with great effect. 

It was a strange sight to see these builders of a 
future city at work. Descendants of the Manu, sim- 
ilar in education and training, they felt and acted 
like one family, even when they had increased to 
thousands. Doubtless the presence of the Manu and 
of His lieutenants kept this feeling alive, and made 
the growing community a real brotherhood, each 
member knowing the rest. They worked because they 
were glad to work, and felt that they were carrying 
out the wishes of Him who was at once their Father 
and their King. They worked in the fields, they 
ground corn they seemed to have wheat, rye and 
oats they cut and shaped the huge stones brought 
from the hills ; all was done joyfully, as a religious 
duty and as bringing merit, and any form of work 
was willingly taken up. 

The style of architecture was cyclopean, enor- 
mous stones being used, larger even than those at 
Karnac. They used machinery, and slung great 
stones on rollers ; sometimes, in difficulties the Manu 
gave instructions which rendered the work easier, 
possibly by some methods of magnetisation. They 
were allowed to use their utmost strength and in- 



THE BUILDING OF THE GREAT CITY 243 

genuity in managing these immense stones, some 
of them 160 feet long, and they succeeded in drag- 
ging them along the roads. But for lifting them into 
their destined places, the Manu and His lieutenants 
lightened them by occult means. Some of these 
lieutenants, above the rank of Masters, were Lords 
of the Moon, who had become Chohans of Rays. 
They moved about among the people superintend- 
ing their work, and were spoken of under the gen- 
eral name of Maharshis. Some names sounded very 
guttural, as Ehudhra ; another name heard was Va- 
sukhya. 1 The buildings were on the Egyptian scale 
but were much lighter in appearance ; and this was 
specially noticeable in the buildings on the White 
Island, where the domes were not great spheres, but 
were bulging at the base, and went up to a point, 
like a tightly closed lotus-bud, in which the folded- 
in leaves had been given a kind of twist. It was as 
though two helices, right-handed and left-handed, 
had been superposed, so that the lines should cross 
each other, and that this was worked on to the lotus 
bud, bulging at the base. There was immense solidi- 
ty in the lower parts of the huge buildings; then a 
crown-work of minarets and arches, arches with a 
peculiar and very graceful curve, and then, on the 
top, the fairy-like lotus-bud of a dome. 

The whole building was a matter of many hun- 
dreds of years, but the White Island, when complete, 

*We were much surprised at finding what was evidently 
a form of Samskrt existing such an enormous time ago in 
a recognisable form. It appeared that the language brought 
from Venus by the Lords of the Flame was this mother- 
Samskrt truly a 'divine language' and, while the people 
were in touch with Them, it persisted without much change. 



244 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

was a marvel. The Island itself sloped up to a cen- 
tral point, and the builders took advantage of this. 
They built stupendous Temples on it, all of white 
marble with inlaid work of gold, and these covered 
the whole Island, making it a single sacred City. 
These rose towards the huge Temple in the centre, 
which was crowned with the minarets and arches 
mentioned above, with the lotus-bud dome in the mid- 
dle. The dome was over the great Hall, wherein the 
Four Kumaras appeared on special occasions, great 
religious festivals, and ceremonies of national im- 
portance. 1 

From a distance say at the end of one of the City 
streets, ten miles away the effect of the white and 
golden City, like a white dome set in the midst of the 
blue Gobi Sea, 2 all the buildings seeming to spring 
upwards into the clear air towards the centre, and 
to be crowned with the fairy dome, almost floating 
in the atmosphere, was extraordinarily beautiful and 
impressive. Rising above it in the air, as in a bal- 
loon, and looking down, we could see the White City 
like a circle, divided by a cross, for the streets were 
arranged as four radii, meeting at the central Tem- 
ple. Looked at from the north west, from the prom- 
ontory of the earlier settlement, an extraordinary 
effect was produced, which could hardly have been 
accidental. The whole looked like the great Eye of 
Masonic symbolism, being foreshortened so that the 

"Readers of 'Rents hi the Veil of Time, 1 The Theoso- 
phist, July, 1910, will remember in Alcyone's Life, X., the 
description of the gathering of the Chiefs of the emigra- 
tion in this Hall, and the appearing of the four Kumaras. 

2 The Gobi Sea, at that time, was a little smaller than 
the present Black Sea in Europe. 



THE BUILDING OF THE GREAT CITY 245 

curves became cylindrical, and the darker lines of 
the city on the mainland made the iris. 

Both inside and outside, the Temples on the White 
Island were adorned with many carvings. A large 
number of these contained Masonic symbols, for 
Masonry inherits its symbols from the Mysteries, 
and all Aryan Mysteries were derived from this an- 
cient centre of Initiation. In one room attached to the 
central Temple, apparently used for teaching, there 
was a series of carvings, beginning with the physical 
atom and going on to the chemical atoms, arranged 
in order, and with explanatory lines marking the 
various combinations. Verily, there is nothing new 
under the sun. 1 

In another room were many models, in one of which 
Crookes' lemniscates were arranged across each 
other, so as to form an atom with a fourfold rose. 
Many things were modelled in alto-relievo, such as 
the pranic atom, the oxygen snake, the nitrogen bal 
loon. 

Alas ! for the great catastrophe which shook these 
mighty buildings into ruins. But for that, they 
might have lasted for thousands upon thousands of 
years. 

The City of the mainland was built of the various- 
coloured stone hewn out of the mountain quarries, 
some of the buildings being very effective with the 
grey and red intermixed. Pink and green was an- 
other favourite combination, and here and there the 
purple porphyry was introduced, with striking 



*If the present writers had known at the time of the 
existence of these carvings, they' might have saved 
themselves much trouble in their researches into oc- 
cult Chemistry, 



246 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

cess. Looking forward through many centuries, we 
saw the building still going on, though with many 
more workers, until the great City grew into its full 
magnificence, a capital, building through a thou- 
sand years, for a people that was to become imperial 
The workers moved outwards as their numbers ex- 
panded, bringing more land, which was very fertile, 
under cultivation for their support, now working in 
the fields, now at their huge Temples. Century after 
century this expansion continued along the shores 
of the Gobi Sea and up the great slope towards the 
hills, ever following the Manu's original plan. 

There were gold mines in the hills, and mines for 
jewels and precious stones of all sorts. Gold was 
much used on the buildings, especially on those made 
of white marble, and gave an effect of extraordinary 
and chaste richness. Jewels were also largely in- 
troduced into decorations, inset as brilliant points in 
schemes of colour; slabs of chalcedony entered into 
decorative designs, and a precious stone, resembling 
Mexican onyx, was worked into patterns. One 
favourite and most effective device in the ornament- 
ing of large public buildings was a combination of 
dark green jade and the purple porphyry. 

Carving was largely employed, both outside and 
inside buildings, but no paintings were observed, nor 
drawings on a flat surface, and no perspective. There 
were long friezes, representing processions, in alto- 
relievo, all the figures being of the same size, no 
idea of distance being introduced by reducing the 
size of the figures. There were no trees or clouds 
as background, and no impression of space was 
given. These friezes recalled the Elgin marbles, and 
were exceedingly well done and very natural. 



THE BUILDING OF THE GREAT CITY 247 

Figures in these friezes were often painted, as were 
also separate statues, of which there were many, 
both in the public streets and the private houses. 

The City was connected with the White Island by 
a massive and splendid bridge a structure so re- 
markable that it gave its name to the City, called, 
because of it, the City of the Bridge. 1 It was a canti- 
lever Bridge, the form v6ry graceful, outlined with 
hewn work of massive scrolls, and decorated with 
great groups of statuary, where its ends rested on 
the cliff of the mainland and on the Island itself. 
The stones of the causeway were 160 feet in length 
and wide in proportion a noble structure, worthy 
even of the Island to which it was the sole approach. 

The City was at its zenith in B. C. 45,000, when it 
was the capital of an immense Empire, which includ- 
ed the whole of East and Central Asia, from Tibet 
to the coast and from Manchuria to Siam, besides 
claiming suzerainty over all the islands from Japan 
to Australia. Traces of its domination are still to be 
seen in some of these countries; the ineffaceable 
stamp of the Aryan blood is set upon races so prim- 
itive as the Hairy Ainus of Japan and the Australian 
so-called aborigines. 

In the zenith of its glory it had the magnificent 
architecture we have described, of the cyclopean 
style as to size, but finished with great delicacy, and 
polished to a remarkable degree. We have seen that 
its builders erected the marvellous Temples whose 
colossal ruins are the wonder of all who have seen 
them at Shamballa to-day ; 2 it was they who dowered 

Called also Manova, the City of Mann. 

2 Shamballa is still the Imperishable Sacred Land, whore 
dwell the four Kumaras, and where gather, every seven 
years, Initiates of all nations. 



248 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

the world with that unequalled Bridge which once 
linked the Sacred Island with the shore which may 
still be seen standing, mighty as ever, though now 
only the shifting desert sand flows beneath it. Its 
sculpture too was noble, as we have seen, its colour- 
ing brilliant, its mechanical genius considerable. In 
its prime it compared not ignobly with Atlantis, and 
though its luxury was never so great, its morals were 
distinctly purer. 

Such was the mighty City planned by Vaivasvata 
Manu and built by His children. Many and great 
were the cities of Asia, but the City of the Bridge 
outshone them all. And over it ever brooded the 
mighty Presences who had, and still have, Their 
earthly dwelling-place on the sacred White Island, 
giving to this one, out of all the cities of earth, the 
ever-abiding benediction of Their immediate prox- 
imitv. 



CHAPTER XVI 
EARLY ARYAN CIVILISATION AND EMPIRE 

THE children of Maim were in no sense a primitive 
people, beginning, as they did, with many hundreds 
of thousands of years of civilisation behind them in 
Atlantis, and thousands of years under their own 
Manu, in Arabia and northern Asia. The population 
could all read and write, including all those who did 
what we should call the lowest work; for all work 
was regarded as honourable, being done for the Ma- 
nu, as His work, no matter what it was. We noticed 
a man who was cleaning the streets, and as a very 
dignified and gorgeously-clothed priest, evidently in 
high office, came along, he addressed the sweeper 
courteously as a brother, as an equal, as one of the 
brotherhood of the great family of the Manu's chil- 
dren. The feeling cultivated was that of the brother- 
hood of the Race, a wonderful fundamental equality 
like that which may sometimes be seen among 
Freemasons and a mutual courtesy; there was at 
the same time a full recognition of personal merit, a 
looking up to the greater people and much gratitude 
to them for their help, and a complete absence of 
rude self-assertion. There was a kindly feeling of 
taking everyone at his best, of taking it for granted 
that the other man meant well ; and so quarrels Were 
avoided. This Aryan civilisation was in this extra- 

249 



250 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

ordinarily different from the more elaborate and 
luxurious Atlantean one, where each sought his own 
comfort, and recognition for himself, and where 
people distrusted each other and were mutually sus- 
picious. In this the people trusted one another a 
man's word was sufficient; it would have been un- 
Aryan to break it. 

Another curious thing was the number of people 
everyone seemed to know. As now in a small village, 
so there in a large town, for centuries all the people 
seemed to know each other, more or less. As the 
population increased, and this became impossible, 
it was the duty of the officials to know the people 
of their districts, and the knowledge of a large num- 
ber of people was one of the qualifications for office. 

The feeling of brotherhood, however, was of a 
brotherhood of Race ; it did not extend outside the 
Aryan people themselves, as, for instance, to the 
Turanians. They were of a different stock, and a 
different culture ; they were crafty and cunning, and 
not to be depended on. Towards them they showed 
a marked and very dignified reserve ; they were not 
hostile to foreigners, nor did they despise them, but 
they treated them with reserve, as not of the family. 
People of other nations were not allowed into the in- 
ner parts of their houses, but only into the outer 
courts. There were special houses and courtyards 
set apart for the lodging of strangers, of whom, 
however, there were few; caravans of merchants 
came occasionally, and embassies from other nations, 
and these were received courteously and hospitably, 
but always with that quiet reserve which indicated a 
barrier not to be crossed. 

Tn governing foreign nations, as they came to do 



EARLY ARYAN CIVILISATION AND EMPIRE 251 

later, they were occasionally hard: this was observed 
in a Governor, set over Turanians ; he was not cruel 
nor oppressive, but was stern and somewhat hard. 
This stern attitude seemed to be rather characteristic 
of their foreign rule, and it was compatible with the 
warmest feeling of brotherhood to their own Bace. 

It would seem that here, as everywhere else, a 
physical- world-brotherhood demanded a certain com- 
mon ground of education and culture, of morality and 
honour. A man was 'an Aryan,' a ' noble man,' and 
that fact implied a code of honour and of customs 
which could not be disregarded. He must be, as we 
should now say, 'a gentleman,' living up to a certain 
standard of social obligation. He might do any kind 
of work, he might rise to any grade of learning, but 
there was a certain minimum of good behaviour and 
good manners below which he must not fall. Out of 
this grew the feeling of reserve towards all ' outside 
the pale,' as to whose manners and customs, morals 
and qualities, nothing was known. The children of 
Manu were a nation of aristocrats, in the true sense 
of the word, proud of their high* descent, and fully 
recognising the demands it made upon them. For 
them, Noblesse oblige was no empty phrase. 

The civilisation was a very bright and happy one, 
with much music, dancing and gaiety, and to this 
their religion conduced, for it was eminently one 
of praise and thanksgiving. The people were con- 
stantly singing hymns of praise, and they recognised 
Devas behind all natural forces. The Dawn-Maidens 
were joyously hymned with each morning, and the 
Spirit in the Sun was the chief object of worship. 
Thp four Kumaras were regarded as Gods, and Their 
Presence was evidently felt by a people living so near 



252 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

to Nature as to be sensitive and psychic. Behind 
the throne of the Chief of the Kumaras in the large 
Hall of the central Temple was an immense golden 
Sun, a half sphere, projecting from the wall, and, 
on days of ceremony, this glowed out with dazzling 
light. The planet Venus was also imaged as an ob- 
ject of worship, perhaps in consequence of the tradi- 
tion that it was from Venus that the Lords of the 
Flame had descended. The Sky itself was wor- 
shipped, and at one time there was worship given to 
the Atom, as the origin of all things, and a mani- 
festation of the Deity in miniature. 

An annual ceremony may serve as an example of 
one of their greater religious festivals. 

At an early hour the people men, women and 
children were seen marching in procession along 
the converging streets into the great crescent which 
faced the mighty Bridge. Eich silken cloths flutter- 
ed from windows and flag-staffs, and the roads were 
strewn with blossoms ; great braziers sent up clouds 
of incense, and the people were clad in silks of many 
colours, often heavily jewelled, and wore splendid 
coral ornaments, and wreaths and garlands of 
flowers a fairyland of colour and they marched 
with clashing of metal plates and blasts of horns. 

Across the Bridge they passed in orderly succes- 
sion, but all sounds sank to silence as they set foot 
upon the Bridge ; and in the silence they passed on 
between the mighty Temples to the central Fane, 
and onwards into the Hall itself. The great throne 
hewn out of living rock, gold-encrusted, jewelled 
richly, stood on its rocky platform, over which great 
symbols wrought in gold, were scattered, and be- 
fore it stood an altar, now piled high with fragrant 



EARLY ARYAN CIVILISATION AND EMPIRE 253 

woods. Above, the huge golden Sun gleamed faint- 
ly, and the planet Venus hung in air, high in the 
vault above. 

When the Hall was filled to its utmost extent, save 
in a space in front and at the sides of the great 
throne, a stately group entered from the back, and 
filled this space, and all bowed low in homage ; there 
stood the three Manus, arrayed in Their robes of 
office, and the Mahaguru, the Bodhisattva of the 
time, Vyasa, standing beside Vaivasvata. And 
there was Surya, close behind His mighty Brother 
and Predecessor, and nearest to the throne the three 
Kumaras ; unseen by the crowd probably, but surely 
dimly felt, hung in the air, in a great semi-circle, 
gorgeous purple and silver Devas, watchful also, 
attendant. Then over the whole vast assemblage 
fell an utter silence, as thoagh men could hardly 
bear to breathe; and softly, sweetly, scarce seem- 
ing to break the silence, stole out an exquisite strain 
of music, supporting a chant, intoned by those 
Mightiest and Holiest who stood around the throne, 
an invocation to the Lord, the Ruler, to come among 
His own. The solemn hushed accents died into 
silence, and then rang out a single silvery note, as 
though in answer; the great golden Sun blazed out 
in dazzling splendour, and below it, just over the 
throne, flashed out a brilliant Star, its beams like 
lightning shooting* forth above the heads of the 
waiting throng; and HE was there, the supreme Lord 
of the Hierarchy, seated on the throne, more radiant 
than Sun and Star, which indeed seemed to draw 
their lustre from Him; and all fell on their faces, 
hiding their eyes from the blinding glory of His 
Presence. 



254 MAN: WHENCE. HOW AND WHITHER 

Then, in His gentleness, He softened that glory, 
so that all might lift their eyes, and see Him, Sanat 
Kuraara, the 'Eternal Virgin,' 1 in all the beauty of 
His unchanging Youth, who was yet the Ancient of 
Days. And a deep breath of awe and wonder came 
from the adoring crowd, and a luminous smile, ren- 
dering the exquisite strong beauty of the Face yet 
more entrancing, answered their simple reverent 
gaze of love and worship. 

Then He stretched forth His Hands towards the 
altar in front of Him, and fire blazed forth upon 
it, the flames rising high in air. And then He wap 
gone the throne was empty, the Star had vanished, 
the golden Sun glowed but faintly, and only the 
Fire which He had given leapt unchanged upon the 
Altar. From this a glowing fragment of wood was 
given to the priests for the altars of the various 
Temples, and to each head of a household present 
there, 2 and he received it in a vessel with a lid which 
closed above it, wherein it remained, live fire, un- 
quenchable, till it had been carried to the altar of 
the home. 

The processions re-formed and left the Holy 
Place in silence, again passing to the Bridge and 
by it reaching the City. Then came an outburst of 
joyous singing, and hand-in-hand the people passed 
along, and congratulations were exchanged, and the 
elders blessed the youngers and all were very glad. 

ir The name, translated from the Samskrt, means ' Eternal 

Virgin/ the termination showing that * Virgin' is masculine. 

2 In later time, when the population of the City had 

grown very large, officials received it, to distribute to the 

houses in their districts. 



EARLY ARYAN CIVILISATION AND EMPIRE 255 

The sacred fire was placed on the family altar, to 
set alight the flame which was to be kept alive 
through the year, and brands lighted at it were 
taken to the houses of those who had not been pres- 
ent, for until the recurrence of the festival when 
another year had run its course, such fire could not 
he had to hallow the family shrine. After this, there 
was music, and feasting, and dancing, until the hap- 
py City sank to sleep. 

Such was the Festival of the Sacred Fire, held on 
every Midsummer Day in the City of the Bridge. 

Some of the people devoted themselves almost 
wholly to study, and reached great proficiency in 
occult science, in order to devote themselves to cer- 
tain branches of the public service. They became 
clairvoyant, and gained control of various natural 
Forces, learning to make thoi:<jht-forms, and to leave 
Jieir physical bodies at will. Mindful of the mel- 
ancholy results in Atlantis of occult power divorced 
From unselfishness and morality, the instructors in 
these studies chose their pupils with extreme care, 
ind one of the lieutenants of the Manu maintained 
i general supervision over such classes. Some of 
:he students, when proficient, had it as their special 
iuty to the State to keep the different parts of the 
Empire in touch with each other; there were no 
lewspapers, but they conducted what may be called 
i news department. News was not published as a 
rule, but anyone who wanted news about anyone else 
n any part of the Empire could go to this central 
)ffice and obtain it. Thus, there were Commission- 
's for the various countries, each of whom gave in- 
formation about the country in his charge, obtaining 
.t by occult means. Expeditions sent out on errands 



256 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

of peace or war were thus followed and news was 
given of them, as in modern days by wireless or 
other telegraphy. 

On one occasion, when Corona was ruling a distant 
country, the Manu was not able to impress him with 
His directions; so He bade one of these trained 
students to leave his physical body, go astrally to 
Corona, and materialise himself on arrival; by this 
device, the message was delivered to Corona in his 
waking consciousness. In this way the Manu re- 
mained as the real Ruler, no matter how far the 
Empire extended. 

Writing was done on various subsltances; one 
man was observed writing with a sharp instrument 
on a waxy-looking surface in an oblong case, as 
though he were etching; then he went over it again 
with a hollow pen, out of which flowed # coloured 
liquid which hardened as it dried, leaving the script 
embedded in the wax. Occasionally a man would 
strike out a method of his own. 

Machinery was not carried to the point reached 
in Atlantis; it was simpler, and more of the work 
was done by hand. The Manu evidently did not de- 
sire the extreme luxury of Atlantis to be repro- 
duced among His people. 

From the small beginning of 60,000 B. C., there 
gradually grew up a thickly populated kingdom, 
which surrounded the Gobi Sea, and obtained do- 
minion by degrees over many neighbouring nations, 
including the Turanians who had so mercilessly 
massacred its forefathers. This was the root-stock 
of all the Aryan nations, and from it went out 
from 40,000 B. C., onwards the great migrations 
which formed the Aryan sub-races. It remained in 



EARLY ARYAN CIVILISATION AND EMPIRE 257 

its cradle-land until it had sent out four of these 
migrations westwards, and had also sent many huge 
bands of conquering emigrants into India, who sub- 
dued the land and possessed it; its last remnants 
only left their home and joined their forerunners in 
India shortly before the sinking of Poseidonis, 
9,564 B. C. ;* they were sent away, in fact, in order 
that they might escape the ruin wrought by that 
tremendous cataclysm. 

From 60,000 B. C. to 40,000 B. C. the parent-stock 
grew and flourished exceedingly, reaching the zenith 
of its first glory at about 45,000 B. C. It conquered 
China and Japan, peopled chiefly by Mongols the 
seventh Atlantean sub-race going northward and 
eastward till stopped by the cold; it also added to 
its Empire Formosa and Siam, which were populated 
by Turanians and Tlavatli fourth and second At- 
lantean sub-races. Then the Aryans colonised Su- 
matra and Java and the adjoining islands not quite 
so much broken up as now; for the most part they 
were welcomed in these regions by the people, who 
looked on the fair-faced strangers as Gods, and were 
more inclined to worship than to fight them. An 
interesting remnant of one of their settlements, still 
left in Celebes, is a hill tribe called Toala. This 
island, to the east of Borneo, came under their sway 
and they stretched down over what is now the Ma- 
lay Peninsula, and over the Philippines, the Liu- 

'This root-stock is usually called 'the first sub-race ' in 
Theosophical literature, but it must not be forgotten that 
this is the original Root Race from which all the branches, 
or sub-races, went out. The first migration is called the 
second sub-race, and so on. The emigrants to India all 
came from this Asian stock, and are the * first sub-race 7 



258 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

Kiu Islands, the Eastern Archipelago, and Papua, 
the islands on the way to Australia, and over Aus- 
tralia itself, which was still thickly populated with 
Lemurians third Eoot Race. 

We found Corona, about 50,000 B. C., ruling over 
a large kingdom in these island-studded seas; he 
had been born in that region, and made for himself 
a kingdom, recognising the Manu as Over-lord, and 
obeying any directions which he received from Him. 
Over all the huge Empire with its many kingdoms, 
the Manu was Suzerain. Whether He was in in- 
carnation or not, the Kings ruled in His name, .and 
He sent directions from time to time as to the carry- 
ing on of the work. 

By 40,000 B. C., the Empire began to show signs 
of declire, and the islands and the outer provinces 
were asserting a barbarian independence. The 
Manu still occasionally incarnated, but usually 
directed things from higher planes. The central 
kingdom, however, remained splendid in civilisation, 
contented and quiescent, for another twenty-five 
thousand years and more, while activities were 
chiefly carried on in directions further afield, in the 
building up of sub-races, and in their spreading in 
all directions. 



CHAPTER XVII 
THE SECOND SUB-RACE, THE ARABIA* 

IT will be remembered that when the Manu went 
to Shamballa after leading His little flock from 
Arabia to their temporary northern resting-place, 
and, after the great catastrophe of B. C. 75,025, 
bringing them to the White Island He was shown 
by the Head of the Hierarchy the plan which was 
to be followed in the shaping of His Race. 1 Four 
long valleys running back through the mountain 
range which lay twenty miles from the shore of the 
Gobi Sea, separated from each other by interven- 
ing hills were to be used by Him for the segrega- 
tion and training of four distinct sub-races. This 
work was now to begin. 

The Manu started by picking out from the great 
band of Servers who had been developing in the 
noble Aryan civilisation a few families, willing to 
act as pioneers, and, leaving the glorious City of 
the Bridge, to go out into the wilderness and found 
His new colony. A large group of people who, for 
the most part, are or have been in the Theosophical 
Society of our own times, were selected by Him for 
this pioneer work, 2 and of these a few families were 

'See Chapter XIV, p. 234. 

2 They are doing, over again, what they have dona so 
often before, breaking open the way for a new type of 

259 



260 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

Bent out to lead the way. In the third generation 
Mars and Mercury took birth among the descendants 
of these, and then the Manu and some of the great 
people incarnated there to specialise the type, the 
Manu preparing a special body of the type at which 
He was aiming, and incarnating in it, when He had 
brought it to the desired point. 

This latter group of highly developed Personages 
set the type whenever a new sub-race is founded, and 
the type is then seen at its best; it is the Golden 
Age to which each nation looks back in later days. 
Then the younger egos come in and carry it on, 
unable, of course, to keep at the level set. There 
is in each case, a group of younger egos sent to 
prepare the way ; then some older ones come, of the 
rank which now includes Masters; from these the 
greater people take bodies and set the new type. 
The juniors then flock in and do the best they can 
with it, at first led by some of their seniors, and 
then later left to themselves to learn their lessons 
by experience. 

Among the juniors chosen to form the first 
pioneer families, we noticed Herakles a son of 
Corona and Theodoros with Sirius as wife, Sirius 
a tall, rather muscular woman, a notable housewife, 
and very kind to her rather large family, among 
whom we observed Alcyone, Mizar, Uranus, Selene 
and Neptune. 1 Herakles had brought some Tla- 

humanity and of civilisation. They are the pioneers, the 
sappers and miners, of a great advancing army, for which 
they are clearing away jungles, making roads, bridging 
rivers. The work may be thankless, but it is necessary, and 
to many, congenial. 

3 See Appendix vii, for the complete lists. 



THE SECOND SUB-RACE, THE ARABIAN 261 

vatli nobles as captives from a foray, and the son 
of one of these, Apis, married his niece Gemini, 
much to the anger of the proud Aryan family, that 
looked on this marriage as a mesalliance an un- 
worthy mixing of their pure blood ; but doubtless it 
was quietly arranged by the Manu, in order that a 
Tlavatli intermixture might be brought in! They 
had Spica and Fides as twins, a quaint little pair. 
Hector and Aurora were another married pair of 
the emigrant families, and their daughter Albireo 
married Selene ; they had Mercury as child. Uranus 
married Andromeda, and Mars and Venus were 
born to them, and Vulcan appeared as a son of 
Alcyone. 

It will be noticed here that two who are now 
Masters, Uranus and Neptune, were born in the 
second generation ; Mars and Venus, both now Mas- 
ters, were born in the family of these in the third; 
Mercury, now a Master, was also born in the third, 
a child of Selene; and Vulcan, also now a Master, 
in the third, a child of Alcyone. In the fourth gen- 
eration the Manu appeared, as a son of Mars and 
Mercury. 

At this time some of our friends were living in 
the City of the Bridge Castor among them, mar- 
ried to Ehea. They thought the people who went to 
the valley were behaving very foolishly, for the ex- 
isting civilisation was a very fine one, and there 
was no sense in going off to make a new one, and 
to plant turnips in an unreclaimed valley, instead 
of living in the culture and ordei of the City. Be- 
sides the new religion followed by the valley-dwel- 
lers was quite unnecessary, the old one being much 



262 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

oetter. Another of the friends who accompany Cas- 
tor through the ages, Lachesis, was a ponderous 
merchant, with Velleda as a hasty short tempered 
son, who was impolite to customers, much to the dis- 
pleasure of his courteous father. Lachesis had mar- 
ried Amalthea, and she ran away with Calypso, a 
proceeding which was considered to be most im- 
proper. As she and her lover were not received ID 
the City, they went to the valley, but met there 
with no warmer welcome. 

The visit of a Toltec Prince from Poseidonis tc 
the City showed an old friend, Crux, in his person, 
and among his suite was another old friend, Phocea, 

For some centuries the people in the valley in- 
creased and multiplied, the careful specialisation 
going on, until in B. C. 40,000 the Manu thoughl 
them sufficiently numerous and sufficiently prepared 
to be sent out into the world. He sent them out under 
the leadership of Mars, supported by Corona 
and Theodoros, to retrace the way by which so 
many thousands of years ago they had come, 
to try to Aryanise the descendants of the Arabs 
whom they had left behind, for these, of all the 
Atlanteans, were the nearest to the possession of 
the new characteristics. These Arabs were still 
where He had settled them a number of half- 
civilised tribes occupying the whole of the Ara- 
bian peninsula, and with a few settlements on the 
Somali coast. A strong and friendly power existed 
at that time in the region now called Persia and 
Mesopotamia, and the Manu who had later joined 
the emigrants and headed His forces had no diffi- 
culty in obtaining permission to march His host 
through it along a carefully indicated and guarded 



THE SECOND SUB-RACE, THE ARABIAN 263 

route. It is noteworthy that this migration differs 
in character from those of later years. In those 
which descended into India the entire tribe moved, 
from the old men and women to the babies; but in 
this case the old and those with many young children 
were advised to stay behind, and the migration was 
confined to men of fighting age, with their wives and 
a comparatively small number of children. Many 
also were young unmarried men. The number of 
fighters was about 150,000, and the women and chil- 
dren may have added another 100,000 to the party. 
The Manu had sent messengers two years before 
to prepare the Arab tribes for His coming, but the 
news had not been altogether favourably received, 
and HT; was by no means sure of a welcome. When 
He had crossed the belt of desert which then, as 
now, separated Arabia from the rest of the world, 
and came in sight of the first of the Arab settle- 
ments, a body of armed horsemen appeared in front 
of Him and incontinently attacked the van of His 
army. He easily repulsed them, and, capturing some 
of them, endeavoured to make them understand that 
His mission was peaceful. The language had 
changed so much that they had great difficulty in 
understanding one another at all, but He contrived 
to reassure His captives and sent them to arrange 
an interview with their Chief. After some trouble 
and the interchange of more messages, the Chief 
came, suspicious and unconciliatory ; but a long con- 
versation and full explanations somewhat changed 
his attitude, and it occurred to him that he might 
use this unusual sort of invasion for his own pur- 
poses. He was at deadly feud with a neighbouring 
tribe, and while he had no force fit to cope with the 



264 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

Mann's capable-looking army, he felt that if he 
could enlist these strangers on his side he could 
make short work of his ancient enemies. So he tem- 
porised, and agreed to allow the visitors to establish 
themselves in a great desolate valley on the bor- 
ders of his territory. 

They thankfully accepted this offer, and very soon 
changed the whole aspect of that valley. Coming as 
they did from a highly-civilised nation, they knew 
all about the science of well-boring, and they present- 
ly had the entire valley efficiently irrigated, and a 
great stream flowing down the middle of it. Within 
a year the whole of their tract of country was 
thoroughly cultivated and some good crops had al- 
ready been obtained ; in three years they were fully 
established as a prosperous and self-supporting 
community. 

The Chieftain who had received them, however, 
was by no means satisfied; he cast a jealous eye 
upon the improvements they had made, and felt 
that, as this was part of his territory, his own people 
and not strangers ought to reap the advantages of 
it. Also, when asked to join in predatory expedi- 
tions, the Manu had said quite plainly that although 
He was grateful to His host and ready at any time 
to defend him from aggression, He would be no 
party to an unprovoked attack upon peaceable peo- 
ple. This made the Chief very angry the more so 
as he did not see his way to enforcing his commanda. 
At last he patched up a peace with his hereditary 
enemy, and induced him to join him in an endeavour 
to exterminate the new-comers. 

This little scheme, however, came hopelessly to 
grief; the Manu defeated and killed both the Chiefs. 



TEE SECOND SUB-RACE, THE ARABIAN 265 

Their subjects, when once the battle was over, phil- 
osophically accepted a new Ruler, and soon found 
that they were much more prosperous and happy 
under the improved regime, though it involved less 
fighting and more regular work. Thus the Manu 
made secure his footing in Arabia, and prom^lv 
proceeded to Aryanise his new subjects as rapidly 
as possible. Other tribes attacked Him now and 
then, but were so invariably defeated with heavy loss 
that they presently came to recognise the wisdom 
of letting Him alone. As years rolled on His king- 
dom prospered mightily, and grew ever stronger, 
while constant internecine struggles enfeebled and 
impoverished the other tribes. The natural result 
followed; by degrees, by taking opportunities as 
they offered, He absorbed tribe after tribe, usually 
without bloodshed and with the full consent of the 
majority. Before His death, forty years later, the 
upper half of Arabia owned his sway, and might be 
regarded as definitely Aryan. He might have ac- 
quired sovereignty over the south as well, but for 
the advent of a religious fanatic, who reminded his 
people that they were a chosen race; this man 
whom, as he will reappear later, and therefpre needs 
a distinguishing name, we will call Alastor took 
his stand on the directions of their Manu, given in 
ancient days, forbidding them to intermarry with 
aliens. They must therefore on no account inter- 
mingle their blood with that of these Gentiles, who 
came no one knew whence, with their pretended civ- 
ilisation and their odious tyranny, which denied to 
man even his inalienable right to kill his fellow-man 
freely, whenever he pleased. This appealed to the 
fierce impatience of control which is a prominent 



266 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

feature of the Arab character, and the southern 
tribes, who had for centuries squabbled viciously 
among themselves, actually united now to oppose 
their re-incarnated Leader. And they opposed Him 
in His own name, making His original order as to 
purity of race their rallying cry against Him. 

It was quaint that Vaivasvata Manu should thus 
be used against Himself, but Alastor was really only 
an anachronism, set in a groove from which he 
could not be moved. When the Manu had needed a 
separate people He had forbidden inter-marriage 
with outsiders: when He wished to Aryanise the 
descendants of his old followers, intermarriage be- 
came essential. But to Alastor as to many of his 
ilk growth and adaptation were heresy, and he 
played on the fanaticism of his followers. 

While this long struggle was going on, the Manu 
had the joy, in one of the intervals of comparative 
peace, of receiving a visit from His mighty Brother, 
the Mahaguru the Buddha-to-be who came to the 
second sub -race ere it began its long career of con- 
quest to indoctrinate it with the new religion which 
He had been teaching in Egypt as a reform of the 
ancient faith there prevailing. 

The great Atlantean Empire in Egypt which had 
quarrelled )with Vaivasvata Manu when He was 
leading His people away from the catastrophe of 
B. C. 75,025 to settle in Arabia had perished in 
that cataclysm, when Egypt went under water. When 
the swamps later became inhabitable, a negroid peo- 
ple possessed the land for awhile, and left behind 
them incongruous flints and other such barbarous 
remains to mark their occupation. After these, 
came the second Atlantean Empire with a great 



THE SECOND SUB-RACE, THE ARABIAN 267 

dynasty of Divine Kings, and with many of the 
heroes whom Greece later regarded as demi-gods, 
such as Herakles of the twelve labours, whose tra- 
dition was handed on to Greece. This Atlantean 
Empire lasted until about B. C. 13,500, when the 
Aryans came from southern India and made there 
an Empire of the Aryan root-stock. This Atlan- 
tean Empire was therefore ruling in B. C. 40,000, 
when the Manu was again in Arabia, and had attain- 
ed to a very high state of civilisation, stately ami 
splendid ; it had immense Temples, such as that of 
Karnac, with long and very gloomy passages, and a 
very ornate ritual, with elaborate religious teaching. 
The Egyptians were a profoundly religious race, 
and they lived through the stories belonging to their 
faith with an intensity of reality of which only a 
faint reflection is now seen among Roman and An- 
glican Catholics on such days as Good Friday. They 
were psychic, and felt the play of super-physical 
influences, and hence were without scepticism as to 
the existence of higher beings and higher worlds; 
their religion was their very life. They built their 
huge Temples to produce the impression* of vastness 
and greatness, to instil reverence into the minds of 
the lower-class people. All the colour and splend- 
our of life circled round their religion. The peo- 
ple normally wore white, but the religious proces- 
sions were gorgeous rivers of splendid colour, glit- 
tering with gold and gems. The ceremonies accom- 
panying the celebration of the death of Osiris pal- 
pitated with reality; the mourning for the mur- 
dered God was real mourning; the people wept and 
wailed aloud, the whole multitude being carried 
away with passionate emotion, and calling on Osiris 
to return. 



268 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

It was to this people that the Mahaguru came as 
Tehuti or Thoth, called later by the Greeks Hermes. 
He came to teach the great doctrine of the 'Inner 
Light' to the priests of the Temples, to the powerful 
sacerdotal hierarchy of Egypt, headed by its Phar- 
aoh. In the inner court of the chief Temple He 
taught them of "the Light that lighteth every man 
that cometh into the wo rid " a phrase of His that 
was handed down through the ages, and was echoed 
in the fourth Gospel in its early Egyptian-coloured 
words. He taught them that the Light was uni- 
versal, and that Light, which was God, dwelt in the 
heart of every man: "I am that Light," He bade 
them repeat, "that Light am I." "That Light," 
He said, "is the true man, although men may not 
recognise it, although they neglect it. Osiris is 
Light; He came forth from the Light; He dwells in 
the Light; He is the Light. The Light is hidden 
everywhere; it is in every rock and in every stone. 
When a man becomes one with Osiris the Light, 
then he becomes one with the whole of which he was 
part, and then he can see the Light in everyone, 
however thickly veiled, pressed down, and shut 
away. All the rest is not; but the Light is. The 
Light is the life of men. To every man though 
there are glorious ceremonies, though there are 
many duties for the priest to do, and many ways in 
which he should help men that Light is nearer than 
aught else, within his very heart. For every man 
the Reality is nearer than any ceremony, for he has 
only to turn inwards, and then will he see the Light. 
That is the object of every ceremony, and ceremonies 
should not be done away with, for I come not to 
destroy but to fulfill. When a man knows, he goes 



THE SECOND SUB-RACE, THE ARABIAN 269 

beyond the ceremony, he goes to Osiris, he goes to 
the Light, the Light Amun-Ra, from which all came 
forth, to which all shall return. " 

And again : * ' Osiris is in the heavens, but Osiris is 
also in the very heart of men. When Osiris in the 
heart knows Osiris in the heavens, then man be- 
comes God, and Osiris, once rent into fragments, 
again becomes one. But see! Osiris the Divine 
Spirit, Isis, the Eternal Mother, give life to 
Horus, who is Man, Man born of both, yet one with 
Osiris. Horus is merged in Osiris, and Isis, who 
had been Matter, becomes through him the Queen 
of Life and Wisdom. And Osiris, Isis, and Horus 
are all born of the Light. " 

"Two are the births of Horus. He is born of Isis, 
the God born into humanity, taking flesh of the 
Mother Eternal, Matter, the Ever- Virgin. He is 
born again into Osiris, redeeming his Mother from 
her long search for the fragments of her husband 
scattered over the earth. He is born into Osiris 
when Osiris in the heart sees Osiris in the heavens, 
and knows that the twain are one." 

So taught He, and the wise among the priests 
were glad. 

To Pharaoh, the Monarch, He gave the motto: 
"Look for the Light," for He said that only as a 
King saw the Light in the heart of each could he 
rule well. And to the people He gave as motto: 
"Thou art the Light. Let that Light shine." And 
He set that motto round the pylon in a great Tem- 
ple, running up one pillar, and across the bar, and 
down the other pillar. And this was inscribed over 
the doors of houses, and little models were made 
of the pylon on which He had inscribed it, models 



270 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

in precious metals, and also in baked clay, so that 
the poorest could buy little blue clay models, 
with brown veins running through them, and glazed. 
Another favourite motto was: " Follow the Light, " 
and this became later: " Follow the King," and this 
spread westward and became the motto of the Bound 
Table. And the people learned to say of their dead : 
"He has gone to the Light. " 

And the joyous civilisation of Egypt grew yet 
more joyous, because He had dwelt among them, the 
embodied Light. The priests whom He had taught 
handed on His teachings and His secret instructions 
which they embodied in their Mysteries, and students 
came from all nations to learn the * Wisdom of the 
Egyptians,' and the fame of the Schools of Egypt 
went abroad to all lands. 

At this time He went over to Arabia, to teach the 
leaders of the sub-race settled there. Deep was the 
joy in each as the mighty Brothers clasped hands 
and smiled into each other's eyes, and thought, in 
Their exile, of Their far-off home, of the City of 
the Bridge and of white Shamballa. For even the 
Great Ones must be sometimes weary, when They 
are living in the midst of the littleness of ignorant 
men. 

Thus to the second sub-race came the Supreme 
Teacher, and gave to them the doctrine of the In- 
ner Light. 

To return to the history of the growth of this 
people in Arabia. In consequence of the opposition 
raised against the Manu by Alas tor in the south, 
the peninsula of Arabia was divided into two parts, 
and the Manu's successors, for many generations, 
were satisfied to maintain their kingdom without 



THE SECOND SUB-RACE, THE ARABIAN 271 

seeking to increase its borders. After some cen- 
turies, a more ambitious Euler succeeded to the 
throne, and, taking advantage of local dissensions 
in the south, marched his armies clear down to the 
ocean, and proclaimed himself Emperor of Arabia. 
He allowed his new subjects to retain their own re- 
ligious ideas, and as the new Government was in 
many ways an improvement over the old, there was 
no lasting opposition to the conqueror. 

A certain fanatical section of the southerners, 
however, felt it their duty to protest against what 
they considered the triumph of evil; and under a 
prophet of rude and fiery eloquence, they abandoned 
their conquered fatherland and settled as a com- 
munity on the opposite Somali coast. 

There, under the rule of the prophet and his suc- 
cessors, they lived for some centuries, greatly in- 
creasing in numbers, until an event occurred which 
caused a serious rupture. It was discovered that 
the ruling prophet of the period, while proclaim- 
ing fanatical purity of race, had himself formed an 
attachment to a young Negress from the interior. 
When this came to light there was a great uproar, 
but the prophet was equal to the occasion, and pro- 
mulgated as a new revelation the idea that the stern 
prohibition against intermarriage was intended only 
to prevent them from mingling with the new-comers 
from the north, and did not at all apply to the Ne- 
groes, who indeed were to be regarded as slaves, a* 
goods and chattels rather than as wives. This bold 
pronouncement divided the community; the majori 
ty accepted it, at first hesitatingly and then with en- 
thusiasm, and black 'slaves' were purchased with 
avidity. But a fairly large minority rebelled 



272 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

against the revelation, and denounced it as merely 
a clumsy artifice to shield a licentious priest (as 
indeed it was) ; and when they saw themselves out- 
voted they drew apart in horror, and declared that 
they could no longer dwell amongst heretics who had 
abandoned all principle. An ambitious preacher, 
who had always yearned to be a leader, put him- 
self at their head, and they made themselves into 
a huge caravan and departed in virtuous indigna- 
tion. They wandered round the shore of the Gulf 
of Aden and up the coast of the Red Sea, eventual- 
ly finding their way into Egyptian territory. Their 
curious story happened to take the fancy of the 
Pharaoh of the period, and he offered them an out- 
lying district of his kingdom if they chose to set- 
tle there. They accepted, and lived there peacefully 
enough for centuries, flourishing under the benef- 
icent Egyptian Government, but never in any way 
intermingling with its people. 

Eventually some Pharaoh made a demand upon 
them for additional taxation and forced work, which 
they considered an infringement of their privileges ; 
so once more they undertook a wholesale migration, 
and this time settled in Palestine, where we know 
them as the Jews, still maintaining as strongly as 
ever the theory that they are a chosen people. 

But the majority, left behind in Somaliland, had 
their adventures also. Now that, owing to the slave 
traffic, they became better known to the tribes of the 
interior, whom they had always previously kept 
rigidly outside their bounds, the savages realised 
the wealth to be obtained from robbing the semi- 
civilised, and the tribes began a series of descents 
upon the colony, which so harassed its members that, 



THE SECOND SUB-RACE, THE ARABIAN 273 

after fighting them for many years, losing thousands 
of lives, and finding their territory more and more 
circumscribed every decade, they too decided to 
abandon their homes, and migrate once more across 
the Gulf to the land of their forefathers. They were 
received in a friendly manner, and were soon ab- 
sorbed into the general mass of the population. 
They had called themselves 'theH true Arabs/ 
though they deserved that title less than any; and 
even to-day there is a tradition that the true Arabs 
landed at Aden, and slowly spread northwards ; even 
to-day may be seen among the Hamyaritic Arabs 
of the southern part of the country the indelible 
traces of that admixture of negroid blood so many 
thousands of years ago; even to-day we may hear 
a legend that the Mostareb or adscititious Arabs of 
the northern half went away somehow for a long 
time into Asia, far away beyond Persia, and then 
returned, bearing with them many marks of their 
stay in foreign lands. 

The second sub-race grew and increased, flourish- 
ing exceedingly for many thousands of. years, and 
extending its dominion over nearly the whole of 
Africa, except that part which was in the hands of 
Egypt. Once, very much later, they invaded Egypt, 
and for a short time ruled as the Hyksos Kings, 
but their palmy days were when they ruled the 
great Algerian island, pushed their way down the 
east coast to the very Cape of Good Hope itself, and 
founded a kingdom which included all Matabeleland 
and the Transvaal and the Lorenzo Marques district. 

Our band of pioneers, after several births in Ara- 
bia, took part in the building of this South African 
Empire, and we found Mars there as Monarch, with 



274 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

His faithful Herakles as ruler of a province under 
him. Sirius was also born in Mashonaland, where 
he married Alcyone, and among their negro servants 
we find the faithful hand-maiden of many lives, 
Boreas. The scenery in Matabeleland was beauti- 
ful, and there were valleys full of fine trees and 
studded with herds of antelopes. Great cities were 
made of the favourite massive type, and huge Tem- 
ples, and the civilisation gradually built up was by 
no means an unworthy one. But the gulf between 
the two peoples, the native Africans and the Arab 
conquerors, was too wide to be spanned, and the 
Africans remained labourers and domestic servants, 
kept entirely in subjection. 

The Arabs made settlements also on the West 
Coast of Africa, but there they came into collision 
with men from Poseidonis, and were in the end en- 
tirely driven back. Madagascar was invaded, the 
southern Empire trying to occupy it, but it suc- 
ceeded only in maintaining for a time settlements 
on different parts of the coast. 

When the great Sumero-Akkad Empire of Persia, 
Mesopotamia and Turkestan finally broke up into 
email States and disorder, an Arab monarch con- 
ceived the bold idea of reuniting it under his own 
leadership. He led his armies against it, and, after 
twenty years of strenuous fighting, made himself 
master of the plains of Mesopotamia and of almost 
the whole of Persia, up to the great salt lake of 
Khorasan, where the desert now is. But he could 
not conquer Kurdistan, nor could he subdue the 
mountain tribes who harassed his armies on their 
way. Then he died, and his son wisely set himself 
to consolidate rather than to extend his Empire. It 



THE SECOND SUB-RACE, THE ARABIAN 275 

held together well for some centuries, and might 
have endured much longer, but for the fact that 
dynastic troubles broke out in Arabia itself, and the 
governor of Persia, a cousin of the Arab King, seiz- 
ed the opportunity to proclaim himself independent. 
The Arab dynasty which he thus founded lasted two 
hundred years, but amidst incessant warfare; then 
again came a period of upheaval and of small tribes, 
and frequent raids from the savage Central Asian 
nomads, who play so prominent a part in the history 
of that region. One Arab King was tempted by re- 
ports which reached him of the fabulous wealth of 
India to send a fleet across to attack it; but that was 
a failure, for his fleet was promptly destroyed and 
his men killed or taken prisoners. 

After the final collapse of the Arabian Empire of 
Persia and Chaldaea, there were centuries of anarchy 
and bloodshed, and the countries were becoming 
almost depopulated ; so the Manu at last determined 
to come to their rescue, and sent forth to them His 
third sub-race, which established the great Persian 
Empire of the Iranians. 



CHAPTER XVIII 
THE THIRD SUB-RACE, THE IRANIAN 

AGAIN we return to the City of the Bridge, still 
great, though decreasing in splendour, for we have 
come to the year B. C. 30,000. An interval of ten 
thousand years elapsed after the despatch of the 
second sub-race before the Manu sent forth the 
third. The men for this work had been carefully 
prepared through many centuries, like the others; 
Ho had kept them apart in one of His mountain- 
valleys, and developed them until they showed as 
quite a distinct type. In His original selection in 
Atlantis, He had included a small proportion of the 
best of the sixth Atlantean sub-race, and He now 
utilised the families which had preserved most of 
that Akkadian blood, sending into incarnation in 
them His group of pioneers. One or two of them 
were sent further afield to bring back a strain of 
Akkadian blood from its home in more western coun- 
tries. TKus we observed Herakles, a strong good- 
looking young man, arriving at the City of the 
Bridge in a caravan from Mesopotamia, his birth- 
place ; he was dolichocephalous, an Akkadian of pure 
blood. He had joined the caravan from a mere spirit 
of adventure, the desire of high-spirited youth to 
see the world, and certainly had not the faintest 
idea that he had been sent to Mesopotamia to take 

276 



THE THIRD SUB-RACE, THE IRANIAN 277 

birth, and was being drawn back to Central Asia to 
rejoin his old friends in their accustomed pioneer 
work. He was immensely attracted by the beauty 
and splendour of the ancient and ordered civilisa- 
tion into which he came, and promptly anchored 
himself therein by falling in love with Orion, a 
daughter of Sirius. 

This proceeding was frowned upon by Sirius and 
his wife Mizar, for Sirius was a younger son of 
Vaivasvata Manu and Mercury, and he disapproved 
of the introduction of a young Akkadian into his 
family circle. But a hint from his Father was 
enough to ensure his compliance, for he was, as ever, 
promptly obedient to authority, and the Manu was 
at once his Father and his King. In order to com- 
ply with the law which the Manu Himself had estab- 
lished, it was necessary that Herakales should be 
adopted into an Aryan family, so he was accepted 
into that of Osiris, an older brother of Sirius. 

The Manu was very old, and as Sirius was not 
wanted for the succession, he was packed off to the 
valley selected for the building up of the third sub- 
race, with his family, including his son-in-law, Her- 
akles, and his children. 1 Pallas the Plato of later 
history was there as a priest, and Helios as a pries- 
tess, a tall commanding figure, with dignified ges- 
tures. 

The people of this valley, as they multiplied, were 
more pastoral than agricultural, keeping large herds 
of sheep and cattle and numbers of horses. 

Thp Manu who, on this occasion, had largely modi- 
fied His appearance, came into the sub-race in the 
fifth generation, and He allowed the people to mul- 

*See Appendix viii, for complete list. 



278 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

tiply for some two thousand years until there was 
available an army of three hundred thousand fight- 
ing men, fit to undergo hardship and strenuous 
marching. He then sent into incarnation Mars, Coro- 
na, Theodoros, Vulcan and Vajra, fit captains for 
His host, and He led it forth Himself. This time it 
was no ordinary migration ; it was simply an army 
on the march. The women and children were left 
behind in the valley, where Neptune, wife of Mars, 
and Osiris, the wife of Corona, strong and noble 
matrons, took into their hands the direction of af- 
fairs, and ruled the community well. 1 

A fine body-guard of young unmarried men acted 
as staff to the leaders, ready to be sent off with mes- 
sages in any direction; they were very proud of 
themselves and very gay, enthusiastic over the idea 
that they were going out for a real good fight un- 
der the Manu Himself. 

But it was no holiday march, for the route lay 
through a difficult country ; some of the passes across 
the end of the Tian-shan range, where it curves 
round into the Kashgar district, were nine thousand 
feet in height; for part of the way they followed 
the course of a river which passed through ravines 
and valleys. The Manu poured His great army of 
three hundred thousand splendid fighting men into 
Kashgar, defeating easily such of the nomad hordes 
as ventured to attack Him as He crossed their de 
serts. These tribes buzzed round the fringe of the 
army, and there were many skirmishes, but no bat- 
tles of any account. The weapons used were long 
and short lances and spears, short strong swords, 
slings and bows. The horsemen used lances and 

Appendix ix. 



THE THIRD SUB-RACE, THE IRANIAN 279 

swords, and had round shields slung across their 
backs; the footmen carried spears, and there were 
bodies of archers and slingers, the former marching 
in the centre, and the archers and slingers on the 
outside. 

Sometimes, as they neared a village, the villa- 
gers who dreaded and hated the warlike hill tribes 
would meet and welcome them, bringing cattle and 
food of all sgrts. Long harassed by forays, often 
attacked, robbed and massacred, the people of the 
plains were inclined to welcome a power which would 
restore and maintain order. 

Persia was overrun without much difficulty in the 
course of two years, and then Mesopotamia was sub- 
dued. The Manu established military posts at fre- 
quent intervals, dividing the country among His 
chiefs. Forts were built, first of earth and later of 
stones, until a network was made over Persia to 
prevent raids from the mountains. No attempt was 
made to conquer the warlike tribes, but they were 
practically confined within their fastnesses, and 
were no longer permitted to plunder the peaceable 
inhabitants of the plains. 

The body-guard, now bearded and seasoned war- 
riors, accompanied their Chiefs everywhere, and the 
land was conquered right down to the desert of the 
south, and up to the Kurdish mountains on the north. 
For some years there was occasional fighting, and 
it was not until the country was quite peaceful and 
settled that the Manu called to it the vast caravan 
of the wives and children of the soldiers, left be- 
hind in the valley of the third sub-race. 

The arrival of the caravan was a matter of great 
rejoicing, and marriages became the order of the 



280 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

day. Herakles and Alcyone fell in love with the 
same young woman, Fides, a handsome girl with a 
decided nose; she preferred Alcyone, and the dis- 
consolate Herakles decided to commit suicide, life 
being no longer worth living; his father, Mars, how- 
ever, came down upon him, bidding him not to be a 
fool, and sent him off on an expedition against an 
insurgent chief, Trapezium ; under these conditions 
Herakles recovered, defeated his adversary, came 
back quite contented, and married Psyche, a niece 
of Mars, who had been adopted by him after her 
father was slain in battle. 

For the next fifty years the Manu kept this new 
Empire under His direct rule, visiting it several 
times and appointing members of His family as its 
Governors; but just before His death He resigned 
His own throne in Central Asia to His grandson 
Mars, appointed Mars ' next brother, Corona, as the 
independent King of Persia, with Theodoros under 
him as Governor of Mesopotamia. From this time 
the third sub-race quickly increased in power. In 
a few centuries it dominated the whole of western 
Asia from the Mediterranean to the Pamirs, and 
from the Persian Gulf to the Sea of Aral. With cer- 
tain changes its Empire lasted until about B. C. 
2,200. 

In this long period of twenty-eight thousand 
years, one event stands out as of supreme impor- 
tance the coming of the Mahaguru as the first Za- 
rathustra, the founding of the Religion of the Fire, 
in B. C. 29,700. 

The country had become fairly settled under the 
reigns of the Kings who had succeeded Corona, of 
whom Mars, the Ruler of the time of course in a 



THE THIRD SUB-RACE, THE IRANIAN 281 

new body was the tenth. Military rule had passed 
away, though occasional raids reminded the inhabit- 
ants of their turbulent neighbours on the further 
side of the ring of forts, now well-built and strong. 
It was in the main an agricultural country, though 
large numbers of herds and flocks were kept, and it 
was these which specially tempted descents from 
the hills. 

The second son of Mars was Mercury, and his 
body was chosen as the vehicle for the Supreme 
Teacher; Surya was the Chief Priest, the Hiero- 
phant, of the time, at the head of the State religion, 
a mixture of Nature and Star Worship, and he 
wielded an immense authority, chiefly because of 
his office, but also partly because he was of the 
blood royal. The fact that Mercury had been chosen 
to surrender his body for the use of the Mahaguru 
had been communicated to his father as well as to 
the Chief Priest, and from his childhood he had been 
carefully trained in view of his glorious destiny, 
Surya taking charge of his education, and the father 
co-operating in every way in his power. 

The day arrived when the first public appearance 
of the Mahaguru was to be made ; He had come from 
Shamballa in His subtle body, and had taken pos- 
session of the body of Mercury, and a great pro- 
cession started from the Royal Palace to the chief 
Temple of the city. In it walked, on the right, 
under a golden canopy, the stately figure of the 
King; the jewelled canopy of the High Priest glitter- 
ed on the left ; and between them was carried, should- 
er-high so that all might see, a golden chair, in which 
sat the well-known figure of the King's second son. 
But what was there that caused a murmur of sur- 



282 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

prise, of wonder, as he passed along! Was that 
really the Prince, whom they had known from child- 
hood! Why was he carried high as the centre of 
the procession, while King and Hierophant walked 
humbly beside him! What was this new stateliness, 
this unknown dignity, this gaze, so piercing yet so 
tender, that swept across the crowd! Not thus had 
held himself, not thus had looked at them, the 
Prince who had grown up among them. 

The procession swept on and entered the huge 
courtyard of the Temple, crowded with people in 
the many-coloured garments of festival days, when 
each wore a mantle of the colour of his ruling 
planet; down the sides of the steps which rose to 
the platform in front of the great door of the 
Temple were ranged the priests in long white gar- 
ments, and rainbow-coloured over-robes of silk; in 
the midst of the platform an altar had been erected, 
and on it wood was piled, and fragrant gums, and 
incense, but no smoke arose for the pile, to the 
people's surprise, was unlighted. 

The procession passed on to the foot of the steps, 
and there all halted, save the three central figures; 
they ascended the steps, the King and the Hiero- 
phant placing themselves to the right and left of the 
altar, and the Prince, who was the Mahaguru, in the 
centre, behind it. 

Then Surya, the Hierophant, spoke to the priests 
and to the people, telling them that He who stood 
there behind the altar was no longer the Prince they 
had known, but that He was the Messenger from 
the Most High and from the Sons of the Fire who 
dwelt in the far East, whence their forefathers had 
come forth. That He had brought Their word to 



THE THIRD SUB-RACE, THE IRANIAN 283 

Their children, to which all should yield reverence 
and obedience, and he bade them listen while the 
great Messenger spake in Their Name. As the 
Head of their faith, he humbly bade Him welcome. 

Then over the listening throng rang the silver 
voice of the Mahaguru, and none there was who 
could not hear it as though spoken to him alone. He 
told them that He had come from the Sons of the 
Fire, the Lords of the Flame, who dwelt in the 
sacred City of the White Island, in far Shamballa. 
He brought them a revelation from Them, a symbol 
which should ever keep Them in their minds. He 
told them how the Fire was the purest of all ele- 
ments and the purifier of all things, and that there- 
after it should be for them the symbol of the Holiest. 
That the Fire was embodied in the Sun in the heav- 
ens, and burned, though hidden, in the heart of 
man. It was heat, it was light, it was health and 
strength, and in it and by it all had life and motion. 
And much He told them of its deep meaning, and 
how in all things they should see the hidden presence 
of the Fire. 

Then He lifted up His right hand, and behold! 
there shone in it a Rod, as of lightning held in 
bondage, yet shooting out its flashes on every side ; 
and He pointed the Rod to the East of the Heavens, 
and cried some words aloud in an unknown tongue ; 
and the heavens became one sheet of flame, and Fire 
fell blazing down upon the altar, and a Star shone 
out above Hi? Head and seemed to bathe Him in its 
radiance. And all the priests and the people fell 
upon their faces, and Surya and the King bowed 
down in homage at His feet, and the clouds of frag- 



284 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

rant smoke from the altar veiled the three for a 
few moments from sight. 

Then, \vith His hand upraised in blessing, the 
Mahaguru descended the steps, and He, with the 
King and the Hierophant, returned with the pro- 
cession to the Palace whence they had come. And 
the people marvelled greatly and rejoiced, because 
the Gods of their forefathers had remembered them, 
and had sent them the Word of Peace. And they 
carried home the flowers which had rained down 
upon them from the sky when the Fire had passed, 
and kept them in their shrines as precious heirlooms 
for their descendants. 

The Mahaguru remained for a considerable time 
in the city, going daily to the Temple to instruct the 
priests ; He taught them that Fire and water were 
the purifiers of all else, and must never be polluted, 
and that even the water was purified by the Fire; 
that all fire was the Fire of the Sun, and was in 
all things and might be released as fire ; that out of 
the Fire and out of the water all things come, 
for the Fire and the water were the two Spirits, 
Fire being life and water form. 1 

The Mahaguru had round Him a quite august as- 
semblage of Masters, and others less advanced. He 
left these to carry on His teaching when He depart- 
ed. 

His departure was as dramatic as His first preach- 
ing. 

The people were gathered together to hear Him 

Possibly out of this aroee the later teaching of Ormuzd 
and Ahriman. There are passages which show that the 
double of Ormuzd was not originally an evil power, but 
rather matter, while Orrnuzd was Spirit. 



THE THIRD SUB-RACE, THE IRANIAN 285 

preach, as He was wont to do occasionally, and they 
knew not that it was for the last time. He stood, 
as before, on the great platform, but there was no 
altar. He preached, inculcating the duty of gain- 
ing knowledge and of practising love, and bade 
them follow and obey Surya, whom He left in His 
place as Teacher. And then He told them that He 
was going, and He blessed them, and lifting up 
His arms to the eastern sky He called aloud; and 
out of the sky came down a whirling cloud of flame, 
and enwrapped Him as He stood, and then, whirling 
still, it shot upwards and fled eastwards, and He 
was gone. 

Then the people fell on their faces and cried out 
that He was a God, and they exulted exceedingly 
that He had lived among them; but the King was 
very sad, and mourned for His departure many 
days. And Mercury, who, in his subtle body, had 
ever remained near Him, at His service, returned 
with Him to the Holy Ones, and rested for awhile 
in peace. 

After He had gone, Star-worship did not at once 
disappear, for the people regarded His teaching as 
a reform, not as a substitution, and still worshipped 
the Moon, and Venus, and the constellations, and 
the planets; but the Fire was held sacred as the 
image, the emblem, and the being of the Sun, and 
the new religion rather enfolded the old one than 
replaced it. Gradually the Faith of the Fire grew 
stronger and stronger ; Star-worship retreated from 
inant faith, and took a very scientific form. Astrol- 
Persia to Mesopotamia, where it remained the dom- 
ogy there reached its zenith, and scientifically guid- 
ed human affairs, both public and private. Its 



286 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

priests possessed much occult knowledge, and the 
wisdom of the Magi became famed throughout the 
East. In Persia, the Religion of the Fire triumphed, 
and later Prophets carried on the work of the great 
Zarathustra, and built up the Zoroastrian Faith and 
its literature ; it has endured down to our own day. 

The third sub-race numbered about a million 
souls when they settled down in Persia and Meso- 
potamia, and they multiplied rapidly under the 
favourable conditions of their new home, and also 
incorporated in their nation the sparse population 
which existed in the country when they entered it. 

In the twenty-eight thousand years of the Persian 
Empire there were naturally -many fluctuations; 
most of the time Persia and Mesopotamia were un- 
der separate rulers, of whom sometimes the one, 
sometimes the other, was nominally Overlord: some- 
times the two countries were split up into smaller 
States, owing a kind of loose feudal allegiance to 
the central King. All through their history they 
had constantly recurring difficulties with the nomad 
Mongolians on one hand, and the mountaineers of 
Kurdistan and the Hindu Kush on the other. Some- 
times the Iranians drew back for a time before these 
tribes ; sometimes they pushed the frontier of civili- 
sation further forward, and drove the savages back. 
At one period they ruled most of Asia Minor, and 
made temporary settlements in several of the coun- 
tries bordering the Mediterranean ; at one time they 
held Cyprus, Rhodes and Crete; but on the whole 
in that part of the world the Atlantean power was 
too strong for them, and they avoided conflict with 
it. At this western boundary of their kingdom 
powerful Scythian and Hittite confederations dis- 



THE THIRD SUB-RACE, THE IRANIAN 287 

puted their dominion at various points of their 
history ; once at least they conquered Syria but seem 
to have found it a useless acquisition and soon 
abandoned it; and twice they embroiled themselves 
with Egypt, against which they could do but little. 
During most of this long period they kept up a high 
level of civilisation, and many relics of their mighty 
architecture lie buried beneath desert sands. Various 
dynasties arose among them, and several different 
languages prevailed in the course of their chequer- 
ed history. They avoided hostilities with India, 
being separated from it by a wild territory a sort 
of no-man's-land; Arabia troubled them but little, 
for there again a useful belt of desert intervened. 
They were great traders, merchants, manufacturers 
a much more settled people than the second sub- 
race, and with more definite religious ideas. The 
best specimens of the Parsis of the present day give 
a fair idea of their appearance. The present inhab- 
itants of Persia have still much of their blood in 
them, though largely commingled with that of their 
Arab conquerors. The Kurds, the Afghans, and the 
Baluchis are also mainly descended from them, 
though with various admixtures. 



CHAPTER XIX 
THE FOURTH SUB-RACE, THE KELTIC 1 

BY this time the great Central Asian Race was 
far on the road to its decline, but the Manu had been 
careful to preserve dignity, power, and pristine 
vigour in two branches to which He had given much 
special training the seed of the fourth and fifth 
sub-races. His arrangements for them had been 
somewhat different from those of the earlier segre- 
gations. The type of the Root Race, the points in 
which it varied from the Atlantean, were now 
thoroughly established, so He was able to devote 
his attention to another kind of specialisation. 

Those who were to constitute the fourth sub-race 
were drawn apart as usual, into a large valley in 
the mountains, not far from the capital; the Manu 
selected a number of the most refined people whom 
He could find in the City as the nucleus of the new 
sub-race, and a division of classes arose in the colo- 
ny; for the Manu was striving to develop certain 
new characteristics, to awaken imagination and art- 
istic sensibility, to encourage poetry oratory, 
painting and music, and the people who responded 
to this could not do agricultural and other hard man- 



band of Servers took no part in the founding of 
the fourth and fifth sub-races. They were at work in many 
countries, and may be met in the Lives of Alcyone. 

288 



TEE FOURTH SVB-RACE, THE KELTIC 289 

ual labour. Anyone who showed any artistic talent 
in the schools was drafted off for special culture; 
thus Neptune was observed reciting, and was given 
special attention in order to develop the artistic fao- 
ulty revealed in his recitation. He was remark- 
ably handsome, and physical beauty was a marked 
characteristic of the sub-race, especially among this 
artistic class. The people were also trained to be 
enthusiastic, and to be devoted to their leaders. 
Great pains were taken for many centuries to de- 
velop these characteristics, and so effective was the 
work that they remain the special marks of the Kelt. 
The valley was managed practically as a separate 
State, and great predominance was given to the arts 
already named, art of all kinds being endowed in 
various ways. Under this special treatment the sub- 
race, as time rolled on, grew somewhat conceited, 
and looked down upon the rest of the kingdom as 
being what we should now call 'Philistine'. And, 
indeed, they had much justification for their vanity, 
for they were an extraordinarily handsome people, 
cultured and refined in their tastes, and with much 
artistic talent. 

The time chosen to send them forth was about 
20,000 B. C., and their instructions were to proceed 
along the northern frontier of the Persian King- 
dom, and to win for themselves a home among the 
mountains which we now call the Caucasus, at that 
time occupied by a number of wild tribes of pre- 
datory nature who were a constant annoyance to 
Persia. By taking advantage of this, the Manu was 
able to make arrangements with the Persian Mon- 
arch not only to allow free passage and food to 
His enormous host, but also to send with them a 



290 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

strong army to assist in subduing the mountaineers. 
Even with this help this proved no easy task. The 
new-comers soon conquered for themselves a place 
in which to live, and they easily defeated the tribes 
when the latter could be persuaded to risk a pitched 
battle; but when it came to guerilla warfare they 
were by no means so successful, and many a year 
had passed before they could consider themselves 
reasonably secure from attack. They established 
themselves first somewhere in the district of Erivan, 
on the shores of Lake Sevanga, but as the centuries 
rolled on and their number greatly increased, they 
gradually exterminated the tribes or reduced them 
to submission, until eventually the whole of Geor- 
gia and Mingrelia was in their hands. Indeed in 
two thousand years they were occupying Armenia 
and Kurdistan as well, and later on Phrygia also 
came under their domination, so that they held near- 
ly all Asia Minor as well as the Caucasus. In their 
mountain home they flourished greatly and became 
a mighty nation. 

They formed rather a federation of tribes than 
an Empire, for their country was so broken up into 
valleys that free communication jwas impossible. 
Even after they had begun to colonise the Mediter- 
ranean coast, they looked back to the Caucasus as 
their home, and it was really a second centre from 
which the sub-race went forth to its glorious des- 
tiny. By 10,000 B. C. they began to resume their 
westward march, travelling not as a nation, but as 
tribes. So it was only in comparatively small waves 
that they finally arrived in Europe, which it was 
their destiny to occupy. 

Even a tribe did not go as a whole, but left be- 



THE FOURTH SUB-RACE, THE KELTIC 291 

hind it in its valley many of its members to carry 
on the work of cultivation ; these intermarried with 
other races, and their descendants, with some inter- 
mixture of Semitic blood in their veins, are the 
Georgians of to-day. Only in the cases in which a 
tribe proposed to settle in a country already in the 
hands of their sub-race did they depart from their 
old home in a body. 

The first section to cross into Europe from Asia 
Minor were the ancient Greeks not the Greeks of 
our ' Ancient History,' but their far-away ancestors, 
those who are sometimes called Pelasgians. It will 
be remembered that the Egyptian priests are men- 
tioned in Plato's Timoeus and Critias as having 
spoken to a later Greek of the splendid race which 
had preceded his own people in his land; how they 
had turned back an invasion from the mighty na- 
tion from the West, the conquering nation that had 
subdued all before it, until it shivered itself against 
the heroic valour of these Greeks. In comparison 
with these, it was said, the modern Greeks the 
Greeks of our history who seem to us so great 
were as pigmies. From these sprang the Trojans 
who fought with the modern Greeks, and the city of 
Agade in Asia Minor was peopled by their descend- 
ants. 

These, then, had held for a long time the sea- 
board of Asia Minor and the islands of Cyprus and 
Crete, and all the trade of that part of the world 
was carried in their vessels. A fine civilisation was 
gradually built up in Crete, which endured for 
thousands of years, and was still flourishing in B. 
C. 2,800. The name of Minos will ever be remem- 
bered as its founder or chief builder, and he was of 



292 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

these elder Greeks, even before B. C. 10,000. The 
final cause of their definite entry into Europe as a 
power was an aggressive movement on the part of 
the Emperor of Poseidonis. 

The Mediterranean coasts and islands had for 
many centuries been in the hands of a number of 
small nations, most of them Etrurian or Akkadian, 
but some Semitic; and, except for occasional squab- 
bles, these people were usually peaceful merchant- 
men. But it occurred one day to the Emperor of 
Poseidonis to annex all these States, by way of ex- 
tending his realm arid rivalling the traditions of his 
forefathers. So he prepared a great army and a 
mighty fleet, and started on his career of conquest. 
He subdued without difficulty the large Algerian 
island ; he ravaged the coasts of Spain, Portugal and 
Italy, and forced all those peoples to submit to him ; 
and Egypt, which was not a great naval power, was 
already debating whether to propose a treaty 
with him, or to anger him by a resistance which 
it was feared would be hopeless. Just when he 
felt secure of the success of his plans, a difficul- 
ty arose from an entirely unexpected quarter. The 
Greek sailors of the Levant declined altogether 
to be impressed by his imposing forces, and de- 
fied him to interfere with their trade. He had 
been so sure of victory that he had divided his 
fleet, and had only half of it immediately avail- 
able; but with that half he at once attacked the 
presumptuous Greeks, who inflicted upon him a 
serious defeat, drowning thousands of his soldiers, 
and leaving not one ship afloat of the great num- 
ber that attacked them. The battle was not unlike 
the destruction by the English of the great Spanish 



THE FOURTH SUB-RACE, THE KELTIC 293 

Armada; the Greek vessels were smaller than the 
Atlantean, and not so powerfully armed, but they 
were faster and far easier to handle. They knew 
their seas thoroughly, and in several cases decoyed 
their enemies into positions where the loss of the 
larger ship was certain. The weather helped them, 
too, as in the case of the Spanish Armada. The At- 
lantean ships had great banks of oars, and were 
clumsy, lumbering things, quite unfitted for heavy 
weather, and shipping water easily. They also could 
only navigate deep water, and the agile Greek ves- 
sels fled into channels navigable enough for them 
but fatal to their heavy antagonists, which promptly 
ran aground. 

The second half of the Atlantean fleet was hasti- 
ly collected and another attack was made, but it 
was no more successful than the first, though the 
Greeks lost heavily in repelling it. The Atlantean 
Monarch himself escaped, and contrived to land in 
Sicily, where some of his troops had established 
themselves; but as soon as it became known that 
his fleet had been destroyed, the conquered popula- 
tions rose against him, and be had to fight his way 
home through the whole length of Italy. He with- 
drew as he went the various garrisons which he had 
established, but, nevertheless, by the time ho reach- 
ed the Riviera, he had but a few utterly exhausted 
followers. He made his way in disguise across the 
south of France, and eventually reached his own 
kingdom in a merchant ship. Naturally he vowed 
direst vengeance against the Greeks, and at once 
ordered preparations for another vast expedition; 
but the news of the total loss of his fleet and army 
emboldened various discontented tribes in his own 



294 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

island to raise the standard of rebellion, and during 
the rest of his reign he never again found himself 
in a position to undertake foreign aggression. 

The success of the Greeks immensely strength- 
ened their position in the Mediterranean, and within 
the next century they had established settlements on 
many of its shores. But a worse enemy than the 
Emperor of Poseidonis now assailed them, and for 
the moment conquered them, although in the end it 
proved beneficial. It was the terrible tidal wave 
created by the sinking of Poseidonis, in B. C. 9,564, 
which destroyed most of their settlements, and ser- 
iously injured the remainder. Both the Gobi Sea 
and the Sahara Sea became dry land, and the most 
appalling convulsions took place. 

This, however, affected the main stock of the sub- 
race in its highland home but slightly; messengers 
from the almost destroyed emigrants arrived in the 
Caucasus, begging urgently for help, and they went 
from tribe to tribe, haranguing the people, and 
urging them to send help to their suffering brethren. 
Partly from fellow-feeling, and partly with the wish 
of bettering their own condition and furthering their 
fortunes by commerce, the tribes combined, as soon 
as it seemed certain that the catastrophe was over, 
to send exploring expeditions to ascertain the fate of 
their brethren beyond the seas, and, when those re- 
turned, further relief was organised on a large scale. 

The early Greek settlements had been all on the 
sea-coast, and the colonists were daring sailors ; the 
populations of the interior were not always friendly, 
though overawed by the dash and valour of the 
Greeks. But when these latter were almost all de- 
stroyed by the cataclysm, the few survivors were 



TEE FOURTH SUB-RACE, THE KELTIC 295 

often persecuted, and even in some cases enslaved, 
by the interior races. When the bottom of the Sa- 
hara Sea was heaved up, its waters poured out 
through the great gap between Egypt and Tunis, 
where Tripoli now stands, and the tidal wave de- 
stroyed the sea-coasts, though the interior suffered 
but little ; it was just those sea-coasts on which the 
Greeks had settled, so that they were the chief suf- 
ferers. The Sahara gradually sank down again, and 
a new coast line rose, assuming the configuration 
known to us along the African coast, the great Al- 
gerian island joining the mainland, and forming with 
the new land the northern coast of Africa. 

Almost all shipping had been simply annihilated, 
and new navies had to be built; yet so great was the 
energy of the Greeks that within a few years all the 
ports of Asia Minor were once more in working 
order, and streams of new ships went forth from 
them to see what help was needed across the seas, 
to re-establish the colonies, and to redeem the 
honour of the Greek name by delivering those who 
bore it from a foreign yoke. In a surprisingly short 
time this was done, and the fact that these ancient 
Greeks were the first to recover from the shock 
of the great cataclysm gave them the opportunity of 
annexing all the best harbours of the new coast line, 
and since most of the trade of Egypt also was in 
their hands, the Mediterranean remained for cen- 
turies practically a Greek sea. There came a time 
when Phoenicians and Carthaginians divided the 
trade with them, but that was much later. They 
even carried their trade eastward, an expedition go- 
ing as far as Java, and founding a colony in that 
island, with which a connection was long kept up. 



296 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

The Phoenicians were a fourth Race people de- 
rived from the Semites and Akkadians, the fifth and 
sixth Atlantean sub-races, the Akkadian blood much 
predominating. The Carthaginians, later, were also 
Akkadian, intermixed with Arab, and with a dash 
of negra blood. Both were trading peoples, and in 
the much later days, when Carthage was a mighty 
city, its troops were almost entirely mercenaries, re- 
cruited among the African tribes, the Libyans and 
Numidians. 

The emigration from Asia Minor into Europe was 
almost continuous, and it is not easy to divide it into 
distinct waves. If we take these ancient Greeks as 
cur'first subdivision, we may perhaps count the Al- 
banians as the second, and the Italian race as the 
third, both of these latter occupying about the same 
countries as those in which we know them now. Then 
after an interval came a fourth wave of astonishing 
vitality that to which modern ethnologists restrict 
the name "Keltic". This slowly became the predom- 
inant race over the north of Italy, the whole of 
France and Belgium and the British Isles, the west- 
ern part of Switzerland, and Germany west of the 
Rhine, The Greeks of our ' Ancient History' were 
a mixture, derived from the first wave, mingled 
with settlers from the second, third and fourth, and 
with an infusion of the fifth sub-race, coming down 
from the north and settling in Greece. These gave 
the rare, and much admired, golden hair and blue 
eyes, occasionally found among the Greeks. 

The fifth wave practically lost itself in the north 
of Africa, and only traces can now be found of its 
blood, much mingled with the Semitic the fifth sub- 
race of the Atlantean to which the name originally 



THE FOURTH SUB-RACE, THE KELTIC 297 

belonged, and the second sub-race of the Aryan, the 
Arabian, sometimes also called Semitic among the 
Berbers, the Moors, the Kabyles, and even the Gu- 
anches of the Canary Islands, in this last case min- 
gled with the Tlavatli. This wave encountered the 
fourth and intermingled with it in the Spanish pen- 
insula, and at a latter stage of its existence only 
about two thousand years ago it contributed the 
last of the many elements which go to make up the 
population of Ireland; for to it belonged the Miles- 
ian invaders who poured into that island from Spain 
some of them founding a dynasty of Milesian 
Kings in France and bound it under curious forms 
of magic. 

But a far more splendid element of the Irish popu- 
lation had come into it before: that from the sixth 
wave, which left Asia Minor in a totally different 
direction, pushing- north-west until they reached 
Scandinavia, where they intermingled to some ex- 
tent with the fifth sub-race, the Teutonic, of which 
we shall speak in the next chapter. They thus de- 
scended upon Ireland from the north, and are cele- 
brated in its history as the Tuatha-de-Danaan, who 
are spoken of more as Gods than men. The slight 
mixture with the Teutonic sub-race gave this last 
wave some characteristics, both of disposition and 
of personal appearance, in which they differed from 
the majority of their sub-race. 

But, on the whole, we may describe the men of 
this fourth, or Keltic sub-race, as having brown or 
black hair and eyes, and round heads. They were, 
as a rule, not tall in stature, and their character 
showed clearly the result of the Manu's efforts thou- 
sands of years before. They were imaginative, elo- 



298 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

quent, poetical, musical, capable of enthusiastic de- 
votion to a leader, and splendidly brave in follow- 
ing him, though liable to quick depression in case of 
failure. They seemed to lack what we call business 
qualities, and they had but scant regard for truth. 

The first Athens or the city built upon the site 
where Athens now stands, was built B.C.8,000. (The 
Athens of our histories was begun about B. C. 1,000, 
the Parthenon being built in B. C. 480.) After the 
catastrophe of B. C. 9,564, some of the old Greeks 
settled down in Hellas, occupying the country, and 
it was there that the Mahaguru, the Supreme Teach- 
er, came to them, Orpheus, the Founder of the most 
ancient Orphic Mysteries, from which the later Mys- 
teries of Greece were derived. About B. C. 7,000 
He came, living chiefly in the forests, where He 
gathered His disciples round Him. There was no 
King to bid Him welcome, no gorgeous Court to ac- 
claim Him. He came as a Singer, wandering 
through the land, loving the life of Nature, her sun- 
lit spaces and her shadowed forest retreats, averse 
to cities and to the crowded haunts of men. A band 
of disciples grew around Him, and He taught them 
in the glades of woodland, silent save for the sing- 
ing of the birds and the sweet sounds of forest 
life, that seemed not to break the stillness. 

He taught by song, by music, music of voice and 
instrument, carrying a five-stringed musical in- 
strument, probably the origin of Apollo's lyre, and 
He used a pentatonic scale. To this He sang, and 
wondrous was His music, the Devas drawing nigh 
to listen to the subtle tones; by sound He worked 
upon the astral and mental bodies of His disciples, 
purifying and expanding them; by sound He drew 



THE FOURTH SUB-RACE, THE KELTIC 299 

the subtle bodies away from the physical, and set 
them free in the higher worlds. His music was quite 
different from the sequences repeated over and over 
again by which the same result was brought about 
in the Boot- stock of the Race, and which it carried 
with it into India. Here He worked by melody, not 
by repetition of similar sounds ; and the rousing of 
each etheric centre had its own melody, stirring it 
into activity. He showed His disciples living pic- 
tures, created by music, and in the Greek Mysteries 
this was wrought in the same way, the tradition com- 
ing down from Him. And He taught that Sound 
was in all things, and that if man would harmonise 
himself, then would the Divine Harmony manifest 
through him, and make all Nature glad. Thus He 
went through Hellas singing, and choosing here and 
there one who should follow Him, and singing also 
for the people in other ways, weaving over Greece 
a network of music, which should make her children 
beautiful and feed the artistic genius of her land. 
One of His disciples was Neptune, a youth of ex- 
quisite beauty, who followed Him everywhere, and 
often carried His lyre. 

Traditions of Him came down among the people 
and spread far and wide. He became the God of 
the Sun, Phoebus-Apollo, and, in the North, Balder 
the Beautiful ; for the sixth Keltic wave, as we have 
seen, went northward to Scandinavia, and carried 
with it the legend of the Singer of Hellas. 

As we think over the symbolism used by this Su- 
preme Teacher, coming as Vyasa, as Hermes, as 
Zarathustra, as Orpheus, we recognise the unity of 
the teaching under the variety of the symbols. Ever 
He taught the Unity of Life, and the oneness of God 



300 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

with His world. For Vyasa it was the Sun, that 
warmed all and gave life; for Hermes it was the 
Light, that shone alike in heaven and in earth; for 
Zarathustra it was the Fire, that lay hidden in all 
things; for Orpheus it was the Harmony, in which 
all vibrated together. But Sun, Light, Fire, Sound, 
all gave but a single message : the One Life, the One 
Love, that was above all, and through all, and in all. 
From Hellas some of the disciples went to Egypt, 
and fraternised with the teachers of the Inner Light, 
and so&e went teaching as far afield as Java. And 
so the Sound went forth, even to the ends of the 
world. But not again was the Supreme Teacher to 
come to the teaching of a sub-race. Nearly seven 
thousand years later He came to His ancient people, 
came for the last time, and in a body taken from 
them in India He reached final Illumination, He fin- 
ished His lives on earth, He became a Buddha. 



CHAPTER XX 
THE FIFTH SUB-RACE, THE TEUTONIC 

WE must now turn back again to B. C. 20,000, in 
order to trace from its cradle the fifth sub-race, for 
it was prepared simultaneously with the fourth, al- 
though in a different way. For it the Manu had set 
apart a valley far from His capital, away on the 
northern side of the Gobi Sea, and into it He had 
sparingly introduced factors which had not appear- 
ed in the fourth. He brought back to it a few of 
the best specimens of His third sub-race from Persia, 
where it was by that time thoroughly specialised, and 
He called also for a few Semites from Arabia. He 
chose for it especially men who were tall and fair, 
and when He Himself was born in it He always used 
a body showing markedly those characteristics. It 
must be remembered that the Manu starts each sub- 
race just as he does the Root Race by incarnating 
in it Himself; and the form which He chooses to 
take largely determines what the appearance of the 
sub-race shall be. This fifth sub-race was of a very 
strong and vigorous type, much larger than the 
preceding one, and was tall and fair, long-headed, 
with light hair and blue eyes. The character was 
also very different from that of the Keltic sub-race ; 
it was dogged and persevering, with little of the 
dash of the fourth ; its virtues were not of the ar- 
tistic type, but rather of the business and common- 



302 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

sense practical sort, blunt and truthful, plain-spoken 
and straightforward, caring for the concrete rather 
than for the poetic. 

While the fourth was developing its beautiful and 
artistic type in its own valley, the sterner fifth was 
also building up its type in its appointed abiding- 
place, the two different evolutions being thus carried 
on simultaneously. By the time that they were both 
ready to start on their migration, the difference be- 
tween tjhem was clearly marked; and though they 
left Central Asia together 20,000 B. C., and passed 
together through Persia, their eventual destinies 
were quite different. 

The fifth sub-race, small in number, was directed 
to move further along the shores of the Caspian Sea, 
and it settled itself in the Territory of Daghestan. 
There it slowly grew for thousands of years, grad- 
ually extending itself along the northern slopes of 
the Caucasian Eange, and occupying the Terek 
and Kuban districts. There its people remained un- 
til after the great cataclysm of 9,564 B. C. ; indeed, 
it was nearly a thousand years after that before they 
began their great march to world-dominion. They 
had not been idle during this long time of waiting, 
for they had already differentiated themselves into 
several distinct types. 

Then, as with one accord, now that the swamps of 
the great Central European plain were becoming 
habitable, they moved north-westward in one mighty 
array as far as what is now Cracow in Poland. There 
they rested for some centuries, for the marshes were 
not yet dry enough for safe habitation, and disease 
fell upon them and thinned their ranks. It was 
chiefly from this secondary centre that the final ra- 



TEE FIFTH SUB-RACE, THE TEUTONIC 303 

diations took place. The first of them was the Slav- 
onic, and it branched off into two main directions. 
One party turned east and north, and from it come 
largely the modern Russians ; the other took a more 
southerly direction, and is now represented by the 
Croatians, Servians, and Bosnians. The second wave 
was the Lettish, though its members did not travel 
far; it gives us the Letts, the Lithuanians and the 
Prussians. The third was the Germanic, and part 
at least of that went further afield, for if those called 
especially the Teutons spread themselves over 
Southern Germany, the other branches, called the 
Goths and Scandinavians, swept to the northern 
point of Europe. The later descent of tKe Scandi- 
navians upon Normandy, and of the Goths upon 
Southern Europe, the spreading of this fifth sub- 
race over Australia, North America and South Af- 
rica, and its dominance in India, where the Boot- 
stock of its people is settled, belong to modern his- 
tory. 

It has yet to build, like its predecessors, its 
World-Empire, though the beginnings of it are be- 
fore our eyes. The terrible blunder of the eight- 
eenth century, which rent away from Great Britain 
its North American Colonies, may be remedied by an 
offensive and defensive alliance between the severed 
halves, and a similar alliance with Germany, the 
remaining great section of the Teutonic sub-race, 
would weld the whole sufficiently into one to make a 
federated Empire. Late events show the rising of 
India into her proper place in this extending Em- 
pire, destined to be mighty in the East as well as 
in the West. 

As this World-Empire rises to its zenith during 



304 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

the coming centuries, the group composed of men of 
the mightiest genius, spoken of on p. 66 will be sent 
to take incarnation in it, to lift it to the highest pin- 
nacle of literary and scientific glory, till it overtops 
the vanished Empires of the Arabians, the Persians, 
the Romans, those of the second, third, and fourth 
sub-races of the Aryan stock. For the resistless 
course of ages, unrolling the Divine Plan, must ac- 
complish its purpose, until the fifth Eace shall have 
played its part, and the sixth and the seventh shall 
have followed it, shaping such human perfection as 
belongs fo the story of our earth in this fourth 
Round of our terrene Chain. What heights of un- 
imaginable splendour lie hidden in the further fu- 
ture, no tongue of half-evolved man may telL 



CHAPTER XXI 

THE BOOT-STOCK AND ITS DESCENT INTO 

INDIA 

WE have traced, roughly and in broad outlines, 
the migration out of Central Asia of the second, 
third, fourth and fifth sub-races of the Aryan Root- 
stock. We have seen its magnificent civilisation, 
and the vast extent of its Empire, and that from 
R. C. 40,000 onwards it had been slowly declining. 
From B. C. 40,000 to B. C. 20,000, the chief work of 
Vaivasvata Manu lay with His sub-races, and He 
and His immediate group, during these twenty thou- 
sand years, had been incarnating in the special dis- 
tricts set apart for the preparation of those sub- 
races. The original Empire, having long passed its 
prime, had been wearing away, as do all human in- 
stitutions, while its sub-races were going out to 
play their appointed parts, and the process of dis- 
integration had already gone far. The Mongolian 
and Turanian races, over whom it had so long ruled, 
had asserted their independence, and the Kingdom 
centring round the City of the Bridge was now but 
a small one. The people built no more they lived 
in the ruins of the great work of their forefathers. 
The efiros showing crenius and strainmcr after hiarh 



306 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

learning steadily sank. Trade had fallen almost to 
zero, and the people were becoming agricultural 
and pastoral only. The central Kingdom still held 
together, but outlying districts had broken off and 
become independent. 

But now, B. C. 18,800, the toilsome work of build- 
ing up and sending out the sub-races was, for the 
time, over. The Manu had managed all His migra- 
tions, and seen His sub-races definitely established, 
and He now turned His attention once more to the 
Root Race, because He wished to get it away by de- 
grees from its ancestral home, and to establish it in 
India, the land chosen for its further evolution. In 
India, the splendid Atlantean civilisation had de- 
veloped from the time that huge Atlantean hosts, 
pouring through the Himalayan passes, after the 
land was sufficiently dry for settlement, had occupied 
the country ; before that, a vast Atlantean Kingdom 
had existed in the far south, and had spread to the 
ocean which, before the catastrophe of B. C. 75,025, 
bounded it on the north. This civilisation, over-lux- 
urious, had now become effete, and the higher clas- 
ses, belonging to the Toltec sub-race, were indolent 
and self-seeking; much, however, remained of a 
noble literature, and there was a great tradition of 
occult knowledge, both of which were needed for 
the work of the future and therefore had to be pre- 
served. The warrior spirit had largely died out, 
and the wealth of the country, enormously and lav- 
ishly displayed, invited conquest from a more virile 
people, who should inherit and carry on all that de- 
served perpetuation. 

The entire removal of the Race from its Central 
Asian Home was necessary so that (1) Shamballa 



DESCENT OF ROOT-STOCK INTO INDIA 307 

should be left in the required solitude; the work 
carried on in close contact with the outer world was 
finished for the time, and the Race must he left to 
grow without external supervision; (2) India should 
be Aryanised ; (3) the Race should be out of the way 
before the coming cataclysm, as the Central Asian 
region would be much altered. 

The Manu had not incarnated in the Root Race 
since He led away the fourth and fifth sub-races, that 
is for about one thousand two hundred years; for, 
as said above, we are now at B. C. 18,800. He had 
therefore become rather a myth in Central Asia, 
and there had been differences of opinion, a few 
centuries earlier, as to whether His rules as to in- 
termarriage still held good. Some held that they 
were obsolete, their object having been obtained, and 
some families had married into those of some of the 
Tartar rulers. A schism had thus occurred, and 
those who favoured the new departure had left the 
Kingdom and set themselves up as a separate com- 
munity. They went no further, however, along the 
road of intermarriage, and it may be opined that 
the few outside marriages which had occurred had 
been brought about in order to gain a slight, but 
necessary, infusion of other blood, and perhaps also 
to cause the desired separation. The disappearance 
of the original cause of disunion did not draw the 
communities nearer together, and indeed, they be- 
came more hostile as centuries went by, and the 
increasing numbers in the Central Kingdom pressed 
the seceders further and further back into the valleys 
of the northern hills. Mars, at the date mentioned 
above, was King of one of the tribes of the seceders, 
who were suffering much from the incursions of the 



308 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

larger nation; continual fighting barely enabled his 
tribe to hold its own, and its eventual destruction 
was certain; his teacher, Jupiter, advised him not 
to fight, but this did not help him, and he thought 
and prayed desperately to find a way of safety for 
his people, so brave, so loyal, but so hopelessly over- 
matched. 

Then, in the crisis of his perplexity, the Manu ap- 
peared to him in a dream, and bade him lead his 
tribe westward and southward the vanguard of 
the greatest migration that had ever occurred into 
the sacred land of India, which was assigned to the 
Race as dwelling. He was told to fight as little as 
he could on his way to his future home, to attack 
none who would let him pass in peace, and to press 
on to the southern extremity of India. In the future 
all the Race would follow, and in the coming migra- 
tions he would frequently take part ; and at a future 
time he and his wife Mercury would do such work as 
He, the Manu, was then doing. 

Thus encouraged, and full of joy, Mars set to work 
to prepare, telling his people of his dream, and bid- 
ding them get ready for the march. Nearly ell be- 
lieved him, but our old Arabian friend, Alastor, had 
turned up again, and he headed a small party who 
refused to follow Mars, saying that he was not go- 
ing to leave the old land and the old teachings be- 
cause of the hysterical dream of an overwrought and 
despairing man. So he stayed behind, betrayed the 
route of his people to their enemies, and was put to 
death after the failure of the pursuing expedition. 

Mars started in B. C. 18,875' and followed the ap- 
pointed road, and after many hardships and not a 
1 See Appendix X. 



DESCENT OF ROOT-STOCK INTO INDIA 309 

little fighting for though he never attacked, he was 
frequently assailed he reached the great plains of 
India, and for a while enjoyed the hospitality of 
his comrade in many lives, Viraj, who was ruling as 
King Podishpar over the greater part of northern 
India. The alliance was cemented by the marriage 
of Corona, the son of Podishpar, to Brhaspati, a 
daughter of Mars and the widow of Vulcan, who 
had been killed in a battle during the journey. South- 
ern India was then a large Kingdom under King 
Huyaranda, or Lahira our Saturn the High 
Priest of the Kingdom being our Surya, under the 
name Byarsha, and the Deputy High Priest being 
Osiris. Surya had told Saturn that the strangers 
were coming at the command of the Gods, some years 
before their arrival, so that the King sent the 
Crown Prince, Crux, to meet them, and gave them 
welcome, settling them in his land. Later, Surya 
declared that "the high-nosed strangers from the 
north " werej fitted to be priests, and that they 
should hold the priestly office hereditarily; those 
who agreed to this became priests, and were the 
ancestors of the Brahmanas of Southern India, ab- 
staining from intermarriage with the earlier inhab- 
itants, and living as a separate class. 

Others intermarried with the Toltec aristocracy, 
thus gradually Aryanising the whole upper classes 
of the country, and the south of India passed peace- 
fully under Aryan rule; for Crux, who succeeded 
Saturn, died without issue, and Herakles, the second 
son of Mars, was elected by the people to the vacant 
throne, establishing an Aryan dynasty. From this 
migration forward, all the immigrants into India are 
spoken of as the * first sub-race,' since the whole 



310 MAN; WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

Root Race, the ancient stock, passed over into In- 
dia. Births into this are reckoned as births into 
the first sub-race, whether taking place in India it- 
self or in the countries colonised and Aryanised 
by it. 

We find a number of old friends in this migra- 
tion, in addition to those already named; Mars' 
eldest son was Uranus, who became a hermit in the 
Nilghiris, and his third son was Alcyone, who be- 
came Deputy High Priest on the resignation due 
to old age of Osiris. His second daughter was 
Demeter. 1 A curious instance of bringing friends 
in from abroad was the arrival of a young Mon- 
golian chieftain, Taurus, who fled from his elder 
brother's anger, and took refuge with Mars in his 
Central Asian Kingdom; he brought Procyon with 
him as his wife, and Cygnus, whom he married to 
Aries, was one of his daughters. 

From the South Indian Aryan Kingdom went out, 
about B. C. 13,500, an important mission to Egypt ; 
the order came from the Head of the Hierarchy 
through the Manu, and the expedition travelled via 
Ceylon, by water up the Red Sea, then hardly more 
than an inlet. It was not intended to colonise, since 
Egypt was already a mighty Empire, but rather to 
settle there under the Egyptian Government, a great 
and beneficent, as well as highly civilised, power. 

Mars was at the head of the expedition, and Surya 
was a High Priest in Egypt as he had been in 
southern India nearly three thousand years before ; 
as then, he smoothed the way for the coming Aryans, 
and he told the Pharaoh of their approach, and ad- 
vised him to welcome them. His advice was taken, 
1 See Appendix X. 



DESCENT OF ROOT-STOCK INTO INDIA 311 

and a little later he counselled the Pharaoh to marry 
his daughter to Mars, and to name the latter his suc- 
cessor. This was duly done, and thus peaceably but 
effectively was an Aryan dynasty established in 
Egypt at the death of the ruling Pharaoh. It reign- 
ed gloriously for many thousand years, until the 
sinking of Poseidonis, when it, with the Egyptian 
people, was driven to the hills by the flooding of 
Egypt. The flood, however, retreated comparatively 
soon, and the country recovered ere long, Manetho's 
history apparently deals with this Aryan dynasty; 
he makes Unas whose date is given as B. C. 3,900, 
while we make it 4,030 B. C. the last King of the 
Fifth dynasty. The Arab Hyksos Kings are put 
at B. C. 1,500. Under the Aryan Pharaohs the great 
Schools of Egypt became even more famous, and for 
long it led the learning of the western world. 

It was the second mighty Empire of the first sub- 
race, if we count the Empire of the Root Race as the 
first. From Egypt was introduced Aryan blood into 
several East African tribes ; it would seem as though 
a low type of body were sometimes required for 
little-advanced egos, who had gone through many 
previous sub-races without making much progress, 
and were thrown into contact with a higher race in 
order to force them forward. Some of the lowest 
types of dwellers in the slums of civilised fourth 
and fifth Aryan sub-races are obviously less ad- 
vanced than Zulus. On the other hand, a touch of 
Aryan blood in an uncivilised tribe would give cer- 
tain characteristics required for its improvement. 

The South Indian Kingdom was used by the Manu 
as a subsidiary centre of radiation on other occasions 
than this of the Aryanising of Egypt. He sent out 



312 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

from it colonists to Java, to Australia and to the 
islands of Polynesia, which accounts for the Aryan 
strain to be observed even to-day in what are called 
the brown Polynesians, in contradistinction to the 
Melanesians. 

While these arrangements were being carried out 
in the south of India, the Manu still worked at the 
gradual transportation of His Race from Central 
Asia into the northern parts of India. One of the 
early immigrations settled itself in the Panjab, and 
after much fighting made terms of peace with the 
inhabitants, partly plundering and partly defending 
them. Another, turning eastwards, had established 
itself in Assam and northern Bengal. The expedi- 
tion immediately preceding one on which we may 
pause for a few minutes had taken place about B. C. 
17,520; part of it reached its destination safely by 
the route followed by Mars, more than a thousand 
years before, while a smaller division, seeking to 
penetrate through what is now called the Khyber 
Pass, was annihilated. In B. C. 17,455 a third 1 was 
sent out, led by Mars, the eldest son of the reigning 
Monarch of the central Kingdom, Jupiter: Jupiter 
had Saturn as his wife, and Mercury as his sister. 
Mars had chosen the members of his expedition with 
great care, selecting the strongest and most vigorous 
tneu and women whom he could find; among them 
were Psyche and his wife Arcturus, with three sons, 
Alcyone, Albireo and Leto. Capella and his wife 
Judex were chosen. Vulcan, a great captain, was 
the warrior most relied on by Mars, and he, with 
Vajra as a subordinate, led one wing of the expedi- 
tion, while Mars headed the other. 

l See Appendix XI. 



DESCENT OF ROOT-STOCK INTO INDIA 313 

The two wings of the expedition met, as was plan- 
ned, and they settled the women and children in a 
strongly entrenched camp, between what are now* 
Jammu and Gujranwala, themselves pressing on to 
the place where Delhi now stands, where they built 
the first city on that imperial site, and named it 
"Ravipur, City of the Sun. On their way they had 
a skirmish with a powerful Chief, Castor, but suc- 
ceeded in passing on, and when the new city was 
ready the women and children and their guards were 
brought to it, and the first life of Delhi, as a capital, 
began. Mars left his kingdom to his eldest son 
Hcrakles, who was much aided by Alcyone, nine 
years his senior and his dearest friend. 

One of the hugest emigrations from the central 
Kingdom took place B. C. 15,950, three great armies 
being formed with Mars as Commander-in-Chief ; 
the command of the right wing was given to Corona, 
who was to pass through Kashmir, the Panjab, and 
the provinces now called the United, to Bengal; the 
left wing was to cross Tibet to Bhutan and thence 
to Bengal; the centre under Mars, with Mercury as 
second in command, was to cross Tibet to Nepal, 
and so onwards to the general meeting place, Bengal 
which was to be their home. Corona, however, 
spent his time for forty years in making a Kingdom 
for himself, and did not reach Bengal till Mars, long 
ruling there, was an old man. Vulcan had joined 
Mars, and finally had established himself in Assam. 
Mars himself, with the help of Vulcan, had subdued 
Bengal, and, after desperate fighting, Orissa, and 
had finally fixed his capital in Central Bengal ; when 
an old man, he placed his eldest son, Jupiter, on 
his throne and retired from the world. 



314 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

The great importance of this far-reaching immi- 
gration is marked by the fact that ten who are now 
Masters took part in it: Mars, Mercury, Vulcan, 
Jupiter, Brbaspati, Osiris, Uranus, Saturn, Neptune, 
Viraj. Of others, bearing familiar names, the gath- 
ering was also large. 1 

From this time onwards there were constant de- 
scents into India from Central Asia, sometimes mere 
bands, sometimes considerable armies, the older set- 
tlers often resisting the new, the new plundering the 
old. Wave after wave rolled in during thousands of 
years, and some of the more thoughtful of the Aryans 
studied the philosophy of the Toltecs, whom they 
sometimes called the Nagas. The lower classes of 
the Atlantean population, mostly the brown Tlavatli, 
they termed Dasyas, while the black people of Lem- 
urian descent, whom they regarded with horror, they 
called Daityas and Takshaks. 

There were some intermarriages between the more 
liberal Aryans and the Toltecs, and we found Alcy- 
one, about B. 0. 12,850, much attached to Psyche, the 
son of Orpheus, an Atlantean dignitary, and marry- 
ing the latter 's daughter, Mizar, though his own 
father, Algol, was a fanatical Aryan, hating the At- 
lanteans and their civilisation. While, under these 
circumstances, he and his young wife became fugi- 
tives, yet an Aryan leader, Vesta, head of an in- 
vading band, gave them shelter, and a relative of 
his, Draco, with his wife Cassiopeia, members of a 
band settled longer in India, helped them to the 
possession of an estate, where he was on very friend- 
ly terms with Aletheia, a rich Atlantean. It was 

l See Appendix XII, For a graphic account of it, see 
the tenth life in The Lives of Alcyone. 



DESCENT OF ROOT-STOCK INTO INDIA 315 

evident, therefore, that in some cases, at least, 
friendly relations existed between the races, and 
these were not disturbed by the irruption of a large 
host of Aryans, once more under Mars, who passed 
through the neighbourhood on his way to carve him- 
self out an Empire in Central India. 1 

By these constant migrations the Central Asian 
Kingdom was drained of its inhabitants by about 
9,700 B.C. The convulsions attending the catastrophe 
of B. C. 9,564 shattered the City of the Bridge into 
ruins, and wrought the destruction of most of the 
great Temples on the White Island. The lategt 
bands did not reach India easily; they were delayed 
in Afghanistan and Baluchistan for some two thou- 
sand years, and many were massacred by Mongol 
raiders; the rest slowly found their way down to 
the plains, already thickly populated. 

When His people were thus finally conveyed into 
India, a danger arose that the Aryan blood might 
become a mere trace amidst the enormous majority 
of the Atlanteans and AJtanto-Lemurians, so the 
Manu again forbade intermarriage, and about B. 
C. 8,000 ordained the caste system, in order that no 
further admixture might be made, and that those 
already made might be perpetuated. He founded at 
first only three castes Brahmana, Bajan and Vish. 
The first were pure Aryans, the second Aryan and 
Toltec, the third Aryan and Mongolian. 

The castes were hence called the Varnas, or colours, 
the pure Aryans white, the Aryan and Toltec inter- 
mixture red, and the Aryan and Mongolian yellow. 
The castes were allowed to intermarry among them- 

*See Appendix XIII. 



316 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

selves, but a feeling quickly grew up that marriages 
should be restricted within the caste. Later, those 
who were not Aryan at all were included under the 
general appellation of Shudras, but even here in 
many cases a certain small amount of Aryan blood 
may appear. Many of the hill tribes are partly Ary- 
an some few are wholly so, like the Siaposh peo- 
ple and the Gipsy tribes. 

During the emigrations into India, one tribe had 
gone off in a direction different from that of the 
others, and had contrived to establish itself in a 
valley in the Susamir district. There, forgotten by 
the rest of the world, it enjoyed its primitive pas- 
toral life for many centuries. About 2,200 B. C., 
there arose a great military leader amongst the 
Mongol tribes, and they devastated all of Asia that 
they could reach, utterly destroying, among others, 
the remnants of the Persian Empire. The Tartar 
leader was finally overthrown, and his hordes scat- 
tered, but he had left utter desolation behind him. 
Somehow in a hundred years or so, news of a fer- 
tile but unoccupied land reached our Aryans in their 
valley; they sent out spies to report, and when the 
story was confirmed, they migrated bodily into 
Persia. Thse were the speakers of Zend, and their 
late arrival accounts for the curiously unsettled 
state of the country even in the time of the last Zoro- 
aster. Such remnants of the third sub-race as had 
been only driven from their homes, and had escaped 
the general massacre, came back and made common 
cause with our tribe, and from these beginnings grad- 
ually developed the latest Persian Empire. 



MAN: 
WHITHER 



FOREWORD 

THE following pages are an attempt to sketch the 
early beginnings of the sixth Root Race, comparable 
to the early stage of the fifth Root Race in Arabia. 
Ere the sixth Race comes to its own, and takes pos- 
session of its continent, now rising slowly, fragment 
after fragment, in the Pacific, many, many, thou- 
sands of years will have rolled away. North Ameri- 
ca will have been shattered into pieces, and the west- 
ern strip on which the first Colony will be settled 
will have become an easternmost strip of the new 
continent. 

While this little Colony is working at the em- 
bryonic stage, the fifth Race will be at its zenith, 
and all the pomp and glory of the world will be con- 
centrated therein. The colony will be a very poor 
thing in the eyes of the world, a gathering of cranks, 
slavishly devoted to their Leader. 

This sketch is reprinted from The Theosophist, 
and is wholly the work of my colleague. 

A. B. 



CHAPTER XXII 

THE BEGINNINGS OF THE SIXTH ROOT 
RACE 

THE VISION OF KING ASHOKA 
Introductory 

Some twelve years ago the present writers en- 
gaged in an examination of some of the earlier lives 
of Colonel H. S. Olcott. Most members of the Society 
are aware that in the incarnation preceding this 
last one he was the great Buddhist King Ashoka; 
and those who have read a little memorandum upon 
his previous history (written for an American Con- 
vention) will remember that when the end of that 
life was approaching he had a time of great depres- 
sion and doubt, to relieve which his Master showed 
him two remarkable pictures, one of the past and 
the other of the future. He had been mourning over 
his failure to realise all of his plans, and his chief 
doubt had been as to his power to persevere to the 
end, to retain his link with his Master until the goal 
should be attained. To dispel this doubt the Master 
first explained to him by a vision of the past how 
the connection between them had originally been 
established long ago in Atlantis, and how the promise 

321 



322 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

had then been given that that link should never be 
broken; and then, by another vision of the future, 
He showed Himself as the Manu of the sixth Boot 
Race, and King Ashoka as a lieutenant serving un- 
der Him in that high office. 4 

The scene was laid in a beautiful park-like coun- 
try, where flower-covered hills sloped down to a 
sapphire sea. The Master M. was seen standing 
surrounded by a small army of pupils and helpers, 
and even while the fascinated King watched the 
lovely scene, the Master K. H. entered upon it, fol- 
lowed by His band of disciples. The two Masters 
embraced, the groups of pupils mingled with joy- 
ous greetings, and the wondrous picture faded from 
before our entranced eyes. But the impression 
which it left has remained undimmed, and it car- 
ries with it a certain knowledge, strange beyond 
words and full of awe. The sight which we were 
then using was that of the causal body, and so the 
egos composing that crowd were clearly distinguish- 
able to our vision. Many of them we instantly rec- 
ognised; others, not then known to us, we have 
since met on the physical plane. Strange beyond 
words, truly, to meet (perhaps on the other side of 
the world), some member whom physically we have 
never seen before, and to exchange behind his back 
the glance which telegraphs our recognition of him 
which says: "Here is yet another who will be 
with us to the end." 

"VVe know also who will not be there; but from 
that, thank God, we are not called upon to draw any 
deductions, for we know that large numbers who are 
not at the inception of the Race will join it later, 
and also that there are others centres of activity con- 



THE BEGINNINGS OF THE SIXTH ROOT RACE 323 

nected with the Master's work. This particular centre 
at which we were looking will exist for the special 
purpose of the foundation of the new Boot Race, 
and therefore will be unique; and only those who 
have by careful previous self -training fitted them- 
selves to share in its peculiar work can bear a part 
in it. It is precisely in order that the nature of 
that work, and the character of the education neces- 
sary for it, may be clearly known, that we are per- 
mitted to lay before our members this sketch of 
that future life. That self-training involves su- 
preme self-sacrifice and rigorous self-effacement, as 
will be made abundantly clear as our story progres- 
ses; and it involves complete confidence in the wis- 
dom of the Masters. Many good members of our 
Society do not yet possess these qualifications, and 
therefore, however highly developed they may be 
in other directions, they could not take their place in 
this particular band of workers ; for the labours of 
the Manu are strenuous, and He has neither time 
nor force to waste in arguing with recalcitrant assist- 
ants who think they know better than He does. The 
exterior work of this Society will, however, still be 
going on in those future centuries, and in its enor- 
mously extended ramifications there will be room 
enough for all who are willing to help, even though 
they may not yet be capable of the total self-efface- 
ment which is required of the assistants of the 
Manu. 

Nothing that we saw at that time, in that vision 
shown to the King, gave us any clue either to the 
date of the event foreseen or to the place where it 
is to occur, though full information on these points 
is now in our possession. Then we knew only that 



324 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

the occasion was an important one connected with 
the founding of the new Eace indeed, that much 
was told to King Ashoka; and, knowing as we did 
the offices which our two revered Masters are to 
hoM in the sixth Boot Race, we were easily able to 
associate the two ideas. 

So the matter remained until much later, and we 
had no expectation that any further elucidation of 
it would be vouchsafed to us. Suddenly, and ap- 
parently by the merest accident, the question was re- 
opened, and an enquiry in a department of the teach- 
ing utterly remote from the founding of the sixth 
Root Race was found to lead straight into the very 
heart of its history, and to pour a flood of light 
upon its methods. 

The remainder of the story is told by the one who 
was chosen to transmit it. 

THE DEVA HELPER 

I was talking to a group of friends about the pas- 
sage in the Fnane'shvari which describes the yogi as 
4 i hearing and comprehending the language of the 
Devas," and trying to explain in what wonderful 
ecstasies of colour and sound certain orders of the 
great Angels express themselves, when I was aware 
of the presence of one of them, who has on several 
previous occasions been good enough to give me 
some help in my efforts to understand the mys- 
teries of their glorious existence. Seeing, I suppose, 
the inadequacy of my attempts at description, he 
put before me two singularly vivid little pictures, 
and said to me:, " There, describe this to them." 

Each of the pictures showed the interior of a great 
Temple, of architecture unlike any with which I am 



THE BEGINNINGS OF THE SIXTH ROOT RACE 325 

familiar, and in each a Deva was acting as priest or 
minister, and leading the devotions of a vast con- 
gregation. In one of these the officiant was produc- 
ing his results entirely by the manipulation of an in- 
describably splendid display of colours, while in the 
other case music was the medium through which he 
on the one hand appealed to the emotions of his con- 
gregation, and on the other expressed their aspira- 
tions to the Deity. A more detailed description of 
these Temples and of the methods adopted in them 
will be given later; for the moment let us pass on 
to the later investigations of which this was only the 
starting-point. The Deva who showed these pictures 
explained that they represented scenes from a 
future in which Devas would move far more freely 
among men than they do at present, and would help 
them not only in their devotions but also in many 
other ways. Thanking him for his kind assistance, 
I described the lovely pictures as well as I could 
to my group, he himself making occasional sug- 
gestions. 

SEEING THE FUTURE 

When the meeting was over, in the privacy of my 
chamber I recalled these pictures with the greatest 
pleasure, fixed them upon my mind in the minutest 
detail, and endeavoured to discover how far it was 
possible to see in connection with them other sur- 
rounding circumstances. To my great delight, I 
found that this was perfectly possible that I could, 
by an effort, extend my vision from the Temples to 
the town and country surrounding them, and could 
in thic way see and describe in detail this life of 
the future. This naturally raises a host of ques- 



326 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

tions as to the type of clairvoyance by which the 
future is thus foreseen, the extent to which such 
future may be thought of as foreordained, and how 
far, if at all, what is seen is modifiable by the wills 
of those who are observed as actors in the drama; 
for if all is already arranged, and they cannot change 
it, are we not once more face to face with the weari- 
some theory of predestination! I am no more com- 
petent to settle satisfactorily the question of free- 
will and predestination than any of the thousands 
of people who have written upon it, but at least I 
can bear testimony to one undoubted fact that 
there is a plane from which the past, the present, 
and the future have lost their relative characteris- 
tics, and each is as actually and absolutely present 
in consciousness as the others. 

I have in many cases examined the records of the 
past, and have more than once described how utterly 
real and living those records are to the investigator. 
He is simply living in the scene, and he can train 
himself to look upon it from the outside merely as 
a spectator, or to identify his consciousness for the 
time with that of some person who is taking part in 
that scene, and so have the great advantage of con- 
temporary opinion on the subject under review. I 
can only say that in this, the first long and connected 
vision of the future which I have undertaken, the 
experience was precisely similar; that this future 
also was in every way as actual, as vividly present, 
as any of those scenes of the past, or as the room in 
which I sit as I write; that in this case also precise- 
ly the same two possibilities existed that of look- 
ing on the whole thing as a spectator, or of identify- 
ing oneself with the consciousness of one who was 



TEE BEOINNINOS OF THE SIXTH ROOT RACE 327 

living in it, and thereby realising exactly what were 
his motives and how life appeared to him. 

As, during part of the investigation, I happened 
to have present with me in the physical body one of 
those whom I clearly saw taking part in that com- 
munity of the future, I made some special effort to 
see how far it may be possible for that ego, by action 
in the intervening centuries, to prevent himself from 
taking part in that movement or to modify his at- 
titude with regard to it. It seemed clear to me, 
after repeated and most careful examination, that he 
can not avoid or appreciably modify this destiny 
which lies before him; but the reason that he can- 
not do this is that the Monad above him, the very 
Spirit within him, acting through the as yet un- 
developed part of himself as an ego, has already de- 
termined upon this, and set in motion the causes 
which must inevitably produce it. The ego has un- 
questionably a large amount of freedom in these 
intervening centuries. He can move aside from the 
path marked out for him to this side or to that ; he 
can hurry his progress along it or delay it ; but yet 
the inexorable compelling power (which is still at 
the same time his truest Self) will not permit such 
absolute and final divergence from it as might cause 
him to lose the opportunity which lies before him. 
The Will of the true man is already set, and that 
Will will certainly prevail. 

I know very well the exceeding difficulty of thought 
upon this subject, and I am not in the least presum- 
ing to propound any new solution for it ; I am sim- 
ply offering a contribution to the study of the sub- 
ject in the shape of a piece of testimony. Let it be 
sufficient for the moment to state that I for my part 



328 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

know this to be an accurate picture of what will 
inevitably happen ; and, knowing that, I put it thus 
before our readers as a matter which I think will 
be of deep interest to them and a great encourage- 
ment to those who find themselves able to accept it ; 
while at the same time I have not the slightest wish 
to press it upon the notice of those who have not as 
yet acquired the certainty that it is possible to fore- 
see the d^istant future even in the minutest detail. 

C. W. L, 



CHAPTER XXIII 

THE BEGINNINGS OF THE SIXTH ROOT- 
RACE 

IT was discovered that these gorgeous Temple ser- 
vices do not represent what will be the ordinary 
worship of the world at that period, but that they 
will take place among a certain community of per- 
sons living apart from the rest of the world; and 
but little further research was necessary to show us 
that this is the very same community, the foundation 
of which had formed the basis of the vision shown 
so long ago to King Ashoka. This community is in 
fact the segregation made by the Manu of the sixth 
Root Race ; but instead of carrying it aWay into re- 
mote desert places inaccessible to the rest of the 
world as did the Manu of the fifth Root Race our 
Manu plants it in the midst of a populous country, 
and preserves it from admixture with earlier races 
by a moral boundary only. Just as the material for 
the fifth Root Race had to be taken from the fifth 
sub-race of the Atlantean stock, so the material bod- 
ies from which the sixth Root Race is to be developed 
are to be selected from the sixth sub-race of our pre- 
sent Aryan Race. It is therefore perfectly natural 
that this community should be established, as it was 
found to be, on the great continent of North Amer- 

329 



330 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

ica, where even already steps are being taken to- 
wards the development of the sixth sub-race. Equally 
natural is it that the part of that continent chosen 
should be that which in scenery and climate ap- 
proaches most nearly to our ideal of Paradise, that 
is to say, Lower California. It is found that the 
date of the events portrayed in the vision of King 
Ashoka the actual founding of the community is 
almost exactly seven hundred years from the present 
time; but the pictures shown by the Deva (and those 
revealed by the investigations which sprang from 
them, belong to a period about one hundred and 
fifty years later, when the community is already 
thoroughly established and fully self-reliant. 

FOUNDING THE COMMUNITY 

The plan is this. From the Theosophical Society 
as it is now, and as it will be in the centuries to 
come, the Manu and the High-Priest of the coming 
Race our Mars and Mercury select such people as 
are thoroughly in earnest and devoted to Their ser- 
vice, and offer to them the opportunity of becoming 
Their assistants in this great work. It is not to 
be denied that the work will be arduous, and that 
it will require the utmost sacrifice on the part of 
those who are privileged to share in it. 

The LOGOS, before He called into existence this 
part of His system, had in His mind a detailed plan 
of what He intended to do with it to what level 
each Race in each Round should attain, and in what 
particulars it must differ from its predecessors. 
The whole of His mighty thought-form exists even 
now upon the plane of the Divine Mind; and when 
a Manu is appointed to take charge of a Root Race, 



THE BEGINNINGS OF THE SIXTH ROOT RACE 331 

His first proceeding is to materialise this thought- 
form down to some plane where He can have it at 
hand for ready reference. His task is then to take 
from the existing world such men as most nearly 
resemble this tj r pe, to draw them apart from the rest, 
and gradually to develop in them, so far as may be, 
the qualities which are to be specially characteristic 
of the new Eace. 

When He has carried this process as far as He 
thinks possible with the material ready to His hand, 
He will Himself incarnate in the segregated group. 
Since He has long ago exhausted all hindering kar- 
ma, He is perfectly free to mould all His vehicles, 
causal, mental and astral, exactly to the copy set 
before Him by the LOGOS. No doubt He can also ex- 
ercise a great influence even upon His physical 
vehicle, though He must owe that to parents who, 
after all, belong still to the fifth Boot Eace, even 
though themselves specialised to a large extent. 

Only those bodies which are physically descended 
in a direct line from Him constitute the new Eoot 
Eace ; and since He in His turn must obviously mar- 
ry into the old fifth Eoot Eace, it is clear that the 
type will not be absolutely pure. For the first gen- 
eration His children must also take to themselves 
partners from the old Eace, though only within the 
limits of the segregated group; but after that gen- 
eration there is no further admixture of the older 
blood, intermarriage outside of the newly constituted 
family being absolutely forbidden. Later on, the 
Manu Himself will reincarnate, probably 1 as His 
own great-grandchild, and so will further purify the 
Eace, and all the while He will never relax His ef- 
forts to mould all their vehicles, now including even 



332 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

the physical, into closer and closer resemblance to 
the model given to Him by the LOGOS. 

GATHERING THE MEMBERS 

In order that this work of special moulding should 
be done as quickly and as completely as possible, it 
is eminently necessary that all the egos incarnating 
in these new vehicles should themselves fully under- 
stand what is being done, and be utterly devoted to 
the work. Therefore the Manu gathers round Him 
for this purpose a large number of His pupils and 
helpers, and puts them into the bodies which He 
Himself provides, the arrangement being that they 
shall wholly dedicate themselves to this task, tak- 
ing up a new body as soon as they find it necessary 
to lay aside the old one- Therefor, as we have said, 
exceedingly arduous labour will be involved for 
those who become His assistants; they must take 
birth again and again without the usual interval on 
other planes; and further, every one of this un- 
broken string of physical lives must be absolutely 
unselfish must be entirely consecrated to the in- 
terests of the new Eace without the slightest thought 
of self or of personal interest. In fact, the man 
who undertakes this must live not for himself but 
for the Race, and this for century after century. 

This is no light burden to assume ; but on the other 
side of the account it must be said that those who 
undertake it will inevitably make abnormally rapid 
progress, and will have not only the glory of taking 
a leading part in the evolution of humanity, but also 
the inestimable privilege of working through many 
lives under the immediate physical direction of the 
Masters whom they love so dearly. And those who 



THE BEGINNINGS OF THE SIXTH ROOT RACE 333 

have already been so blest as to taste the sweetness 
of Their presence know well that in that presence 
no labour seems arduous, no obstacles seem insur- 
mountable ; rather all difficulties vanish, and we look 
back in wonder at the stumbles of yesterday, finding 
it impossible to comprehend how we could have felt 
discouraged or despairing. The feeling is exactly 
that which the Apostle so well expressed when he 
said: "I can do all things through Christ who 
strengtheneth me." 

ENTERING THE ESTATE 

When the time draws near which in His judgment 
is the most suitable for the actual founding of the 
Race, He will see to it that all these disciples whom 
He has selected shall take birth in that sixth sub- 
race. When they have all attained maturity He (or 
they jointly) will purchase a large estate in a conven- 
ient spot, &nd all will journey thither and commence 
their new life as a community. It was this scene of 
the taking possession of the estate which was shown 
to King Ashoka, and the particular spot at which the 
two Masters were seen to meet is pne near the 
boundary of the estate. They then lead their fol- 
lowers to the central site which has already been 
selected for the principal city of the community, 
and there they take possession of the dwellings 
which have been previously prepared for them. For, 
long before this, the Manu and His immediate lieu- 
tenants have supervised the erection of a magnifi- 
cent group of buildings in preparation for this oc- 
casion a great central Temple or cathedral, vast 
buildings arranged as libraries, museums and coun- 
cil-halls, and, surrounding these, perhaps some four 



334 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

hundred dwelling-houses, each standing in the midst 
of its own plot of ground. Though differing much 
in style and detail, these houses are all built ac- 
cording to a certain general plan which shall he de- 
scribed later. 

All this work has been done by ordinary labourers 
working under a contractor a large body of men, 
many of whom are brought from a distance; and 
they are highly paid in order to ensure that the 
work shall be of the best. A great deal of com- 
plicated machinery is required for the work of the 
colony, and in their early days men from without 
are employed to manage this and to instruct the 
colonists in its use; but in a few years the colonists 
learn how to make and repair everything that is 
necessary for their well-being, and so they are able 
to dispense with outside help. Even within the first 
generation the colony becomes self-supporting, and 
after this no labour is imported from outside. A 
vast amount of money is expended in establishing 
the colony and bringing it into working order, but 
when once it is firmly established it is entirely self- 
supporting and independent of the outer world. The 
community does not, however, lose touch with the 
rest of the world, for it always takes care to ac- 
quaint itself with all new discoveries and inventions, 
and with any improvements in machinery. 

CHILDKEN OF THE MANU 

The principal investigations which we made, how- 
ever, concern a period about one hundred and fifty 
years later than this, when the community has al- 
ready enormously increased, and numbered some- 
where about a hundred thousand people, all of them 



THE BEGINNINGS OF THE SIXTH ROOT RACE 335 

direct physical descendants of the Mann, with the 
exception of a few who have been admitted from the 
outer world under conditions which shall presently 
be described. It at first seemed to us improbable 
that the descendants of one man could in that period 
amount to so large a number; but such cursory ex- 
amination as could be made of the intervening period 
showed that all this had happened quite naturally. 
When the Manu sees fit to marry, certain of His 
pupils selected by Him stand ready voluntarily to' 
resign their old bodies as soon as He is able to pro- 
vide them with new ones. He has twelve children 
in all; it is noteworthy that He arranges that each 
shall be born under a special influence as astrolo- 
gers would say one under each sign of the Zodiac. 
All these children grow up in due course, and marry 
selected children of other members of the com- 
munity. 

Every precaution is taken to supply perfectly 
healthy and suitable surroundings, so that there is 
no infant mortality, and what we should call quite 
large families are the rule. At a period of fifty 
years after the founding of the community one hun- 
dred and four grandchildren of the Manu are al- 
ready living. At eighty years from the commence- 
ment, the number of descendants is too great to be 
readily counted ; but taking at random ten out of the 
hundred and four grandchildren, we find that those 
ten, by that time, have between them ninety-five chil- 
dren, which gives us a rough estimate of one thou- 
sand direct descendants in that generation, not in- 
cluding the original twelve children and one hun- 
dred and four grandchildren. Moving on another 
quarter of a century that is to say one hundred and 



336 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

five years from the original founding of the com- 
munity, we find fully ten thousand direct descend- 
ants, and it then becomes clear that in the course 
of the next forty-five years there is not the slightest 
difficulty in accounting for fully one hundred thou- 
sand. 

GOVERNMENT 

It is now necessary to describe the government 
and the general conditions of our community, to see 
what are its methods of education and of worship, 
and its relation with the outer world. This last ap- 
pears entirely amicable; the community pays some 
quite nominal tax for its land to the general govern- 
ment of the country, and in return it is left almost 
entirely alone, since it makes its own roads and re- 
quires no services of any sort from the outside gov- 
ernment. 

It is popularly regarded with great respect; its 
members are considered as very good and earnest 
people, though unnecessarily ascetic in certain ways. 
Visitors from outside sometimes come in parties, 
just as tourists might in the twentieth century, to 
admire the Temples and other buildings. They are 
not in any way hindered, though they are not in any 
way encouraged. The comment of the visitors gen- 
erally seems to be along the lines: "Well, it is all 
very beautiful and interesting, yet I should not like 
to have to live as they do!" 

As the members have been separated from the 
outside world for a century and a half, old family 
connections have fallen into the background. In a 
few cases such relationships are still remembered, 
and occasionally visits are interchanged. There is 



THE BEGINNINGS OF THE SIXTH ROOT RACE 337 

no restriction whatever upon this ; a member of the 
colony may go and visit a friend outside of it, or 
may invite a friend quite freely to come and stay 
with him. The only rule with regard to these mat- 
ters is that intermarriage between those within the 
community and those outside is strictly forbidden. 
Even such visits as have been described are infre- 
quent, for the whole thought of the community is so 
entirely one-pointed that persons from the outside 
world are not likely to find its daily life interesting 
to them. 

THE SPIRIT OF THE NEW RACE 

For the one great dominant fact about this com- 
munity is the spirit which pervades it. Every mem- 
ber of it knows that he is there for a definite pur- 
pose, of which he never for a moment loses sight. 
All have vowed themselves to the service of the 
Manu for the promotion of the progress of the new 
Race. All of them definitely mean business; every 
man has the fullest possible confidence in the wis- 
dom of the Manu, and would never dream of disput- 
ing any regulation which He made. We must re- 
member that these people are a selection of a selec- 
tion. During the intervening centuries many thou- 
sands have been attracted by Theosophy, and out 
of these the most earnest and the most thoroughly 
permeated by these ideas have been chosen. Most 
of them have recently taken a number of rapid in- 
carnations, bringing through to a large extent their 
memory, and in all of those incarnations they have 
known that their lives in the new Race would have 
to be entirely lives of self-sacrifice for the sake of 
that Race. They have therefore trained themselves 



338 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

in the putting aside of all personal desires, and 
there is consequently an exceedingly strong public 
opinion among them in favour of unselfishness, so 
that anything like even the slightest manifestation 
of personality would be considered as a shame and 
a disgrace. 

The idea is strongly engrained that in this selec- 
tion a glorious opportunity has been offered to them, 
and that to prove themselves unworthy of it, and in 
consequence to leave the community for the outer 
world, wouJd be an indelible stain upon their honour. 
In addition, the praise of the Manu goes to those 
who make advancement, who can suggest anything 
new and useful and assist in the development of the 
community, and not to anyone who does anything 
in the least personal. The existence among them 
of this great force of public opinion practically ob- 
viates the necessity of laws in the ordinary sense of 
the word. The whole community may not inaptly 
be compared to an army going into battle ; if there 
are any private differences between individual sol- 
diers, for llie moment all these are lost in the one 
thought of perfect co-operation for the purpose of 
defeating the enemy. If any sort of difference of 
opinion arises between two members of the com- 
munity, it is immediately submitted either to the 
Manu, or to the nearest member of His Council, and 
10 one thinks of disputing the decision which is 
>iven. 

THE MANU AND His COUNCIL 

It will be seen therefore that government in the 
>rdinary sense of the term scarcely exists in this 
jommunity. The Kami's ruling is undisputed, and 



THE BEGINNINGS OF THE SIXTH ROOT RACE 339 

He gathers round Him a Council of about a dozen 
of the most highly developed of His pupils, some of 
them already Adepts at the Asekha level, who are 
also the Heads of departments in the management 
of affairs, and are constantly making new experi- 
ments with a view to increasing the welfare and 
efficiency of the Race. All members of the Council 
are sufficiently developed to function freely on all 
the lower planes, at least up to the level of the 
causal body ; consequently we may think of them as 
practically in perpetual session as constantly con- 
sulting, even in the very act of administration. 

Anything in the nature either of courts of law 
or a police force does not exist, nor are such things 
required; for there is naturally no criminality nor 
violence amongst a body of people so entirely devot- 
ed to one object. Clearly, if it were conceivable that 
any member of the community could offend against 
the spirit of it, the only punishment which would or 
could be meted out to him would be expulsion from 
it; but as that would be to him the end of all his 
hopes, the utter failure of aspirations cherished 
through many lives, it is not to be supposed that 
anyone would run the slightest risk of it. 

In thinking of the general temper of the people 
it must also be borne in mind that some degree of 
psychical perception is practically universal, and 
that in the case of many it is already quite highly 
developed ; so that all can see for themselves some- 
thing of the working of the forces with which they 
have to deal, and the enormously greater advance- 
ment of the Manu, the Chief Priest and Their Coun- 
cil is obvious as a definite and indubitable fact, so 
that all have before their eyes the strongest of rea- 



340 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

sons for accepting their decisions. In ordinary 
physical life, even when men have perfect confidence 
in the wisdom and good-will of a ruler, there still 
remains the doubt that that ruler may be misinform- 
ed on certain points, and that for that reason his 
decisions may not always be in accordance with ab- 
stract justice. Here, however, no shadow of such 
a doubt is possible, since by daily experience it is 
thoroughly well-known that the Manu is practically 
omniscient as far as the community is concerned, 
and that it is therefore impossible that any circum- 
stances can escape His observation. Even if His 
judgment upon any case should be different from 
what was expected, it would be fully understood by 
His people that that was not because any circum- 
stances affecting it were unknown to Him, but rather 
because He was taking into account circumstances 
unknown to them. 

Thus we see that the two types of people which 
are perpetually causing trouble in ordinary life do 
not exist in this community those who intentionally 
break laws with the object of gaining something for 
themselves, and those others who cause disturbance 
because they fancy themselves wronged or mis- 
understood. The first class cannot exist here, be- 
cause only those are admitted to the community who 
leave self behind and entirely devote themselves to 
its good ; the second class cannot exist here because 
it is clear to all of them that misunderstanding or 
injustice is an impossibility. Under conditions such 
as these the problem of government becomes an 
easv one. 



CHAPTER XXIV 
RELIGION AND THE TEMPLES 

THIS practical absence of all regulations gives to 
the whole place an air of remarkable freedom, al- 
though at the same time the atmosphere of one podnt- 
edness impresses itself upon us very forcibly. Men 
are of many different types, and are moving along 
lines of development through intellect, devotion and 
action ; but all alike recognise that the Manu knows 
thoroughly well what He is doing, and that all these 
different ways are only so many methods of serving 
Him that whatever development comes to one 
comes to him not for himself, but for the Race, that 
it may be handed on to his children. There are no 
longer different religions in our sense of the word, 
though the one teaching is given in different typical 
forms. The subject of religious worship is, how- 
ever, of such great importance that we will now de- 
vote a special section to its consideration, follow- 
ing this up with the new methods of education, and 
the particulars of the personal, social and corporate 
life of the community. 

TJIEOROPHY IN THE COMMUNITY 

Since the two Masters who founded the Theo- 
sophical Society are also the leaders of this com- 

341 



342 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

munity, it is quite natural that the religious opinion 
current there should be what we now call Theosophy. 
All that we now hold all that is known in the inner- 
most circles of our Esoteric Section is the com- 
mon faith of the community, and many points on 
which as yet our own knowledge is only rudimen- 
tary are thoroughly grasped and understood in de- 
tail. The outline of our Theosophy is no longer 
a matter of dicussion but of certainty, and the facts 
of the life after death and the existence and nature 
of the higher worlds are matters of experimental 
knowledge for nearly all members of the colony. 
Here, as in our own time, different branches of the 
study attract different people ; some think chiefly of 
the higher philosophy and metaphysics, while the 
majority prefer to express their religious feelings 
along some of the lines provided for them in the 
different Temples. A strong vein of practicality 
runs through all their thinking, and we should not 
go far wrong in saying that the religion of this com- 
munity is to do what it is told. There is no sort of 
divorcement between science and religion, because 
both alike are bent entirely to the one object, and 
exist only for the sake of the State. Men no longer 
worship various manifestations, since all possess 
accurate knowledge as to the existence of the Solar 
Deity. It is still the custom with many to make a 
salutation to the Sun as he rises, but all are fully 
aware that he is to be regarded as a centre in the 
body of the Deity. 

THE DEVAS 

One prominent feature of the religious life is the 
extent to which the Devas take part in it. Many 



RELIOION AND THE TEMPLES 343 

religions of the twentieth century spoke of a Golden 
Age in the past in which Angels or Deities walked 
freely among men, but this happy state of things 
had then ceased because of the grossness of that 
stage of evolution. As regards our community this 
has again been realised, for great Devas habitually 
come among the people and bring to them many 
new possibilities of development, each drawing to 
himself those cognate to his own nature. This 
should not surprise us, for even in the twentieth 
century much help was being given by Devas to 
those who were able to receive it. Such opportuni- 
ties of learning, such avenues of advancement, were 
not then open to the majority, but this was not 
because of the unwillingness of the Devas, but 
because of man's backwardness in evolution. We 
were then much in the position of children in a 
primary class in this world-school. The great pro- 
fessors from the universities sometimes came to 
our school to instruct the advanced students, and we 
sometimes saw them pass at a distance; but their 
ministrations were as yet of no direct use to us 
simply because we were not at the age or state of 
development at which we could make any use of 
them. The classes were being held. The teachers 
were there, quite at our disposal as soon as we 
grew old enough. Our community has grown old 
enough, and therefore it is reaping the benefit of 
constant intercourse with these great beings and 
of frequent instruction from them. 

THE TEMPLE SERVICES 

These Devas are not merely making sporadic ap- 
pearances, but are definitely working as part of the 



344 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

regular organisation under the direction of the 
Chief Priest, who takes entire control of the re- 
ligious development of the community, and of its 
educational department. For the outward expres- 
sion of this religion we find that various classes of 
Temple services are provided, and that the manage- 
ment of these is the especial function of the Devas. 
Four types of these Temples were observed, and 
though the outline and objects of the services were 
the same in all, there were striking differences in 
form and method, which we shall now endeavour 
to describe. 

The key-note of the Temple service is that each 
man, belonging as he does to a particular type, has 
some one avenue through which he can most easily 
reach the Divine, and therefore be most easily 
reached in turn by divine influence. In some men 
that channel is affection, in others devotion, in 
others sympathy, in yet others intellect. For these 
four kinds of Temples exist, and in each of them 
the object is to bring the prominent quality in the 
man into active and conscious relationship with the 
corresponding quality in the LOGOS, of which it is 
a manifestation, for in that way the man himself 
can most easily be uplifted and helped. Thereby 
he can be raised for a time to a level of spirituality 
and power far beyond anything that is normally pos- 
sible for him; and every such effort of spiritual 
elevation makes the next similar effort easier for 
him, and also raises slightly his normal level. Every 
service which a man attends is intended to have a 
definite and calculated effect upon him, and the ser- 
vices for a year or series of years are carefully 
ordered with a view to the average development of 



RELIGION AND THE TEMPLES 345 

the congregation, and with the idea of carrying its 
members upward to a certain point. It is in this 
work that the co-operation of the Deva is so valu- 
able, since he acts as a true priest and intermediary 
between the people and the LOGOS, receiving, gather- 
ing together and forwarding their streams of as- 
pirational force, and distributing, applying and 
bringing down to their level the floods of divine 
influence which come as a response from on high. 

THE CKIMSON TEMPLE 

The first Temple entered for the purposes of ex- 
amination was one of those which the Deva original- 
ly showed in his pictures one of those where prog- 
ress is principally made through affection, a great 
characteristic of the services of which is the splendid 
flood of colour which accompanies them, and is in 
fact their principal expression. Imagine a magni- 
ficent circular building somewhat resembling a cath- 
edral, yet of no order of architecture at present 
known to us, and much more open to the outer air 
than it is possible for any cathedral to be in ordina- 
ry European climates. Imagine it filled with a 
reverent congregation, and the Deva-priest standing 
in the centre before them, on the apex of a kind of 
pyramidal or conical erection of filigree work, so 
that he is equally visible from every part of the 
great building. 

It is noteworthy that every worshipper as he 
enters takes his seat on the pavement quietly and 
reverently, and then closes his eyes and passes be- 
fore his mental vision a succession of sheets or 
clouds of colour, such as sometimes pass before one's 
eyes in the darkness just before falling asleep. 



346 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

Each person has an order of his own for these col- 
ours, and they are evidently to some extent a per- 
sonal expression of him. This seems to be of the 
nature of the preliminary prayer on entering a 
church of the twentieth century, and is intended to 
calm the man, to collect his thoughts, if they have 
been wandering, and to attune him to the surround- 
ing atmosphere and the purpose which it subserves. 
When the service commences the Deva materialises 
on the apex of his pyramid, assuming for the oc- 
casion a magnificent and glorified human form, and 
wearing in these particular Temples flowing vest- 
ments of rich crimson (the colour varies with the 
type of Temple, as will presently be seen). 

His first action is to cause a flashing-out above 
his head of a band of brilliant colours somewhat 
resembling a solar spectrum, save that on different 
occasions the colours are in different order and vary 
in their proportions. It is practically impossible to 
describe this band of colours with accuracy, for it 
is much more than a mere spectrum : it is a picture, 
yet not a picture; it has within it geometrical forms, 
yet we have at present no means by which it can be 
drawn or represented, for it is in more dimensions 
than are known to our senses as they are now 
constituted. This band is the key-note or text of 
that particular service, indicating to those who un- 
derstand it the exact object which it is intended to 
attain, and the direction in which their affection and 
aspiration must be outpoured. It is a thought ex- 
pressed in the colour-language of the Devas, and is 
intelligible as such to all the congregation. It is 
materially visible on the physical plane, as well as 
on the astral and mental, for although the majority 



RELIGION AND THE TEMPLES 347 

of the congregation are likely to possess at least 
astral sight, there may still be some for whom such 
sight is only occasional. 

Each person present now attempts to imitate this 
text or key-note, forming by the power of his will 
in the air in front of himself a smaller band of col- 
ours as nearly like it as he can. Some succeed far 
better than others, so that each such attempt ex- 
presses not only the subject indicated by the Deva 
but also the character of the man who makes it. 
Some are able to make this so definitely that it is 
visible on the physical plane, while others can make 
it only at astral and mental levels. Some of those 
who produce the most brilliant and successful imita- 
tions of the form made by the Deva do not bring 
it down to the physical plane. 

The Deva, holding out his arms over the people, 
now pours out through this colour-form a wonder- 
ful stream of influence upon them a stream which 
reaches them through their own corresponding col- 
our-forms and uplifts them precisely in the propor- 
tion in which they have been successful in making 
their colour-forms resemble that of the Deva. The 
influence is not that of the Deva-priest alone, for 
above and Altogether beyond him, and apart from 
the Temple or the material world, stands a ring of 
higher Devas for whose forces he acts as a channel. 
The astral effect of the outpouring is remarkable. 
A sea of pale crimson light suffuses the vast aura 
of the Deva and spreads out in great waves over the 
congregation, thus acting upon them and stirring 
their emotions into greater activity. Each of them 
shoots up into the rose-coloured sea his own partic- 
ular form, but beautiful though that is, it is natur- 



348 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

ally of a lower order than that of the Deva indi- 
vidually coarser and less brilliant than the totality 
brilliancy in which it flashes forth, and so we have 
a curious and beautiful effect of deep crimson 
flames piercing a rose-coloured sea as one might 
imagine volcanic flames shooting up in front of a 
gorgeous sunset. 

To understand to some extent how this activity 
of sympathetic vibration is brought about we must 
realise that the aura of a Deva is far more exten- 
sive than that of a human being, and it is also far 
more flexible. The feeling which in an ordinary 
man expresses itself in a smile of greeting, in a 
Deva causes a sudden expansion and brightening 
of the aura, and manifests not only in colour but 
also in musical sound. A greeting from one Deva 
to another is a splendid chord of music, or rather 
an arpeggio; a conversation between two Devas is 
like a fugue; an oration delivered by one of them 
is a splendid oratorio. A Rupadeva of ordinary de- 
velopment has frequently an aura of many hundred 
yards in diameter, and when anything interests 
him or excites his enthusiasm it instantly increases 
enormously. Our Deva-priest therefore is including 
the whole of his congregation within his aura, and 
is consequently able to act upon them in a most in- 
timate manner from within as well as from with- 
out. Our readers may perhaps picture to them- 
selves this aura, if they recollect that of the Arhat 
in Man Visible and Invisible; but they must think 
of it as less fixed and more fluidic, more fiery and 
sparkling as consisting almost entirely of pulsat- 
ing fiery rays, which yet give much the same general 
effect of arrangement of colour. It is as though 



RELIGION AND THE TEMPLES 349 

those spheres of colour remain, but are formed of 
fiery rays which are ever flowing outward, yet as 
they pass through each section of the radius they 
take upon themselves its colour. 

THE LINKS WITH THE LOGOS 

This first outpouring of influence upon the people 
has the effect of bringing each person up to his 
highest level, and evoking from him the noblest af- 
fection of which he is capable. When the Deva sees 
that all are tuned to the proper key, he reverses 
the current of his force, he concentrates and defines 
his aura into a smaller spherical form, out of the 
top of which rises a huge column reaching upwards. 
Instead of extending his arms over the people he 
raises them above his head, and at that signal every 
man in the congregation sends towards the Deva- 
priest the utmost wealth of his affection and aspi- 
ration pours himself out in worship and love at 
the feet of the Deity. The Deva draws all those 
fiery streams into himself, and pours them upward 
in one vast fountain of many-coloured flame, which 
expands as it rises and is caught by the circle of 
waiting Devas, who pass it through themselves and, 
transmuting it, converge it, like rays refracted 
through a lens, until it reaches the great chief Deva 
of their Eay, the mighty potentate who looks upon 
the very LOGOS Himself, and represents that Eay in 
relation to Him. 

That great Chieftain is collecting similar streams 
from all parts of his world, and he weaves these 
many streams into one great rope which binds the 
earth to the Feet of its GOD; he combines these 
many streams into the one great river which flows 



350 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

around those Feet, and brings our petal of the lotus 
close to the heart of the flower. And He answers. 
In the light of the LOGOS Himself shines forth for 
a moment a yet greater brilliancy ; back to the great 
Deva Chieftain flashes that instant recognition; 
through him on the waiting ring below flows down 
that flood of power; and as through them it touches 
the Deva- priest expectant on his pinnacle, once 
more he lowers his arms and spreads them out 
above his people in benediction. A flood of colours 
gorgeous beyond all description fills the whole vast 
cathedral; torrents as of liquid fire, yet delicate as 
the hues of an Egyptian sunset, are bathing every 
one in their effulgence; and out of all this glory 
each one takes to himself that which he is able to 
take, that which the stage of his development en- 
ables him to assimilate. 

All the vehicles of each man present are vivified 
into their highest activity by this stupendous down- 
rush of divine power, and for the moment each real- 
ises to his fullest capacity what the life of God really 
means, and how in each it must express itself as 
love for his fellow-man. This is a far fuller and 
more personal benediction than that poured out at 
the beginning of the service, for here is something 
exactly fitted to each man, strengthening him in his 
weakness and yet at the same time developing to its 
highest possibility all that is best in him, giving 
him not only a tremendous and transcendent ex- 
perience at the time, but also a memory which shall 
be for him as a radiant and glowing light for many 
a day to come. This is the daily service the daily 
religious practice of those who belong to this Bay 
of affection. 



RELIGION AND THE TEMPLES 351 

Nor does the good influence of this service affect 
only those who are present; its radiations extend 
over a large district, and purify the astral and 
mental atmospheres. The effect is distinctly per- 
ceptible to any moderately sensitive person even 
two or three miles from the Temple. Each such 
service also sends out a huge eruption of rose-col- 
oured thought-forms which bombard the surrounding 
country with thoughts of love, so that the whole at- 
mosphere is full of it. In the Temple itself a vast 
crimson vortex is set up which is largely permanent, 
so that anyone entering the Temple immediately 
feels its influence, and this also keeps up a steady 
radiation upon the surrounding district. In addition 
to this each man as he goes home from the service 
is himself a centre of force of no mean order, and 
when he reaches his home the radiations which pour 
from him are strongly perceptible to any neighbours 
who have not been able to attend the service. 

THE SERMON 

Sometimes, in addition to this, or perhaps as a 
service apart from this, the Deva delivers what may 
be described as a kind of colour-sermon, taking up 
that colour-form which we have mentioned as the 
key-note or text for the day, explaining it to his 
people by an unfolding process, and mostly with- 
out spoken words, and perhaps causing it to pass 
through a series of mutations intended to convey to 
them instruction of various kinds. One exceeding- 
ly vivid and striking colour-sermon of this nature 
was intended to show the effect of love upon the 
various qualities in others with which it comes into 
contact. The black clouds of malice, the scarlet of 



352 MAN; WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

anger, the dirty green of deceit, or the hard brown- 
grey of selfishness, the brownish-green of jealousy, 
and the heavy dull-grey of depression, were all in 
turn subjected to the glowing crimson fire of love. 
The stages through which they pass were shown, 
and it was made clear that in the end none of them 
could resist its force, and all of them at last melted 
into it and were consumed. 

INCENSE 

Though colour is in every way the principal fea- 
ture in this service which we have described, the 
Deva does not disdain to avail himself of the chan- 
nels of other senses than that of sight. All through 
his service, and even before it began, incense has 
been kept burning in swinging censers underneath 
his golden pyramid, where stand two boys to attend 
to it. The kind of incense burnt varies with the dif- 
ferent parts of the service. The people are far 
more sensitive to perfumes than we of earlier cen- 
turies; they are able to distinguish accurately all 
the different binds of incense, and they know ex- 
actly what each kind means and for what purpose it 
is used. The number of pleasant odours available 
in this way is much larger than that of those pre- 
viously in use, and they have discovered some 
method of making them more volatile, so that they 
penetrate instantly through every part of the build- 
ing. This acts upon the etheric body somewhat as 
the colours do upon the astral, and bears its part in 
bringing all the vehicles of the man rapidly into 
harmony. These people possess a good deal of new 
information as to the effect of odours upon certain 
parts of the brain, as we shall see more fully when 



RELIGION AND THE TEMPLES 353 

we come to deal with the educational processes. 

SOUND 

Naturally every change of colour is accompanied 
by its appropriate sound, and though this is a sub- 
ordinate feature in the colour-temple which we have 
described, it is yet by no means without its effect. 
We shall now, however, attempt to describe a some- 
what similar service in a Temple where music is 
the predominant feature, and colour comes only to 
assist its effect, precisely as sound has assisted 
colour in the Temple of affection. In common par- 
lance, these Temples in which progress is made prin- 
cipally by the development of affection are called 
* crimson Temples' first because everyone knows 
that crimson is the colour in the aura which in- 
dicates affection, and therefore that is the prevail- 
ing colour of all the splendid outpourings which 
take place in it ; and secondly, because in recognition 
of the same fact all the graceful lines of the architec- 
ture are indicated by lines of crimson, and there 
are even some Temples entirely of that hue. The 
majority of these Temples are built of a stone of a 
beautiful pale grey with a polished surface much 
like that of marble, and when this is the case only 
the external decorations are of the colour which 
indicates the nature of the services performed with- 
in. Sometimes, however, the Temples of affection 
are built entirely of stone of a lovely pale rose- 
colour, which stands out with marvellous beauty 
against the vivid green of the trees with which 
they are always surrounded. The Temples in which 
music is the dominant factor are similarly known as 
'blue Temples,' because since their principal ob- 



354 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

ject is the arousing of the highest possible devotion, 
blue is the colour most prominent in connection with 
their services, and consequently the colour adopted 
for both exterior and interior decoration. 

THE BLUE TEMPLE 

The general outline of the services in one of the 
blue Temples closely resembles that which we have 
already described, except that in their case sound 
takes the place of colour as the principal agent. 
Just as the endeavour in the colour-Temple was to 
stimulate the love in man by bringing it consciously 
into relation with the divine love, so in this Temple 
the object is to promote the evolution of the man 
through the quality of devotion, which by the use of 
music is enormously uplifted and intensified and 
brought into direct relation with the LOGOS who is 
its object. Just as in the crimson Temple there ex- 
ists a permanent vortex of the highest and noblest 
affection, so in this music-Temple there exists a 
similar atmosphere of unselfish devotion which in- 
stantly affects everyone who enters it. 

Into this atmosphere come the members of the 
congregation, each bringing in his hand a curious 
musical instrument, unlike any formerly known on 
earth. It is not a violin ; it is perhaps rather of the 
nature of a small circular harp with strings of some 
shining metal. But this strange instrument has 
many remarkable properties. It is in fact much 
more than a mere instrument; it is specially mag- 
netised for its owner, and no other person must use 
it. It is tuned to the owner ; it is an expression of 
the owner a funnel through which he can be reach- 
ed on this physical plane. He plays upon it, and 



RELIGION AND THE TEMPLES 355 

yet at the same time he himself is played upon in 
doing so. He gives out and receives vibrations 
through it. 

THE DEVOTIONAL SERVICE 

When the worshipper enters the Temple, he calls 
up before his mind a succession of beautiful sounds 
a piece of music which fulfills for him the same 
office as the series of colours which pass before the 
eyes of the man in the colour-Temple at the same 
stage of the proceedings. When the Deva material- 
ises he also takes up an instrument of similar na- 
ture, and he commences the service by striking upon 
it a chord (or rather an arpeggio) which fulfils the 
function of the keynote in colour which is used in 
the other Temple. The effect of this chord is most 
striking. His instrument is but a small one and 
apparently of no great power, though wonderfully 
sweet in tone ; but as he strikes it, the chord seems 
to be taken up in the air around him as though it 
were repeated by a thousand invisible musicians, 
so that it resounds through the great dome of the 
Temple and pours out in a flood of harmony, a sea 
of rushing sound over the entire congregation. Each 
member of the congregation now touches his own in- 
strument, and very softly at first, but gradually 
swelling out into a greater volume, until everyone is 
taking part in this wonderful symphony. Thus, as 
in the colour-Temple, every member is brought into 
harmony with the principal idea which the Deva 
wishes to emphasise at this service, and in this case, 
as in the other, a benediction is poured over the peo- 
ple which raises each to the highest level possible for 



356 MAN: WHENCE. HOW AND WHITHER 

him, and draws from him an eager response which 
shows itself both in sound and in colour. 

Here also incense is being used, and it varies at 
different points of the service, much as in the other 
case. Then when the congregation is thoroughly 
tuned, each man begins definitely to play. All are 
clearly taking recognised parts, although it does not 
seem that this has been arranged or rehearsed be- 
forehand. As soon as this stage is in full operation 
the Deva-priest draws in his aura, and begins to 
pour his sound inwards instead of out over the peo- 
ple. Each man is putting his very life into his play- 
ing, and definitely aiming at the Deva, so that 
through him it may rise. The effect on the higher 
emotions of the people is most remarkable, and the 
living aspiration and devotion of the congregation 
is poured upwards in a mighty stream through the 
officiating Deva to a great circle of Devas above, 
who, as before, draw it into themselves, transmuting 
it to an altogether higher level, and send it forward 
in a still mightier stream towards the great Deva 
at the head of their Ray. Upon him converge thou- 
sands of such streams from all the devotion of the 
earth, and he in his turn gathers all these together 
and weaves them into one, which, as he sends it up- 
wards, links him with the solar LOGOS Himself. 

In it he is bearing his share in a concert which 
comes from all the worlds of the system and these 
streams from all the worlds make somehow the 
mighty twelve-stringed lyre upon which the LOGOS 
Himself plays as He sits upon the Lotus of His sys- 
tem. It is impossible to put this into words ; but the 
writer has seen it, and knows that it is true. He 
hears, He responds, and He Himself plays upon His 



RELIGION AND THE TEMPLES 357 

system. Thus for the first time we have one brief 
glimpse of the stupendous life which He lives among 
the other LOGOI who are His peers ; but thought fails 
before this glory ; our minds are inadequate to com- 
prehend it. At least it is clear that the great music- 
Devas, taken in their totality, represent music to 
the LOGOS, and He expresses Himself through them 
in music to His worlds. 

THE BENEDICTION 

Then comes the response a downpouring flood 
of ordered sound too tremendous to be described, 
flowing back through the Chieftain of the Bay to the 
circle of Devas below, and from them to the Deva- 
priest in the Temple, transmuted at each stage to 
lower levels, so that at last it pours out through the 
officiant in the Temple in a form in which it may be 
assimilated by his congregation a great ocean of 
soft, sweet, swelling sound, an outburst of celestial 
music which surrounds, enwraps, overwhelms them, 
and yet pours into them through their own instru- 
ments vibrations so living, so uplifting, that their 
higher bodies are brought into action and their con- 
sciousness is raised to levels which in their outer 
life it could not even approach. Each man holds 
out his instrument in front of him, and it is through 
that that this marvellous effect is produced upon 
him. It seems as though from the great symphony 
each instrument selected the chords appropriate to 
itself that is to say, to the owner whose expression 
it is. Yet each harp somehow not only selects and re- 
sponds, but also calls into existence far more than 
its own volume of sound. 

The whole atmosphere is surcharged by the Gand- 



358 MAN: WHENCE. HOW AND WHITHER 

harvas, or music-Devas, so that veritably every 
sound is multiplied, and for every single tone is pro- 
duced a great chord of overtones and undertones, all 
of unearthly sweetness and beauty. This benedic- 
tory response from on high is an utterly amazing 
experience, but words completely fail when we en- 
deavour to find expression for it. It must be seer 
?nd h^ard and felt before it can in any way be uu 
derstood. 

This magnificent final swell goes sounding home 
with the people, as it were ; it lives inside them still 
even though the service is over, and often the mem- 
ber will try to reproduce it in a minor degree in a 
kind of little private service at home. In this Tem- 
ple also there may be what corresponds to a sermon, 
but in this case it is delivered by the Deva through 
his instrument and received by the people through 
theirs. It is clear that it is not the same to all that 
some get more and some less of the meaning of the 
Deva and of the effect which he intends to produce. 

INTELLECT 

All the effects which are produced in the crimson 
Temple througli affection by the gorgeous seas of 
colour are attained here through devotion by this 
marvellous use of music. It is clear that in both 
cases the action is primarily on the intuitional and 
emotional bodies of the people on the intuitional 
directly, in those who have developed it to the re- 
sponsive stage, and on the intuitional through the 
emotional for others who are somewhat less ad- 
vanced. The intellect is touched only by reflection 
from these planes, whereas in the next variety of 
Temple to be described this action is reversed, for 



RELIGION AND THE TEMPLES 359 

the stimulation is brought to bear directly upon the 
intellect, and it is only through and by means of 
that that the intuitional is presently to be awak- 
ened. Eventual results are no doubt the same, but 
the order of procedure is different. 

THE YELLOW TEMPLE 

If we think of the men of the crimson Temple as 
developing through colour, and those of the blue as 
utilising sound, we might' perhaps put form as the 
vehicle principally employed in the yellow Temple 
for naturally yellow is the colour of the Temple es- 
pecially devoted to intellectual development, since 
it is in that way that it symbolises itself in the var- 
ious vehicles of man. 

Once more the architecture and the internal struc- 
ture of the Temple are the same, except that all dec- 
orations and outlinings are in yellow instead of 
blue or crimson. The general scheme of the service, 
too, is identical the text or key-note first, which 
brings all into union, then the aspiration or prayer 
or effort of the people, which calls down the re- 
sponse from the LOGOS. The form of instruction 
which, for want of a better name, I have called the 
sermon also has its part in all the services. All 
alike use incense, though the difference between the 
kind used in this yellow Temple and that of the blue 
and the crimson is noticeable. The vortex in this 
case stimulates intellectual activity, so that merely 
to enter the Temple makes a man feel more keenly 
alive mentally, better able to understand and to ap- 
preciate. 

These people do not bring with them any physical 
instruments, and instead of passing before their 



360 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

eyes a succession of clouds of colour, they begin, aa 
soon as they take their seats, to visualise certain 
mental forms. Each man has his own form, which 
is clearly intended to be an expression of himself, 
just as was the physical instrument of the musician, 
or the special colour-scheme of the worshipper in 
the Temple of affection. These forms are all dif- 
ferent, and many of them distinctly imply the power 
to visualise in the physical brain some of the simpler 
four-dimensional figures. Naturally the power of 
visualisation differs; so some people are able to 
make their figures much more complete and definite 
than others. But, curiously, the indefiniteness seems 
to show itself at both ends of the scale. The less 
educated of the thinkers those who are as yet only 
learning how to think often make forms which are 
not clearly cut, or even if at first they are able to 
make them clear they are not able to maintain them 
so, and they constantly slip into indefiniteness. They 
do not actually materialise them, but they do form 
them strongly in mental matter, and almost all of 
them, even at quite an early stage, seem to be able 
to do this. The forms are evidently at first pre- 
scribed for them, and they are told to hold them 
rather as a means than than as object of contempla- 
tion. They are clearly intended to be each an expres- 
sion of its creator, whose further progress will in- 
volve modifications of the form, though these do not 
change it essentially. He is intended to think 
through it and to receive vibrations through it, just 
as the musical man received them through his in- 
strument, or the member of the colour congregation 
through his colour-form. With the more intelligent 
persons the form becomes more definite and more 



RELIGION AND THE TEMPLES 361 

complicated ; but with some of the most definite of 
all it is again taking on an appearance suggesting 
indefiniteness, because it is beginning to be so much 
upon a still higher plane because it is taking on 
more and more of the dimensions, and is becoming 
so living that it cannot be kept still. 

THE INTELLECTUAL STIMULUS 

When the Deva appears he also makes a form 
not a form which is an expression of himself, but, 
as in the other Temples, one which is to be the key- 
note of the service, which defines the special object 
at which on this occasion he is aiming. His congre- 
gation then project themselves into their forms, and 
try through those to respond to his form and to 
understand it. Sometimes it is a changing form 
one which unfolds or unveils itself in a number of 
successive movements. Along with the formation 
of this, and through it, the Deva-priest pours out 
upon them a great flood of yellow light which applies 
intense stimulus to their intellectual faculties along 
the particular line which he is indicating. He 
is acting strongly upon both their causal and 
mental bodies, but very little comparatively on 
the emotional or the intuitional. Some who have 
not normally the consciousness of the mental 
body have it awakened in them by this process, so 
that for the first time they can use it quite freely and 
see clearly by its means. In others, who have it 
not normally, it awakens the power of four-dimen- 
sional sight for the first time; in others less ad- 
vanced it only makes them see things a little more 
clearly, and comprehend temporarily ideas which 
are usually too metaphysical for them. 



362 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

INTELLECTUAL FEELING 

The mental effort is not entirely unaccompanied 
by feeling, for there is at least an intense delight in 
reaching upwards, though even that very delight is 
felt almost exclusively through the mental body. 
They all pour their thoughts through their forms 
into the Deva-priest, as before, and they offer up 
these individual contributions as a kind of sacrifice 
to the LOGOS of the best that they have to give. Into 
him anct through him they give themselves in sur- 
render to the burning Light above; they merge 
themselves, throw themselves, into him. It is the 
white heat of intellectuality raised to its highest 
power. As in the other Temples, the Deva-priest 
synthesises all the different forms which are sent to 
him, and blends together all the streams of force, 
before forwarding it to the circle above him, which 
this time consists of that special class which for the 
present we will call the yellow Devas those who 
are developing intellect, and revel in assisting and 
guiding it in man. 

As before, they absorb the force, but only to send 
it out again at a higher level and enormously in- 
creased in quantity to the great Chieftain who is the 
head of their Bay, and a kind of centre for the ex- 
change of forces. The intellect aspect of the LOGOS 
plays upon him and through him from above, while 
all human intellect reaches up to him and through 
him from below. He receives and forwards the con- 
tribution from the Temple, and in turn he opens the 
flood-gates of divine intelligence which, lowered 
through many stages on the way, pours out upon the 
waiting people and raises them out of their every- 



RELIGION AND THE TEMPLES 363 

day selves into what they will be in the future. The 
temporary effect of such a down-pouring is almost 
incalculable. All egos present are brought into vig- 
orous activity, and the consciousness in the causal 
body is brought into action in all of those in whom 
it is as yet in any way possible. In others it means 
merely greatly increased mental activity; some are 
so lifted out of themselves that they actually leave 
the body, and others pass into a kind of Samadhi, 
because the consciousness is drawn up into a vehicle 
which is not yet sufficiently developed to be able to 
express it. 

The response from above is not merely a stimula- 
tion. It contains also a vast mass of forms it 
would seem all possible forms along whatever is the 
special line of the day. These forms also are as- 
similated by such of the congregation as can utilise 
them, and it is noteworthy that the same form means 
much more to some people than to others. For ex- 
ample, a form which conveys some interesting de- 
tail of physical evolution to one man may to another 
represent a whole vast stage of cosmic development. 
For many people it is as though they were seeing 
in visible form the Stanzas of Dzyan. All are try- 
ing to think on the same line, yet they do it in dif- 
ferent ways, and consequently they attract to 
themselves different forms out of the vast ordered 
system which is at their disposal. Each man draws 
out of this multitude that which is most suited to 
him. Some people, for example, are simply getting 
new lights on the subject, substituting for their 
own thought-form another which is in reality in no 
way superior to it, but simply another side of the 
question. 



364 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

Men are evidently raised into the intuitional con- 
sciousness along these lines. By intense thinking, 
by comprehension of the converging streams, they 
attain first an intellectual grasp of the constitution 
of the universe, and then by intense pressure up- 
wards they realise it and break through. It usually 
comes with a rush and almost overwhelms the man 
all the more so as along his line he has had little 
practice before in understanding the feelings of hu- 
manity. From his intellectual point of view he has 
been philosophically examining and dissecting peo- 
ple, as though they were plants under a microscope ; 
and now, in a moment, it is borne in upon him that 
all these also are divine as himself, that all these 
are full of their own feelings and emotions, under- 
standings and misunderstandings, that these are 
more than brothers, since they are actually within 
himself and not without. This is a great shock for 
the man to whom it comes, and he needs time to 
readjust himself and to develop some other qualities 
which he has been hitherto to some extent neglect- 
ing. The service ends much as the others did, and 
each man's mental form is permanently somewhat 
the better for the exercise through which he has 
passed. 

MENTAL MAGIC 

Here also we have the form of instruction which 
we have called the sermon, and in this case it is 
usually an exposition of the changes which take 
place in a certain form or set of forms. In this 
case the Deva occasionally makes use of spoken 
words, though only few of them. It is as though he 
were showing them changing magic-lantern pictures, 



RELIGION AND THE TEMPLES 365 

and naming them as they pass before them. He 
materialises strongly and clearly the special 
thought-form which he is showing them, and each 
member of the congregation tries to copy it in his 
own mental matter. In one case which is observed, 
that which is described is the transference of forms 
from plane to plane a kind of mental magic which 
shows how one thought can be changed into another. 
On the lower mental plane he shows how a selfish 
thought may become unselfish. None of his people 
are crudely selfish, or they would not be in the com- 
munity ; but there may still remain subtle forms of 
self-centred thought. There is a certain danger also 
if intellectual pride, and it is shown how this can be 
transmuted into worship of the wisdom of the 
LOGOS. 

In other cases most interesting metamorphoses 
are shown forms changing into one another by 
turning inside out like a glove. In this way, for 
example, a dodecahedron becomes an icosahedron. 
Not only are these changes shown, but also their 
inner meaning on all the different planes is explain- 
ed, and here also it is interesting to see the unfold- 
ment of the successive esoteric meanings and to 
notice how some members of the congregation stop 
at one of these, feeling it to the highest possible 
degree, and well satisfied with themselves for being 
able to see it, while others go on one, two or more 
stages beyond them, further into the real heart of 
the meaning. What is applied only as a transmuta- 
tion to their own thoughts by the majority of the 
congregation may be to the few who have gone fur- 
ther a translation of cosmic force from one plane to 
another. Such a sermon is a veritable training in 



366 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

mental intensity and activity, and it needs a closely 
sustained attention to follow it. 

In all these Temples alike a great point is made 
of the training of the will which is necessary in or- 
der to keep the attention focused upon all the dif- 
ferent parts of their variations in the pictures, the 
music, or the thought-forms. All this is shown most 
prominently by the intense glow of the causal bod- 
ies, but it reacts upon the mental vehicles and even 
upon the physical brain, which appears on the whole 
to be distinctly larger among these pioneers of the 
Sixth Root^ Race than with men of the fifth. It 
used to be thought by many that much study 
and intellectual development tended greatly to at- 
rophy or destroy the power of visualisation, but that 
is not at all the cape with the devotees of the yel- 
low Temple. Perhaps the difference may be that in 
the old days study was so largely a study of mere 
cvords, whereas in the case of all these people they 
lave for many lives been devoting themselves also 
:o meditation, which necessarily involves the con- 
stant practice of visualisation in a high degree. 

THE GREEN TEMPLE 

Yet one more type of Temple remains to be de- 
scribed a type which is decorated in a lovely pale 
preen, because the thought-forms generated in it are 
>f precisely that colour. Of the Temples already 
nentioned the crimson and the blue seem to have 
nany points in common, and a similar link seems to 
ioin the yellow and the green. One might perhaps 
;ay that the blue and the crimson correspond to 
,wo types of what in India is called Bhakti-yoga; 
n that case the yellow Temple might be thought of 



RELIGION AND THE TEMPLES 367 

as offering us the Jnana-yoga, and the green Temple 
the Karma-yoga ; or in English we might character- 
ise them as the Temples of affection, devotion, in- 
tellect and action respectively. The congregation of 
the green Temple works also chiefly on the mental 
plane, but its particular line is the translating of 
thought into action to get things done. It is part* 
of its regular service to send out intentionally ar- 
ranged thought-currents, primarily towards its own 
community, but also through them to the world at 
large. In the other Temples too they think of the 
outside world, for they include it in their thoughts 
of love and devotion or treat it intellectually; but 
the idea of these people of the green Temple is ac- 
tion with regard to everything, and they consider 
that they have not surely grasped an idea until they 
have translated it into action. 

The people of the yellow Temple, on the other 
hand, take the same idea quite differently, and con- 
sider it perfectly possible to have the fullest com- 
prehension without action. But the devotees of this 
green Temple cannot feel that they are really fulfill- 
ing their place in the world unless they ^re con- 
stantly in active motion, A thought-form to them 
is not an effective thought-form unless it contains 
some of their typical green because, as they say, it 
is lacking in sympathy so that all their forces ex- 
press themselves in action, action, action, and in ac- 
tion is their happiness, and through the self-sacrifice 
in the action they attain. 

They have powerful and concentrated plans in 
their minds, and in some cases it is noticed that 
many of them combine to think out one plan and 
to get the thing done. They are careful to accum- 



368 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

ulate much knowledge about whatever subject they 
take up as a speciality. Often each one takes some 
area in the world into which he pours his thought- 
forms for a certain object. One, for example, will 
take up education in Greenland, or social reform in 
Kamchatka. They are naturally dealing with all 
sorts of out-of-the-way places like these, because by 
this time everything conceivable has already been 
done in every place of which we have ever heard in 
ordinary life. They do not use hypnotism, however; 
they do not in any way try to dominate the will of 
any man whom they wish to help ; they simply try 
to impress their ideas and improvements on his 
brain. 

THE LINE OF THE HEAL.ING-DEVAS 

Once more, the general scheme of their service 
is like that of the others. They do not bring with 
them any physical instruments, but they have their 
mental forms just as the intellectual people have, 
only in this case they are always plans of activity. 
Each has some special plan to which he is devoting 
himself, though at the same time through it he is de- 
voting himself to the LOGOS. They hold their plans 
and the realisation of them before them, just in the 
same way as the other men do their thought or col- 
our-forms. It is noteworthy that these plans are al- 
ways carried to a great height of conception. For 
example, a man's plan for the organisation of a 
backward country would include and be mainly cen- 
tred in the idea of the mental and moral uplifting 
of its inhabitants. These devotees of the green 
Temple are not actually philanthropical in the old 
sense of the word, though their hearts are filled with 



RELIGION AND THE TEMPLES 369 

sympathy with their fellow-men which expresses 
itself in the most beautiful shade of their character- 
istic colour. Indeed, from what glimpses have been 
caught of the outer world it seems evident that or- 
dinary philanthrophy is quite unnecessary, because 
poverty has disappeared. Their schemes are all 
plans for helping people, or for the improvement of 
conditions in some way. 

Suggestions of all kinds and sorts of activity find 
their place here, and they appeal to the active or 
healing-Devas, the type identified by Christian Mys- 
tics with the hierarchy of the Archangel Eaphael. 
Their Deva-priest puts before them as his text, or 
as the dominant idea of the service, something which 
will be an aspect of all their ideas and will strength- 
en every one of them- They try to present clearly 
their several schemes, and through that they gain 
development for themselves in trying to sympa- 
thise with and help other people. After the prelim- 
inary tuning up and the opening benediction, there 
conies once more the offering of their plans. The 
opening benediction may be thought of as bringing 
the sympathy of the Devas for all their schemes 
and the identification of the Deva-priest with each 
and all of them. 

When the time of aspiration comes, each offers 
his plan as something of his own which he has to 
give, as his contribution, as the fruit of his brain, 
which he lays before the Lord, and also he has the 
thought that thus he throws himself and bis life 
into his schemes as a sacrifice for the sake of the Lo- 
gos. Once more we get the same magnificent effect, a 
sea of pale luminous sunset green, and among it the 
the splendid sheet and fountains, the great glowing 



370 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

flames of darker green shooting up from the sym- 
pathetic thought of each member present. Just as 
before, all this is gathered into a focus by the Deva- 
priest, is sent up by him to a circle of healing-Devas 
above, and through them to the Chieftain of their 
Ray, who once more presents this aspect of the 
world to the LOGOS. 

When they thus offer themselves and their 
thoughts, there comes back the great flow of re- 
sponse, the outpouring of good-will and of blessing, 
which in turn illuminates the sacrifice which they 
have offered through the line to which each has di- 
rected himself. The great Devas seem to magnetise 
the man and increase his power along this and 
cognate lines, raising it to higher levels, even while 
they increase it. The response not only strengthens 
such thoughts of good as they already have, but 
also opens up to them the conception of further 
activities for their thoughts. It is a definite act of 
projection, and it is done by them in a time of silent 
meditation after the reception of the blessing. 

There are many types among these people; they 
bring different chakrams or centres in the mental 
body into activity, and their streams of thought- 
force are projected sometimes from one chakram 
and sometimes from another. In the final benedic- 
tion it seems as though the LOGOS pours Himself 
through His Devas into them, and then again out 
through them to the objects of their sympathy, so 
that an additional transmutation of the force takes 
place, and the culmination of their act is to be an ac- 
tive agent for His action. Intense sympathy is the 
feeling most cultivated by these people; it is their 
keynote, by which they gradually rise through the 



RELIGION AND THE TEMPLES 371 

mental and causal bodies to the intuitional, and 
there find the acme of sympathy, because there the 
object of smpathy is no longer outside themselves, 
but within. 

The sermon in this case is frequently an exposi- 
tion of the adaptability of various types of ele- 
mental essence to the thought-force which they re- 
quire. Such a sermon is illustrated as it goes on, 
and the thought-forms are constructed before the 
congregation by the Deva and materialised for them, 
so that they may learn exactly the best way to pro- 
duce them and the best materials of which to build 
them. 

INDEPENDENTS 

In the special lines of development of these Tem- 
ples there seems a curious half-suggestion of the 
four lower sub-planes of the mental plane as they 
present themselves during the life after death, for 
it will be remembered that affection is the chief 
characteristic of one of these planes, devotion of an- 
other, action for the sake of the Deity of a third, 
and the clear conception of right for right's sake of 
the fourth. It is, however, quite evident that there 
is no difference in advancement between the egos 
who follow one line and those who follow another; 
all these paths are clearly equal, all alike are stair- 
ways leading from the level of ordinary humanity 
to the Path of Holiness which rises to the level of 
Adeptship. To one or other of these types belong 
the great majority of the people of the community, 
so that all these temples are daily filled with crowds 
of worshippers. 

A few people there are who do not attend any of 



372 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

these services, simply because none of these are to 
them the most appropriate ways of development. 
There is not, however, the slightest feeling that 
these few are therefore irreligious or in any way 
inferior to the most regular attendants. It is 
thoroughly recognised that there are many paths 
to the summit of the mountain, and that each man 
is absolutely at liberty to take that which seems 
best to him. In most cases a man selects his path 
and keeps to it, but it would never occur to him to 
blame his neighbour for selecting another, or even 
for declining to select any one of those provided. 
Every man is trying his best in his own way to fit 
himself for the work that he will have to do in the 
future, as well as to carry out to the best of his abili- 
ty the work at present before him. Nobody harbours 
the feeling: " I am in a better way than so-and-so," 
because he sees another doing differently. The 
habitual attendants of one Temple also quite often 
visit the others; indeed, some people try them all 
in turn rather according to their feeling of the 
moment, saying to themselves: "I think I need a 
touch of yellow this morning to brighten up my in- 
tellect"; or: "perhaps I am becoming too metaphys- 
ical, let me try a tonic of the green Temple"; or 
on the other hand: "I have been straining hard 
lately along intellectual lines; let me now give a 
turn to affection or devotion." 

CONGREGATION OF THE DEAD 
Many people also make a practice of attending 
the magnificent, though more elementary, services 
which are frequently held in the Temples, ostensi- 
bly for children; these will be described in detail 
when we come to the subject of education. It is in- 



RELIGION AND THE TEMPLES 373 

teresting to observe that the peculiar nature of the 
Temple services of this community has evidently 
attracted much jittention in the astral world, for 
large numbers of dead people make a practice of at- 
tending the services. They have discovered the 
participation of the Devas and the tremendous 
forces which are consequently playing through them, 
and they evidently wish to partake of the advan- 
tages. This congregation of the dead is recruited 
exclusively from the outside world; for in the com- 
munity there are no dead, since every man, when he 
puts aside one physical body, promptly assumes 
another in order to carry on the work to which he 
has devoted himself. 

THE MASTEK OF RELIGION 

The religious and educational side of the life of 
the community is under the direction of the Master 
K. H. ; and He Himself makes it a point to visit all 
the Temples in turn, taking the place of the officiat- 
ing Deva, and in doing so showing the fact that He 
combines within Himself in the highest possible 
degree all the qualities of all the types. The Devas 
who are doing work connected with religion and 
education are all marshalled under His orders. Some 
members of the community are being specially train- 
ed by the Devas, and it seems probable that such 
men will in due course pass on to the line of the 
Deva evolution. 



CHAPTER XXV 
EDUCATION AND THE FAMILY 

THE EDUCATION OF CHILDREN 

As we should naturally expect, much attention is 
paid in this community to the education of the chil- 
dren. It is considered of such paramount impor- 
tance that nothing which can in any way help is neg- 
lected and all sorts of adjuncts are brought into 
play; colour, light, sound, form, electricity are all 
pressed into the service, and the Devas who take so 
large a part in the work avail themselves of the aid 
of armies of nature-spirits. It has been realised that 
many facts previously ignored or considered in- 
significant have their place and their influence in 
educational processes that, for example, the sur- 
roundings most favourable for the study of mathe- 
matics are not at all necessarily the same that are 
best suited for music or geography. 

People have learnt that different parts of the phys- 
ical brain may be stimulated by different lights 
and colours that for certain subjects an atmosphere 
slightly charged with electricity is useful, while for 
others it is positively detrimental. In the corner 
of every class-room, therefore, there stands a var- 
iant upon an electrical machine, by means of which 
the surrounding conditions can be changed at will. 

374 



EDUCATION AND THE FAMILY 375 

Some rooms are hung with yellow, decorated ex- 
clusively with yellow flowers, and permeated with 
yellow light. In others, on the contrary, blue, red, 
violet, green or white predominates. Various per- 
fumes are also found to have a stimulating effect, 
and these also are employed according to a regular 
system. 

Perhaps the most important innovation is the 
work of the nature-spirits, who take a keen delight 
in executing the tasks committed to them, and enjoy 
helping and stimulating the children much as 
gardeners might delight in the production of es- 
pecially fine plants. Among other things they take 
up all the appropriate influences of light and col- 
our, sound and electricity, and focus them, and as 
it were spray them upon the children, so that they 
may produce the best possible effect. They are also 
employed by the teachers in individual cases ; if, for 
example, one scholar in a class does not understand 
the point put before him, a nature-spirit is at once 
sent to touch and stimulate a particular centre in 
his brain, and then in a moment he is able to com- 
prehend. All teachers must be clairvoyant ; it is an 
absolute prerequisite for the office. These teachers 
are members of the community men and women in- 
discriminately; Devas frequently materialise for 
special occasions or to give certain lessons, but never 
seem to take the entire responsibility of a school. 

The four great types which are symbolised by the 
Temples are seen to exist here also. The children 
are carefully observed and treated according to the 
results of observation. In most cases they sort 
themselves out at a quite early period into one or 
other of these lines of development, and every op- 



376 MAN: WHENCE. HOW AND WHITHER 

portunity is given to them to select that which they 
prefer. Here again there is nothing of the nature 
of compulsion. Even tiny children are perfectly ac- 
quainted with the object of the community, and fully 
realise that it is their duty and their privilege to 
order their lives accordingly. It must be remember- 
ed that all these people are immediate reincarna- 
tions, and that most of them bring over at least 
some memory of all their past lives, so that for 
them education is simply a process of as rapidly as 
possible getting a new set of vehicles under con- 
trol and recovering as quickly as may be any links 
that may have been lost in the process of transition 
from one physical body to another. 

It does not of course in any way follow that the 
children of a man who is on (let us say) the musical 
line need themselves be musical. As their previous 
births are always known to the parents and school- 
masters, every facility is given to them to develop 
either along the line of their last life or along any 
other which may seem to come most easily to them. 
There is the fullest co-operation between the par- 
ents and schoolmasters* A particular member who 
was noticed took his children to the schoolmaster, 
explained them all to him in detail, and constantly 
visited him to discuss what might be best for them. 
If, for example, the schoolmaster thinks that a cer- 
tain colour is especially desirable for a particular 
pupil he communicates his idea to the parents, and 
much of that colour is put before the child at home 
as well as at school; he is surrounded with it, and 
it is used in his dress and so on. All schools are 
under the direction of the Master K. H., and every 
schoolmaster is personally responsible to Him. 



EDUCATION AND THE FAMILY 377 

TRAINING THE IMAGINATION 

Let me take as an example the practice of a school 
attached to one of the yellow Temples, and see how 
they begin the intellectual development of the lowest 
class. First the master sets before them a little 
shining ball, and they are asked to make an image 
of it in their minds. Some who are quite babies 
can do it really well. The teacher says: 

"You can see my face; now shut your eyes; can 
you see it still? Now look at this ball; can you shut 
your eyes and still see it?" 

The teacher, by the use of his clairvoyant faculty, 
can see whether or not the children are making 
satisfactory images. Those who can do it are set 
to practise day by day, with all sorts of simple forms 
and colours. Then they are asked to suppose that 
point moving, and leaving a track behind it as a 
shooting star does; then to imagine the luminous 
track, that is to say, a line. Then they are asked to 
imagine this line as moving at right angles to it- 
self, every point in it leaving a similar track, and 
thus they mentally construct for themselves a 
square. Then all sorts of permutations and di- 
visions of that square are put before them. It is. 
broken up into triangles of various sorts, and it is 
explained to them that in reality all these things 
are living symbols with a meaning. Even quite the 
babies are taught some of these things. 

"What does the point mean to you?" 

"One." 

"Who is One?" 

"God." 

"Where is He?" 

"He is everywhere." 



378 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

And then presently they learn that two signifies 
the duality of Spirit and matter, that three dots of 
a certain kind and colour mean three aspects of the 
Deity, while three others of a different kind mean 
the soul in man. A later class has also an inter- 
mediate three which obviously mean the Monad. In 
this way, by associating grand ideas with simple ob- 
jects, even tiny little children possess an amount of 
Theosophical information which would seem quite 
surprising to a person accustomed to an older and 
less intelligent educational system. An ingenious 
kind of kindergarten machine was observed, a sort 
of ivory ball at least it looked like ivory which, 
when a spring is touched, opens out into a cross with 
a rose drawn upon it like the Eosicrucian symbol, 
out of which come a number of small balls each of 
which in turn subdivides. By another movement 
it can be made to close again, the mechanism being 
cleverly concealed. This is meant as a symbol to 
illustrate the idea of the One becoming many, and 
of the eventual return of the many into the One. 

MORE ADVANCED CLASSES 

For a later class that luminous square moves 
again at right angles to itself and produces a cube, 
and then still later the cube moves at right angles 
to itself and produces a tesseract, and most of the 
children are able to see it and to make its image 
clearly in their minds. Children who have a genius 
for it are taught to paint pictures, trees and animals 
landscapes and scenes from history, and each child 
is taught to make his picture living. He is taught 
that the concentration of his thought can actually 
alter the physical picture, and the children are 
proud when they can succeed in doing this. Hav- 



EDUCATION AND THE FAMILY 379 

ing painted a picture as well as they can, the 
children concentrate upon it and try to improve it, 
to modify it by their thought. In a week or so, 
working at the concentration for some time each 
day, they are able to produce considerable modifi- 
cations, and a boy of fourteen can, from much prac- 
tice, do it quite rapidly. 

Having modified his picture, the child is taught 
to make a thought-form of it, to look at it, to con- 
template it earnestly, and then to shut his eyes and 
visualise it. He takes, first, ordinary physical pic- 
tures ; then a glass vessel containing a coloured gas 
is given to him, and by the effort of his will he has 
to mould the gas into certain shapes to make it 
take a form by thought to make it become, inside 
its vessel, a sphere, a cube, a tetrahedron or some 
such shape. Many children can do this easily after 
a little practice. Then they are asked to make it 
take the shape of a man, and then that of the picture 
at which they have previously been looking. When 
they can manage this gaseous matter fairly easily 
they try to do it in efcheric, then in astral, and then 
in purely mental matter. The teacher himself 
makes materialisations for them to examine when 
necessary, and in this way they gradually work up- 
ward to more advanced acts of thought-creation. 
All these classes are open to visits from parents and 
friends, and often many older people like to attend 
them and themselves practise the exercises set for 
the children. 

THE SCHOOL SYSTEM 

There is nothing in the nature of the boarding- 
school, and all children live happily at home and 



380 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

attend the school which is most convenient for them. 
In a few cases the Deva-priests are training children 
to take their places; but even in these cases the 
child is not taken away from home, though he is 
usually surrounded by a special protective shell, so 
that the influence which the Deva pours in upon 
him may not be interfered with by other vibrations. 

A child does not belong to a class at all in the 
same way as under older methods; each child has 
a list of numbers for different subjects ; he may be 
in the first class for one subject, in the third for an- 
other, in the fifth for some other. Even for small 
children the arrangement seems to be far less a class 
than a kind of lecture room. In trying to com- 
prehend the system, we must never for a moment 
forget the effect of the immediate reincarnations, 
and that consequently not only are these children 
on the average far more intelligent and developed 
than other children of their age, but also they are 
unequally developed. Some children of four re- 
member more of a previous incarnation, and of 
what they learnt then, than other children of eight 
or nine; and again some children remember a cer- 
tain subject fully and clearly, and yet have almost 
entirely lost their knowledge of some other subjects 
which seem quite as easy. So that we are dealing 
with entirely abnormal conditions, and the schemes 
adopted have to be suited to them. 

At what corresponds to the opening of the school, 
they all stand together and sing something. They 
get four lessons into their morning session, but the 
lessons are short, and there is always an interval 
for play between them. Like all their houses, the 
school-room has no walls, but is supported entirely 



EDUCATION AND THE FAMILY 381 

on pillars, so that practically the whole life of the 
children, as well as of the rest of the community, is 
lived in the open air; but nevertheless the children 
are turned out even from that apology for a room 
after each of the lessons, and left to play about in 
the park which surrounds the school. Girls and 
boys are taught together promiscuously. This 
morning session covers all of what would be called 
the compulsory subjects the subjects which every- 
body learns; there are some extra lessons in the 
afternoon on additional subjects for those who wish 
to take them, but a considerable number of the chil- 
dren are satisfied with the morning work. 

THE CURRICULUM 

The school curriculum is different from that of 
the twentieth century. The very subjects are most- 
ly different, and even those which are the same are 
taught in an entirely different way. Arithmetic, for 
example, has been greatly simplified; there are no 
complex weights and measures of any kind, every- 
thing being arranged on a decimal system ; they cal- 
culate but little, and the detailed working-out of 
long rows of figures would be denounced as insuffer- 
ably tedious. Nothing is taught but what is likely 
to be practically useful to the average person in 
after-life; all the rest is a matter of reference. In 
earlier centuries they had books of logarithms, by 
reference to which long and complicated calcula- 
tions could be avoided ; now they have the same sys- 
tem immensely extende.d, and yet, at the same time, 
much more compressed. It is a scheme by which the 
result of practically any difficult calculation can be 
looked up in a few moments by a person who knows 



382 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

the book. The children know how to calculate, just 
as a man may know how to make his own loga- 
rithms, and yet habitually use a book for them to 
avoid the waste of time in tedious processes involv- 
ing long rows of figures. 

Arithmetic with them is hardly a subject in itself, 
but is taken only as leading up to calculations con- 
nected with the geometry which deals with solid 
figures and the higher dimensions. The whole thing 
is so different from previous ideas that it is not easy 
to describe it clearly. For example, in all the chil- 
dren's sums there is no question of money, and no 
complicated calculation. To understand the sum 
and know how to do it is sufficient. The theory in 
the schoolmaster's mind is not to cram the brains 
of the children, but to develop their faculties and tell 
them where to find facts. Nobody, for example, 
would dream of multiplying a line of six figures by 
another similar line, but would employ either a 
calculating machine (for these are common), or one 
of the books to which I have referred. 

The whole problem of reading and writing is far 
simpler than it used to be, for all spelling is pho- 
netic, and pronunciation cannot be wrong when a 
certain syllable must always have a certain sound. 
The writing has somewhat the appearance of short- 
hand. There is a good deal to learn in it, but at 
the same time, when he has learnt it, the child is in 
possession of a finer and more flexible instrument 
than any of the older languages, since he can write 
at least as fast as any ordinary person can speak. 
There is a large amount of convention about it, and 
a whole sentence is often expressed by a mark like 
a flash of lightning. 



EDUCATION AND THE FAMILY 383 

The language which they are speaking is natural- 
ly English, since the community has arisen in an 
English-speaking country, but it has been modified 
considerably. Many participial forms have disap- 
peared, and some of the words are different. All 
subjects are learnt so differently now. Nobody 
learns any history, except isolated interesting 
stories, but everyone has in his house a book in 
which an epitome of all history can be found. Ge- 
ography is still learnt to a limited extent. They 
know where all the different races live, and with 
great precision in what these races differ, and what 
qualities they are developing. But the commercial 
side has dropped ; no one bothers about the exports 
of Bulgaria; nobody knows where they make wool- 
len cloth, or wants to know. All these things can be 
turned up at a moment's notice in books which are 
part of the free furniture of every house, and it 
would be considered a waste of time to burden the 
memory with such valueless facts. 

The scheme is in every respect strictly utilitarian ; 
they do not teach the children anything which can 
be easily obtained from an encyclopaedia. They 
have developed a scheme of restricting education to 
necessary and valuable knowledge. A boy of twelve 
usually has behind him, in his physical brain, the 
entire memory of what he knew in previous lives. 
It is the custom to carry a talisman over from life 
to life, which helps the child to recover the memory 
in the new vehicles a talisman which he wore in his 
previous birth, so that it is thoroughly loaded with 
the magnetism of that birth and can now stir up 
again the same vibrations. 



384 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

CHILDREN'S SERVICES 

Another interesting educational feature is what 
is called the children's service at the Temple. Many 
others than children attend this, especially those 
who are not yet quite up to the level of the other 
services already described. The children's service 
in the music-Temple is exceedingly beautiful; the 
children perform a series of graceful evolutions, 
and both sing and play upon instruments as they 
march about. That in the colour-Temple is some- 
thing like an especially gorgeous Drury Lane pan- 
tomime, and has evidently been many times careful- 
ly rehearsed. 

In one case they are reproducing the choric dance 
of the priests of Babylon, which represents the 
movement of the planets round the sun. This is 
performed upon an open plain, as it used to be in 
Assyria, and groups of children dress in special col- 
ours (representing the various planets) and move 
harmoniously, so that in their play they have also 
an astronomical lesson. But it must be understood 
that they fully feel that they are engaging in a sac- 
red religious rite, and that to do it well and 
thoroughly will not only be helpful to themselves, 
but that it also constitutes a kind of offering of 
their services to the Deity. They have been told 
that this used to be done in an old religion many 
thousands of years ago. 

The children take great delight in it, and there is 
quite a competition to be chosen to be part of the 
Sun ! Proud parents also look on, and are pleased to 
able to say: "My boy is part of Mercury to-day, " 
and so on. The planets all have their satellites 
more satellites in some cases than used to be known, 



EDUCATION AND THE FAMILY 385 

so that astronomy has evidently progressed. The 
rings of Saturn are remarkably well represented by 
a number of children in constant motion in a figure 
closely resembling the * grand chain' at the com- 
mencement of the fifth figure of the Lancers. An es- 
pecially interesting point is that even the inner 
' crape ' ring of Saturn is represented, for those chil- 
dren who are on the inside of the next ring keep a 
gauzy garment floating out so as to represent it. The 
satellites are single children or pairs of children 
waltzing outside the ring. All the while, though they 
enjoy it immensely, they never forget that they are 
performing a religious function and that they are of- 
fering this to God. Another dance evidently indicates 
the transfer of life from the Moon Chain to the 
Earth Chain. All sorts of instruction is given to 
the children in this way, half a play and half a re- 
ligious ceremony. 

SYMBOLIC DANCES 

There are great festivals which each Temple 
celebrates by special performances of this kind, and 
on these occasions they all do their best in the way 
of gorgeous decoration. The buildings are so ar- 
ranged that the lines are picked out in a kind of 
permanent phosphorescence, not a line of lamps, but 
a glow which seems to come from the substance. The 
lines of the architecture are graceful, and this has 
a splendid effect. The children's service is an ed- 
ucation in colours. The combinations are really 
wonderful, and the drilling of the children is per- 
fect. Great masses of them are dressed identically 
in the most lovely hues, delicate and yet brilliant, 
and they move in and out among one another in 



386 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

the most complicated figures. In their choric dance 
they are taught that they must not only wear the 
colour of the star for spectacular purposes, but 
must also try mentally to make the same colour. 
They are instructed to try to fancy themselves that 
colour, and try to think that they actually are part 
of the planet Mercury or V^onus, as the case may 
be. As they move they sing and play, each planet 
having its own special chords, so that all the planets 
as they go round the sun may produce an imitation 
of the music of the spheres. In these children's 
services also the Devas often take part, and aid 
with the colours and the music. Both kama and 
rupa Devas move quite freely among the people, 
and take part in daily life. 

The children's service in connection with the yel- 
low Temple is exceedingly interesting. Here they 
dance frequently in geometrical figures, but the evo- 
lutions are difficult to describe. One performance, 
for example, is exceedingly pretty and effective. 
Thirty-two boys wearing golden brocaded robes are 
arranged in a certain order, not all standing on the 
eame level, but on raised stages. They evidently 
represent the angles of some solid figure. They 
hold in their hands thick ropes of a golden-coloured 
thread, and they hold these ropes from one to an- 
other so as to indicate the outline of a certain figure 
say a dodecahedron. Suddenly, at a preconcerted 
signal, they drop one end of the rope or throw it 
to another boy, and in a moment the outline has 
changed into that of an icosahedron. This is won- 
derfully effective, and gives quite a remarkable 
illusory effect of changing solid figures one into 
another. All such changes are gone through in a 



EDUCATION AND THE FAMILY 387 

certain order, which is somehow connected with the 
evolution of the matter of the planes at the com- 
mencement of a solar system. Another evolution 
is evidently to illustrate something of the formation 
of atoms out of bubbles. The children represent 
bubbles. A number of them rush out from the cen- 
tre and arrange themselves in a certain way. Then 
they rush back again to the centre and again come 
still further out, and group themselves in quite a 
different way. All this needs much training, but 
the children appear most enthusiastic about it. 

THE UNDERLYING IDEA 

The education and the religion are so closely 
mingled that it is difficult clearly to differentiate one 
from the other. The children are playing in the 
Temple. The underlying idea which is kept before 
them is that all this is only the physical side of 
something far greater and grander, which belongs to 
higher worlds, so that they feel that to everything 
they do there is an inner side, and they hope to 
realise this and to be able to see and comprehend 
it directly; and this is always held before them as 
the final reward of their efforts. 

BIRTH AND DEATH 

The various influences which take such a prom- 
inent part in the education of the children are 
brought to bear upon them even before birth. Once 
more we must reiterate that when a birth is about 
to take place the father and mother and all parties 
concerned are quite aware what ego is to come to 
them, and therefore they take care that for months 
before the actual birth takes place the surroundings 



388 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

shall in every way be suitable to that ego, and such 
as may conduce to a perfect physical body. Great 
stress is laid upon the influence of beautiful sur- 
roundings. The future mother has always before 
her eyes lovely pictures and graceful statues. The 
whole of life is pervaded with this idea of beauty 
so much so that it would be considered a crime 
against the community that any object should be 
ugly or ungraceful. In all architecture this beauty 
of line as well as of colour is the first consideration, 
and the same is true with regard to all the minor 
accessories of life. Even before the child's birth 
preparation will be made for him; his mother dress- 
es chiefly in certain colours, and surrounds her- 
self with flowers and lights of what are considered 
the most appropriate kind. 

Parentage is a mattor of arrangement between 
all parties concerned, and death is usually volun- 
tary. As the members of this community live en- 
tirely healthy lives, and have surrounded them- 
selves with perfect sanitary conditions, disease has 
been practically eliminated, so that except in the 
rare case of an accident no one dies except of old 
age, and they do not drop the body as long as it is 
useful. They do not feel at all that they are giving 
up life, but only that they are changing a worn-out 
vehicle. The absence of worry and unhealthy con- 
ditions has certainly tended on the whole to lengthen 
physical life. Nobody looks at all old until at least 
eighty, and many pass beyond the century. 

When a man begins to find his powers failing 
him, he also begins to look round him for a desir- 
able re-birth. He selects a father and mother whom 
he thinks would suit him, and goes round to call 



EDUCATION AND THE FAMILY 389 

upon them to ask whether they are willing to take 
him. If they are, he tells them that he expects to 
die soon, and then hands over to them his personal 
talisman which he has worn all his life, and also 
sends to them any personal effects which he wishes 
to carry over to his next life. The talisman is usual- 
ly a jewel of the particular type appropriate to the 
ego, according to the sign of the Zodiac to which as 
an ego he belongs, the influence under which he at- 
tained individuality. This charm he always wears, 
so that it may be fully impregnated with his magnet- 
ism, and he is careful to make arrangements that it 
may be handed over to him in his next birth, in 
order to help in the arousing in the new body of 
the memory of past lives, so as to make it easier to 
keep unbroken the realisation of life as an ego. 
This amulet is always correspondent to his name 
as an ego the name which he carries with him from 
life to life. In many cases men are already using 
this name in ordinary life, though in others they 
have perpetuated the name which they bore when 
they entered the community, carrying it on from life 
to life and altering its termination so as to make it 
masculine or feminine according to the sex of the 
moment. Each person has therefore his own name, 
his permanent name, and in addition in each incar- 
nation he takes that of the family into -which he 
happens or chooses to be born. 

The personal effects do not include anything of 
the nature of money, for money is no longer used, 
cind no man has more than a life-interest in houses 
or land, or in other property. But he has some- 
times a few books or ornaments which he wishes to 
preserve, and if so he hands them over to his pro- 



390 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

spective father and mother, who, when they hear 
that his death IR approaching, can hegin to prepare 
for him. He does not alter his ordinary mode of 
life ; he does nothing which in the slightest degree 
resembles committing suicide; but he simply loses 
the will to live lets his life go, as it were and 
generally passes away peacefully in sleep within a 
short period of time. Usually, indeed, he takes up 
his abode with the prospective father and mother as 
soon as the agreement is made, and dies at their 
house. 

There is no funeral ceremony of any sort, as 
death is not regarded as an event of any import- 
ance. The body is not cremated, but is instead 
placed in a kind of retort into which some chemical 
is poured probably a strong acid of some sort. 
The retort is then hermetically sealed, and a power 
resembling electricity, but far stronger, is passed 
through it. The acid fizzes vigorously, and in a few 
minutes the whole body is entirely dissolved. When 
the retort is opened and the process is completed 
there is nothing left but a fine grey powder. This 
is not preserved or regarded with any rever- 
ence. The operation of disposing of the body is 
easily performed at the house, the apparatus being 
brought there when desired. There is no ceremony 
of any kind, and the friends of the deceased do not 
assemble for the occasion. They do, however, come 
round and pay him a visit soon after his rebirth, as 
the sight of them is supposed to help to reawaken 
the memory in the new baby body. Under these 
circumstances there are of course no prayers or 
ceremonies of any kind for the dead, nor is there 
any need of help upon the astral plane, for every 



EDUCATION AND TEE FAMILY 391 

member of the community remembers his past lives 
and knows perfectly well the body which he is about 
to take as soon as it can be prepared for him. Many 
members of the community continue tb act as in- 
visible helpers to the rest of the world, but within 
the community itself nothing of that kind is neces- 
sary. 

The Manu has a careful record kept of all the 
successive incarnations of each of the members of 
His community, and in some rare cases He interferes 
with an ego's choice of his parents. As a general 
rule all the members of the community have already 
disposed of such grosser karma as would limit 
them in their choice, and they also know enough of 
their own type and of the conditions which they re- 
quire not to make an unsuitable selection, so that in 
almost every case they are left perfectly free to 
make their own arrangements. The matter is, how- 
ever, always within the knowledge of the Manu, 
so that He may alter the plan if He does not ap- 
prove. 

As a rule the dying man is at liberty to select the 
sex of his next birth, and many people seem to 
make a practice of taking birth alternately as man 
and as woman. There is no actual regulation as to 
this, and everything is left as free as possible; but 
at the same time the due proportion of the sexes in 
the community must be maintained, and if the num- 
ber of either sex falls temporarily below what it 
should be, the Manu calls for volunteers to bring 
things once more into harmony. Parents usually 
arrange to have ten or twelve children in the family, 
and generally the same number of girls as boys. 
Twins, and even triplets, are not at all uncommon. 



392 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

Between the birth of one child and the next there is 
mostly an interval of two or three years, and there 
are evidently theories with regard to this matter. 
The great object is to produce perfect children, and 
no cripples or deformed persons are to be seen, nor 
is there any infant mortality. It is manifest that 
the labour of child-birth has diminished almost to 
vanishing-point; indeed, there seems to be scarcely 
any trouble, except perhaps a little with the first 
child. 

MARRIAGE 

This brings us to the question of marriage. There 
is no restriction placed upon this, except the one 
great restriction that no one must marry outside 
the community; but it is generally regarded as 
rather undesirable that people of the same type of 
religious feeling should inter-marry. There is no 
rule against it, but it is understood that on the whole 
the Manu prefers that it should not take place. 
There is a certain all-sufficing expression which 
practically puts any matter beyond the limits of 
discussion: "It is not His wish." 

People choose their own partners for life fall in 
love, in fact much as they used to do, but the 
dominant idea of duty is always supreme, and even 
in matters of the heart no one permits himself to 
do anything or feel anything which he does not think 
to be for the best for the community. The great 
motive is not passion, but duty. The ordinary sex 
passions have been dominated, so that people now 
unite themselves definitely with a view to carrying 
on the community and to creating good bodies for 
the purpose. They regard married life chiefly as 
an opportunity to that end f and what is necessary 



EDUCATION AND THE FAMILY 393 

for such production is a religious and magical ac- 
tion which needs to be carefully directed. It forms 
part of the sacrifice of themselves to the LOGOS, so 
that no one must lose his balance or his reason in 
connection with it. 

When people fall in love, and, as we should say, 
engage themselves, they go to the Manu Himself 
and ask Him for a benediction on their union. Usu- 
ally they also arrange with a prospective son or 
daughter, so that when they go to the Manu they 
say that such and such a man wishes to be born from 
them, and ask that they may be permitted to mar- 
ry. The Manu examines them to see whether they 
will suit each other, and if He approves He pro- 
nounces for them a formula: "Your life together 
shall be blessed." Marriage is regarded almost en- 
tirely from the point of view of the prospective off- 
spring. Sometimes it is even arranged by them. 
One man will call on another and say : 

"I am expecting to die in a few weeks, and I 
should like to have you and Miss X. for my father 
and mother, as I have some karmic ties with both 
of you that I should like to work off ; wo^ild that be 
agreeable to you!" 

Not infrequently the suggestion seems to be ac- 
cepted, and the plan works out well. One man, who 
was taken at random for the purpose of investiga- 
tion, was found to have three egos desiring to in- 
carnate through him, so that when he took his pro- 
spective wife to the Manu he asked: 

"May we two marry, with these three egos wait- 
ing to take birth through us!" 

And the Manu gave His consent. There is no 
other marriage ceremony than this benediction given 



394 MAN; WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

by the Manu, nor is a wedding made the occasion of 
feasting or the giving of presents. There is noth- 
ing in the nature of a marriage contract. The ar- 
rangements are exclusively monogamous, and there 
is no such thing as divorce, though the agreement 
is always terminable by mutual consent. People 
marry distinctly with a view of furnishing a vehicle 
for a certain soul, and when that is safely done it 
seems to be entirely at their option whether they 
renew their agreement or not. Since the parents 
are selected with care, in the majority of cases the 
agreement is renewed, and they remain as husband 
and wife for life ; but there are cases in which the 
agreement is terminated, and both parties form 
other alliances. Here also, as in everything else, 
duty is the one ruling factor, and everyone is al- 
ways ready to yield his personal preference to what 
is thought to be best for the community as a whole. 
There is therefore far less of passion in these lives 
than in those of the older centuries ; and the strong- 
est affection is probably that between parents and 
children. 

There are cases in which the unwritten rule as to 
not marrying a person of the same type is abrogat- 
ed, as, for example, when it is desired to produce 
children who can be trained by the Devas as priests 
for a particular Temple. In the rare case where a 
man is killed by some accident, he is at once im- 
pounded in the astral body and arrangements are 
made for his re-birth. Large numbers of people 
desire to be born as children of the members of the 
Council; those, however, have only the usual num- 
ber of children, lest the quality should be deteriorat- 
ed. Birth in the family of the Manu Himself is the 



EDUCATION AND THE FAMILY 395 

greatest of all honours; but of course He selects 
His children Himself. There is no difference of 
status between the sexes, and they take up indif- 
ferently any work that is to be done. On this mat- 
ter it may be interesting to record the opinion of 
a mind of that period which was examined for that 
special purpose. This man does not seem to think 
much of the difference between man and woman. He 
says that there must be both, in order that the Race 
may be founded, but that we know there is a better- 
time coming for the women. He feels that in bearing 
children the women are taking a harder share of the 
work, and are therefore to be pitied and protected. 
The Council, however, is composed entirely of men, 
and, under the direction of the Manu, its members 
are making experiments in the creation of mind-born 
bodies. They have produced some respectable copies 
of humanity, but have not yet succeeded in satisfy- 
ing the Manu. 



CHAPTER XXVI 

BUILDINGS AND CUSTOMS 

RACIAL CHARACTERISTICS 

IN appearance the community is still like the sixth 
sub-race from which it sprang that is to say, it 
is a white Race, although there are among it people 
with darker hair and eyes and a Spanish or Italian 
complexion. The stature of the Race has distinctly 
increased, for none of the men are under six feet, 
and even the women are but little short of this. The 
people are all muscular and well-proportioned, and 
much attention is paid to exercise and the equal de- 
velopment of the muscles. It is noteworthy that 
they preserve a free and graceful carriage even to 
extreme old age. 

PUBLIC BUILDINGS 

It was mentioned in the beginning that when the 
community was founded a vast block of central 
buildings was erected, and that the houses of the 
first settlers were grouped round that, though al- 
ways with ample space between them for beautiful 
gardens. By this time many subordinate towns have 
sprung up in the district though perhaps the word 
town may mislead a twentieth-century reader, since 

396 



BUILDINGS AND CUSTOMS 397 

there is nothing in the least resembling the sort of 
town to which he is accustomed. The settlements 
may rather be called groups of villas thinly scatter- 
ed amidst lovely parks and gardens ; but at least all 
such settlements have their Temples, so that every 
inhabitant is always within easy reach of a Temple 
of the variety which he happens to prefer. The in- 
habited part of the estate is not of great size, some 
forty or fifty miles in diameter, so that even the 
great central buildings are, after all, quite easily 
available for anyone who wishes to visit them. Each 
Temple has usually in its neighbourhood a block of 
other public buildings a sort of public hall, an ex- 
tensive library, and also a set of school-buildings. 

HOUSES 

The houses built for the community before its 
foundation were all on the same general plan and, 
though a good deal of individual taste has been 
shown in those erected since, the broad principle is 
still the same. The two great features of their ar- 
chitecture which much differentiate it from almost 
all that preceded it, are the absence of , walls and of 
corners. Houses, temples, schools, factories, all of 
them are nothing but roofs supported upon pillars 
pillars in most cases as lofty as those of the Egyp- 
tian Temples, though far lighter and more graceful. 
There is, however, provision for closing the spaces 
between the pillars when necessary something dis- 
tantly resembling the patent automatic rolling shop- 
blinds of earlier centuries, but they can be made 
transparent at will. These devices, however, are 
rarely employed, and the whole of the life of the 
people, night and day, is in reality spent in the open 
air. 



398 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

Domes of many shapes and sizes are prominent 
features. Some of them are of the shape of that of 
S. Peter's, though smaller; some are low and broad, 
like those of San Giovanni degli Eremiti, in Paler- 
mo; some with the lotus-bud shape of those of a 
Muhammadan mosque. These domes are full of 
windows, or are often themselves built of some trans- 
parent substance of various colours. Every Temple 
has a great central dome, and every house has one 
at least. The general scheme of the house is to 
have a sort of great circular or oval hall under the 
dome, which is the general living room. Fully 
three-fourths of its circumference is quite open, but 
behind the fourth part are often built rooms and 
offices of various kinds, which usually rise to only 
half the height of the columns, having above them 
other small rooms which are used as bedrooms. All 
those rooms, though separated from one another by 
partitions, have no outside walls, so that in them 
also people are still practically in the open air. 
There are no corners anywhere, every room being 
circular or oval. There is always some part of the 
roof upon which it is possible to walk. Every house 
is full of flowers and statues, and another striking 
feature is the abundance of water everywhere ; there 
are fountains, artificial cascades, miniature lakes 
and pools in all directions. 

The houses are always lighted from the roof. 
No lamps or lanterns are seen, but the dome is made 
to glow out in a mass of light, the colour of which 
can be changed at will, and in the smaller rooms a 
section of the ceiling is arranged to glow in the same 
way. All the parks and streets are thoroughly 
lighted at night with a soft and moonlike but pen- 



BUILDINGS AND CUSTOMS 399 

etrating light a far nearer approach to daylight 
than anything previously secured. 

FURNISHING 

Furniture is principally conspicuous by its ab- 
sence. There are scarcely any chairs in the houses, 
and there are no seats of any sort in the Temples 
or public halls. The people recline upon cushions 
somewhat in the oriental style, or rather perhaps 
like the ancient Romans, for they do not sit cross- 
legged. The cushions, however, are curious; they 
are always either air-cushions or entirely vegetable 
products stuffed with some especially soft fibrous 
material, not altogether unlike cocoanut fibre. These 
things are washable, and indeed are constantly being 
washed. When going to the Temple, to the library 
or to any public meeting each person usually carries 
his own air-cushion with him, but in the houses large 
numbers are seen lying about which may be used 
by anybody. There are small low tables or per- 
haps they are rather to be described as book-restw, 
which can be so arranged as to be flat like a table. 
All the floors are of marble, or of stone polished 
like marble often a rich crimson hue. Beds, filled 
either with air or water, or made of the same vege- 
table material as that used for the cushions, are 
laid upon the floor, or sometimes suspended like 
hammocks, but no bedsteads are used. In the few 
cases where there are comparatively permanent 
walls, as for example between the bed-rooms and 
offices and the great hall, they are always beauti- 
fully painted with landscapes and historic scenes. 
Curiously, all these things are interchangeable, and 
there is a department which is always prepared to 



400 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

arrange exchanges a kind of circulating library 
for decorations, through the medium of which any 
person can change the wall-panels or statues which 
decorate his house, whenever he wishes to do so. 

DRESS 

The dress of the people is simple and graceful, 
but at the same time strictly utilitarian. Most of 
it is not unlike that of India, though we sometimes 
see an approach to the ancient Greek dress. There 
is no uniformity about it, and people wear all sorts 
of different things. But there is nothing inharmon- 
ious; all is in perfect taste. Colours both brilliant 
and delicate are worn by both men and women alike, 
for there seems to be no distinction between the 
clothing of the sexes. Not a single article is made 
of wool ; it is never worn. The substance employed 
is exclusively linen or cotton, but it is steeped in 
some chemical which preserves its fibres so that the 
garments last for a long time, even though all are 
washed daily. The chemical process imparts a glos- 
sy satin-like surface, but does not interfere in the 
least with the softness or flexibility of the material. 
No shoes or sandals or any other foot-coverings are 
worn by the members of the community, and scarcely 
any people wear hats, though there are a few some- 
thing like the panama, and one or two small linen 
caps were seen. The idea of distinctive clothes for 
certain offices has disappeared; no uniforms of any 
sort are worn, except that the officiating Deva al- 
ways materialises round himself robes of the colour 
of his Temple, while conducting a service; and the 
children, as before described, dress themselves in 
certain colours when they are about to take part in 
the religious festivals. 



BUILDINGS AND CUSTOMS 401 

FOOD 

The community is entirely vegetarian, because it 
is one of the standing rules that nothing must be 
killed. Even the outer world is by this time 
largely vegetarian, because it has begun to be rec- 
ognised that the eating of flesh is coarse, vulgar, 
and above all unfashionable! Comparatively few 
people take the trouble of preparing their own 
meals, or eat in their own houses, though they are 
perfectly free to do so if they wish. Most go to what 
may be called restaurants, although, as they are 
practically entirely in the open air, they may be 
supposed rather to resemble tea-gardens. Fruit 
enters largely into the diet of the period. We have 
a bewildering variety of fruits, and centuries of 
care have been devoted to scientific crossing of 
fruits, so as to produce the most perfect forms of 
nourishment and to give them at the same time re- 
markable flavours. 

If we look in at a fruit-farm we see that the sec- 
tion devoted to each kind of fruit is always divided 
into smaller sections, and each section is labelled as 
having a particular flavour. We may have, for ex- 
ample, grapes or apples, let us say, with a straw- 
berry flavour, a clove flavour, a vanilla flavour, and 
so on mixtures which would seem curious from the 
point of view of those who are not accustomed to 
them. This is a country where there is almost no 
rain, so that all cultivation is managed by means 
of irrigation, and as they irrigate these different 
sections they throw into the water what is called 
4 plant-food' and by variations in this they succeed in 
imparting different flavours. By varying the food, 



402 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

growth can be intensified or retarded, and the size 
of the fruits can also be regulated. The estate of 
the community runs up into the hills, so they have 
the opportunity at different levels of cultivating al- 
most all possible kinds of fruit. 

The food which is most eaten is a sort of sub- 
stance somewhat resembling blanc-mange. It is to 
be had in all kinds of colourings, and the colouring 
indicates the flavour, just as it used to do in ancient 
Peru. There is a large selection. Perhaps the 
choice of different flavours in the food may to some 
extent take the place of many habits which have 
now disappeared, such as smoking, wine-drinking, 
or the eating of sweets. There is also a substance 
which looks like cheese, but is sweet. It is certain- 
ly not cheese, for no animal products are used, and 
no animals are kept in the colony except as pets. 
Milk is used, but it is exclusively the vegetable milk 
obtained from what is sometimes called the cow- 
tree, or an exact imitation made from some kind of 
bean. Knives and forks do not appear, but spoons 
are still used, and most people bring their own with 
them. The attendant has a sort of weapon like a 
hatchet with which he opens fruits and nuts. It is 
made of an alloy which has all the qualities of gold 
but has a hard edge, which apparently does not need 
resharpening. It is possibly made of one of the 
rarer metals, such as iridium. In these restaurant 
gardens also there are no chairs, but each person 
half -reclines in a marble depression in the ground, 
and there is a marble slab which can be turned 
round in front of him so that he can put his food 
upon it, and when he has finished he turns this up 
and water flows over it. 



BUILDINGS AND CUSTOMS 403 

On the whole people eat distinctly less than in the 
twentieth century. The usual custom is to have one 
regular meal in the middle of the day, and to take 
a light refection of fruit in the morning and even- 
ing. Everybody is at breakfast just after sunrise, 
for people are always up then or a little before. 
The light evening meal is at about five o'clock, for 
most people go to bed fairly early. So far as has 
been seen, no one sits down to a heavy meal in the 
evening; but there is complete individual freedom 
with regard to all these matters, so that people fol- 
low their own taste. The drinking of tea or cof- 
fee has not been observed ; indeed there seems to be 
but little drinking of any sort, possibly because so 
much fruit is eaten. 

Plenty of water is available everywhere, even 
though there is almost no rain. They have enor- 
mous works for the distillation of sea-water, which 
is raised to a great height and then sent out on a 
most liberal scale. It is worthy of note, however, 
that the water specially sent out for drinking is not 
the pure result of the distillation, but they add to it 
a small proportion of certain chemicals the theory 
being that pure distilled water is not the most 
healthy for drinking purposes. The manager of the 
distillation-works explains that they use natural 
spring water as far as it will go, but they cannot 
get nearly enough of it, and so it has to be supple- 
mented by the distilled water; but then it is neces- 
sary to add the chemicals to this in order to make 
it fresh and sparkling and really thirst-quenching. 

LIBRAKIES 
The literary arrangements are curious but perfect. 



404 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

Every house is provided, gratis and as part of its 
permanent fittings, with a sort of encyclopaedia of 
the most comprehensive nature, containing an epi- 
tome of practically all that is known, put as tersely 
as possible and yet with great wealth of detail, so 
as to contain all the information that an ordinary 
man is ever likely to want on any subject. If, how- 
ever, for some reason he needs to know more, he has 
only to go to the nearest district-library, of which 
there is one connected with each Temple. There he 
finds a far fuller encyclopaedia, in which the article 
on any given subject contains a careful epitome of 
every book that has ever been written upon it a 
most colossal work. If he wants to know still more, 
or if he wants to consult original books printed in 
the old languages or the ancient Eoman type now 
disused, he has to go to the central library of the 
community, which is on a scale commensurate with 
that of the British Museum. Translations into the 
English of the day printed in this shorthand-like 
script, are always appended to these originals. 

Thus it is possible for a man to study to the fullest 
any subject in which he is interested, for all in- 
struments of research and books are provided free in 
this way. New books are being written all the time 
on all conceivable subjects. The fiction of the day 
is almost entirely based upon reincarnation, the 
characters always passing from life to life and ex- 
emplifying the working of karma; but a novelist in 
these days writes not with a view to fame or money, 
but always to the good of the community. Some 
people are writing short articles, and these are al- 
ways on view at their own district Temple hall. Any- 
one may go and read them there, and anyone who 



BUILDINOS AND CUSTOMS 405 

is interested has only to go and ask for a copy and 
it is giver to him. If a man is writing a book it 
is exhibited in this way, chapter by chapter; the 
whole life is in this way communal ; the people share 
with their neighbours what they are doing while 
they are doing it. 

NEWSPAPERS 

The daily newspaper has disappeared or per- 
haps we may rather say that it survives in a much 
amended form. To make it comprehensible it must 
be premised that in each house there is a machine 
which is a kind of combination of a telephone and 
recording tape-machine. This is in connection with 
a central office in the capital city, and is so arranged 
that not only can one speak through it as through 
a telephone, but that anything written or drawn 
upon a specially prepared plate and put into the 
box of the large machine at the central office will re- 
produce itself automatically upon slips which fall 
into the box of the machine in each of the houses. 
What takes the place of the morning newspaper is 
managed in this way. It may be said that each 
person has his newspaper printed in his own house. 
When any news of importance arrives at any time 
it is instantly forwarded in this way to every house 
in the community; but a special collection of such 
news is sent early each morning and is commonly 
called the Community Breakfast Chat. It is a com- 
paratively small affair and has a certain resem- 
blance to a table of contents and an index, for it gives 
the briefest epitome of the news, but attaches a num- 
ber to each item, the different departments being 
printed upon different colours. If any person wants 



406 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

full information as to any of the items, he has only 
to ring up the central office and ask for details of 
number so-and-so, and all that is available is at 
once sent along his wire and dropped before him. 
But the newspaper differs greatly from those of old- 
er times. There is hardly any political news, for 
even the outer world has changed in many ways. 
There is a great deal of information upon scientific 
subjects, and as to new theories. There are still 
notes of the private doings of royal people, but 
they are quite brief. There is a department for 
community news, but even that is chiefly concerned 
with scientific papers, inventions and discoveries, 
although it also records marriages and births. 

The same instrument is also used for adding to 
the household encyclopaedias whenever it is neces- 
sary. Extra slips are sent out daily whenever there 
is anything to say, so that just as the newpaper is 
being delivered in slices all day, so now and then 
come little slips to be added to the various depart- 
ments of the encyclopaedia. 

PUBLIC MEETINGS 

In connection with each Temple there is a defin- 
ite scheme of educational buildings, so that broadly 
speaking the school-work of each district is done 
under the aegis of its Temple. The great central 
Temple has in connection with it the huge open- 
air places of assembly, where, when necessary, al- 
most the entire community can be gathered together. 
More usually, when the Manu desires to promulgate 
some edict or information to .all His people He Him- 
self speaks in the great central Temple, and what 
He says is simultaneously produced by a sort of 



BUILDINGS AND CUSTOMS 407 

altogether improved phonographic system in all the 
other Temples. It would seem that each of the dis- 
trict Temples has a sort of representative phono- 
graph in the central Temple, which records at the 
other end of the line all that takes place there, so 
that all particulars are in this way immediately re- 
produced. 

SCIENCE DEPARTMENTS 

Mention has already been made of the great cen- 
tral library in connection with the central Temple. 
In addition to that, as another part of the same 
great mass of buildings, there is a complete and 
well-appointed museum, and also what may be call- 
ed a university. Mary branches of study are taken 
up here, but they are pursued by methods different 
from those of old. The study of animals and plants, 
for example, is entirely and only done by means of 
clairvoyance, and never by destruction of any kind, 
only those being professors and students of these 
arts who have developed sufficient sight to work in 
this manner. There is a department of what we 
may call physical geography, which has already 
mapped out the entire earth in a vast number of 
large-scale models, which show by coloured signs 
and inscriptions not only the nature of the surface 
soil, but also what is to be found in the way of miner- 
als and fossils down to a considerable depth. 

There is also an elaborate ethnographical depart- 
ment in which there are life-size statues of all races 
of men which have ever existed on the earth, and 
also models of those existing on other planets of this 
chain. There is even a department with reference to 
the other chains of the solar system. For each of 



408 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

the statues there is an exhaustive description with 
diagrams showing in what way his higher vehicles 
differ* The whole is tabulated and arranged from 
the point of view of the Manu, to show what the 
development of mankind has been in the various 
Races and sub-races. A good deal is also shown of 
the future, and models with detailed explanations 
are given for them also. In addition to this there 
is also the anatomical department, dealing with the 
whole detailed anatomy of the human and animal 
bodies in the past, the present and the future. There 
is not exactly any medical department, for illness 
no longer exists: it has been eliminated. There is 
still, however, surgery for cases of accident, though 
even that has been much improved. Few profes- 
sors of that art are needed, for naturally accidents 
are rare. There is nothing corresponding to the 
great hospitals of former times, but only a few light 
and airy rooms, in which the victims of accidents 
can be temporarily laid if necessary. 

Connected with the centre of learning is also an 
elaborate museum of all sorts of arts and crafts 
which have existed in the world from the beginning 
onwards. There are also models of all kinds of 
machinery, most of which is new to us, since it has 
been invented between the twentieth century and the 
twenty-eighth. There is also much Atlantean ma- 
chinery, which had long been forgotten, so that there 
is a complete arrangement for any kind of study 
along these lines. 

History is still being written, and it has been 
in process of production for more than a hundred 
years ; but it is being written from a reading of the 



BUILDINGS AND CUSTOMS 409 

records. It is illustrated by a method which is quite 
new to us a method which precipitates a scene 
from the records when it is considered important. 
We have in addition a series of models illustrating 
the history of the world at all periods. In the 
central library there are certain small rooms some- 
what like telephone- cabinets, into which students 
can take the record of any prominent event in 
history, and by putting it into a machine and setting 
that in motion they can have the whole scene re- 
produced audibly and visibly, with the exact pre- 
sentment of the appearance of the actors, and their 
words in the very tones in which they were spoken. 

There is also an astronomical department, with 
most interesting machinery indicating the exact posi- 
tion at any moment of everything visible in the 
sky. There is a great mass of information about 
all these worlds. There are two departments, one 
for direct observation by various means and an- 
other for the tabulation of information acquired by 
testimony. Miich of this information has been given 
by Devas connected with various planets and stars ; 
but this is always kept entirely apart from the re- 
sults of direct observation. Chemistry has been car- 
ried to a wonderful height and depth. All possible 
combinations are now fully understood, and the 
science has an extension in connection with ele- 
mental essence, which leads on to the whole ques- 
tion of nature-spirits and Devas as a definite de- 
partment of science, studied with illustrative models. 
There is also a department of talismans, so that any 
sensitive person can by psychometry go behind the 
mere models, and see the things in themselves. 



410 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

ABTS 

It does not seem that lecturing holds at all a 
prominent place. Sometimes a man who ig studying 
a subject may talk to a few friends about it, but be- 
yond that, if he has anything to say he submits it 
to the officials and it gets into the daily news. If 
anybody writes poetry or an essay he communicates 
it to his own family, and perhaps puts it up in the 
district hall. People still paint, but only as a kind 
of recreation. No one now devotes the whole of his 
time to that. Art, however, permeates life to a far 
greater extent than ever before, for everything, 
even the simplest object for daily use, is artistically 
made, and the people put something of themselves 
into their work and are always trying new experi- 
ments. 

There is nothing corresponding to a theatre, and 
on bringing the idea to the notice of an inhabitant, 
a definition of it comes into his mind as a place in 
which people used to run about and declaim, pre- 
tending to be other than they were, and taking the 
Jparts of great people. They consider it as ar- 
chaic and childish. The great choric dances and pro- 
cessions may be considered as theatrical, but to them 
these appear as religious exercises. 

Games and athletics are prominent in this new 
life. There are gymnasiums, and much attention is 
given to physical development in women as well as 
in men. A game much like lawn-tennis is one of the 
principal favourites. The children play about just 
as of old, and enjoy great freedom. 

WILL-POWEB 

The force of will is universally recognised in the 



BUILDINGS AND CUSTOMS 411 

community and many things are performed by its 
direct action. Nature-spirits are well-known, and 
take a prominent part in the daily life of the people, 
most of whom can see them. Almost all children 
are able to see them and to use them in various 
ways, but they often lose some of this power as 
they grow up. The use of such methods, and also 
of telepathy, is a kind of game among the children, 
and the grown-up people recognise their superiority 
in this respect, so that if they want to convey a 
message to some friend at a distance they often call 
the nearest child and ask him to send it rather than 
attempt to do it themselves. He can send the mes- 
sage telepathically to some child at the other end, 
who then immediately conveys it to the person for 
whom it is intended, and this is a quite reliable and 
usual method of communication. Adults often lose 
the power at the time of their marriage, but some 
few of them retain it, though it needs a far greater 
effort for them than it does for the child. 

ECONOMIC CONDITIONS 

Some effort was made to comprehend the economic 
conditions of the colony, but it was not found easy 
to understand them. The community is self-sup- 
porting, making for itself everything which it needs. 
The only importations from outside are curiosities 
such as ancient manuscripts, books and objects of 
art. These are always paid for by the officials of 
the community, who have a certain amount of the 
money of the outside world, which has been brought 
in by tourists or visitors. Also they have learnt the 
secret of making gold and jewels of various kinds 
by alchemical means, and these are often used for 



412 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

payment for the few goods imported from the out- 
side. If a private member wishes for something 
which can only be bought from the outer world, he 
gives notice of his desire to the nearest official, and 
work of some sort is assigned to him in addition to 
the daily work which he is normally doing, so that 
by that he may earn the value of whatever he de- 
sires. 

Everybody undertakes some work for the good of 
the community, but it is usually left entirely to each 
to choose what it is to be. No one kind of work is 
esteemed nobler than any other kind and there is 
no idea of caste of any sort. The child at a certain 
age chooses what he will do, and it is always open 
to him to change from one kind of work to another 
by giving due notice. Education is free, but the free 
tuition of the central university is given only to 
those who have already shown themselves specially 
proficient in the branches which they wish to pursue. 
Food and clothing are given freely to all or rather, 
to each person is distributed periodically a number 
of tokens in exchange for one of which he can ob- 
tain a meal at any of the great restaurant-gardens 
anywhere all over the colony. Or if he prefers it he 
can go to certain great stores and there obtain food- 
materials, which he can take home and prepare as 
he wishes. The arrangement appears complicated 
to an outsider, but it works perfectly simply among 
those who thoroughly understand it. 

All the people are working for the community, 
and among the work done is the production of food 
and clothing, which it then proceeds to hand round. 
Take, for example, the case of a cloth factory. It is 
the Government's factory, and it is turning out on 



BUILDINGS AND CUSTOMS 413 

an average so much cloth, but the output can be in- 
creased or decreased at will. The work is chiefly in 
the hands of girls, who join the factory voluntarily ; 
indeed, there is a competition to get in, for only a 
certain number are needed. If things are not want- 
ed they are not made. If cloth is wanted the factory 
is there to produce it; if not, it simply waits. The 
superintendent in charge of the cloth-store of the 
Government calculates that in a certain time he will 
need so much cloth, that he has in stock so much, 
and therefore requires for renewal so much, and 
he asks for it accordingly ; if he does not want any, 
he says he has enough. The factory never closes, 
though the hours vary considerably. 

In this cloth factory the workers are mostly wo- 
men, quite young, and they are doing little but 
superintending certain machines and seeing that 
they do not go wrong. Each of them is managing a 
kind of loom into which she has put a number of 
patterns. Imagine something like a large clock-face 
with a number of movable studs on it. When a girl 
fctarts her machine she arranges these studs ac- 
cording to her own ideas, and as the machine goes 
on its movements produce a certain design. She 
can set it to turn out fifty cloths, each of different 
pattern, and then leave it. Each girl sets her 
machine differently that is where their art comes 
in ; every piece is different from every other piece, 
unless she allows the machine to run through its list 
over again after it has finished the fifty. In the 
meantime, after having started the machines the 
girls need only to glance at them occasionally, and 
the machinery is so perfect that practically nothing 
ever goes wrong with it. It is arranged to run al- 



414 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

most silently, so that while they are waiting one of 
the girls reads from a book to the rest. 

THE NEW POWER 

One feature which makes an enormous difference 
is the way in which power is supplied. There are 
no longer any fires anywhere, and therefore no heat, 
no grime, no smoke, and hardly any dust. The whole 
world has evolved by this time beyond the use of 
steam, or any other form of power which needs heat 
to generate it. There seems to have been an inter- 
mediate period when some method was discovered 
of transferring electrical power without loss for 
enormous distances, and at that time all the available 
water-power of the earth was collected and syn- 
dicated ; falls in Central Africa and in all sorts of 
out-of-the-way places were made to contribute their 
share, and all this was gathered together at great 
central stations and internationally distributed. 
Tremendous as was the power available in that way, 
it has now been altogether transcended, and all that 
elaborate arrangement has been rendered useless 
by the discovery of the best method to utilise what 
the late Mr. Keely called dynaspheric force the 
force concealed in every atom of physical matter. 

It will be remembered that as long ago as 1907, 
3ir Oliver Lodge remarked that "the total output 
>f a million-kilowatt station for thirty million years 
exists permanently and at present inaccessibly in 
rvery cubic millimetre of space ". (Philosophical 
Magazine, April, 1907, p. 493.) At the period which 
ve are now describing, this power is no longer in- 
iccessible, and consequently unlimited power is sup- 
)lied free to everyone all over the world. It is on 



BUILDINGS AND CUSTOMS 415 

tap, like gas or water, in every house and every 
factory in this community, as well as everywhere 
else where it is needed, and it can be utilised for 
all possible purposes to which power can be turned. 
Every kind of work all over the world is now done 
in this way. Heating and lighting are simply mani- 
festations of it. For example, whenever heat is re- 
quired, no one in any civilised country dreams of 
going through the clumsy and wasteful process of 
lighting a fire. He simply turns on the force and, 
by a tiny little instrument which can be carried in 
the pocket, converts it into heat at exactly the point 
required. A temperature of many thousands of de- 
grees can be produced instantly wherever needed, 
even in an area as small as a pin's head. 

By this power all the machines are running in the 
factory which we inspected, and one result of this is 
that all the workers emerge at the end of the day 
without having even soiled their hands. Another 
consequence is that the factory is no longer the ugly 
and barren horror to which in earlier ages we were 
painfully accustomed. It is beautifully decorated 
all the pillars are carved and wreathed with intricate 
ornament, and there are statues standing all about, 
white and rose and purple the last being made of 
porphyry beautifully polished. Like all the rest of 
the buildings, the factory has no walls, but only 
pillars. The girls wear flowers in their hair, and 
indeed flowers plentifully decorate the factory in all 
directions. It is quite as beautiful architecturally 
as a private house. 

CONDITIONS OF WOKK 
A visitor who calls to look over the factory ofclig- 



416 MAN: WHENCE. HOW AND WHITHER 

ingly asks some questions from the manageress 
a young girl with black hair and a gorgeous* garland 
of scarlet flowers in it. The latter replies : 

"Oh, we are told how much we are to do. The 
manager of the community cloth-stores considers 
that he will want so many cloths by such a time. 
Sometimes few are wanted, sometimes many, but al- 
ways some, and we work accordingly. I tell my girls 
to come to-morrow according to this demand for 
one hour, or two, or four according to what there 
is to do. Usually about three hours is a fair average 
day's work, but they have worked as long as five 
hours a day when there was a great festival ap- 
proaching. Oh, no, not so much because new clothes 
were required for the festival, but because the girls 
themselves wanted to be entirely free from work for 
a week, in order to attend the festival. You see we 
always know beforehand how much we are expected 
to turn out in a given week or month, and we cal- 
culate that we can do it by working, say, two and 
a half hours each day. But if the girls want a 
week's holiday for a festival, we can compress two 
weeks' work into one by working five hours a day 
for that week, and then we can close altogether dur- 
ing the next one, and yet deliver the appointed 
amount of cloth at the proper time. Of course, we 
rarely work as much as five hours ; we should more 
usually spread the work of the holiday-week over 
some three previous weeks, so that an hour extra 
each day would provide all that is needed. An in- 
dividual girl frequently wants such a holiday, and 
she can always arrange it by asking some one to come 
and act as a substitute for her, or the other girls will 
gladly work a few minutes longer so as to make up 



BUILDINGS AND CUSTOMS 417 

fo the amount which she would have done. They 
are all good friends and thoroughly happy. When 
they take a holiday they generally go in to visit the 
central library or cathedral, to do which comfortably 
they need a whole day free." 

A visitor from the outside world wonders that 
anyone should work at all where there is no com- 
pulsion, and asks why people do so, but meets with 
little sympathy or comprehension from the inhabit- 
ants: 

"What do you mean!" says one of them, in an- 
swer, "we are here to work. If there is work to do, 
it is done for His sake. If there is no work, it is 
a calamity that it happens so, but He knows best." 

"It is another world." exclaims the visitor. 

"But what other world is possible!" asks the be- 
wildered colonist; "for what does man exist!" 

The visitor gives up the point in despair, and asks : 

"But who tells you to work, and when and 
where!" 

"Every child reaches a certain stage," replies the 
colonist. "He has been carefully watched by teachers 
and otherg!fo see in what direction his strength 
moves most easily. Then he chooses accordingly, 
perfectly freely, but with the advice of others to 
help him. You say work must begin at this time 
or at that time, but that is a matter of agreement 
between the workers, and of arrangement each day." 

There is a certain difficulty in following this con- 
versation, for though the language is the same a 
good many new words have been introduced, and the 
grammar has been much modified. There is, for ex- 
ample, a common-gender pronoun, which signifies 
either 'he' or 'she'. It is probable that the invention 



418 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

of this has become a necessity because of the fact 
that people remember and frequently have to speak 
of incarnations in both sexes. 

At all the various kinds of factories visited the 
methods of work are of much the same kind. In 
every place the people work by watching machines 
doing the work, and occasionally touching adjusting 
buttons or setting the machine going anew. In all, 
the same short hours of labour are the rule, except 
that the arrangements at the restaurant gardens are 
somewhat different. In this case the staff cannot 
altogether absent itself simultaneously, because food 
has to be ready at all times, so that there are al- 
ways some workers on duty, and no one can go away 
for a whole day without previous arrangement. In 
all places where perpetual attendance is necessary, 
as it is at a restaurant, and at certain repairing 
shops, and in some other departments, there is an 
elaborate scheme of substitution. The staff is al- 
ways greatly in excess of the requirements, so that 
only a small proportion of it is on duty at any one 
time. The cooking or arrangement of food, for 
example, at each of the restaurants is done by one 
man or one woman for each meal one for the big 
meal in the middle of the day, another for morning 
breakfast, another for tea, each being on duty some- 
thing like three hours. 

Cooking has been revolutionised. The lady who 
does this work sits at a kind of office-table with a 
regular forest of knobs within her reach. Messages 
reach her by telephone as to the things that are re- 
quired; she presses certain knobs which squirt the 
required flavour into the blanc-mange, for example, 
and then it is shot down a kind of tube and is deliv- 



BUILDINGS AND CUSTOMS 419 

ered to the attendant waiting in the garden below. In 
some cases the application of heat is required, but 
that also she does without moving from her seat, by 
another arrangement of knobs. A number of little 
girls hover about her and wait upon her little girls 
from eight to fourteen years ol J. They are evident- 
ly apprentices, learning the business ; they are seen 
to pour things out of little bottles and also to mix 
other foods in little bowls. But even among 
these little girls, if one wants a day or a week off, 
she asks another little girl to take her place, and 
the request is always granted ; and though of course 
the substitute is likely to be unskilled, yet the com- 
panions are always so eager to help her that no 
difficulty ever arises. There is always a large 
amount of interplay and exchange in all these mat- 
ters ; but perhaps the most striking thing is the eager 
universal good-will which is displayed everybody 
anxious to help everybody else, and no one ever 
thinking that he is being unfairly treated or 'put 
upon'. 

It is also pleasant to see, as has been already 
mentioned, that no class of work is considered as in- 
ferior to any other class. But indeed there is no 
longer any mean or dirty labour left. Mining is 
no longer undertaken, because all that is needed can 
be as a rule alchemically produced with much less 
trouble. The knowledge of the inner side of chemis- 
try is such that almost anything can be made in this 
way, but some things are difficult and therefore im- 
practicable for ordinary use. There are many al- 
loys which were not known to the older world. 

All agricultural work is now done by machinery, 
and no person any longer needs to dig or to plough 



420 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

by hand. A man does not even dig his own private 
garden, but uses instead a curious little machine 
which looks something like a barrel on legs, which 
digs holes to any required depth, and at any re- 
quired distance apart, according to the way in which 
it is set, and shifts itself along a row automatically, 
needing only to be watched and turned back at tho 
end of the row. There is no manual labour in the 
old sense of the word, for even the machinery itself 
is now made by other machinery; and though ma- 
chinery still needs oiling, even that appears to be 
done in a clean manner. There is really no low or 
dirty labour required. There are not even drains, 
for everything is chemically converted and even- 
tually emerges as an odourless grey powder, some- 
thing like ashes, which is used as a manure for the 
garden. Each house has its own converter. 

There are no servants in this scheme of life, be- 
cause there is practically nothing for them to do;* 
but there are always plenty of people ready to come 
and help if necessary. There are times in the life 
of every lady when she is temporarily incapacitated 
from managing her household affairs; but in such 
a case some one always comes in to help sometimes 
a friendly neighbour, and at other times a kind of 
ladies' help, who comes because she is glad to help, 
but not for a wage. When any such assistance is 
required, the person who needs it simply applies 
through the recognised means of communication, and 
some one at once volunteers. 

PRIVATE PROPERTY 

There is but little idea of private property in 
anything. The whole colony, for example, belongs 



BUILDINGS AND CUSTOMS 421 

to the community. A man lives in a certain house, 
and the gardens are his so that he can alter or ar- 
range them in any way that he chooses, but he doea 
not keep people out of them in any way, nor does 
he encroach upon his neighbours. The principle in 
the community is not to own things, but to enjoy 
them. When a man dies, since he usually does so 
voluntarily, he takes care to arrange all his busi- 
ness. If he has a wife living, she holds his house 
until her death or her remarriage. Since all, ex- 
cept in the rarest cases, live to old age, it is scarcely 
possible that any children can be left unprotected 
but if such a thing does happen, there are always manj 
volunteers anxious to adopt them. At the death oi 
both parents, if the children are all married, th<f 
house lapses to the community, and is handed ovei 
to the next young couple in the neighbourhood whc 
happen to marry. It is usual on marriage for the 
young couple to take a new house, but there are cases 
in which one of the sons or daughters is asked by the 
parents to remain with them and take charge ol 
the house for them. In one case an extension is 
built on to a house for a grandchild who marries 
in order that she may still remain in close toucl: 
with the old people; but this is exceptional. 

There is no restriction to prevent people fron 
gathering portable property, and handing it ovei 
before death to the parents selected for the nexl 
life. This is always done with the talisman, as hat 
already been said, and not infrequently a few books 
accompany it, and sometimes perhaps a favourite 
picture or object of art. A man, as we have men 
tioned, can earn money if he wishes, and can buj 
things in the ordinary way, but it is not necessarj 



422 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

for him to do so, since food, clothing and lodging 
are provided free, and there is no particular ad- 
vantage in the private ownership of other objects. 

A PAKK-LIKE CITY 

Although in this community so large a number of 
people are gathered together into one central city 
and other subordinate centres, there is no effect of 
crowding. Nothing now exists in the least like what 
used to be meant by the central part of a city in 
earlier centuries. The heart of the great central 
city is the cathedral, with its attendant block of 
museum, university and library buildings. This has 
perhaps a certain resemblance to the buildings of 
the Capitol and Congressional Library at Washing- 
ton, though on a still larger scale. Just as in that 
case, a great park surrounds it. The whole city 
and even the whole community exists in a park a 
park abundantly interspersed with fountains, statues 
and flowers. The remarkable abundance of water 
everywhere is one of the striking features. In every 
direction one finds splendid fountains, shooting up 
like those at the Crystal Palace of old. In many 
cases one recognises with pleasure exact copies of 
old and familiar beauties ; for example, one fountain 
is exactly imitated from the Fontana di Trevi at 
Borne. The roads are not at all streets in the old 
sense of the word, but more like drives through the 
park, the houses always standing well back from 
them. It is not permitted to erect them at less than 
a certain minimum distance one from another. 

There is practically no dust, and there are no 
street sweepers. The road is all in one piece, not 
made of blocks, for there are no horses now to 



BUILDINGS AND CUSTOMS 423 

slip. The surface is a beautiful polished stone with 
a face like marble and yet an appearance of 
grain somewhat like granite. The roads are 
broad, and they have at their sides slight curb- 
stones ; or rather it would be clearer to say that the 
road is sunk slightly below the level of the grass at 
each side, and that the curb-stones rise to the level 
of the grass. The whole is thus a kind of shallow 
channel of polished marble, which is flooded with 
water every morning, so that the roads are thus 
kept clean and spotless without the necessity of the 
ordinary army of cleaners. The stone is of various 
colours. Most of the great streets are a lovely pale 
rose-colour, but some are laid in pale green. 

Thus there is really nothing but grass and highly 
polished stone for the people to walk upon, which 
explains the fact that they are always able to go 
bare-footed, not only without inconvenience but with 
the maximum of comfort. Even after a long walk 
the feet are scarcely soiled, but notwithstanding, at 
the door of every house or factory, there is a de- 
pression in the stone a sort of shallow trough, 
through which there is a constant rush of fresh 
water. The people, before entering the house, step 
into this and their feet are instantly cooled and 
cleansed. All the Temples are surrounded by a ring 
of shallow flowing water, so that each person before 
entering must step into this. It is as though one of 
the steps leading up to the Temple were a kind of 
shallow trough, so that no one carries into the Tem- 
ple even a speck of dust. 

LOCOMOTION 
All this park-like arrangement and the space be- 



424 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

tween the houses make the capital of our community 
emphatically a 'city of magnificent distances'. This 
however does not cause the slightest practical in- 
convenience, since every house possesses several 
light running cars of graceful appearance. They 
are not in the least like any variety of motor-car 
they rather resemble bath-chairs made of light metal 
filigree work, probably aluminium, with tyres of 
some exceedingly elastic substance, though ap- 
parently not pneumatic. They run with perfect 
smoothness and can attain a high speed, but are so 
light that the largest size can be readily pushed 
with one finger. They are driven by the universal 
power; a person wishing to start on a journey 
charges from the power-tap a sort of flat shallow 
box which fits under the seat. This gives him suf- 
ficient to carry him clear across the community with- 
out recharging, and if he wishes for more than that, 
he simply calls at the nearest house, and asks to 
be allowed to attach his accumulator to its tap for 
a few moments. These little cars are perpetually 
used; they are in fact the ordinary means of loco- 
motion, and the beautiful hollow polished roads are 
almost entirely for them, as pedestrians mostly 
walk along the little paths among the grass. There 
is little heavy transport no huge and clumsy vehi- 
cles. Any large amount of goods or material is car- 
ried in a number of small vehicles, and even large 
beams and girders are supported on a number of 
small trolleys which distribute the weight. Fly- 
ing machines are observed to be commonly in use in 
the outer world, but are not fashionable in the com- 
munity, as the members feel that they ought to be 
able to get about freely in their astral bodies, and 



BUILDINGS AND CUSTOMS 42 

therefore rather despise other means of aerial loco 
motion. They are taught at school to use astral con 
sciousness, and they have a regular course of lessoni 
in the projection of the astral body. 

SANITATION AND IRRIGATION 

There is no trouble with regard to sanitation 
The method of chemical conversion, mentioned som< 
time ago, includes deodorisation, and the gasei 
thrown off from -it are not in any way injurious 
They seem to be principally carbon and nitrogen 
with some chlorine, but no carbon dioxide. Th( 
gases are passed through water, which contains som< 
solution, as it has a sharp acid feeling. All th( 
gases are perfectly harmless, and so is the grej 
powder, of which only a little is present. All bac 
smells of every kind are against the law now, evei 
in the outer world. There is not what we shoulc 
call a special business-quarter in the town, thougl 
certain factories are built comparatively near om 
another, for convenience in interchanging various 
products. There is, however, so little difference be 
tween a factory and private house that it is difficull 
to know them apart, and as the factory makes nc 
noise or smell it is not in any way an objectionable 
neighbour. 

One great advantage which these people have i* 
their climate. There is no real winter, and in the 
season corresponding to it the whole land is stil 
covered with flowers just as at other times. The} 
irrigate even where they do not cultivate; the sys 
tern has been extended in a number of cases int< 
fields and woods and the country in general, evei 
where there is no direct cultivation. They have spe 



426 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

cialised the eschscholtzia, which was so common in 
California even centuries ago, and have developed 
many varieties of it, scarlet as well as brilliant 
orange, and they have sown them all about and al- 
lowed them to run wild. They have evidently in the 
beginning imported seeds of all sorts extensively 
from all parts of the world. People sometimes grow 
in their gardens plants which require additional heat 
in winter, but this is not obtained by putting them 
in a green-house, but by surrounding them with little 
jets of the power in its heat form. They have not 
yet needed to build anywhere near the boundary 
line of the community, nor are there any towns or 
villages for some distance on the other side of that 
boundary. The whole estate was a kind of huge 
farm before they bought it, and it is surrounded 
principally by smaller farms. The laws of the out- 
side world do not trouble or affect the community, 
and the Government of the continent does not in any 
way interfere with it, as it receives a nominal year- 
ly tribute from it. The people of the community are 
well-informed as regards the outside world; even 
school-children know the names and location of all 
the principal towns in the world. 



CHAPTER XXVII 
CONCLUSION 

THE FEDERATION OF NATIONS 

THE whole object of this investigation was to ob- 
tain such information as was possible about the 
beginnings of the Sixth Root-Race and the communi- 
ty founded by the Manu and the High-Priest for 
that purpose. Naturally therefore no special atten- 
tion was directed to any other part of the world 
than this. Notwithstanding, certain glimpses of 
other parts were obtained incidentally, and it will 
perhaps be interesting to note these; but they are 
put down without attempt at order or completeness, 
just as they were observed. 

Practically the whole world has federated itself 
politically. Europe seems to be a Confederation 
with a kind of Reichstag, to which all countries 
send representatives. This central body adjusts 
matters, and the Kings of the various countries are 
Presidents of the Confederation in rotation. The 
rearrangement of political machinery by which this 
wonderful change has been brought about is the work 
of Julius Caesar, who reincarnated some time in the 
twentieth century in connection with the coining of 
the Christ to reproclaim the WISDOM. Enormous 
improvements have been made in all directions, and 

427 



428 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

one cannot but be struck with the extraordinary 
abundance of wealth that must have been lavished 
upon these. Caesar, when he succeeds in forming 
the Federation and persuades all the countries to 
give up war, arranges that each of them shall set 
aside for a certain number of years half or a third 
of the money that it has been accustomed to spend 
upon armaments, and devote it to certain social im- 
provements which he specifies. According to his 
scheme the taxation of the entire world is gradually 
reduced, but notwithstanding, sufficient money is 
reserved to feed all the poor, to destroy all the 
slums, and to introduce wonderful improvements 
into all the cities. He arranges that those countries 
in which compulsory military service has been the 
rule shall for a time still preserve the habit, but 
shall make their conscripts work for the State in 
the making of parks and roads and the pulling down 
of slums and the opening up of communications 
everywhere. He arranges that the old burdens shall 
be gradually eased off, but yet contrives with what 
is left of them to regenerate the world. He is in- 
deed a great man; a most marvellous genius. 

There seems to have been some trouble at first 
and some preliminary quarrelling, but he gets to- 
gether an exceedingly capable band of people a 
kind of cabinet of all the best organisers whom the 
world has produced reincarnations of Napoleon, 
Scipio Africanus, Akbar and others one of the 
finest bodies of men for practical work that has ever 
been seen. The thing is done on a gorgeous scale. 
When all the Kings and prime ministers are gather- 
ed together to decide upon the basis for the Con- 
federation, Caesar builds for the occasion a circular 



CONCLUSION 429 

hall with a great number of doors so that all may 
enter at once, and no one Potentate take precedence 
of another. 

THE RELIGION OF THE CHRIST 

Caesar arranges all the machinery of this wonder- 
ful revolution, but his work is largely made possible 
by the arrival and preaching of the Christ Himself, 
so we have here a new era in all senses, not merely 
in outward arrangement, but in inner feeling as well. 
All this is long ago from the point of view of the 
time at which we are looking, and the Christ is now 
becoming somewhat mythical to the people, much 
as He was to many people at the beginning of the 
twentieth century. The religion of the world now 
is that which He founded ; that is the Religion, and 
there is no other of any real importance, though 
there are still some survivals, of which the world 
at large is somewhat contemptuously tolerant, re- 
garding them as fancy religions or curious super- 
stitions. There are a few people who represent the 
older form of Christianity who in the name of the 
Christ refused to receive Him when He came in a 
new form. The majority regard these people as 
hopelessly out-of-date. On the whole the state of 
affairs all the world over is obviously much more 
satisfactory than in the earlier civilisations. Ar- 
mies and navies have disappeared, or are only rep- 
resented by a kind of small force used for police 
purposes. Poverty also has practically disappeared 
from civilised lands; all slums in the great cities 
have been pulled down, and their places taken, not 
by other buildings, but by parks and gardens. 



430 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 
THE NEW LANGUAGE 

This curious altered form of English, written in a 
kind of short-hand with many grammalogues, has 
been adopted as a universal commercial and literary 
language. Ordinarily educated people in every 
country know it in addition to their own, and indeed 
it is obvious that among the upper and commercial 
classes it is rapidly superseding the tongues of the 
different countries. Naturally the common people 
in every country still speak their old tongue, but 
even they recognise that the first step towards get- 
ting on in the world is to learn the universal lan- 
guage. The great majority of books, for example, 
are printed only in that, unless they are intended 
especially to appeal to the uneducated. In this way 
it is now possible for a book to have a much wider 
circulation than it could ever have had before. There 
are still university professors and learned men who 
know all the old languages, but they are a small 
minority, and all the specially good books of all 
languages have long ago been translated into this 
universal tongue. 

In every country there is a large body of middle 
and upper class people who know no other lan- 
guage, or know only the few words of the language 
of the country which are necessary in order to 
communicate with servants and labourers. One thing 
which has greatly contributed to this change is this 
new and improved method of writing and printing, 
which was first introduced in connection with the 
English language and is therefore more adapted to 
it than others. In our community all books are 
printed on pale sea-green paper in dark blue ink, 



CONCLUSION 431 

the theory being apparently that this is less trying 
to the eyes than the old scheme of black on white. 
The same plan is being widely adopted in the rest 
of the world. Civilised rule or colonisation haa 
spread over many parts of the world which former- 
ly were savage and chaotic; indeed almost no real 
savages are now to be seen. 

THE OLD NATIONS 

People have by no means yet transcended national 
feelings. The countries no longer fight with one 
another, but each nation still thinks of itself with 
pride. The greatest advantage is that they are not 
now afraid of one another, and that there is no 
suspicion, and therefore far greater fraternity. But 
on the whole, people have not changed much; it is 
only that now the better side of them has more op- 
portunity to display itself. There has not as yet 
been much mingling of the nations ; the bulk of the 
people still marry in their own neighbourhood, for 
those who till the soil almost always tend to stay in 
the same place. Crime appears occasionally, but 
there is much less of it than of old, because the 
people on the whole know more than they did, and 
chiefly because they are much more content. 

The new religion has spread widely and its in- 
fluence is undoubtedly strong. It is an entirely 
scientific religion, -so that though religion and 
science are still separate institutions, they are no 
longer in opposition as they used to be. Naturally 
people are still arguing, though the subjects are not 
those which we know so well. For example, they dis- 
cuss the different kinds of spirit-communion, and 
quarrel as to whether it is safe to listen to any 



[32 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

pooks except those who have been authorised and 
guaranteed by the orthodox authorities of the time. 
Schools exist everywhere, but are no longer under 
he control of the Church, which educates no one ex- 
ept those who are to be its own preachers. Ordina- 
y philanthrophy is not needed, since there is prac- 
ically no poverty. There are still hospitals, and they 
,re all Government institutions. ,A11 necessaries of 
Lfe are controlled, so that there can be no serious 
luctuations in their price. All sorts of luxuries and 
innecessary things are still left in the hands of pri- 
r ate trade objects of art, and things of that kind, 
iut even with this, there is not so much competition 
is division of business; if a certain man opens a 
hop for the sale of ornaments and such things, an- 
ther one is not likely to start in business close by, 
imply because there would not be enough trade for 
he two ; but there is no curtailing of liberty with re- 
;ard to that. 

LAND AND MINES 

The conditions as to the ownership of private land 
nd of mines and factories are much changed. A 
arge amount at least of the land is held nominally 
rom the King, on some sort of lease by which it re- 
r erts to him unconditionally at the end of a thousand 
r ears, but he has the right to resume it at any inter- 
r ening period if he chooses, with certain compensa- 
ions. In the meantime it may descend from father 
o son, or be sold or divided, but never without the 
onsent of the authorities. There are also consider- 
ible restrictions as to many of these estates, re- 
erring to what kind of buildings may be erected 
n them. All factories for necessaries are State prop- 



CONCLUSION 433 

terty, but still there is no restriction which pre- 
vents anyone from starting a similar factory if he 
likes. There is still some mining, but much less than 
of old. The cavities and galleries of many of the 
old mines in the northern parts of Europe are now 
used as sanatoria for the rare cases of consumption 
or bronchial or other affections, because of their 
equal temperature in summer and winter. There 
are also arrangements for raising metal from great 
depths, which cannot exactly be called mines, for 
they are much more like wells. This may be con- 
sidered a modern and improved type of mine. Little 
of the work is done down below by human beings; 
rather machines excavate, cut out huge slices and 
lift them. All these are State property in the ulti- 
mate, but in many cases private owners rent them 
from the State. Iron is burnt out of various earths 
in some way, and the material is obtained with less 
trouble than of old. 

THE GOVERNMENT OF BRITAIN 

The Government of England has been considerably 
changed. All real power is in the hands of the 
King, though there are ministers in charge of sep- 
arate departments. There is no parliament but there 
is a scheme the working of which is not easy fully 
to comprehend in the rapid glimpse which is all that 
we had. It is something more or less of the nature 
of the referendum. Everybody has a right to make 
representations, and these pass through the hands 
of a body of officials whose business it is to receive 
complaints or petitions. If these representations 
show any injustice, it is rapidly set right without 
reference to the Jiigher authorities. Every such peti- 



434 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

tion is attended to if it can be shown to be reason- 
able, but it does not usually penetrate to the King 
himself, unless there are many requests for the 
same thing. The Monarchy is still hereditary, still 
ruling by the claim of descent from Cerdic. The 
British Empire appears to be much as in the 
twentieth century, but it was an earlier federation 
than the greater one, and it naturally acknowledges 
permanently one King, while the World-Federation 
is constantly changing its President. Some of what 
used to be Colonial Governors now hold their offices 
by heredity, and are like tributary Monarchs. 

LONDON 

London still exists, and is larger than ever, but 
much changed, for now all over the world there are 
no fires, and consequently no smoke. Some of the 
old streets and squares are still recognisable in gen- 
eral outline, but there has been a vast amount of 
pulling-down, and improvements upon a large scale. 
S. Paul's Cathedral is still there, preserved with 
great care as an ancient monument. The Tower has 
been partly reconstructed. The introduction of one 
unlimited power has produced great effects here 
also, and most things that are wanted seem to be 
supplied on the principle of turning on a tap. Here 
also few people any longer cook in private houses, 
but they go out for meals much as they do in the 
community, although things are served here in a 
different manner. 

OTHER PLACES 

Taking a passing glance at Paris, it also is seen 
to be much changed. All the streets are larger and 



CONCLUSION 435 

the whole city is, as it were, looser. They have 
pulled down whole blocks, and thrown them into 
gardens. Everything is so hopelessly different. 
Glancing at Holland, we see a country so thickly 
inhabited that it looks like almost a solid city. Am- 
sterdam is, however, still clearly distinguishable, 
and they have elaborated some system by which they 
have increased the number of canals and contrive to 
change all the water in all of them every day. There 
is not any natural flow of water, but there is some 
curious scheme of central suction, a kind of enor- 
mous tube system with a deep central excavation. 
The details are not clear; but they somehow ex- 
haust the area and draw into that all sewage and 
such matters, which are carried in a great chan- 
nel under the sea to a considerable distance and are 
then spouted out with tremendous vigour. No ships 
pass anywhere near that spot, as the force is too 
great. Here also, as in the community, they are dis- 
tilling sea- water and extracting things from it ob- 
taining products from which many things are made 
articles of food among others, and also dyes. In 
some of the streets they grow tropical trees in the 
open air by keeping round them a constant flow of 
the power in its heat aspect. 

Centuries ago they began by roofing in the streets 
and keeping them warm, like a greenhouse ; but when 
the unlimited power appeared they decided to dis- 
pense with the roofs, about which there were many 
inconveniences. In passing glimpses at other parts 
of the world, hardly anything worth chronicling 
was seen. China appears to have had some vicis- 
situdes. The race is still there and it does not seem 
to have diminished. There is a good deal of super- 



436 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

ficial change in some of the towns, but the vast body 
of the race is not really altered in its civilisation. 
The great majority of the country people still speak 
their own tongue, but all the leading people know 
the universal language. 

India is another country where but little change 
is observable. The immemorial Indian village is an 
Indian village still, but there are no famines now. 
The country groups itself into two or three big king- 
doms, but is still part of the one great Empire. 
There is evidently far more mixture in the higher 
classes than there used to be, and much more inter- 
marriage with white races; so that it is clear that 
among a large section of the educated people the 
caste system must to a great extent have been 
broken down. Tibet seems to have been a good deal 
opened up, since easy access is to be had to it by 
means of flying machines. Even these, however, 
meet with occasional difficulties, owing to the rarity 
of the air at a great height. Central Africa is 
radically changed, and the neighbourhood of the 
Victoria Nyanza has become a sort of Switzerland 
full of great hotels. 

ADYAR 

Naturally it is interesting to see what has happen- 
ed by this time to our Headquarters at Adyar, and 
it is delightful to find it still flourishing, and on a 
far grander scale than in older days. There is still 
a Theosophical Society; but as its first object has 
to a large extent been achieved, it is devoting itself 
principally to the second and third. It has de- 
veloped into a great central University for the pro- 
motion of studies along both these lines, with sub- 



CONCLUSION 437 

sidiary centres in various parts of the world affil- 
iated to it. 

The present Headquarters building is replaced by 
a kind of gorgeous palace with an enormous dome, 
the central part of which must be an imitation of the 
Taj Mahal at Agra, but on a much larger scale. In 
this great building they mark as memorials certain 
spots by pillars and inscriptions, such as: "Here 
was Madame Blavatsky's room"; "Here such and 
such a book was written "; "Here was the original 
shrine-room "; and so on. They even have statues 
of some of us, and they have made a copy in marble 
of the statues of the Founders in the great hall. Even 
that marble copy is now considered as a relic of 
remote ages. The Society owns the Adyar Kiver 
now, and also the ground on the other side of it, in 
order that nothing may be built over there that may 
spoil its prospect, and it has lined the river-bed with 
stone of some sort to keep it clean. They have 
covered the estate with buildings, and have acquired 
perhaps an additional square mile along the sea- 
shore. Away beyond Olcott Gardens they have a 
department for occult chemistry, and there they 
have all the original plates reproduced on a larger 
scale and also exceedingly beautiful models of all 
the different kinds of chemical atoms. They have a 
magnificent museum and library, and a few of the 
things which were here at the beginning of the 
twentieth century are still to be seen. One fine old 
enamelled manuscript still exists, but it is doubt- 
ful whether there are any books going back as far 
as the twentieth century. They have copies of The 
Secret Doctrine, but they are all transcribed into the 
universal language. 



438 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

THE THEOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 

The Society has taken a great place in the world. 
It is a distinct department in the world's science, 
and has a long line of specialities which no one else 
seems to teach. It is turning out a vast amount of 
literature, possibly what we should call texts, and 
is keeping alive an interest in the old religions and 
in forgotten things. It is issuing a great series 
somewhat resembling the old 'Sacred Books of the 
East, ' but on a more magnificent scale. The volume 
just issued is number 2,159. There are many pan- 
dits who are authorities on the past. Each man ap- 
pears to. specialise on a book. He knows it by heart 
and knows all about it, and has read thoroughly all 
the commentaries upon it. The literary department is 
enormous, and is the centre of a world-wide or- 
ganisation. Though they still use English, they 
speak it differently, but they keep the archaic motto 
of the Society written in its original form. The 
Society's dependencies in other parts of the world 
are practically autonomous big establishments and 
universities in all the principal countries ; but they 
all look up to Adyai as the centre and origin of the 
movement and make it a place of pilgrimage. Col- 
onel Olcott, though working in the community in 
California as a lieutenant of the Manu, is the nom- 
inal President of the Society, and visits its Head- 
quarters at least once in every two years. He comes 
and leads the salutations before the statues of the 
Founders. 

THREE METHODS OF REINCARNATION 
As in the examination of the Californian com- 



CONCLUSION 439 

munity a great many people were seen who were 
clearly recognisable as friends of the twentieth cen- 
tury, it seems desirable to enquire how they manage 
to be there whether they have been taking a num- 
ber of rapid incarnations, or have calculated their 
stay in the heaven- world so as to arrive at the right 
moment. 

The enquiry leads in unexpected directions and 
gives more trouble than had been anticipated, but 
at least three methods of occupying the intermediate 
time have been discovered. First, some of the work- 
ers do take the heaven-life, but greatly shorten and 
intensify it. This process of shortening but inten- 
sifying produces considerable and fundamental dif- 
ferences in the causal body; its effects cannot in 
any way be described as better or worse, but they 
are quite certainly different. It is a type which is 
much more amenable to the influence of the Devas 
than the other, and this is one of the ways in which 
modifications have been introduced. That shorter 
heaven-life is not shut in in a little world of its own, 
but is to a great extent open to this Deva influence. 
The brains of the people who come along that line 
are different, because they have preserved lines of 
receptivity which in other cases have been atrophied. 
They can be more easily influenced for good by in- 
visible beings, but there is a corresponding liabili- 
ty to less desirable influences. The personality is 
less awake, but the man inside is more awake in 
proportion. Those who take the longer heaven-life 
focus practically all their consciousness in one place 
at once, but people of this other type do not. Their 
consciousness is more equally distributed on the 
different levels, and consequently they are usually 



440 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

less concentrated upon the physical plane and less 
able to achieve in connection with it. 

There are others to whom a different opportunity 
has been offered, for they were asked whether they 
felt themselves able to endure a series of rapid in- 
carnations of hard work devoted to the building of 
the Thoosophical Society. Naturally, such an offer 
is made only to those who bring themselves definitely 
to a point where they are useful those who work 
hard enough to give satisfactory promise for the 
future. To them is offered this opportunity of con- 
tinuing their work, of taking incarnation after incar- 
nation without interval, in different parts of the 
world, to carry the Theosophical Movement up to 
the point where it can provide this large contingent 
for the community. The community at the time when 
it is observed is much larger than the Theosophical 
Society of the twentieth century; but that Society 
has increased by geometrical progression during the 
intervening centuries so much so that although 
practically all the hundred thousand members of 
the community have passed through its ranks (most 
of them many times), there is still a huge Society 
left to carry on the activities at Adyar and the other 
great centres all over the world. 

We have seen already two methods by which per- 
sons who are in the Society in the twentieth century 
may form part of the community of the twenty-eighth 
century by the intensification of the heaven-life, 
and by the taking of special and repeated incarna- 
tions. Another method is far more remarkable than 
either of these one which is probably applied in 
only a limited number of instances. The case which 
drew attention to this was that of a man who had 



CONCLUSION 441 

pledged himself to the Master for this work to- 
wards the conclusion of his twentieth century in- 
carnation, and unreservedly devoted himself to prep- 
aration for it. The preparation assigned was in- 
deed most unusual, for he needed development of 
a certain kind in order to round off his character 
and make him really useful development which 
could only be obtained under the conditions existing 
in another planet of the chain. Therefore he was 
transferred for some lives to that planet and then 
brought back again here a special experiment 
made by permission of the Maha-Chohan Himself. 
The same permission was in some cases obtained 
by other Masters for Their pupils, though such an 
extreme measure is rarely necessary. 

Most of the members of the community have been 
taking a certain number of special incarnations, and 
therefore have preserved through all those lives the 
same astral and mental bodies. Consequently they 
have retained the same memory, and that means that 
they have known all about the community for several 
lives, and had the idea of it before them. Normal- 
ly such a series of special and rapid incarnations is 
arranged only for those who have already taken the 
first of the great Initiations. For them it is under- 
stood that an average of seven such lives should 
bring them to the Arhat Initiation, and that after 
that is attained seven more should suffice to cast off 
the remaining five fetters and attain the perfect 
liberation of the Asekha level. This number, four- 
teen incarnations, is given merely as an average, 
and it is possible greatly to shorten the time by es- 
pecially earnest and devoted work, or, on the other 
hand, to lengthen it by any lukewarmness or care- 



442 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

lessness. The preparation for the work of the com- 
munity is an exception to ordinary rules, and al- 
though all its members are definitely aiming at the 
Path, we must not suppose that all of them have 
attained as yet to the greater heights. 

A certain small number of persons from the out- 
side world, who are already imbued with the ideals 
of the community, sometimes come and desire to join 
it, and some at least of these are accepted. They 
are not allowed to intermarry with the community, 
because of the especial purity of race which is exact- 
ed, but they are allowed to come and live among 
the rest, and are treated exactly like all the others. 
When such members die they reincarnate in bodies 
belonging to the families of the community. 

The Manu has advanced ideas as to the amount 
of progress which He expects the community as a 
whole to make in a given time. In the principal 
Temple He keeps a kind of record of this, some- 
what resembling a weather-chart, showing by lines 
what He has expected and how much more or less 
has been achieved. The whole plan of the communi- 
ty was arranged by our two Masters, and the light 
of Their watchful care is always hovering over it 
All that has been written gives only a little gleam 
of that light a partial foreshadowing of that which 
They are about to do. 

How TO PBEPABE OUBSELVES 

It is certainly not without definite design that just 
at this time in the history of our Society permission 
has been given thus to publish this, the first definite 
and detailed forecast of the great work that has to 
be done. There can be little doubt that at least one 



CONCLUSION 443 

of the objects of the great Ones in allowing this is 
not only to encourage and stimulate our faithful 
members, but to show them along what lines they 
must specially develop themselves, if they desire the 
inestimable privilege of being permitted to share in 
this glorious future, and also what (if anything) 
they can do to pave the way for the changes that are 
to come. One thing that can be done here and now 
to prepare for this glorious development is the ear- 
nest promotion of our first object, of a better under- 
standing between the different nations and castes 
and creeds. 

In that everyone of us can help, limited though 
our powers may be, for every one of us can try to 
understand and appreciate the qualities of nations 
other than our own ; every one of us, when he hears 
some foolish or prejudiced remark made against 
men of another nation, can take the opportunity of 
putting forward the other side of the question of 
recommending to notice their good qualities rather 
than their failings. Every one of us can take the 
opportunity of acting in an especially kindly manner 
toward any foreigner with whom we happen to come 
into contact, and feeling the great truth that when 
a stranger visits our country all of us stand tem- 
porarily to him in the position of hosts. If it comes 
in our way to go abroad and none to whom such 
an opportunity is possible should neglect it we must 
remember that we are for the moment represen- 
tatives of our country to those whom we happen to 
meet, and that we owe it to that country to en- 
deavour to give the best possible impression of kind- 
liness and readiness to appreciate all the manifold 
beauties that will open before us, while at the same 



444 MAN: WHENCE. HOW AND WHITHER 

time we pass over or make the best of any points 
which strike us as deficiencies. 

Another way in which we can help to prepare is 
by the endeavour to promote beauty in all its as- 
pects, even in the commonest things around us. One 
of the most prominent characteristics of the com- 
munity of the future is its intense devotion to beau- 
ty,so that even the commonest utensil is in its simple 
way an object of art. We should see to it that, at 
least within the sphere of our influence, all this is 
so with us at the present day; and this does not 
mean that we should surround ourselves with costly 
treasures, but rather that, in the selection of the 
simple necessaries of every-day life, we should con- 
sider always the question of harmony, suitability 
and grace. In that sense and to that extent we must 
all strive to become artistic; we must develop with- 
in ourselves that power of appreciation and com- 
prehension which is the grandest feature of the art- 
ist's character. 

Yet, on the other hand, while thus making an 
effort to evolve its good side, we must carefully 
avoid the less desirable qualities which it sometimes 
brings with it. The artistic man may be elevated 
clear out of his ordinary every-day self by his de- 
votion to his art. By the very intensity of that, he 
has not only marvellously uplifted himself, but he 
also uplifts such others as are capable of responding 
to such a stimulus. But unless he is an abnormally 
well-balanced man, this wonderful exaltation is al- 
most invariably followed by its reaction, a corre- 
spondingly great depression. Not only does this 
stage usually last far longer than the first, but the 
waves of thought and feeling which it pours forth 



CONCLUSION 445 

affect nearly everybody within a considerable area, 
while only a few (in all probability) have been able 
to respond to the elevating influence of the art. It is 
indeed a question whether many men of artistic 
temperament are not, on the whole, thus doing far 
more harm than good; but the artist of the future 
will learn the necessity and the value of perfect 
equipoise, and so will produce the good without the 
harm ; and it is at this that we must aim. 

It is obvious that helpers are needed for the 
work of the Manu and the Chief Priest, and that 
in such work there is room for all conceivable di- 
versities of talent and of disposition. None need 
despair of being useful because he thinks himself 
lacking in intellect or ecstatic emotion ; there is room 
for all, and qualities which are lacking now may 
be speedily developed under the special conditions 
which the community will provide. Good-will and 
docility are needed, and perfect confidence in the 
wisdom and capability of the Manu; and above all 
the resolve to forget self utterly and to live only 
for the work that has to be done in the interests of 
humanity. Without this last, all other qualifications 
" water but the desert ". 

Those who offer themselves to help must have in 
some sort the spirit of an army a spirit of per- 
fect self-sacrifice, of devotion to the Leader and of 
confidence in Him. They must above all things be 
loyal, obedient, painstaking, unselfish. They may 
have many other great qualities as well, and the 
more they have the better; but these at least they 
must have. There will be scope for the keenest in- 
telligence, the greatest ingenuity and ability in every 
direction; but all these will be useless without the 



446 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

capacity of instant obedience and utter trust in 
the Masters. Self-conceit is an absolute barrier 
to usefulness. The man who can never obey an 
order because he always thinks that he knows better 
than the authorities, the man who cannot sink 
his personality entirely in the work which is given 
to him to do and co-operate harmoniously with his 
fellow-workers such a man has no place in the 
army of the Manu, however transcendent his other 
qualifications may be. All this lies before us to be 
done, and it will be done, whether we take our share 
in it or not ; but since the opportunity is offered to 
us surely we shall be criminally foolish if we neglect 
it. Even already the preparatory work is beginning ; 
the harvest truly is plenteous, but as yet the labour- 
ers are all too few. The Lord of the Harvest calls 
for willing helpers ; who is there among us who is 
ready to respond? 



EPILOGUE 

IT is obvious that the outline of the California^ 
community and of the world of the twenty-eighth 
century is but an infinitesimal fragment of the 
'Whither' of the road along which humanity will 
travel. It is an inch or two of the indefinite num- 
ber of miles which stretch between us and the goal 
of our Chain, and even then a longer 'Whither 1 
stretches beyond. . It tells of the first small begin- 
nings of the sixth Eoot Race, beginnings which bear 
much the same proportion to the life of that Race, 
as the gathering of the few thousands on the shore 
of the sea that washed the south-eastern part of 
Ruta bore to the great fifth Root Race that is now 
leading the world. We do not know how long a time 
is to elapse from those peaceful days to the years 
during which America will be rent into pieces by 
earthquakes and volcanic outbursts, and a new con- 
tinent will be thrown up in the Pacific, to be the 
home of the sixth Root Race. We see that later the 
strip in the far west of Mexico, on which the com- 
munity exists will become a strip on the far east 
of the new continent, while Mexico and the United 
States will be whelmed in ruin. Gradually will that 
new continent be upheaved, with many a wild out- 
burst of volcanic energy, and the land that was once 
Lemuria will arise from its age-long sleep, and lie 
again beneath the sun-rays of our earthly day. 

447 



448 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

It may be supposed that a very long period will 
be occupied by these great seismic changes, ere the 
new land will be ready for the new Bace, and its 
Manu and its Bodhisattva will lead it thither. 

Then will come the ages during which its seven 
sub-races will rise, and reign, and decay; and from 
the seventh the choosing of the germs of the seventh 
Root Race by its future Manu, and the long labours 
of that new Manu and of His Brother the new Bod- 
hisattva, until it shall, in turn, grow into a definite 
new Race and inherit the earth. It also will have 
its seven sub-races, to rise, and reign, and vanish 
vanishing as the earth itself falls asleep, and passes 
into its fourth obscuration. 

. The Sun of Life will rise on a new earth, the 
planet Mercury, and that fair orb will pass through 
its day of ages, and again that Sun will set and the 
night will fall. A new rising, a new setting, on the 
globes F and G of our Round, and the ending of 
the Round, and the gathering of its fruits into the 
bosom of its Seed Manu. 

Then, after long repose, the fifth, sixth and seventh 
Rounds, ere our terrene Chain shall vanish into 
the past. Then, onwards yet, after an Inter-Chain 
Nirvana, and still there are fifth and sixth and 
seventh Chains yet to come and to pass away, ere 
the Day of the High Gods shall decline to its setting, 
and the soft still Night shall brood over a resting 
system, and the great Preserver shall repose on the 
many-headed serpent of Time. 

But even then the * Whither 1 stretches onward into 
the endless ages of Immortal Life. The dazzled 



EPILOGUE 449 

eyes close ; the numbed brain is still. But above, be- 
low, on every side, stretches the illimitable Life 
who is GOD, and in Him will ever live and move and 
exist the children of men. 

PEACE TO ALL BEINGS 



APPENDIX 



THE MOON CHAIN 

THE names of individuals who have been traced 
through the ages adopted from 'Bents in the Veil 
of Time,' with many subsequent additions have 
been as far as possible relegated to Appendices. In 
a book intended for the general public, too many 
of these names would be wearisome. On the other 
hand, they are of great interest to Fellows of the 
Theosophical Society, many of whom may thus trace 
some of their former incarnations. We have re- 
tained these names in the text where the exigencies 
of the story required it, and have added large num- 
bers, family relationships, etc., in the form of Ap- 
pendices. 

P. 31. Individualised on Globe D, in the fourth 
Round of the Moon Chain: MAES and MERCURY; 
probably many others who have become Masters in 
the Earth Chain. Yet loftier Beings individualised 
in earlier Chains. Thus, the MAHAGUBU and SURYA 
dropped out of globe D of the seventh Bound of the 
second Chain at its Day of Judgment, and came to 
globe D of the third, or Moon Chain, in the fourth 
Round as primitive men, with second Chain animals 
ready for individualisation. JUPITER was probably 
with these and VAXVASVATA MANU Manu of the 
fifth Race on the fourth Round of the Earth Chain. 

463 



454 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

P. 34. Individualised on globe D, in the fifth 
Round : Herakles, Sirius, Alcyone, Mizar, and prob- 
ably all those later called Servers, who worked to- 
gether through the ages see the next paragraph. 
Many others, who have made great progress along 
other lines, probably individualised during this 
Round. Also individualised on globe D, in the fifth 
Rouhd: Scorpio, and many of that ilk; but the} 
dropped out again at the Day of Judgment in the 
sixth Round. These were first noticed in the sixth 
Round, evidently at the same stage as Herakles, 
Sirius, Alcyone and Mizar; and therefore must have 
individualised in the fi^th Hound. 



II 

IN THE CITY OF THE GOLDEN GATE ABOUT 
B. C. 220,000 

IN these lists all the people recognised up to the 
time of writing will be named, whether given in the 
text or not, so as to enable the reader to draw, with- 
out much trouble, a genealogical chart, if he likes 
to do so. 

MARS was Emperor, the Crown Prince Vajra, the 
Hierophant of the State, Mercury. Ulysses was 
Captain of the Palace Guard. In the Imperial 
Guard were recognised : Herakles, Pindar, Beatrix, 
Oeinini, Capella, Lutetia, Bellona, Apis, Arcor, Cap- 
ricorn, Theodoros, Scotus, Sappho. Herakles had as 



APPENDIX 455 

servants three Tlavatli youths, Alcmene, Hygeia 
and Bootes who had been captured in battle by his 
father, and given to him. 



Ill 



ANCIENT PERU 

WHEN the articles on ancient Peru appeared in 
the Theosophical Review, Mr. Leadbeater wrote the 
following introduction to them, and it is useful to 
reprint it here. It was written in 1899. 

When, in writing on the subject of clairvoyance, I 
referred to the magnificent possibilities which the 
examination of the records of the past opened up 
before the student of history, several readers sug- 
gested to me that deep interest would be felt by our 
Theosophical public in any fragments of the results 
of such researches which could be placed before 
them. That is no doubt true, but it is not so easy 
as might be supposed to carry out the suggestion, 
It has to be remembered that investigations are not 
undertaken for the pleasure of the thing, nor for 
the gratification of mere curiosity, but only when 
they happen to be necessary for the due p< ^ f nnance 
of some piece of work, or for the elunr.Vion of 
some obscure point in our study. Most oT tW scenes 
from the past history of the world wh; r have BO 
interested and delighted our enquirers have come 
before us in the course of the examination of one or 
other of the lines of successive lives which have been 



456 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

followed far back into earlier ages, in the endeavour 
to gather information as to the working of the great 
laws of karma and reincarnation; so that what we 
know of remote antiquity is rather in the nature of 
a series of glimpses than in any way a sustained 
view rather a gallery of pictures than a history. 

Nevertheless, even in this comparatively casual 
and desultory manner, much of exceeding interest 
has been unveiled before our eyes much not only 
with regard to the splendid civilisations of Egypt, 
of India and of Babylonia, as well as to the far more 
modern States of Persia, Greece, and Eome, but to 
others on a scale vaster and grander far even than 
these to which, indeed, these are but as buds of 
yesterday; mighty Empires whose beginnings reach 
back into primeval dawnings, even though some 
fragments of their traces yet remain on earth for 
those who have eyes to see. 

Greatest perhaps of all these was the magnificent 
and world-embracing dominion of the Divine Kulers 
of the city of the Golden Gate in old Atlantis ; for 
with the exception of the primary Aryan civilisation 
round the shores of the Central Asian sea, almost all 
Empires that men have called great since then have 
been but feeble and partial copies of its marvellous 
organisation; while before it there existed nothing 
at all comparable to it, the only attempts at govern- 
ment on a really large scale having been those of the 
egg-headed sub-race of the Lemurians, and of the 
myriad hosts of the Tlavatli mound-builders in the 
far west of early Atlantis. 

Some outline of the polity which for so many 
thousands of years centred round the glorious City 
of the Golden Gate has already been given in one 



APPENDIX 457 

of the Transactions of the London Lodge; what I 
wish to do now is to offer a slight sketch of one of 
its later copies one which, though on but a small 
scale as compared to its mighty parent, yet preserv- 
ed to within almost what we are in the habit of call- 
ing historical periods much of the splendid public 
spirit and paramount sense of duty which were the 
very life of that grand old scheme. 

The part of the world, then, to which we must for 
this purpose direct our attention is the ancient king- 
dom of Peru a kingdom, however, embracing enor- 
mously more of the South American continent than 
the Republic to which we now give that name, or 
even the tract of country which the Spaniards found 
in possession of the Incas in the sixteenth century. 
It is true that the system of government in this later 
kingdom, which excited the admiration of Pizarro, 
aimed at reproducing the conditions of the earlier 
and grander civilisation of which I have now to 
speak ; yet, wonderful as even that pale copy was ac- 
knowledged to be, we must remember that it was but 
a copy, organised thousands of years later by a far 
inferior race, in the attempt to revivify traditions, 
;ome of the best points of which had been forgotten. 

The first introduction of our investigators to this 
most interesting epoch took place, as has already 
been hinted, in the course of an endeavour to follow 
back a long line of incarnations. It was found that 
after two nobly-borne lives of great toil and stress 
(themselves the consequence, apparently, of a serious 
failure in the one preceding them), the subject (Era- 
to) whose history was being followed was born un- 
der favourable circumstances in this great Peru- 
vian Empire, and there lived a life which, though 



458 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

certainly as full of hard work as either of its pred- 
ecessors, yet differed from them in being honoured, 
happy and successful far beyond the common lot. 

Naturally the sight of a State in which most of 
the social problems seemed to have been solved in 
which there was no poverty, no discontent, and prac- 
tically no crime attracted our attention immediate- 
ly, though we could not at the time stay to examine 
it more closely; but when afterwards it was found 
that several other lines of lives in which we were 
interested had also passed through that country at 
the same period, and we thus began to learn more 
and more of its manners and customs, we gradually 
realised that we had come upon a veritable physi- 
cal Utopia a time and place where at any rate the 
physical life of man was better organised, happier, 
and more useful than it has perhaps ever been else- 
where. 

No doubt there will be many who will ask them- 
selves : ' i How are we to know that this account dif- 
fers from those of other Utopias how can we feel 
certain that the investigators were not deceiving 
themselves with beautiful dreams, and reading theo- 
retical ideas of their own into the visions which they 
persuaded themselves that they saw; how, in fact, 
can we assure ourselves that this is more than a 
mere f airy-story T M 

The only answer that can be given to such en- 
quiries is that for them there is no assurance. The 
investigators themselves are certain certain by 
long accumulation of manifold proofs, small often 
in themselves, perhaps, yet irresistible in combina- 
tioncertain also in their knowledge, gradually ac- 
quired by many patient experiments, of the dif- 



APPENDIX 459 

ference between observation and imagination. They 
know well how often they have met with the ab- 
solutely unexpected and unimaginable, and how fre- 
quently and how entirely their cherished preconcep- 
tions have been overset. Outside the ranks of tho 
actual investigators there are a few others who 
have attained practically equal certainty, either by 
their own intuitions, or by a personal knowledge of 
those who do the work; to the rest of the world the 
results of all enquiry into a past so remote must 
necessarily remain hypothetical. They may regard 
this account of the ancient Peruvian civilisation as 
a mere fairy-tale, in fact ; yet even so I think I may 
hope for their admission that it is a beautiful fairy- 
tale. 

I imagine that except by these methods of clair- 
voyance it would be impossible now to recover any 
traces of the civilisation which we are about to 
examine. I have little doubt that traces still exist, 
but it would probably require extensive and elab- 
orate excavations to enable us to acquire sufficient 
knowledge to separate them with any certainty from 
those of other and later races. It may be that, in 
the future, antiquarians and archaeologists will turn 
their attention more than they have hitherto done 
to these wonderful countries of South America, and 
then perhaps they may be able to sort out the various 
footprints of the different races which one after 
another occupied and governed them ; but at present 
all that we know (outside of clairvoyance) about old 
Peru is the little that was told to us by the Spanish 
conquerors ; and the civilisation at which they mar- 
velled so greatly was but a faint and far distant re- 
flection of the older and grander reality. 



460 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

The very race itself had changed; for though 
those whom the Spaniards found in possession were 
still some offshoot of that splendid third sub-race 
of the Atlanteans, which seems to have been endued 
with so much more enduring power and vitality than 
any of those which followed it, it is yet evident that 
this offshoot was in many ways in the last stage of 
decrepitude, in many ways more barbarous, more 
degraded, less refined, than the much older branch 
of which we have to speak. 

This little leaf out of the world's true history- 
this glimpse at just one picture in nature's vast 
galleries reveals to us what might well seem an 
ideal State compared to anything which exists at 
the present day; and part of its interest to us con- 
sists in the fact that all the results at which our 
modern social reformers are aiming were already 
fully achieved there, but achieved by methods dia- 
metrically opposite to most that are being suggested 
now. The people were peaceful and prosperous ; no 
such thing as poverty was known, and there was 
practically no crime ; no single person had cause for 
discontent, for everyone had an opening for his 
genius (if he had any) and he chose for himself his 
profession or line of activity, whatever it might be. 
In no case was work too hard or too heavy placed 
upon any man; everyone had plenty of spare time 
to give to any desired accomplishment or occupa- 
tion; education was full, free, and efficient, and the 
sick and aged were perfectly and even luxuriously 
cared for. And yet the whole of this wonderfully 
elaborate system for the promotion of physical well- 
being was carried out, and so far as we can see could 
only have been carried out, under an autocracy which 



APPENDIX 461 

was one of the most absolute that the world has 
ever known. 



IV 
PERU, ABOUT B. C. 12,000 

THIS is one of the largest of the gatherings of 
those who are now working in the Theosophioal 
Society. MARS was Emperor at the time, and the 
lists begin with his father and mother. There were 
three families of the time among which they were 
distributed, those descended from JUPITER, SATURN, 
and Psyche. 

JUPITER married VULCAN and had two sons 
MARS and URANUS. The family of MARS by his mar- 
riage with BRIIASPATI consisted of two sons, Siwa 
and Pindar, who respectively married Proteus and 
Tolosa. Siwa and Proteus also had two sons, 
Corona and Orpheus, Corona marrying Pallas, and 
having as sons Ulysses and OSIRIS, and as Daughter 
Theodoros Ulysses marrying Cassiopeia, VIRAJ 
being their son; OSIRIS marrying ATHENA, and Theo- 
doros marrying Deneb; Orpheus marrying Hestia, 
by whom he had two sons Thor and Rex who re- 
spectively married Iphigenia and Ajax. Pindar and 
Tolosa had three daughters, Herakles, Adrona and 
Cetus, and one son Olympia. Herakles married 
Castor, Adrona Berenice, Cetus Procyon and Olym- 
pia Diana. 

URANUS married Hesperia, and had three sons 
Sirius, Cetitaurus and Alcyone and two daughters 



462 MAN: WHENCE. HOW AND WHITHER 

Aquarius and Sagittarius. The wife of Sirius was 
Spica, and Pollux, Vega and Castor were their sons, 
and Alcestis and Minerva their daughters. Fides was 
an adopted son and married Glaucus. Pollux mar- 
ried Melpomene and had three sons Cyrene, Apis, 
Flora and two daughters Eros and Chamaeleon. 
Apis married Bootes, Eros Pisces, and Chamseleon 
Gemini. Vega married Pomona and they had one 
son, Ursa, who espoused Lacerta, and two daughters 
Circe and Ajax, the latter marrying Eex. Ursa's 
family included Cancer (daughter), Alastor (son), 
Phocea (daughter), and Thetis (son). Of these, 
Alastor married Clio and had one daughter, Trape- 
zium, and a son, Markab. Castor married Herakles, 
and they had as issue: Vajra and Aurora (sons), 
the latter marrying Wenceslas, and daughters La- 
certa, Alcmene, and Sappho, who respectively mar- 
ried Ursa, Hygeia and Dorado. Alcestis married 
Nicosia and they had a son Formator. Minerva 
married Beatus. The next son ot URANUS was Cen- 
taurus, who marripH ftimel, their son being Beatus. 
Alcyone had Mizar as his wife, and their children 
were Perseus, Leo, Capella, Begulus and Irene 
(sons), and Ausonia (daughter). Perseus married 
Alexandros. Leo married Concordia, and they had 
as children Deneb, whose wife was Theodoros, 
Egeria, whose husband was Telemachus, Calliope, 
whose wife was Parthenope, Iphigenia, whose hus- 
band was Thor, and Daleth, whose husband was 
Polaris. Capella married Soma and they had two 
sons Telemachus and Aquila and one daughter 
Parthenope, who married Calliope. Telemachus 
married Egeria and they had a son, Beth. Ausonia 
married Rama. Regulus married Mathematicus, 



APPENDIX 463 

and they had a daughter, Trefoil, who married Aqui- 
la. Irene married Flos. Of the daughters of 
URANUS, Aquarius married Virgo, and Sagittarius 
Apollo. 

The second great family of this period was that 
of SATURN, who had VENUS as his wife. Their chil- 
dren were six Hesperia (daughter) who married 
URANUS; MERCURY (son) who married Lyra (by 
whom he had two sons, SURYA and Apollo, and one 
daughter, Andromeda, who married Argus) ; Caly- 
pso (son) who married Avelledo, by whom he had 
one son Rhea (who married Zama and had two sons 
Sirona and Lachesis) and one daughter, Amalthea; 
Crux (daughter) married NEPTUNE, by whom there 
were five children Melete, son (married Erato, sons 
Hebe, Stella), Tolosa, daughter (married Pindar), 
Virgo, son, (married Aquarius-son Euphrosyne, who 
married Canopus), Alba, daughter (married Altair), 
Leopardus, son, (married Auriga) ; Selene (son) 
who married Beatrix, and by whom there were six 
children, Erato, daughter, who married Melete, Al- 
debaran, son, who married Orion (children: The- 
seus, wife Dactyl; Arcor, husband Capricorn chil- 
dren, Hygeia, wife Alcmene ; Bootes, husband Apis ; 
Gemini, wife Chameleon; Polaris, wife Daleth 
Fomalhaut, son; Arcturus, husband Nitocris; and 
Canopus, husband Euphrosyne) ; Spica, daughter, 
who married Sirius, Albireo, son, who married Hec- 
tor, Leto, son, who married Fons (children: Norma, 
wife Aulus, Scotus, wife Elsa, Sextans, husband 
Pegasus) and Elektra; Vesta (son) who married 
Mira, by whom there was one son, Bellatrix (mar- 
ried Tiphys, sons Juno, who weds Minorca, and Pro- 
serpina, who espouses Colossus), and four daugh- 



464 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

It may be supposed that a very long period will 
be occupied by these great seismic changes, ere the 
new land will be ready for the new Bace, and its 
Manu and its Bodhisattva will lead it thither. 

Then will come the ages during which its seven 
sub-races will rise, and reign, and decay; and from 
the seventh the choosing of the germs of the seventh 
Root Race by its future Manu, and the long labours 
of that new Manu and of His Brother the new Bod- 
hisattva, until it shall, in turn, grow into a definite 
new Race and inherit the earth. It also will have 
its seven sub-races, to rise, and reign, and vanish 
vanishing as the earth itself falls asleep, and passes 
into its fourth obscuration. 

. The Sun of Life will rise on a new earth, the 
planet Mercury, and that fair orb will pass through 
its day of ages, and again that Sun will set and the 
night will fall. A new rising, a new setting, on the 
globes F and G of our Round, and the ending of 
the Round, and the gathering of its fruits into the 
bosom of its Seed Manu. 

Then, after long repose, the fifth, sixth and seventh 
Rounds, ere our terrene Chain shall vanish into 
the past. Then, onwards yet, after an Inter-Chain 
Nirvana, and still there are fifth and sixth and 
seventh Chains yet to come and to pass away, ere 
the Day of the High Gods shall decline to its setting, 
and the soft still Night shall brood over a resting 
system, and the great Preserver shall repose on the 
many-headed serpent of Time. 

But even then the ' Whither ' stretches onward into 
the endless ages of Immortal Life. The dazzled 



APPENDIX 465 

they had as sons : Sirius, Achilles, Alcyone, Orion, 
and one daughter, Mizar. Sirius married Vega, 
and had as children: Mira, Rigel, Ajax, Bellatrix 
and Proserpina, all massacred. Achilles married 
Albireo, and had a daughter, Hector. Alcyone 
married Leo, and had as sons: URANUS and NEP- 
TUNE, and as daughters SURYA and BRHASPATI; all 
these were saved from the massacre, and, as a wo- 
man, SURYA married SATURN, saved at the same 
time, and VAIVASVATA MANU, VIRAJ and MARS were 
their children ; in the next generation, Herakles was 
the son of MARS. Keturning to the children of MARS 
and MERCURY, Mizar married Herakles, the son of 
VIRAJ, and they had three sons: Capricorn, Arcor, 
Fides, and two daughters, Psyche and Pindar. 
Corona married Deneb, and had two sons, one of 
whom was Dorado. Adrona had Pollux as son. 
Cetus married Clio. Others seen were Orpheus, 
VULCAN and VENUS, who were both saved, and 
JUPITER, the head of the community. Vega and Leo 
were sisters, as were Albireo and Helios, the latter 
a very pretty and coquettish young lady. Scorpio 
appeared among the Turanian assailants. 



VI 

IN SHAMBALLA, ABOUT B. C. 60,000 

MARS, a Toltec Prince from Poseidonis, married 
JUPITER, the daughter of the MANU. They had VIRAJ 
as son, who married SATURN and of them VAIVASVATA 
MANU was bora. 



466 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

VII 

IN THE CITY OF THE BRIDGE, AND THE 

VALLEY OF THE SECOND SUB-RACE, 

ABOUT B. C. 40,000 

Two families chiefly provided the emigrants, 
Corona and Theodoros, who sent two sons, Herak- 
les and Pindar, and Demeter and Fomalhaut sent 
their sons Vega and Aurora, and their daughters 
Sirius and Dorado; their remaining son Mira and 
daughter Draco remained with them in the City. 
In the City were also Castor and Rhea. Lachesis, 
who married Amalthea, had Velleda as son; and 
Calypso who ran away with Amalthea, Crux, a 
foreigner, with Phocea, jcame as visitors. 

Herakles married Sirius, and they had as chil- 
dren: Alcyone, Mizar, Orion, Achilles, URANUS, 
Aldebaran, Siwa, Selene, NEPTUNE, Capricorn, and 
some others unrecognised. Alcyone married Per- 
seus, and VULCAN, Bellatrix, Rigel, Algol, and Aro 
turus were their children. Mizar married Deneb, 
and their children were Wenceslas, Ophiuchus, and 
Cygnus, with many unrecognised. Orion married 
Eros, and had Sagittarius, Theseus and Mu in his 
family. Achilles married Leo, and had as children 
Ulysses, Vesta, Psyche, and Cassiopeia. URANUS 
married Andromeda, and MARS and VENUS were 
born to them. Aldebaran married Pegasus and 
Capella and Juno were among their children. Selene 
married Albireo, and MERCURY appeared in their 
family ; she married MARS, and they had VAIVASVATA 
MANU as son. Capicorn married her first cousin, 



APPENDIX 467 

Polaris, and their children were Vajra, Adrona, 
Pollux, and Diana. 

Pindar married Beatrix, and they had Gemini, 
Arcor, and Polaris as children. Gemini married a 
foreigner, Apis, and Spica and Fides were born to 
them as twins. 

The children of Sirius are given above; his 
brother Vega married Helios, and they had 
children Leo, Proserpina, Canopus, Aquarius, and 
Ajax. Aurora married Hector, and one of their 
children was Albireo. Dorado had a daughter Ale- 
theia, who married Argus. 



VIII 

IN THE CITY OF THE BRIDGE AND THE 

VALLEY OF THE THIRD SUB-RACE, ABOUT 

B. C. 32,000. 

THE MANU was married to MERCURY, and i.^d 
Sirius as a younger son. Sirius married Mi/^r % 
and had as children: Alcyone, Orion, VENUS, Uhv 
ses, Albireo and SATURN, and went to the valley. Ai- 
cyone married Achilles, who was the daughter of 
Vesta and Aldebaran, and had Libra as a brother. 
Orion married Herakles, an Akkadian, and they had 
six sons: the eldest, Capella, was a fine horseman; 
Fides, a good runner, slim and lightly built; Do- 
rado, a fair rider and first-rate at games, fond of 
a game like quoits, throwing rings on upright posts ; 
Elektra, Canopus and Arcor, the third, fifth and 



468 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

It may be supposed that a very long period will 
be occupied by these great seismic changes, ere the 
new land will be ready for the new Race, and its 
Manu and its Bodhisattva will lead it thither. 

Then will come the ages during which its seven 
sub-races will rise, and reign, and decay; and from 
the seventh the choosing of the germs of the seventh 
Root Race by its future Manu, and the long labours 
of that new Manu and of His Brother the new Bod- 
hisattva, until it shall, in turn, grow into a definite 
new Race and inherit the earth. It also will have 
its seven sub-races, to rise, and reign, and vanish 
vanishing as the earth itself falls asleep, and passes 
into its fourth obscuration. 

. The Sun of Life will rise on a new earth, the 
planet Mercury, and that fair orb will pass through 
its day of ages, and again that Sun will set and the 
night will fall. A new rising, a new setting, on the 
globes F and G of our Round, and the ending of 
the Round, and the gathering of its fruits into the 
bosom of its Seed Manu. 

Then, after long repose, the fifth, sixth and seventh 
Rounds, ere our terrene Chain shall vanish into 
the past. Then, onwards yet, after an Inter-Chain 
Nirvana, and still there are fifth and sixth and 
seventh Chains yet to come and to pass away, ere 
the Day of the High Gods shall decline to its setting, 
and the soft still Night shall brood over a resting 
system, and the great Preserver shall repose on the 
many-headed serpent of Time. 

But even then the * Whither 1 stretches onward into 
the endless ages of Immortal Life. The dazzled 



APPENDIX 469 

Markab was a soldier, and Married Clio. Vesta, 
Mizar, Albireo, Orion, Ajax, Hector, Crux and Se- 
lene were also seen. Trapezium was an insurgent 
chief. 



THE FIRST ARYAN IMMIGRATION INTO 
INDIA, B. C. 18,875 

MARS married MERCURY, and had sons URANUS, 
Herakles, and Alcyone, daughters BRHASPATI and 
Demeter. BRHASPATI married first VULCAN, and 
after his death Corona, the son of VIRAJ, and had 
one son, Trefoil, who married Arcturus, and five 
daughters: Fides, who married Betelgueuse; Thor, 
who married Iphigenia; Rama, who married Per- 
seus ; Daedalus, who married Elsa ; and Rector who 
married Fomalhaut. SATURN was King in South 
India, and had Crux as son ; SURYA was High Priest, 
and OSIRIS, Deputy High Priest. 

Herakles married Capella, and had as sons Cas- 
siopeia, Altair and Leto, as daughters Argus and 
Centaurus. Alcyone married Theseus, and had 
four sons : Andromeda, Betelgueuse, Fomalhaut and 
Perseus, and three daughters, Draco, NEPTUNE, and 
Arcturus. Demeter married Wenceslas, and had as 
sons, Elsa, Iphigenia and Diana, who married re- 
spectively, Daedalus, Thor, and Draco. Cassiopeia 
married Capricorn, and had Cetus, Spica and Ad- 
rona as sons, Sirona as daughter; Spica married 
Kudos, Altair married Polaris, and had Tolosa as 



470 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

son. Leto married Gemini. Argus married Andro- 
meda and had among her sons Arcor, who married 
Mizar, the daughter of NEPTUNE and Hector; the 
latter had also Siwa and Orpheus as sons. Diomede 
married Orpheus. Regnlus and Irene were daugh- 
ters of Arcor and Mizar. Argus married a second 
husband, Mathematicus, and had three daughters, 
Diomede, Judex who married Beatus, and Kudos. 
Centaurus married Concordia. Of Alcyone's sons: 
Andromeda married Argus as said, and died early ; 
Betelgueuse married Fides, and had as sons Flos, 
and Beatus who married Judex. Fomalhaut mar- 
ried Rector, Perseus married Rama, Draco Diana, 
NEPTUNE Hector, and Arcturus Trefoil. Alcyone's 
wife, Theseus, was the daughter of Glaucus and 
Telemachus, and the latter had a sister, Soma. Alas- 
tor was in Central Asia. Taurus, a Mongol, had 
Procyon as wife, and Cygnus as daughter, who 
married Aries. 



XI 

AN ARYAN IMMIGRATION INTO INDIA, 
B. C. 17,455 

JUPITER married SATURN and had MARS as his son 
and MERCURY as his sister. MARS married NEPTUNE, 
and had sons, Herakles, Siwa and Mizar, daughters 
OSIRIS, Pindar and Andromeda. Herakles married 
Cetus, and had, as sons, Gemini and Arcor; as 
daughters, Polaris who married Diana, Capricorn 
who married Glaucus, and Adrona. Siwa married 



APPENDIX 471 

Proserpina, Mizar married Kama, and had as sons : 
Diana and Daedalus; as daughters: Diomede and 
Kudos. OSIRIS married Perseus. 

VULCAN married Corona, and their three daugh- 
ters, Kama Rector and Thor, married respectively 
Mizar, Trefoil and Leto. Psyche, a friend of Mars, 
married Arcturus, and had as sons, Alcyone, Albi- 
reo, Leto and Ajax ; as daughters, Beatrix, Procyon 
and Cygnus. Alcyone married Eigel and had as 
sons: Cassiopeia who married Diomede; Crux who 
married Kudos, and Wenceslas who married Beg- 
ulus. They had also three daughters: Taurus 
who married Concordia, Irene who married Flos, 
and Theseus who married Daedalus. Albireo mar- 
ried Hector, and had a daughter Beatus, who mar- 
ried Iphigenia. Leto married Thor, and had a son 
Flos. Ajax married Elsa, Beatrix Mathematicus 
and Cygnus Fomalhaut. Capella, another friend of 
Mars, married Judex, and had as sons Perseus, who 
married OSIRIS, and Fomalhaut who married Cyg- 
nus. The daughters were Hector, Demeter who 
married Aries, and "Rlsa who married Ajax. Vajra 
married Orpheus, and had Draca and Altair as sons, 
BRHASPATI, URANUS and Proserpina as daughters. 
Draco married Argus, and had as son Concordia, 
who married Taurus. Altair married Centaurus 
and their daughter Kegulus married Wenceslas. 
Betelgueuse married Canopus, and had Spica and 
Olympia as sons, Rigel as daughter. Spica married 
Telemachus, and had two sons, Glaucus and Iphig- 
enia, whose marriages are mentioned above. Castor 
married Pollux, and had as sons Aries and Alastor, 
and three daughters, Minerva, Sirona and Pomona. 



472 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

XII 

AN ARYAN IMMIGRATION INTO INDIA, 
B. C. 15,950 

SURYA was the father of MARS and MERCUBY. 
MARS married BRHASPATI, and had sons, JUPITER, 
Siwa and VIRAJ; daughters, OSIRIS, URANUS, and 
Ulysses. JUPITER married Herakles, and they had 
as sons : Beatrix who married Pindar, Aletheia who 
married Taurus, Betelgueuse; and as daughters: 
Canopus who married Fomalhaut, Pollux who mar- 
ried Melpomene, and Hector who married NEPTUNE. 
URANUS married Leo, and Ulysses Vajra ; the latter 
had as sons: Clio who married Concordia, Melpo- 
mene, and Alastor, who married Gemini; as 
daughters : Irene who married Adrona, Sirona who 
married Spica, and Beatus who married Soma. 

MERCURY married SATURN, and their sons were: 
Selene, Leo, Vajra and Castor, and their daughters, 
Herakles, Alcyone and Mizar. Selene married Au- 
rora, and had as sons : Wenceslas . who married 
Crux, Theseus who married Lignus, and Polaris 
who married Proserpina ; as daughters : Taurus who 
married Aletheia, Arcturus, who married Perseus, 
and Argus who married Draco. Leo married URA- 
NUS, and had as sons: Leto, who married Demeter, 
Draco, Fomalhaut both married as above and as 
daughters: Centaurus who married Altair, Proser- 
pina, and Concordia who married Clio. Castor mar- 
ried Iphigenia. Alcyone married Albireo, and had 
four sons: NEPTUNE who married Hector, Psyche 
married Clarion, Perseus married Arcturus, and 
Ajax Capella; the daughters were Eigel who mar- 



APPENDIX 473 

ried Centurion, Demeter who married Leto, and 
Algol who married Priam. Mizar married Glau- 
cus, and had two sons, Soma and Flos. The 
daughters, Diomede and Telemachus, married 
respectively Trefoil and Betelgueuse ; VULCAN mar- 
ried Cetus and had one son, Procyon, and three 
daughters, Olympia, Minerva and Pomona. Arcor 
married Capricorn and had four sons: Altair, Ad- 
rona, Spica, Trefoil, and four daughters: Pindar, 
Capella, Crux, and Gemini. Corona married Or- 
pheus, and had three sons: Kama who married 
VENUS, Cassiopeia who married Bector, and Aries ; 
of the daughters, Andromeda married Daedalus, El- 
sa Mathematicus, and Pallas Diana. Thor married 
Kudos ; his sons were Mathematicus, Diana and Dae 
dalus who married three sisters as above and 
Judex; the daughter was Eector. 

At the one pole of human evolution there stood 
at the date of this immigration the four KUMAEAS, 
the MANU and the MAHAGUBU; far down towards the 
other, Scorpio, the high priest Ya-uli. 



XIII 
IN NOETHEEN INDIA, B. C. 12,800 

MARS and MERCURY are brothers. MARS married 
SATURN, and had two sons, Vajra and VIRAJ, and two 
daughters, VULCAN and Herakles. Vajra married 
Proserpina, and had three sons, Ulysses, Fides and 
Selene, and three daughters, Beatrix, Hector and 
Hestia. VIRAJ married OSIRIS, VULCAN married 



474 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

URANUS, and Herakles Polaris. Ulysses married 
Philae, and had three sons: Cygnus who married 
Diana, Calliope who married Parthenope, and Pis* 
ces Ajax; the daughters were Bellatrix who mar- 
ried Thor, Aquarius who married Clarion, and Pe- 
pin who married Lignus. Eeturning to the sons of 
Vajra we have: Fides who married Iphigenia, and 
had three sons: Aquila who married Sappho, Kudos 
Concordia, and Beatus Gimel. They had four 
daughters: Herminius married to Nicosia, Sextans 
to Virgo, Sagittarius to Clio, Parthenope to Callio- 
pe, Selene married Achilles and had two sons: 
Aldebaran marrying Elektra, and Helios marrying 
Lomia. There were five daughters : Vega marry- 
ing Leo, Kigel marrying Leto, Alcestis marrying 
Aurora, Colossus marrying Aries, and Eros marry- 
ing Juno. Of Vajra 's daughters, Beatrix married 
Albireo, and had two sons, Berenice who married 
Canopus, and Deneb. The daughters, Pindar and 
Lyra, married respectively Capella and Euphrosy- 
ne. Hector married Wenceslas, and has as sons: 
Leo, Leto, Norma marrying Melete, Nicosia mar- 
rying Herminius ; the daughters were : Ajax married 
lo Pisces, and Crux married to Demeter. Hestia 
married Telemachus; their sons were: Thor, Dio- 
niede married to Chrysos; the daughters were Sap 
pno, Trefoil, Minorca married to Lobelia, and Mag- 
nus to Calypso. Herakles, the daughter of MARS, 
married Polaris; their three sons, Viola, Dorado, 
and Olympia, married respectively Egeria, Dactyl 
and Mira ; the daughter, Phoenix, married Atalanta, 
Viola and Egeria had four sons: Betelgueuse mar- 
ried to Iris, Nitocris married to Brunhilda, Taurus 
to Tiphvs and Perseus to Fons: one daughter, Lo- 



APPENDIX 475 

mia, married Helios, the other, Libra, married Bo- 
reas. Dorado and Dactyl had sons : Centurion mar- 
ried to Theodoros, Pegasus to Priam, Scotos to Au- 
sonia; daughters: Arcturus to Eector, and Brun- 
hilda to Nitocris. Olympia married Mira, and had 
four sons: Clarion married Aquarius, Pollux Can- 
cer, Procyon Avelledo, and Capricorn Zama. The 
daughter, Arcor, married Centaurus. Phoenix, the 
daughter of Herakles, who married Atalanta, had 
three sons: Gemini, Lignus and Virgo, who mar- 
ried Adrona, Pepin and Sextans; there were three 
daughters: Daleth married Kegulus, Dolphin mar- 
ried Formator, and Daphne Apis. That finishes the 
descendants of MAKS. 

MERCURY, his brother, married VENUS, and had 
NEPTUNE and URANUS as sons, OSIRIS, Proserpina 
and Tolosa as daughters. URANUS married VULCAN, 
had two sons, Rama and Albireo, who married Glau- 
cus and Beatrix ; and two daughters, BRHASPATI and 
ATHENA, who married Apollo and JUPITER. Eama 
and Glaucus had Juno and Ara as sons, who mar- 
ried Eros and Ophiuchus; their daughters were 
four: Canopus married to Berenice, Diana to Cyg- 
nus, Chrysos to Diomede, and Judex to Irene. Al- 
bireo, marrying into the family of Vajra, has his 
children noted above. BRHASPATI and Apollo had 
three sons : Capella married to Pindar, Corona and 
Siwa; their daughter Proteus married Bex. OSIRIS 
married VIRAJ, and had as sons JUPITER and Apollo, 
the latter marrying BRHASPATI. The daughter, Pal- 
las, married Castor; they had five sons: Clio who 
married Sagittarius, Markab who married Cetus, 
Aries who married Colossus, Aglaia who married 



476 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

Pomona, and Sirona, who married Quies. That 
finishes the descendants of MERCURY. 

Algol married Theseus, and had son Alcyone, who 
married Mizar, the daughter of Orpheus and sister 
of Psyche. Alcyone and Mizar had five sons : Fom- 
alhaut who married Alexandros, Altair Alba, Wen- 
ceslas Hector, Telemachus Hestia, Soma Flos ; their 
three daughters were: Iphigenia married to Fides, 
Glaucus to Rama, Philae to Ulysses. Fomalhaut 
and Alexandros had three sons : Bex who married 
Proteus, Rector who married Arcturus, and Leopar- 
dus; their three daughters were: Melete who mar- 
ried Norma, Ausonia who married Scotus, and Con- 
cordia who married Kudos. 

Altair and Alba had three sons: Apis who mar- 
ried Daphne, Centaurus who married Arcor, and 
Flora ; their daughters were Chamaeleon, Gimel who 
married Beatus, and Priam who married Pegasus. 
The children of Wenceslas are given among the de- 
scendants of MARS, as are those of Telemachus, Iphi- 
genia, and Philae, while those of Glaucus are among 
the descendants of MERCURY. Soma and Flos had 
four sons: Alastor married to Melpomene, Boreas 
to Libra, Regulus to Daleth, Irene to Judex; the two 
daughters, Phocea and Daedalus, married Zephyr 
and Leopardus. 

Aletheia took Spes to wife, and had two sons, 
Mona and Fortuna, and four daughters: Achilles, 
Aulus, Flos and Alba. Mona married Andromeda, 
and they had as sons : Lobelia who married Minor- 
ca, and Zephyr who married Phocea ; their daughters 
were : Adrona who married Gemini, Cetus who mar- 
ried Markab, Melpomene who married Alastor, and 
Avelledo who married Procyon, Fortuna married 



APPENDIX 477 

Auriga, and their two sons, Hebe and Stella, mar- 
ried Trefoil and Chamaeleon ; their daughters were : 
Iris, Tiphys, Eudoxia married to Flora, and Pomo- 
na to Aglaia. Aulus married Argus, and they had 
three sons: Calypso married to Magnus, Formator 
to Dolphin, and Minerva; the daughters, Elektra 
and Ophiuchus, married Aldebaran and Ara. 

Psyche, the brother of Mizar, married Mathema- 
ticus, and they had three daughters: Egeria, Elsa 
who married Beth, and Mira. Elsa and Beth had 
Aurora, Demeter and Euphrosyne as sons, who mar- 
ried Alcestis, Crux and Lyra; their daughters were: 
Theodoros married to Centurion, and Fons to Per- 
seus. 

Draco married Cassiopeia; their sons were: Ar- 
gus Beth, Atalanta and Castor, who married Pallas ; 
his daughters were: Andromeda, Dactyl, Alexand- 
ros, Auriga. Vesta was also present. 



XIV 
THE ARYANISATION OF EGYPT 

IN the body of this book we have three times re- 
ferred (on pp. 228, 267, 311) to the expedition sent 
forth from South India by the MANU for the ex- 
press purpose of Aryanising the noble families of 
Egypt. While the book is going through the press 
some further investigations have been made, which 
are found to throw additional light upon the subject, 
and to some extent to link it up with accepted Egyp- 
tian history. The earlier part of the book being 
already in type, all that we can do is to append here 



478 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

an article which has been written to explain the 
later discoveries. 

Kef erring to our remark on p. 311 that "Mane- 
tho's history apparently deals with this Aryan dy- 
nasty," we now see that he quite reasonably be- 
gins with the reunification of Egypt under the MANU, 
and that the date which our researches assign to 
that reunification (though not yet verified with per- 
fect exactitude) comes within a few years of 5,510 
B. C., which is the latest selection by the most dis- 
tinguished living Egyptologist for the commence- 
ment of the First Dynasty. The new Egyptologi- 
cal theories now make the date of the Pharaoh 
Unas about two hundred years earlier than we do. 

Others of our characters, besides the few whom 
MARS took with Him, are to be found in Egypt in 
13,500 B. C. ; a full list of all these will be given 
when the Lives of Alcyone appear in book form. 

In the sixth life of Alcyone we followed the first 
of the great Aryan migrations from the shores of 
what was then the Central Asian sea to the south 
of the Indian Peninsula. The religious kingdom 
that the Aryans established there was, as centuries 
rolled on, used by the MANU as a subsidiary centre 
of radiation, as we have already said. 

From South India likewise was sent forth the 
expedition destined to bring about the Aryanisa- 
tion of Egypt, which was carried out in much the 
same way and by many of the same egos who five 
thousand years previously had played their part in 
the migration from Central Asia to which reference 
has just been made. 

About the year 13,500 B. C. (shortly after the 
time of the thirteenth life of Alcyone and the twelfth 



APPENDIX 479 

life of Orion, when so many of our characters had 
taken birth in the Tlavatli race inhabiting the south- 
ern part of the Island of Poseidonis) VIRAJ was 
ruler of the great South Indian Empire. He had 
married BRHASPATI, and Mars was one of their sons. 
The MANU appeared astrally to the Emperor, and 
directed him to send MARS over the sea to Egypt 
by way of Ceylon. VIRAJ obeyed, and MARS depart- 
ed upon his long journey, taking with him ( accord- 
ing to the instructions received) a band of young 
men and women, of whom twelve are recognisable : 
Ajax, Betelgueuse, Deneb, Leo, Perseus and Theo- 
doros among the men, and Arcturus, Canopus, 
lympia, VULCAN, Pallas and OSIRIS among the ladies. 

On their arrival in Egypt, then under Toltec rule, 
they were met by JUPITER, the Pharaoh of the time. 
He had one child only his daughter SATURN his 
wife having died in child-birth. The High-Priest 
SURYA had been directed in a vision by the MAHAGU- 
RU to receive the strangers with honour, and to ad- 
vise JUPITER to give his daughter to MARS in mar- 
riage, which he did; and in a comparatively short 
time marriages were arranged among the existing 
nobility for all the new-comers. 

Small as was this importation of Aryan blood, in 
a few generations it had tinged the whole of the 
Egyptian nobility, for since the Pharaoh had set his 
seal of august approval upon these .mixed mar- 
riages, all the patrician families competed eagerly 
for the honour of an alliance with the sons or 
daughters of the new-comers. The mingling of the 
two races produced a new and distinctive type, 
which had the high Aryan features, but the Tolteo 
colouring the type which we know so well from the 



480 MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 

Egyptian monuments. So powerful is the Aryan 
blood that it still shows its unmistakable traces 
even after centuries of dilution ; and from this time 
onward an incarnation among the principal classes 
of Egypt counted as a birth in the first sub-race of 
the fifth root-race. 

Many changes took place as the centuries rolled 
by, and the impetus given by the Aryan rejuvena- 
tion gradually died out. The country never reached 
so low a level as the parallel civilisation of Poseido- 
nis, chiefly because of the retention of Aryan tra- 
dition by a certain clan whose members claimed ex- 
clusively for themselves direct descent from the 
royal line of MARS and SATUBW. For more than a 
thousand years after the Aryanisation this clan 
ruled the country, the Pharaoh being always its 
head ; but there came a time when for political rea- 
sons the reigning monarch espoused a foreign prin- 
cess, who by degrees acquired over him so great an 
influence that she was able to wean him from the 
traditions of his forefathers, and to establish new 
forms of worship to which the clan as a whole would 
not subscribe. The country, weary of Aryan strict- 
ness, followed its monarch into license and luxury; 
the clan drew its ranks together in stern disap- 
proval, and thenceforward its members held them- 
selves markedly aloof not declining offices in the 
army or in the service of the State, but marrying 
onlv among themselves, and making a great point 
of maintaining old customs and what they called the 
purity of the religion as well as of the race. 

After nearly four thousand years had passed, we 
find a condition of affairs in which the Egyptian 
Empire, its religion and even its language were 



APPENDIX 481 

alike degenerate and decaying. Only in the ranks of 
the conservative clan can we find some pale reflec- 
tion of the Egypt of earlier days. About this time, 
among the priests of the clan arose some who were 
prophets, who re-echoed in Egypt the message that 
was being given in Poseidonis a warning that, be- 
cause of the wickedness of these mighty and long- 
established civilisations, they were doomed to des- 
truction, arid that it behoved the few righteous to 
flee promptly from the wrath to come. Just as 'a 
considerable proportion of the white race of moun- 
taineers left Poseidonis, so the members of the clan 
in a body shook off the dust of Egypt from their 
feet, took ship across the Bed Sea and found a re- 
fuge among the mountains of Arabia. 

As we know, in due time the prophecy was ful- 
filled, and in the year 9564 B. C. the island of Posei- 
donis sank beneath the Atlantic. The effect of the 
cataclysm on the rest of the world was of the most 
serious character, and for the land of Egypt it 
was specially ruinous. Up to this point Egypt had 
had an extensive western seaboard, and although 
the Sahara Sea was shallow, it was sufficient for 
the great fleets of comparatively small ships which 
carried the traffic to Atlantis and the Algerian 
Islands. In this great catastrophe the bed of the 
Sahara Sea rose, a vast tidal wave swept over 
Egypt, and almost its entire population was de- 
stroyed. And even when everything settled down, 
the country was a wilderness, bounded on the west 
no longer by a fair and peaceful sea, but by a vast 
salt swamp, which as the centuries rolled on dried 
into an inhospitable desert. Of all the glories of 
Egypt there remained only the Pyramids tower- 



482 MAN: WHENCE. HOW AND WHITHER 

ing in lonely desolation a desolation which en- 
dured for fifteen hundred years before the self- 
exiled clan returned from its mountain, refuge, 
grown into a great nation. 

But long before this, half-savage tribes had ven- 
tured into the land, fighting their primitive battles 
on the banks of the great river which once had 
borne the argosies of a mighty civilisation, and was 
yet again to witness a revival of those ancient glor- 
ies, and to mirror the stately temples of Osiris and 
Amen-ra. Professor Flinders Petrie describes five 
of these earlier races, which overran different parts 
of the country and warred desultorily among them- 
selves. 

1. An aquiline race of the Libyo-Amorite type, 
which occupied a large part of the land, and held 
its own longer than any other, maintaining for cen- 
turies a fair level of civilisation. 

2. A Hittite race with curly hair and plaited 
beards. 

3. A people with pointed noses and Jong pigtails 
mountaineers, wearing long, thick robes. 

4. A people with short and tilted noses, who es- 
tablished themselves for some time in the central 
part of the country. 

5. Another variant of this race, with longer noses 
and projecting beards, who occupied chiefly the 
marshland near the Mediterranean. All these are 
observable by clairvoyance, but they have mingled 
so much that it is often difficult to distinguish them ; 
and in addition to these, and probably earlier in the 
field than any of them, a savage negroid race from 
the interior of Africa, which has left practically no 
record of its passing. 



APPENDIX 483 

Into this turmoil of mixed races came our clan, 
priest-led across the sea from its Arabian hills, and 
gradually made its footing sure in Upper Egypt, 
establishing its capital in Abydos, and slowly pos- 
sessing itself of more and more of the surrounding 
land, until by weight of its superior civilisation it 
was recognised as the dominant power. All through 
its earlier centuries its policy was less to fight than 
to absorb to build out of this chaos of peoples a 
race upon which its hereditary characteristics 
should be stamped. A thousand years had passed 
since their arrival, when, in the twenty-first life of 
Alcyone, we find MAKS reigning over an already 
highly-organised empire; but it was fourteen hun- 
dred years later still before the MANIT Himself 
(they have corrupted His name to Menes now) 
united the whole of Egypt under one rule, and 
founded at the same time the first dynasty and His 
great city of Memphis thus initiating in person 
another stage of the work begun by His direction in 
13,500 B. C. 

Clio and Markab were noticed among a group of 
Egyptian statesmen who disapproved of the Aryan 
immigration and schemed against it. Clio's wife 
Adrona, and Markab 's wife Avelledo were impli- 
cated in their plots. All four of them were even- 
tually exiled, as was also Cancer, the sister of Ad- 
rona. 



INDEX 



ABOLITION of war, 428 

Action, self-sacrifice in, 367 

temple of, 367 

Adscititious Arabs, 273 

Agnishvatta Pitrs, 23 

Airships 128 

Akbar, reincarnation of, 428 

Albanians, the 296 

'Alcyone/32,43, 110, 114,116,236 

237, 260, 274, 280, 310, 313, 

314, 454, 462, 465, 466, 

472, 476, 478. 

All Paths equal, 371 
Amun-ra, 269, 479 
Ancient Peru, 134 
Angel evolution, the 12, 20, 25 
Angels of the stars, 214, 215 
Animal-men, 69, 107 
Animals of the Moon, 30, 32 
pet, in Peru, 186 
Anthropoid apes 111 
Antiquity, mighty mon- 
archies of, 135 
Ants, bees and wheat, 130 
Appearance, physical, of 

Peruvians, 136 
Apollo's Lyre, 298 
Appointments of school- 
rooms, 380 
Arabia, Manu's rule in, 21, 228 
Arabian emigration to the 

Somali Coast, 271 

sub-race, the, 259, 262 



Arbitration in Peru, 141 

Archangel Raphael, the, 369 

Architecture, Aryan, 242 
Arabians and Aryans, 

intermarriage of, 265 

Arabs, adscititious 273 

Hamyaritic, 273 
Arabs, Manu's collision 

with the, 263, 264 

in the Community, 397, 398 

Peruvian, 165 

Arhat initiation, the, 441 

Armada, destruction of 

Atlantean, 293 

Arranging to die, 388, 389 

Artistic race, the 289 

Arts in the Community, 410 

Aryan, an, 251 
and Atlantean civilisations 

contrasted, 249-250 

architecture, 238 
blood m East Africa, 311 

brotherhood, 250 

ceremony, an, 252 

colonisation, 257 

Empire, the, 247 
Empire, decline of the, 258 

festival, an, 252 

migrations, 257 

Mysteries, the, 245 
race, Toltec infusion 

in, 240 

root-stock, 256 



488 



MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 



Aryan civilisation, the 456 
Aryanisation of Egypt, 310, 477 
Aryans and Arabs, inter- 
marriage of, 265 
brotherhood of the, 242 
in Australasia, 311 
in Egypt, 228, 267, 477 
in Java, 311 
joyous religion of the, 251 
joyous work of the, 242 
stern rule of the, 251 
Ascension of the Maha- 

guru, 285 
Ashoka, King, vision of, 321 
Asia, removal from Cen- 
tral 306 
Astrological theories in 

Chaldaea, 192 

Astronomical dances, 384 

Astronomy in Peru, 163 

Asuras, 23 

'Athena/ 461, 475 

Athens, 298 
Atlantean civilisation, the, 

456 

Atlantean and Aryan civi- 
lisations contrasted, 249,250 
armada, destruction 

of, 293 

art, 129 

government, 131 

Atlanteans built Egyptian 

pyramids, 227 

in Egypt, 227, 266 

in India, 306 

Atlantis, ii, 105, 126 

food in, 131 

science in, 129 

Atom, force in the, 414 

the pranic, 245 

worship of the, 252 

Attainment, levels of 13,18 

Aura of a Deva, 348 



Australasia held by 

Aryans, 258 

Autocracy, success of, 460 

Avatara, an, 11 

BABYLONIA and Peru, con- 
trast between, 191 
Raider, 299 
Balloon, the nitrogen, 245 
Barhishad Pitrs, 23, 58, 77 
Basket-works, the, 

68, 82, 85, 89, 94, 

Beauty, promotion of, 444 

Bees, ants and wheat, 130 
Beginnings of the fifth 

root race, 225 
sixth root race, 323, 329 
Benediction of the Deva- 

priest, 350, 357, 370 

Bhakti yoga, 366 

Birth in the Community, 387 

in the Manu's family, 394 

preparation for, 388 

Bismarck, 97 

Black magic, story of, 116 

Blue Temple, the, 354 

music in the, 355 

Boat-load, the orange, 

57, 68, 95 

the pink, 95 

the yellow, 57, 69 

Boat-loads, the, 77, 93 

Bodhisattva, the, 31, 253 

Body, disposal of the, in 

the Community, 390 

Book of Duty, The, 220 

Books in Peru, 179 

Brahmana, 315 

Brain, stimulation of the, 375 

Breeding, scientific, 129 

Bridge, the, 247 
City of (see Manova 

City) 

Bridges in Peru, 173 

Brhaspati, 237, 461, 465 

471, 472. 475 



1NDEI 



489 



Britain, future govern- 
ment of, 433 
Brotherhood, Aryan, 242, 249 
BUDDHA, His office, 72 
The Lord Dipankara, 71, 72 
The Lord Gautama, 

32, 71, 225, 300 

The Lord Kashyapa, 72 

Building in Peru, 168 

of the great city, 240, 242 

Buildings, public in the 

Community, 396, 422 

Byarsha, 309 

QBSAR, Julius, 107, 427 

Calculation in Peru, 187 

Carnivorous trees, 50 

Carthaginians, 296 
Caste system, founding of 

the, 315 

Castes, colours of the, 315 

intermarriage of, 307 
Catastrophe of 75,025 B C, 

231 

Caucasian race, the, 290 
Causal body, conscious- 
ness raised into the, 363 
Central Asia, removal 

from, 306 
Ceremonies, public, in 

Chaidaea, 202, 209 

Ceremony, an Aryan, 252 

Chain, the first, 16 

the second, 25 

the third, 27 

Chakrams, 370 

Chakshushas, the Seed- 

Manu, 74 
Chaidaea, astrological theor- 
ies in, 192 
early history of, 221 
education in, 219 
festivals in, 206 
poetry in, 221 
prayer in, 201 
priesthood in, 218 



public ceremonies in, 

202209 

religion in, 191 

sacred fires in, 212 

star-worship in, 211 

symbolical colours in, 207 

temples in, 202 

Chaldaean Empire, destruc- 
tion of, 222 

Changes, seismic, 234 

Character of the fifth sub- 
race 302 

Chemistry in Peru, 162 

Cheops, 227 

Chhayas, 59 

Chief priest in the Com- 
munity, 344 

Chieftain of the Ray, 

349, 357, 362, 370 

Children, education of, 374 

of the Manu, the, 335 

of the Sun, the, 139 

Children's services, 384 

China conquered by Aryans, 

257 

in the future, 435 

Choosing partners in the 

Community, 392 

Choric dance, the, 384 

Chosen, migration of the, 227 

segregation of the, 226 

Christ, religion of the, 429, 431 

return of the, 427 

City, a Moon, 46 

a park-like, 422 

of the Golden Gate, 105, 

107, 110, 114, 126, 233 454 

of the Sun, 315 

the Sacred, 244 

City of the Manu, 

234, 241, 246, 276, 466 

building of the, 242 

destruction of the, 315 

science in the, 255 

writing in the, 256 

Civilisation, the Atlantean, 456 



490 



MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 



the Aryan, 456 

Civilisation, a Turanian, 250 

of Egypt, joyous, 270 
Civilisations, Aryan and 

Atlantean contrasted, 207, 256 
Clairvoyant teachers, 375 
Clan, the, 110, 114 
Gasses in imagination, ad- 
vanced, 377 
Cloth factory, a, 412 
Colony on Mars, a, 74 
Colour Deva, a 346 

sermon of the Deva- 

priest, 354 
Colours, symbolical, in 

Chaldaea, 207 

Common-gender pronoun, a, 417 
Community, architecture 

in the, 397 

arts in the, 410 

birth in the, 387 
choosing partners in 

the, 392 
conditions of work in 

the, 412, 415 

cooking in the, 418 

death in the, 390 

Devas in the, 342 
disposal of body in the, 390 

dress in the, 40G 

ethnography in the, 407 
economic conditions in 

the, 411 

farming in the, 401, 419, 420 

food in the, 401, 402 

founding of the, 330 

furniture in the, 390 

government of the, 336 

houses in the, 397 
how to prepare for 

the 442, 444 

language in the, 383 

length of life in the, 488 

libraries in the, 404 

locomotion in the, 424 

machinery in the, 413 



marriage in the, 392 
musical instruments in 

the, 354 

newspapers in the, 405 
private property in 

the, 420 

progress of the, 442 
psychical development 

in the, 339 
public buildings in the, 

396, 422 

public meetings in the, 406 
religion in the, 341 
sanitation and irri- 
gation in the, 425 
science in the, 407 
spirit of the, 337 
stature in the, 396 
temple services in the, 343 
Theosophy in the, 341 
vegetarianism in the, 401 
visitors to the, 337 

Conditions, economic in 
the Community, 411 
of work in the Com- 
munity, 412, 415 
Confidence in the Manu, 340 
Congregation of the dead, 372 

Conquest of Georgia, 290 

of Mesopotamia, 274 

Consciousness raised into 

the causal body, 363 

the vegetable, 25 

Continuous reincarnation 

in the Community, 332 

Contrast between Baby- 
lonia and Peru, 191 

Conventional type, the, 84 

Cooking in the Commun- 
ity, 418 

Co-operation between 
parents and schol- 

masters, 376 



INDEX 



491 



'Corona/ 107, 110, 114, 229 236, 

255, 256, 258, 260, 262, 278, 

280, 309, 313, 461, 465, 465, 

469, 471, 473 

Council of the Manu, 338 

Crete, 291 

Crimson, meaning of, 345 

Temple, the, 345 

Curriculum in Peru, 157 

in the Community, 381 

DAGHESTAN, 302 

Daitya, 114, 125 

Daityas, 314 

Dance, the choric, 384 

Dances, astronomical, 384 

symbolical, 385 

Dark Face, Lords of the, 

57,96 

Dasyas, 314 

Day of Judgment, 14, 48, 53 

Dead, congregation of the, 372 
Death, arranging for, 393 

in the Community, 390 

Decision of the Monad, 327 

Decline of the Aryan 

Empire, 258 

Deity, the Solar, 342 

Delhi, founding of, 313 

Destiny of the fifth race, 304 
Destruction of the Atlan- 
tean armada, 293 

of the Chaldaean Em- 
pire, 222 
Deva, aura of a, 348 
evolution, the, 12, 20, 25 
helper, the, 324 
materialisation of a, 346, 375 
of colour, 346 
pictures shown by a, 325 
Deva-priest, the, 347 
benediction of the 357, 369 
colour sermon of the, 354 
music of the, 357 
Devas in the Community, 342 
materialisation of, 346, 375 
move among men, 343, 386 



of music, 357 

special training by, 373 

the healing, 368 

the yellow, 361 

Development by music, 298 

of the horse, 231 

of the sixth sub-race 335 

Devotional service, the, 355 

Dharmakaya, 1 1 

Dipankara BUDDHA, 71, 72 

Divine Emanations, the, 14 

Dress in Peru, 170 

in the Community 400 

Duty, The Book of, 220 

Duty in marriage, 392 

EARTH chain, the 74 

East Africa, Aryan blood 

in, 311 

Economic conditions in 

the Community 411 

Education, electricity used in 374 

in Chaldaea, 219 

in Peru, 149, 156 

of children, 374 

Effects of the sinking of 

Poseidonis, 295 

Egg-born, the, 93 

Egg-headed, the, 90 

Egos, the seven groups of, 66, 67 

Egypt, Aryanisation of, 310, 477 

Aryans in, 242, 269, 310, 477 

Atlanteans in, 227 

early races in, 482 

flooded, 228, 234 

joyous civilisation of, 270 

religion in, 267 

Egyptian Empire, decline 

of the, 480 
pyramids built by 

Atlanteans, 227, 481 

Electricity superseded, 414 

used in education, 374 

Elemental kingdoms, the, 

8, 9, 59 

the planetary, 214 

Emanations, the Divine, 14 



492 



MAN i WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 



247 



222 
258 
273 
274 
147 



Empire, the Aryan, 

Chaldaean destruction 

of, 

decline of the Aryan, 
the South African, 
the Sumiro-Akkad, 
Engineering in Peru, 
English language, future 

of the, 383,430 

Estate, preparation of the, 333 
Ethnography in the Com- 
munity, 407 
Evolution, schemes of, 4, f 
the angel, 11, 20, 25 
Evolutionary wave, the, 14 
Eye, the third, 100 

FACTORIES, ownership 

of, 432 

Factory, a cloth, 412 
Failures, 14, 26 

Faith, the Zoroastrian, 286 

'Faithful unto death/ 112 
Family of the Manu, birth 

in, 394 
Fanatical opponent of the 

Manu, 265 
Farming in the Commun- 
ity, 401, 419, 420 
Father and mother, select- 
ing your, 388 
Federation of nations, the 427 
Festival, an Aryan, 252 
Festivals at the Temples, 385 
in Chaldaea, 206 
Fiction in Peru, 181 
Fifth race, beginnings of 
the, 225 
destiny of the, 304 
Fifth sub-race, the, '301 
character of the, 301 
type of the, t 301 
Fire, founding of the Reli- 
gion of the, 280 
Sons of the, 77, 98, 282 
the sacred, 254 



Flame, Lords of the, 

76, 91, 97, 
Floods in Egypt, 
'Follow the King/ 
Food in Atlantis, 

in Peru, 

in the Community, 
Force in the atom, 
Formosa held by Aryans, 
Fortresses in Peru, 
Founding of a sub-race, 

of Delhi, 

of the caste-system, 

of the Community, 
Four valleys, the, 
Fourth dimensional sight, 

sub-race, the Keltic, 
Fraternity of nations, 
Fruits of our round, 
Furniture in the Commu- 
nity, 
Future, the 

Adyar in the, 

China in the, 

Government of Bri- 
tain, 

Holland in the, 

India in the, 

London in the, 

Paris in the, 

seeing the 

Theosohical Society 
in the, 

GANDHARVAS, the, 
Gas, modelling in, 
Gathering the members, 
Gautama BUDDHA, The 

Lord, 91, 

General Staff, the, 
Georgia, conquest of, 
Germanic race, the 
Glass, malleable, 
Globe, the spirit of a, 



401, 



252, 283 
228, 234 
270 
131 
185 
402 
414 
257 
172 
260 
313 
315 
330 

235, 259 
361 
288 
430 
448 

399 

436 
435 

433 
435 
436 
434 
434 
325 

438 



357 
379 
330 

226, 300 

13 

290 

303 

176 

59 



INDEX 



493 



Gobi Sea, the, 97, 234, 235, 464 
God geometrises, 3 

Golden Gate, City of the, 

105, 107, 110, 114 
126, 233, 454 
Governing class in Peru, 
the, 139, 159 

Government, future, of 

Britain, 433 

of Atlantis, 131 

of Peru, 137 

of the Community, 336 

Great city, building of the, 240 
Greece and Poseidonis, 

war between 292 

Greeks of history, 296 

Green Temple, the, 366 

Group from Venus, the, 108 
of Servers, the, 63, 259 
Groups of egos, the seven, 66, 67 

Gipsy tribes, 316 

HALL, Sun in the, 252, 253, 254 

Hamyaritic Arabs, 273 
HEAD of the Hierarchy, 

the, 234, 253 

Healing Devas, the, 368 

Heart, Osiris in the, 269 

Heavenly Man, the, 66 

Helper, the Deva, 324 

'Herakles,' 32, 42, 108, 114, 229, 

237, 260, 274, 276, 277, 280, 

301, 309, 313, 461, 462, 465, 

467, 468, 469, 470, 472, 473, 

474 

Hermaphrodites, 86, 91 

Hermes, 268 

Hierarchy, HEAD of the, 234, 253 

the Occult, 12, 76 

Hill tribes, partly Aryan, 316 

Himalayas lifted, 233 

History, living, 409 

of Chaldaea, the, 221 

Holiness, the path of 371 

Holland in the future, 435 



Home of the sixth root- 
race, the, 447 
Horse, development of the, 231 
Horus, 269 
House, a Peruvian, 167 
Houses in the Commun- 
ity, 397 
Huyaranda, King, 309 
Hyksos Kings, the, 273, 311 

IMAGINATION, advanced 

classes in, 379 

of symbols, 378 

training the 377 
Imitation by nature-spirits, 13? 
Immigrations into North 

India, 312 
Imperishable Sacred Land, 

the, 98 
Incarnations of the Manu, 331 

rapid, 439 

Incense in the Temples, 352 359 
India, Atlantean kingdom 

in, 306 
immigrations into 

North, 312 

in the future, 436 

migrations to, 257 
Individualisation on the 

Moon, 34 

three modes of, 34, 62 

wrong ways of, 35 

Influences, planetary, 195 
Infusion of Toltec blood 

into the Aryan race, 240 
Inner Light, the, 268, 270 
Round, the, 108 
Intellect, stimulation of the, 361 
Intellectual pride, trans- 
mutation of, 365 
Intermarriage of Aryans 
with Arabs, 266 
with Toltecs, 314 
Intervals between lives, 63, 106 
Intuition, a rush of, 364 
Invasion of Persia, the, 279 



494 



MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 



Iranian sub-race, the 

third, 276 

Iranians, the, 286 

Ireland, the population of, 297 

Irrigation in the Com- 
munity, 425 

Isis, 269 

Island, the White, 98, 110 

231, 233, 241, 243 

Italian race, the, 296 



JAPAN conquered by 

Aryans, 257 

Jews, the, 272 

JnSna yoga, 367 

Journey of Manu north- 
ward, the, 231 
Joyous civilisation of 
Egypt, the, 270 
work of Aryans, 242 
Judgment, the Day of, 

14, 48, 53 

Julius Cesar, 107, 427 

Jupiter, 7 

'Jupiter/ 72, 230, 236, 240, 312, 

313, 453, 461, 465, 470, 472, 

479 

KARMA yoga, 367 

Kashyapa, the Lord, 72 

Kelt, special marks of the, 289 

Keltic sub-race the fourth, 288 

character of the, 298 

Kindergarten machine, a, 378 

'King, follow the/ 270 
Kingdoms of nature, the 

seven, 1 

King-Initates, the, 100 
Kings, the Hyksos, 273,311 

Kryashakti, 12, 98 
KUMARAS, the Four, 

99, 251, 473 

the Three, 253 



LAND, apportionment of, 143 

ownership of, 421 

system of Peru, 142 

Language, future of the 

English, 383, 430 

in the Community, 383 

Law of progress, the, 224 

Laws in Peru, 139 

Legacies left to oneself, 389 

Lemuria, ii 

reappearance of, 447 

Lemurian Polar Star, the, 

93, 97, 232 

race, the, 100 
Length of life in the Com- 
munity, 488 
Lettish race, the, 303 
Levels of attainment, 12, 18 
Libraries in the Commu- 
nity, 404 
Life Streams, the, 7 
Life- Wave, the second, 8 
the third, 76 
'Light, look for the/ 269 
'Light, the Inner/ 268, 270 
'Light, thou art the/ 269 
Lines, the, 68 
Links with the Locos, 349 
Literature in Peru, 180 
Lives, memory of past, 376 
Living history, 409 
Locomotion in the Com- 
munity, 424 
Logoi, planetary, 3 
LOGOS, the, iv 
among His peers, the, 357 
links with the, 349 
thought-form of the, 330 
the twelve-stringed 

lyre of the, 356 

London in the Future, 434 

'Look for the Light/ 269 

Lords of the Dark Face, 57, 96 

of the Flame, 76, 90, 97 

252, 283 

of the Moon, 46, 58 

75, 86, 90, 93, 94 



INDEX 



495 



Lunar life, episodes of, 

32, 39, 40, 44, 49 

Nirvana, the, 61, 69, 72, 74 

77, 93, 99, 101, 106 

Lyre of Apollo, the, 298 

twelve-stringed, of the 

LOGOS, 356 

MACHINE, a kindergarten, 378 
Machinery in Peru, 162 
in the Community, 413 
Magic, black, a story of, 116 
mental, 364 
MAHAGURU, 34, 253, 266, 280 
281, 283, 284, 298, 453, 473 
ascension of the, 285 
symbolism used by the, 299 
Maharshis, 243 
MAITREYA, the Lord, J2 
Malleable glass, 176 
Man, second round, des- 
cription of the, 78 
the Heavenly, 66 
what he is, 1 
Man, Visible and Invisible, 348 
Mftnasaputras, 23, 76 
Manetho, the history of, 311 
Manova City, 

234, 251, 247, 276, 466, 479 

occult science in, 255 

the building of, 252 

the destruction of, 315 

the writing in, 257 

MANU, the, 31, 64, 102, 134, 236, 

276, 277, 280, 305, 307, 

391,467,475,477 

birth in family of the, 374 

children of the, 335 

collision of the, with 

the Arabs, 263, 264 

confidence in the, 340 

fanatical opponent of, 265 

founded root race, 240 

in Arabia, 228 

incarnation of the, 331 

northward journey of, 231 
of the sixth root race, 



322, 329 

rule of, in Arabia, 265 

the, and His council, 338 

the Root, 55, 73, 74, 75 

the Seed, 55, 64, 73 

Vaivasvata, 66, 75, 105 

125, 228, 240, 453, 465 

466,468 

work of the, 330 

MANUS, the three, 253 

Marriage as a duty, 397 

customs in Peru, 184 

in the Community, 392 

Master K. H., 72, 373, 376 

M. as MANU, 322 

of religion, the, 373 

Mars, 6, 82, 83, 84, 89 

colony on, 83 

'Mars,' 31, 32, 45, 260, 261, 262, 

273, 278, 280, 308, 309, 310, 

311, 312, 313, 453, 454, 461, 

464, 465, 466, 468, 470, 472, 

473, 478, 479, 483 

Materialisation of a Deva, 

346, 375 
Meetings, public, in the 

Community, 406 

Members, gathering the, 330 

Memory of past lives, 376 

talisman, the 383, 389 

Menes, 483 

Mental magic, 364 

Mercury, 6 

men sent to, 109 

'Mercury/ 31, 32, 43, 107, 235, 260 

261,277,281,285,308,312, 

313, 463, 464, 465, 466, 467, 

468, 469, 470, 472, 473, 475, 

476 

Mesopotamia, conquest of, 274 

Metal, precious, in Peru, 171 

Metal-man, the, 233 

Metal- work in Peru, 175 

Methods of reincarnation, 

three, 438 

of reproduction, 86, 91 

Migration into mid-Europe, 302 



496 



MAN i WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 



of the chosen, 226 

Migrations, Aryan, 257 

to India, 257 

Milesian kings, 299 

Mindless, sin of the, 96 

Mines, ownership of, 432 

Mineral life, 17, 22 

'Mizar,' 32, 43, 110, 260, 314, 462, 

464, 465, 466, 467, 469, 470, 

471, 473, 477 

Modelling in gas, 379 
Monad, the, 14, 15, 21, 23 

decision of the, 327 
Monarchies, mighty, of 

antiquity, 135 

Moon, the, 6 
animals of the, 30, 32 

city, a, 46 

individualisation on the, 34 
Lords of the, 

46, 58 75, 86, 89, 90, 92, 95 
Moon-chain, the, 29, 31, 453 

Moon-life, episodes of, 

32, 39, 40, 46, 49 
a story of, 32 
Moon-men, 32, 40, 108 
More, Sir Thomas, 106 
Mostareb Arabs, 273 
Mother and father, select- 
ing your, 388 
Music, Devas of, 357 
development by, 298 
in Peru, 182 
in the blue Temple, 354 
of the Deva-priest, 355 
Musical instruments in 

the Community, 354 

Mysteries, the Aryan, 245 

NAGAS, 313 

Napoleon, 97 

reincarnation of, 428 

Nations, fraternity of, 430 

the federation of, 427 

Nature-spirits, imitation by, 130 

used in education, 375 

Neptune, 6 



'Neptune/ 237, 260, 278, 289, 314 

463, 465, 466, 468, 

469, 470, 472, 475 

New power, a, 414 

New shorthand, the, 430 

Newspapers in the Community 425 

NirmanakSya, 12 

Nirvana, Inter-Chain, 61, 71, 72, 74, 

77, 93 99, 101, 106 

Nitrogen balloon, the, 245 

North India, immigrations 

into, 312 

Northward journey of the 
Manu, 231 

OBSCURATION, 87 

of the sun, 333 

Occult Hierarchy, the, 12, 76 

science, in Manova 

City, 255 

Olcott, Colonel H. S., 321 

Opponent of Mars, a fanat- 
ical, 265 
Orange boat-load, the 

36, 51, 57, 68, 95 
Origin of Samskrt, 243 

Orpheus, 298, 300 

Orrery, a complete, 409 

Osiris, 267 

in the heart, 269 

'Osiris,' 278,309,310,314,461 

468, 470, 472, 473, 475 

Overthrow of the Tartars, 316 

Ownership of land, mines 

and factories, 432 

Oxygen snake, the, 245 

PAINTING in Peru, 177 

Pan, 114 

Parentage by arrangement, 388 
Parents and schoolmasters, 

co-operation of, 376 

Paris in the future, 434 

Park-like city, a, 422 
Partners, choosing of, in the 

Community, 392 



INDEX 



497 



Past lives, memory of, 376 
records of the, 455 
Path of Holiness, the, 371 
Paths, the seven, 10 
Pedigree of Man, The, 23, 98 
Peers, the LOGOS among His, 357 
Pelasgians, the, 291 
Persia, invasion of, 279 
Persian Empire, the latest, 316 
Peru, ancient, 134 
and Babylonia, con- 
trast between, 191 
arbitration in, 140 
astronomy in, 164 
books in, 177 
bridges in, 172 
building in, 168 
calculation in, 187 
chemistry in, 162 
climate of, 137 
curriculum in, 157 
dress in, 187 
education in, 149, 157 
engineering in, 147 
fiction in, 181 
food in, 185 
fortresses in, 172 
governing class in, 

139, 159 

kingdom of, 474 

land system in, 142 

literature in, 180 

machinery in, 162 

marriage customs in, 184 

metal-work in, 175 

music in, 183 

painting in, 177 

pet animals in, 186 

pottery in, 175 

precious metals in, 171 
provision for the aged 

in, 150 

public opinion in, 139 

pyramids in, 170 

registration in, 142 

religion in, 151 

religious services in, 153 



. roads in, 172 
scientific agriculture in, 160 
sculpture in, 149 
sickness in, 149 
soldiers in, 173 
temples in, 171 
weapons in, 175 
Peruvian architecture, 166 
government, 137 
house, a, 167 
laws, 139 
sermon, a, 154 
Peruvians, physical appear- 
ance of the, 136 
Philalethes, 106 
Philanthropy, ordinary, 

will be unnecessary, 368 

Phoebus Apollo, 299 

Phoenicians, the, 296 

Pictures modified by 

thought, 378 

shown by a Deva, 325 

Pink boat-load, the, 95 

Pitrs, Agnishvatta, 23 

Barhishad, 23, 58, 77 

Solar, 65, 67 

Planetary elemental, the, 215 

influences, 195 

Logoi, 3 

Podishpar, King, 309 

Poetry in Chaldaea, 221 

Polar Star, the Lemurian, 

93, 97, 232 

Polynesians, the brown, 312 

Population of Ireland, 297 

Poseidonis, 125 

and Greece, war Between, 292 

sinking of, 294, 481 

effects of the sinking of 295 

Power of visualisation, 366 

the new, 414 

the Rod of, 283 

Pranic atom, the, 245 

Prayer in Chaldxa, 201 



MAN: WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHER 



Preparation for birth, 388 
for the sixth root race 323 
of the estate, 333 
Pride, intellectual, trans- 
mutation of, 365 
Priesthood in Chaldaea, 218 
Priests of the Sun, 147 
Private property in the 

Community, 420 

Progress of the Community, 442 

the law of, 224 

Pronoun, a common-gender, 417 

Psychical development in 

the Community, 339 
Public ceremonies in 
Chaldaea, 202, 209 
meetings in the Com- 
munity, 406 
opinion in Peru, 138 
Pudding-bags, 79, 92 
Pyramids of Egypt built 
by Atlante.ans, 227 
Peruvian, 170 

RACE prejudice, 444 

the artistic, 288 

the Caucasian, 290 

the Germanic, 303 

the Italian, 296 

the Lemurian, 99 

the Lettish, 303 

the Slavonic, 303 
Toltec, Aryan infusion 

in the, 240 
Races, early, in Egypt, 482 
Rajan, 315 
Raphael, the archangel, 369 
Rapid reincarnations, 439 
Ravipur, 313 
Ray, Chieftain of the, 357, 362 
Reappearance of Lemuria, 447 
Records of the past, 455 
Recurrence of types, 87 
Registration in Peru, 141 
Reincarnation in the Com- 
munity, continuous, 332 



of Akbar, 428 

of Napoleon, 428 

of Scipio Africanus, 428 

on another planet, 441 

three methods of, 438 

Religion in Chaldaea, 191 

in Egypt, 267 

in Peru, 151 

in the Community, 341 

of the Christ, the, 429 
of the Fire, founding 

of the, 280 

the joyous Aryan, 251 

the Master of, 373 

Religious services in Peru, 153 

Removal from Central 

Asia, the, 306 
Reproduction, methods of, 

86,91 

Return of the Christ, 429 
Rmoahal, the, 103 
Roads in Peru, 173 
Rod of Power, the 283 
Root-Manu, the 55, 73, 74 
Vaivasvata, 168 
Root race, beginnings of 
the fifth, 224 
fourth, the, 103 
seventh, the, 448 
sixth, beginnings of the, <529 
sixth, home of the, 447 
sixth, Manu of the, 322 
sixth, preparation for the, 323 
Root-stock, Aryan, 256 
Rounds, fruits of our, 448 
the first, 77 
the fourth, 88 
the inner, 108 
the second, 79 
the third, 82 
what is a, 14 
Rounds, correspond to sab- 
planes, 28 
Rule, the stern Aryan, 251 
Ruler of Sumiro-Akkad 
Empire, 231, 274 



INDEX 



499 



Rush of intuition, a, 364 

Ruta, 114, 125 

SACRED city, the, 244 

fires in Chaldaea, 212 

land, the imperishable, 108 

Samadhi, 363 

Sambhogakaya, 12 

Samskrt, origin of, 243 

Sanat Kumara, 254 

Sanitation in the Community, 425 

Saturn, 6 

'Saturn/ 252, 255, 309, 312, 329 

461, 463, 465, 467, 469, 470, 

472, 473 

Schemes of evolution, 4, 6 

School curriculum in the 
Community, 381 

system in the Community, 379 
rooms, appointments of, 375 
Schoolmasters and parents, 

co-operation between, 376 

Science in Atlantis, 129 

in the Community, 407 

Scientific agriculture in Peru, 161 
breeding, 129 

Scipio Africanus, reincar- 
nation of, 428 
'Scorpio/ 43, 109, 237 
465, 473 

Sculpture in Peru, 184 

Sea, the Gobi, 97 

Secret Doctrine, The, 17, 23 

59, 76, 79, 92, 96, 98, 437 

Seed-Manu, the, 55, 64 

65, 73, 74 

Seeing the future, 325 

Segregation of the chosen, 225 

sixth root race, 329, 332 

Seismic changes, 234 

Selection of sex, the, 395 

of your father and 

mother, 398 

Self-sacrifice in action, 367 

Sermon, a Peruvian, 154 

Servers, the group of, 

63, 259 



Service, the devotional, 355 

Services, children's, 384 

Seven groups of egos, 66, 67 

paths, the, 11 

the number, 3 

world's, the, 5 

Seventh root race, the, 448 

Sex, selection of, 391, 395 

Shamballa, 235, 237, 259, 270 

281, 283, 465 

Shorthand, the new, 430 

Shudras, 316 

Siam conquered by Aryans, 257 
Siaposh people, the, 316 

Sight, fourth dimensional, 361 
Silent Watcher, the, 99 

Sin of the Mindless, 96 

Sinking of Poseidonis, ef- 
fects of the, 294, 295 
'Sinus/ 32, 43, 107, 228, 235 
260, 274, 277, 461 
465, 467, 468 
Sixth root race, beginnings 
of the, 323, 329 
home of the, 447 
Manu of the, 322 
preparation for the, 323 
Sixth sub-race, develop- 
ment of the, 335 
Slavonic race, the, 303 
Snake, the oxygen, 245 
Solar deity, the, 342 
Pitrs, the, 65, 68 
system, the, 2 
Soldiers in Peru, 173 
Somali Coast, Arabian emi- 
gration to the, 271 
Sons of the Fire, 77, 98, 283 
South African Empire, the, 273 
Speakers of Zend, 316 
Special marks of the Kelt, 289 
training by Devas, 373 
Spirit of a globe, the, 59 
of the Community, 337 
the triple, 14 
Staff, the General, 12 



MO 



MAN i WHENCE, HOW AND WHITHEH 



Star, the, 254 

the Lemurian Polar, 

94, 96, 232 

Angels, the, 214, 216 

worship in Chaldaea, 211 

Stature in the Community, 396 

Stimulation of the brain, 375 

of the intellect, 361 

Stone used for temples, 353 

Story of black magic, a, 117 

of 'Ulysses' and 

'Vajra,' 113 

Subjective mind, the, iii 

Sub-planes correspond to 

Rounds, 28 

Sub-race, the Arabian, 259, 262 

fifth or Teutonic, 301 

founding of a, 260 

the fourth or Keltic, 288, 297 

the second or Arab, 273 

the third or Iranian, 276 

type of the fifth, 302 

Sumiro-Akkad Empire, 

Ruler of, 231, 274 

Sun, children of the, 137 

City of the, 313 

land of the, 146 

obscuration of the, 233 

Priests of the, 148 

Spirits in the, 251 

the Temple of the, 252 

Superseded, electricity, 414 

Super-man, the, 14, 23 

'Surya,' 32, 108, 237, 253, 281 

309, 310 

463, 465, 469, 472, 479 
Symbolical colours in 
Chaldaea, 207 

dances, 385 

Symbolism used by the 

Mahaguru, 299 

Symbols, imagination of, 378 

Sympathy, cultivation of, 370 

System, founding of the, caste, 315 

the school, 379 

the Solar, 2 



TAKSHAKS, 314 
Talisman, the memory, 383, 389 

Tartars, overthrow of the, 316 

Teachers, clairvoyant, 375 
Temple, incense in the, 

352, 356, 359 

music in the blue, 354 
of action, 363 
services in the Com- 
munity, 343 
the blue, 354 
the crimson, 345 
the green, 366 
the yellow, 359 
visualisation in the yellow, 360 
Temples in Chaldaea, 202 
festivals in the, 385 
in Peru, 171 
incense in the, 352, 356, 359 
on the White Island, 243 
stone used for, 353 
the four, 344 
Teutonic sub-race, the fifth, the, 

301 
Theories, astrological, in 

Chaldaea, 192 
Theosophy in the Com- 
munity, 341 
Third eye, the, 100 
Thoth, 268 
Thou art the Light/ 269 
Thought-forms of the LOGOS, 330 
Thought, pictures modified by, 378 
Tlavatli sub-race, the, 105 
Toltec infusion in the 

Aryan race, 24C 
Toltecs, the, 104, 105, 129 

in Egypt, 22" 
intermarriage of 

Aryans with, 314 

Training by Devas, special, 373 

of the imagination, 377 

of the will, 366' 

Trees, carnivorous, 4C 

Tribes, Gipsy, 316 

hill, partly Aryan, 316 

Trojans, the, 291 



INDEX 



501 



Transmutation of intellec- 
tual pride, 
Tuatha-de-Danaan, 
Tuition, utilitarian, 
Turanian civilisation, a, 
Turanians, attack of the, 
Types of matter, 
recurrence of, 

'ULYSSES/ 111, 236, 461, AM, 466, 
468, 472, 473, 474 
'Ulysses' and 'Vajra/ 

the story of, 
Unas, 
Uranus, 

'Uranus,' 237, 259, 309, 461, 462, 
463, 465, 466, 469, 471, 472, 

Utilitarian tuition, 
Utopia, an, 

VA iv AS VAT A Manu, 
66, 75, 105, 126, 228, 240, 459, 

465, 

Root-Manu, the, 

'Vajra,' 111, 237, 278, 312, 464, 
468, 472, 473, 475 
'Vajra' and 'Ulysses/ 

the story of, 

Valleys, the four, 2 

Vaughan, Thomas, 
Vegetable Consciousness, 
Vegetarianism in the Com- 
munity, 
Venus, 7, 24, 76, 

the group from, 
/enus/ 237, 261, 463, 465, 466, 

467, 

Vestures, the three, 
Viraj/ 46, 226, 230, 309, 314 





Vish, 315 


365 


Vision of King Ashoka, 321 


297 

tot 


Visitors to the Community, 337 


383 

1QA 


Visualisation in the yellow 


1VU 
1O1 


Temple, 360 


lyi 


the power of, 366 




Vulcan, 7 


87 


'Vulcan/ 226, 261, 278, 309, 312, 




313, 465, 466, 468, 471, 473, 


466, 


475, 479 


474 




111 


WAR, abolition of, 428, 431 


478 


between Greece and 


7 


Poseidonis, 292 


462, 


Watcher, the Silent, 99 


472, 


Water-men, 91 


475 


Wave, the evolutionary, 14 


383 


Weapons in Peru, 175 


458 


Wheat, bees and ants, 130 


TVO 


White Island, the, 98,110,111 




232, 234, 241, 244 




Will, the, 329 


459, 

A.O 


training of the, 366 


468 

*T) 


Will-power, 410 


73 


Work, conditions of, in 


464, 


the Community, 419 


, 475 


of Aryans, joyful, 242 




of the Manu, the, 330 


111 


Worlds, the seven, 5 


, 259 
106 


Worship of the Atom, 252 


25 


YELLOW Devas, the, 361 


Af\t 


boat-load, the, 37, 52, 57, 69 


401 


Temple, the , 359 


, 252 


Temple, visualisation 


113 


in the, 360 


466, 


Yoga, 366 


, 473 


Yugas, the, four, 19 


11 




,314 


ZARATHUSHTRA, the first, 280 


472, 


Zend, speakers of, 316 


,479 


Zoroastrian faith, the, 286